Home

RedHat 5.2 - Reference Guide

1. Figure 8 28 Workstation Date amp Time could type su followed by the root password when prompted Please Note If you are not running X as root you may need to give root access to your system s X server To do this enter the following command on a non root terminal window xhost localhost After starting the control panel simply clicking on an icon starts up a tool Please note that you are not prevented from starting two instances of any tool but doing so is a very bad idea because you may try to edit the same files in two places and end up overwriting your own changes If you do accidentally start a second copy of a tool you should quit it immediately Also do not manually edit any files managed by the control panel tools while the tools are running Similarly do not run any other programs such as linuxconf that may change those files while the tools are running 8 2 1 Printer Configuration The printer configuration tool printtool maintains the etc printcap file print spool direc tories and print filters The filters allow you to print many different types of files including 151 152 System Configuration Figure 8 29 The Control Panel plain text ASCID files PostScript files e TEX dvi files GIF JPEG TIFF and other graphics formats e RPMs In other words simply printing a GIF or RPM file using the 1pr command will result in the printer doing the right thing Figure 8 30 Pri
2. cece eee eee 22 rescue mode isis scies panied te ees uted yeas 215 USING 8 trick csset peter does eds 215 using diskettes os ceeeserropei Re n 215 USING LILO sisse tere eee it 215 resources information lsssslsssssssse 308 restarting kerneld oooooococcccccccccccccos 158 TOO password scccisce vee cesi ee hem ene 76 root password changing ee 121 root becoming with su 6 6 cece eee 89 routes managing 6 sss 163 RPM siria riada desd see rpm Pal rd la al ode 165 book written about 005 173 dependencies dcos niente des 168 design goals eerte rave 165 determining file ownership with 171 file conflicts resolving 167 finding deleted files with 171 handy hints ceuessstenrbestetite these 171 1ristalling sees eren endet e 166 locating documentation with 172 mailing list devoted to 173 other teSoUrCES ocrni ogi sietan EREN 173 preserving config fileS 169 UCT TH p isses eive pi Set i Rubeis 169 querying for file list 173 querying uninstalled packages 172 uninstallin sion coo en 168 pgrading condi rra 168 USING carre 166 A eng apinn siias 170 website devoted tO oooooooocooooom 173 REM USINE ici hance i eade let 346 iol 28 SCSI Supportias a iescce octets net enn 46 secure shell obtaining
3. M Raden 272 c ching names rver oie vie esee 261 neum EN 251 Prioridad 239 Chkconfig iio eo 276 christminster citada 257 cleanfeed A eek e AA eu 263 colour YahtzEe ooooococcocoooorocconccra coo 257 COMA voir oras dae ede dd 266 controlpanel eec er eere er rne ns 276 CDlO c duereeqere rev ree crecida 272 CPTOlO rene 251 A prr EERTE eee testes 248 cracklib dicts oot ot reote Dag 276 CI ODtaDS cic A A 241 Gta cm 245 CVS nut ene ee ete e A COMMI ICD IDEE 252 Ohio dias repe 290 DOV ii rn 241 Dilo dae baina 263 dhepid e mita id 263 dialog EE 284 distal daa 284 dial ias 284 Dip 267 ncc PE 232 dosemu freed sies eet repe eren 233 ug T 276 404 e2fsprogs devel e ecce em ems 248 Ed MP TTE 231 OREA d UE WX RA RR ya eg 294 icq 229 E 246 CSC 246 O de bd 246 EPOSTODIC icons pende 246 A a aisle tee aes ate E E E teaser 276 BlectricFence eere rere Rn re dnx 244 Jl TE scams taaaiaamaenas eer E 234 CMOS ow a kd une Seems Ret eee lia 231 emacs el cocaina 231 o us ases ax erc Va ey eee eoe dcn 231 emacs lo aos at 231 3 RET 241 CRT ed caries ver eor M eR euoT CES FU 234 Pedi 246 ext2ed A serere soa ae rris Paler EA 276 D n 246 FACS sa ide SOT 284 faces devel 5 sata ci oec ia eet saxa 248 Taces xfaee uoi ste ioco trei baee bere HESHE RD AR 284 it ure CE uana Rd IRA STRE 253 fetchimall siii dica iaa 234 Mecca 273 filesystetri ricos 241 flew si eei 273 findut
4. 6 0005 335 selecting components 666 00 cece sans 60 selecting packages sic reete nhe 60 selecting packages with glint 177 sendmail cinco Ra EY Aa 200 INDEX aliases a oda 201 masqu rading nisse sieer renti bonis cda 201 with UUCP 2 vore ee REY Reine 200 sendmail boot hangS oooooocccccocoococoo 348 sendmail problems 000eeeees 349 serial terminal installation for SPARC 361 services PAM eise ic ata 194 services controlling access tO oooooomo ooo 201 services selecting for autostart 69 shadow passwords sss 196 shadow utilitieS oooooooocoooommmm 196 SOUL OWN vivan ee ex da epa 186 214 shutdown command sssssssse 90 shutting doWn cc lees Cipres e Et tnter 90 signal 11 during install 4 320 signal 7 during install 008 320 SILO configuration 2i iiscse tee heb nr s 362 A yr pepPU DPF IPEP DR 28 162 SH ncwatandntes odore Mer tefte emis see SLIP SLIP configuration see a 137 138 modification of cessisse eie 141 142 slow system large RAM 00 000505 336 SMB installation viii 17 SMP support enabling 0005 340 sndconfig command sese cec rre ehe 97 sound configuration seenen a ERa 96 sound card config AA rut oneni inea 97 sound card problems ssssssssss 343 sound cards recognized oooooooc
5. To handle this error you should install the requested packages If you want to force the installa tion anyway a bad idea since the package probably will not run correctly use nodeps on the command line 9 2 2 Uninstalling Uninstalling a package is just as simple as installing rpm e foo Notice that we used the package name foo not the name of the original package file foo 1 0 1 1386 rpm You can encounter a dependency error when uninstalling a package if some other installed package depends on the one you are trying to remove For example rpm e foo removing these packages would break dependencies foo is needed by bar 1 0 1 To cause RPM to ignore that error and uninstall the package anyway which is a bad idea since the package that depend on it will probably fail to work properly use nodeps on the command line 9 2 3 Upgrading Upgrading a package is almost just like installing 9 2 Using RPM 169 rpm Uvh foo 2 0 1 i386 rpm foo HEHE FEAE FE FE AE EE EH AE FE FE AE FE FEAE FE AE EEE EEE EE EE SH What you don t see above is the fact that RPM automatically uninstalled any old versions of the foo package In fact you may want to always use U to install packages since it works fine even when there are no previous versions of the package installed Since RPM performs intelligent upgrading of packages with configuration files you may see a mes sage like saving etc foo c
6. ooo oooo 100 201 203 on line documentation sssssssss 101 Options Kernel costeros carr tomar 34 o pia 24 78 OVEEVICW 5 visui erae tuere ea tete e p a ns xi package installation screen 0 66 2 000 62 package list index cem ass 403 package manipulation with glint 179 packages dependences c csscieisiss iransi been 62 168 determining file ownership 171 documentation sssssssssssseee 104 finding deleted files from 171 Nandy Rints cess wie seeder sa ertet 171 installing psss 60 166 installing with glint 181 rgo 227 locating documentation for 172 obtaining information on 61 obtaining list of files 173 preserving config files 169 querying risa 169 querying uninstalled 172 MOM 168 removing with glint oooooooo 183 selec dos coii o done E 60 selecting individual 61 uninstalling with glint 183 upgrading rias 168 upgrading with glint suus 182 using glint to view available 178 VETIVE ot pi n nE SEDERE ads 170 verifying with glint 179 180 I P eto iaa EEEREN 193 additional information 196 configuration fileS ooooooo 194 modules cc
7. At this point a dialog box entitled Select Partition is displayed see Figure 4 15 on the following page Enter the device name of the partition holding the RedHat directory tree There is also a field labelled Directory If the RedHat directory is not in the root directory of that partition for example test new RedHat enter the path to the RedHat directory in our example test new If the installation program was unable to find the necessary files on the partition and directory you ve specified you ll be returned to the Select Partition dialog box to make the necessary corrections If everything has been specified properly you should see a message box indicating that the packages are being scanned If you are doing a workstation or server class installation please turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 Move on to the next section to continue installing Red Hat Linux 4 9 Formatting Partitions The next dialog box presents a list of partitions to format see Figure 4 16 on page 61 All newly created partitions should be formatted In addition any already existing partitions that contain old data you no longer need should be formatted However partitions such as home or usr 1ocal must not be formatted if they contain data you wish to keep Select each partition to format and press 59 60 Continuing the Installation Mhat partition and directory on that partition hold the Pahat FHI and Badiat hare directo iar hr
8. User accounts If you have more than 15 accounts on the system Linuxconf will provide you with a filter screen see figure 8 4 on page 116 e On the User accounts screen see figure 8 5 on page 117 select a user that you wish to update You will be presented with the User information screen see figure 8 8 on page 120 e Add or remove the desired groups from the choiceSupplementary groups field Each group should be separated by a space character e Once you ve made all the changes you d like select choiceAccept at the bottom of the screen This will automatically update the group definitions Repeat the process for each user 8 1 3 CD ROMs Diskettes Hard Drives and Filesystems the Inside Track A filesystem is composed of files and directories all starting from a single root directory The root directory may contain any number of files and other directories with each directory in turn following suit The average filesystem often looks like an inverted tree with the directories as branches and the 131 132 System Configuration files as leaves Filesystems reside on mass storage devices such as diskette drives hard drives and CD ROMs For example a diskette drive on DOS and Windows machines is typically referenced by A This describes both the device A and the root directory on that device 1 The primary hard drive on the same systems is typically referred to as the C drive because the device specif
9. 18 Before You Begin INTEL For an SMB installation you ll need boot and supplemental diskettes If you ve determined that this installation method is most applicable to your situation please skip ahead to Section 2 5 2 4 6 Installing From a Hard Drive If none of the other installation methods will work for you but you have some means of getting the Red Hat Linux package files written to your system s hard drive you can install from your hard drive In this installation method the Red Hat Linux packages you select are read from one partition on a hard drive and are installed on another partition or set of partitions How To Do It The hard drive installation method requires a bit of up front effort on your part as you must copy all the necessary files to a partition before starting the Red Hat Linux installation program You must first create a RedHat directory at the top level of your directory tree Everything you will install should be placed in that directory First copy the base subdirectory and its contents Next copy the packages you want to install to another subdirectory called RPMS You can use avail able space on an existing DOS partition or a Linux partition that is not required in the install proce dure for example a partition that would be used for data storage on the installed system INTEL If you are using a DOS filesystem you will not be able to use the full Linux filenames for the RPM packages The i
10. After providing the configuration information for your new device click Done The device should appear in your Interfaces list as an inactive device The active column should have a label of no To activate the new device first select it with a mouse click and then choose on the Activate button If it does not come up properly you may need to reconfigure it by choosing on Edit Managing Routes In the Routes management screen you have the ability to add edit or remove static networking routes Adding or editing an entry involves identical actions just like the Hosts panel An edit dialog box will appear simply type the new information and click Done when you are finished See figure 8 45 for an example Figure 8 45 Adding Editing Routes 8 2 4 Time and Date Please Note Documentation on setting your system s time and date using linuxconf can be found in Section 8 1 4 on page 149 The time machine allows you to change the time and date by clicking on the appropriate part of the time and date display and clicking on the arrows to change the value The system clock is not changed until you click on the Set System Clock button Click on Reset Time to set the time machine time back to that of the system 164 System Configuration Please Note Changing the time can seriously confuse programs that depend on the normal pro gression of time and could possibly cause problems Try to quit as many applications and processes as possi
11. The X Window System exorcista eR RE EERE RE eR ER Gs 91 64 Configuring Your Red Hat Linux System For Sound ooo oo 96 CONTENTS 65 Mouseconfiguration ee 99 6 6 World Wide Web i es RR ERS ee Oe VOI E RR CR GE RR Ba 99 7 Finding Documentation 101 71 On Eme Helps ad OOS OR A Ae reae desc Wow aee oid as 101 7 2 Help from the Internet Community ee 106 8 System Configuration 109 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf e 110 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel ooo oo eee 150 9 Package Management with RPM 165 91 RPM Design Goals cs s muss he e a ch che m POR UR A a a oe 165 92 UsingRPM amp sun rt nd e a ae ee co des 166 9 3 Impressing Your Friends with RPM 2 0 ooo o es 171 9 4 Other RPM ResQuices 9 2400 66424449 Bb goe v SE dean Pet Rs s 173 10 Glint 175 10 1 Starting glint uus soe ree E ew osa 176 10 2 The Package Display veros orde eo Dab a Soe Eee ae Ge 176 10 3 Configuration 0 040440 00494294 EE Se OS a UR ba Be a ee a 178 10 4 Package Manipulation g ee e262 4 4 a nea eS REA SIE E 179 11 System Administration 185 11 1 Filesystem Structure a ses agasan khe EG ER COR EEE EAE ERLE EG 185 11 2 Special Red Hat File Locations ees 189 11 3 Users Groups and User Private Groups o ooo 189 11 4 User Authentication with PAM ara sae e aon a a a i ee 193 11 5 Shadow Utiliti s 5 2 ee ordo a Pero eq m Pese eed ge RAS x 196
12. The partition number follows an old PC standard that there are a limit of 4 primary partitions per hard drive However one of those partitions can be designated as an extended partition Inside of this extended partition logical partitions can be specified for most drives you can have 12 logical drives in the extended partition for 16 partitions all together The numbering scheme is broken into the following e 1 4 primary partitions e 5 16 logical partitions E 6 6 Installation problems with IDE cdrom Question Linux is having trouble detecting my IDE CD ROM drive during the install Can I force the install to see it Answer Sometimes IDE cdrom drives will not be detected either due to the fact that they are on a IDE channel the BIOS doesn t know about or that when queried replies back with data that Linux thinks is bogus Early NEC IDE cdrom s respond with data saying that it is an IDE floppy drive instead of a cdrom To solve your problem you need to manually specify the the CD ROM drive from the LILO boot prompt When you see E 6 Installation 317 boot Or LILO You need to type in linux hdX cdrom where X is the IDE letter that Linux would specify for that drive depending on which IDE bus it is on E 6 7 Laptop Installation Problems Question Iam having trouble getting linux installed on my Laptop computer Answer Laptops are one of the hardest pieces of hardware to support in the industry Man
13. The word linux should always be included in a boot command that includes one or more argu ments and must precede the first argument Replace nfs server ip address with the NFS server s IP address and path to RH image with the path to the exported directory containing the appropriate Red Hat Linux SPARC files F 5 Choosing a Boot Method F5 Choosing a Boot Method This section describes how to start or boot the installation program Once the installation program is running you will be able to choose from several installation methods You can choose from the following installation methods CD ROM NFS hard disk and FTP Note that if the installation program is booted directly from CD ROM the installation will automatically proceed from that CD ROM There are three different ways a Red Hat Linux SPARC installation can be started Boot From Diskette The installation program is read from a diskette Boot From CD ROM The installation program is read directly from the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM Boot From the Network The installation program is read from a TFTP server F 5 1 Booting From Diskette If your SPARC system has a diskette drive you can boot the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation pro gram from a diskette The boot diskette image known as boot img is located in the images direc tory on your Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM A ramdisk diskette image known as ramdisk img is also available Please refer to Appen
14. gt Information about other hosts To modify or delete an entry select it To delete the entry select Del at the bottom of the host network definition screen To modify it change the information as necessary To add a new entry select Add at the bottom of 147 148 System Configuration Hebateking Cieni bares Basic host imiona Hare server specification i Rrarbreg snd gateways Demis ahe routes bo netogrks Bascivar canfisussbos oy cas specify weich rama server will be used la nesate heal ip sumar Using tha DHE ii la handie Bin a TCPAP raro The fers aes Dua foc ad Paca iie sea dorado abau oar hasi minu ahe router bo hots ce thi HIS simam routes tp aiena Inca ni the routed daemon DHS usas F ONE 5 required for normal operador Hari name search path detal iatan Mejor Information System Trees 1 FX neice reup PPP SLIP PLIP Server tasks Esparjed Ms murder MF 5 F alias dor virtual host UCF dunt m uni cape bar devices and moder nz heduled byes Wil delivery een parir Basic basic information special domain meting SSS i ik ras A hamster 3 ngl search damas 1 pes damas 2 reati domada J fear doris 2 pes doris 5 vean doris B5 Figure 8 25 Resolver Configuration Screen the etc hosts screen This will also open the host network definition screen Required Fields e Primary name domain the primary name is the name of the computer while
15. true for Alpha based systems only Indicates the ARC console s 42 year time offset is in effect Any other value indicates that the normal Unix epoch is assumed letc sysconfig keyboard The etc sysconfig keyboard files controls the behavior of the keyboard The following values may be used e KEYTABLE file where file is the name of a keytable file For example KEYTABLE usr lib kbd keytables us map letc sysconfig mouse The etc sysconfig mouse file is used to specify information about the available mouse The following values may be used e MOUSETYPE type where type is one of the following microsoft A Microsoft mouse mouseman A MouseMan mouse mousesystems A Mouse Systems mouse ps 2 A PS 2 mouse msbm A Microsoft bus mouse logibm A Logitech bus mouse atibm An ATI bus mouse logitech A Logitech mouse mmseries A older MouseMan mouse mmhittab A mmhittab mouse e XEMU3 emulation where emulation is one of the following yes Three mouse buttons should be emulated no The mouse already has three buttons In addition dev mouse is a symlink that points to the actual mouse device 206 System Administration etc sysconfig network The etc sysconfig network file is used to specify information about the desired network configuration The following values may be used e NETWORKING answer where answer is one of the following yes Networking should be config
16. FEH ZEBH Lirur native TEEH TEEH Linux native Dri Budae Dri va Cane LEHI Tcal toed Frum F1 fdd r Ai 2 SN dr Ph Bear FHE A Buien eel pet Figure 3 2 More Installation Program Widgets problem Please see Figure 3 3 on the next page for a listing of the virtual consoles the keystrokes to switch to them and their contents In general there should be no reason to leave virtual console 1 unless you are attempting to diagnose installation problems But if you are the curious type feel free to look around 3 2 Starting the Installation Program Now it s time to start installing Red Hat Linux To start the installation it is first necessary to boot the installation program Before we start please make sure you have all the resources you ll need for the installation If you ve already read through Chapter 2 on page 5 and followed the instructions you should be ready 3 2 Starting the Installation Program Console Keystroke Contents 1 installation dialog shell prompt 2 3 install log messages from install program 4 system log messages from kernel etc 5 other messages Figure 3 3 Virtual Console Information ALPHA If you haven t created your diskettes yet please refer to the first chapter of the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum and create them now After you ve created the necessary diskettes please finish reading the first chapter of the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum for informa
17. This should turn off the messages upon boot as it tells linux that these are OFF and should not be looked for E 11 Printer Administration E 11 1 Basic Printer Configuration Question Iam having trouble setting up my printer My printer is not listed in the printer configuration tool Answer Due to licensing problems we can not ship the latest ghostscript It is however available for down load in the directory having been contributed by another Red Hat user http www users dircon co uk typhoon This later version of ghostscript supports many more printers E 11 2 Truncated Printout Question When I print lines from my printout get truncated Answer Some printers truncate ASCII lines when printing a page This is how the printer handles lines that are too long The text must be run through something that will format the text like pr or mpage before sending it to the printer E 12 Appendix Long answers 351 E 12 Appendix Long answers E 12 1 The Red Hat FTP site is slow Are there mirrors There are many mirrors of the Red Hat FTP site An up to date list can always be found at ftp ftp redhat com pub MIRRORS html E 12 2 What versions of Red Hat Linux are there There have been many now Here s a rundown e Preview or Beta Summer 1994 e Halloween Fall 1994 e Mother s Day 1 0 Summer 1995 e Mother s Day 1 1 Late Summer 1995 e Red Hat Linux 2 0beta Late Late Summer 1995 e Red Hat Li
18. Version 5 31 335K unzip will list test or extract files from a ZIP archive commonly found on MS DOS systems A companion program zip creates ZIP archives both programs are compatible with archives created by PKWARE s PKZIP and PKUNZIP for MS DOS but in many cases the program options or default behaviors differ zip Version 2 1 206K C 11 Utilities zip is a compression and file packaging utility for Unix VMS MSDOS OS 2 Windows NT Minix Atari and Macintosh It is analogous to a combination of the UNIX commands tar 1 and compress 1 and is compatible with PKZIP Phil Katz s ZIP for MSDOS systems C 11 2 Console This section lists packages that provide utilities that manage your Red Hat Linux system s console SVGATextMode Version 1 8 845K SVGATextMode allows the screen mode of the Linux console to be controlled in detail This allows more characters on screen more stable text less characters on screen less stable text etc also on badly designed hardware you could sometimes achieve a melted monitor Extra fonts are required to work fully though without them useful effects can still be achieved open Version 1 4 12K This program runs a command on an given virtual console number It can also run the program on the first virtual console which isn t already in use vlock Version 1 2 9K vlock either locks the current terminal which may be any kind of terminal local or remote or locks the e
19. mode Simply enter the shutdown command this time with h or r and the shutdown will com plete normally The shutdown command also gives you quite a bit of flexibility in terms of timing If you want the shutdown to proceed right away just enter the word now If you want to shut the system down five minutes from now you can enter 5 Therefore this command shutdown r 15 means shut the system down starting fifteen minutes from now and reboot after the shutdown has completed While shutdown has more options available we ve only described the basics necessary to perform a clean shutdown If you re interested in learning more enter man shutdown to learn more about shutdown s capabilities 6 3 The X Window System While there are people that will use the character cell interface present when you first log in many people prefer a graphically oriented user interface For Linux systems the graphical user interface of choice is the X Window System In order to run X you need to have the necessary packages installed If you selected the X Window System component to be installed when you originally installed Red Hat Linux everything should be ready to go In that case please refer to section 6 3 2 on page 93 6 3 1 If You Haven t Installed X If you didn t select the X Window System component when you installed Red Hat Linux your Red Hat Linux system won t have the necessary software installed While it is possible t
20. return here and read on 2 6 Installation Classes Red Hat Linux includes defines three different classes or types of installations They are e Workstation e Server e Custom These classes give you the option of simplifying the installation process with some loss of configu ration flexibility or retaining complete flexibility with a slightly more complex installation process Let s take a look at each class in more detail so you can see which one is right for you 2 6 1 The Workstation Class Installation A workstation class installation is most appropriate for you if you re new to the world of Linux and would like to give it a try By answering very few installation questions you can be up and running Red Hat Linux in no time What Does It Do A workstation class installation removes any linux related partitions and uses all free unpartitioned disk space to create the following partitions 19 20 Before You Begin e A 32MB swap partition e A 16MB partition mounted as boot in which the Linux kernel and related files reside e A 2MB partition mounted as dos in which the MILO boot loader is located e A larger the exact size is dependent on available disk space partition mounted as in which all other files are stored This approach to disk partitioning results in the simplest filesystem configuration possible Please Note You will need approximately 600MB of free disk space in order to per
21. 0 Halt 1 Single user mode 2 Multiuser mode without NFS 3 Full multiuser mode 4 Not used 214 System Administration 5 Full multiuser mode with an X based login screen 6 Reboot If your machine gets into a state where it will not boot due to a bad etc inittab or will not let you log in because you have a corrupted etc passwd or have simply forgotten your password boot into single user mode by typing linux 1 at the LILO boot prompt A very bare system will come up and you will be given a shell from which you can fix things 11 11 4 Initscript Utilities The chkconfig utility provides a simple command line tool for maintaining the et c rc d direc tory hierarchy It relieves system administrators from having to directly manipulate the numerous symlinks in etc rc d In addition there is the nt sysv utility that provides a screen oriented interface versus chkconfig s command line interface Please see the chkconfig and nt sysv man pages for more information 11 11 5 Running Programs at Boot Time The file etc rc d rc local is executed at boot time after all other initialization is complete and whenever you change runlevels You can add additional initialization commands here For instance you may want to start up additional daemons or initialize a printer In addition if you require serial port setup you can edit etc rc d rc serial andit will be executed automatically at boot time The default etc rc d rc local
22. 1 688K Static libraries and header files for the GIMP s X libraries which are available as public libraries C 12 X11 GLIB includes generally useful data structures GDK is a drawing toolkit which provides a thin layer over Xlib to help automate things like dealing with different color depths and GTK is a widget set for creating user interfaces imlib Version 1 8 342K Imlib is an advanced replacement library for libraries like libXpm that provides many more features with much greater flexability and speed imlib cfgeditor Version 1 8 337K The imlib config program allows you to control the way imlib uses color and handles gamma correc tion etc imlib devel Version 1 8 504K Headers static libraries and documentation for Imlib nls Version 1 0 4K This is a package of files used by some older X11R5 binaries such at Netscape It isn t required by versions of Netscape greater than 3 0 however xpm Version 3 4j 56K Allows applications to display color bitmapped pictures Used by a large number of popular X Windows programs to enhance the user interface C 12 5 Shells This section lists packages containing various graphically oriented shells mcserv Version 4 1 35 19K mcserv is the server program for the Midnight Commander networking file system It provides access to the host file system to clients running the Midnight file system currently only the Midnight Commander file manag
23. 11 6 Buildinga Custom Kernel lt i enc ose RE E 197 11 7 Sendmail i523 23 29 Ot OS A DE ee eek Se eae a a ea SS 200 11 8 Controlling Access to Services ices ce citadi kdo ay yd nn 201 CONTENTS 11 9 Anonymous FIP sss p eek a or SA RUE IR Sen oe Ped Re Ue 202 TONES Configuration sesiis a aa pas ta Ye aoe x RUE Re eo Y ee sd a 202 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown a 204 11 12Rescue Modes er dca 4 4 Seda t kae bade rud mM e qr Sob as 215 Getting Technical Support 217 A 1 An Overview of Our Support Policy s s sos ooo 217 A2 Getting SUpPOEE sc seruis aid S pL ur ue a Ea ae Se Se ERIS 219 A 3 Support FAO Frequently Asked Questions o o o o 222 Making Installation Diskettes 225 B 1 Making a Diskette Under MS DOS 0 0 00 eee eee eee 226 B 2 Making a Diskette Under a Linux likeO S ooo oo e 226 Package List 227 CE Applications uos a e e Sele A ae es EE E RU a Bd 229 C2 Basi ra cr e A A AA we 240 ES Dae MONS y edad a e ei Pu cae dP aS hw EA e AD RE a UR 242 C4 Development 4 cu ok eg Soc abe eGR el Y Rok e YR a e 244 Eb Documentation 222 5 cum 665 4464 0286 orbe dI eee bee at eee des 253 C 6 Extensions 52 wc dee ee be ed pow WO Ee XP VOR RU See ee a 256 C7 Games c psooscerue E BRR aS a Ree ee EORR BA 257 C8 Libraries csi Bao Re hod eR eR GR Y qn He CARER SE Ae ES s 258 C 9 Networking russerne de4 04 Fads ae bene x eaa She Rew EA A 261 CAO Shells
24. 115 utilities ShadOW eecsecxsxx ess edu dtacae peines 196 verifying packages with glint 180 versions of Red Hat Linux 351 Mideo Adaptet desse ore sepe ea exe n 93 o 92 401 402 video configuration 000 cece cece eee 13 viewing available packages with glint 178 virtual consoles iei eroe ten Retina ein 31 X Ased with eret p RI Y exin 96 Window Maker ooocccccccccccccccoccnnnccnnooo 4 window manager changing 95 Windows finding hardware configuration with 11 Windows NT dual booting with 321 wmconfig command oooooocccccccccocnncncooo 95 World Wide Web 06 0 2 000 000 see WWW WWW sucesivas eet eevee yan Dade 99 DO WS ETS cuerno cra 99 O as tie wees see Apache tc 91 alternate window managers 330 customizing window managers 329 grey screen only 0c cece eee 329 handy tools piia teer conten doses eas 96 NeoMagic support for 45 332 A O 328 starting automatically 94 332 starting manually 000 94 tisermode tools ertet ote et teet eed 96 virtual consoles used with 96 X Window System E cece cece ee 91 X window system rr cien ae e eee 328 X windows for SPARC 5 0066 c eee 363 X windows configuring 6 eee ee 66 XCODDPUFatOr sa s
25. 86K dip is a program to allow for automatic scripting of modem dialing It s useful for setting up PPP and SLIP connections but isn t required for either It is used by netcfg for setting up SLIP connections fwhois Version 1 00 7K This is the whois program It will allow you to find out information on people stored in the whois databases around the world ipxutils Version 1 0 44K This package includes utilities necessary for configuring and debugging IPX interfaces and networks under Linux IPX is the low level protocol used by NetWare to transfer data Itrace Version 0 3 4 70K ltrace is a program that simply runs the specified command until it exits It intercepts and records the dynamic library calls which are called by the executed process and the signals which are received by that process It can also intercept and print the system calls executed by the program mgetty Version 1 1 14 1 166K This package contains an intelligent getty for allowing logins over a serial line such as through a modem It allows automatic callback and includes fax support though mgetty sendfax needs to be installed to make full use of it s fax support mgetty sendfax Version 1 1 14 271K This package includes support for FAX Class 2 modems to send and receive faxes It also includes simple FAX queueing support mgetty voice Version 1 1 14 622K This package includes support for some modems which have
26. DD ies 256 A O de edes 269 Si da PUR bind Md Ravi Ce aue 271 Scotia lomas ferta xa a rer E PR Opec de de 257 wo M M 284 data 285 nda ici aii ti ces als aa 264 sendmail ct iii cas os 243 s endmaildoc i eer aa 243 setconsole uuu aces esit sprint 281 etsera cc sti dnd Bas alodus tadas 281 jm a 242 setuptools ccce EEE eR 3o da ee dam 282 Semil tool 4 ixcepis exo nd ha ave need e ena 238 Sho tlls 2 rereere exte xad da enr sacer md 282 shadow tils 2 raean ia A tiras 282 Shapeefe So sse endcedidte dana aU Pa d da of tonis 282 SharutilS zia odio eee dd sati pd die 274 diia aaa 260 slang devel eeepc oe heh ara 250 sliplogin sicco te eer rer er rad pes 282 SIP CET 237 MES e bereniedo cates ie Madu hi ERA 274 NOOO irreal ii sauce tte mee es 282 ra 240 SOX devel ovre rr re rere ers 261 Pron 233 Pi 290 QU peor aida aaa 264 QUIN pi sos ete gae s ra e ede eon 265 cop e A a A AR eee 274 St tsertalz Si ri o 282 cnr ei M 245 cin m 261 svgalib devel i iesus eer reet hne 250 SVGATextMode 0 e cece cence eee eae 273 SWatChins taa aa Dee EAT med Ae 282 Syll A 274 SYSLOG i c ssseneseek Eee hk erre eer RE 243 SYS VIM sri NE UU 242 it 283 va 272 Mitos 247 A a M 247 tcp wtapp ets soos sehr ndr e heres 262 EPA teria e exer ARRA RUN nds 236 A AN 271 A IE 270 KELMCAD co
27. How can I avoid this Answer The best instructions on dual booting NT and Linux are to be found in the Linux NT Loader HOWTO The latest version can be found at the Linux Documentation Project s website http sunsite unc edu LDP HOWTO mini Linux NT Loader A possibly earlier one can also be found on the Red Hat Linux cdrom in doc HOWTO mini Linux NT Loader E 6 14 How to get around the cylinder 1023 install problem Question Ican not install Linux below the 1023rd cylinder in my system What can I do Answer You will need to have the kernel below this limit and use a different bootloader than LILO The BIOS may not be able to reach it for one of the following reasons 322 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ e The kernel is above the 1023 cylinder of the hard drive e The kernel is on a drive the BIOS can t boot to not on Primary IDE or SCSI chain e Other esoteric kernel BIOS problems e You have hardware that can only be initialized in DOS Plug and Play etc You will probably need to use the LOADLIN boot loader that is provided on the cdrom in dosutils You will need to copy this directory over to your DOS hard drive partition and edit the auto boot bat file to point to its new position and remove the initrd line If your system is a SCSI system you will need to go into rescue mode and copy the mnt boot initrd img from the hard drive over to the dos partition and use it for booting E 6 15 Removing LILO Qu
28. If the kickstart file resides on the boot diskette the proper boot command would be boot linux ks floppy If on the other hand the kickstart file resides on a server the appropriate boot command would be boot linux ks H 3 The Kickstart File Now that you have some background information on kickstart installations let s take a look at the kickstart file itself The kickstart file is a simple text file containing a list of items each identified by a keyword You can create it by editing a copy of the README ks file found in the docs directory of a Red Hat Linux CD ROM or you can create it from scratch You should be able to edit it with any text editor or word processor that can save files as ASCII text First some ground rules to keep in mind while creating your kickstart file e Items must be specified in order It is not a good idea to try to change the order of the required items e Items that aren t required can be omitted e For kickstart upgrades the following items are required language installation method device specification keyboard setup the upgrade keyword LILO configuration If any other items are specified for an upgrade those items will be ignored note that this includes package selection e Omitting any required item will result in the installation process prompting the user for an answer to that question just as during a normal installation If this happens once the answer
29. In addition any mount points you ve defined are passed to the installation program and will eventually be used by your Red Hat Linux system to define the filesystem layout Back This button causes Disk Druid to abort without saving any changes you ve made When this button is selected the installation program will take you back to the previous screen so you can start over Handy Function Keys While there is some overlap between Disk Druid s buttons and the available functions keys there are two function keys that have no corresponding buttons e Add NFS This function key is used to add a read only NFS served filesystem to the set of mount points on your Red Hat Linux system When selected a dialog box will appear containing fields that must be filled in Reset This function key is used to discard all changes you may have made while in Disk Druid and return the list of partitions to those read from the partition table s on your hard disk s When selected you ll be asked to confirm whether you want the changes discarded or not Note that any mount points you ve specified will be lost and will need to be reentered 49 50 Continuing the Installation Please Note You will need to dedicate at least one partition to Red Hat Linux and optionally more This is discussed more completely in Section 2 7 5 on page 26 Now let s see how Disk Druid is used to set up partitions for your Red Hat Linux system Adding a Parti
30. Question I see this thing on the registration page that asks me what my login is What is my login anyway Answer If you are a first time user of the the support system or accessed the support system after August 15 1997 then the Login can be whatever you want it to be It must be all one word and if there is already a duplicate you will be warned of an error If you accessed the system before this time and have a valid registration your login will be the email address you had when registering and the password will be the old Support ID number You can change the password if you like however the login cannot be changed Question I ve tried entering a login and password but it won t accept it Why won t it accept the password I m trying to enter Answer The password must be a minimum of 5 alphanumeric characters long and no more than 8 Make sure you typed in the exact same password both times for both password fields on the registration page Question I hear that it s possible to change my registration information and view all my old tickets and the past correspondence How do I do that Answer Simply login to the registration page at http www redhat com support register and all these options will be available to you If you need to reference an old trouble ticket change your system information or just check up on the status of a trouble ticket visit this page You can also open a trouble ticket with valid registration number
31. REC PaPa H Figure 5 11 Configure Printer Partxcript printer fau ma rex configura the paper rimas and raralutian For this primer F Apre Legal ladgar Er H Ane aa Debo fete At rar BL e Figure 5 12 Printer Settings 76 Finishing the Installation Plaara verify that thiz printer information iz correct Printer tpa LOCAL Quest lp Spaal directory Pur Lele lp Printe desilos desint Printer driver Part icript printer Paper alzar Vetter Pana Lut tan 3x3 Bits per plosl Krfailt Chee selecta Figure 5 13 Verifying Printer Information 5 7 Setting a Root Password The installation program will next prompt you to set a root password for your system see Figure 5 14 on the next page You ll use the root password to log into your Red Hat Linux system for the first time The root password must be at least six characters long the password you type is not echoed to the screen You must enter the password twice if the two passwords do not match the installation program will ask you to enter them again You ought to make the root password something you can remember but not something that is easy for someone else to guess Your name your phone number qwert y password root 123456 and anteater are all examples of poor passwords Good passwords mix numerals with upper and lower case letters and do not contain dictionary words Aard387vark or 420BMttNT for example Remember that the pass
32. Remove the user s home directory and all its contents Please Note Files not contained in the user s home directory but owned by that user will remain on the system The file will still be owned by the deleted account s user ID Uid If you create a new account and specifically assign it the Uid of a deleted account it will then become the owner of any such orphaned files Selecting Leave the account s data in place on the Deleting account lt accountname gt screen see figure 8 10 will 1 Remove the user from the user accounts list 2 Leave the user s home directory with all its files in place 125 126 System Configuration Please Note Files and directories owned by the deleted account s user ID Uid will remain on the system If you create a new account and specifically assign it the Uid of a deleted account it will then become the owner of these orphaned files 8 1 2 Groups All users belong to one or more groups Just as each file has a specific owner each file belongs to a particular group as well The group might be specific to the owner of the file or may be a group shared by all users The ability to read write or execute a file can be assigned to a group this is separate from the owner s rights For example the owner of a file will be able to write to a document while other group members may only be able to read it Creating a Group Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the
33. Slrn is an easy to use but powerful full screen NNTP based newsreader It relies extensively on the S Lang programmer s library for many of its features Slrn works particularly well over slow network connections tin Version 1 22 537K Tin is a full screen easy to use Netnews reader It can read news locally i e usr spool news or remotely rtin or tin r option via a NNTP Network News Transport Protocol server trn Version 3 6 431K trn is one of the original threaded news readers this version is configured to read news from an NNTP news server C 1 11 Productivity This section contains packages aimed at helping you keep track of time and staying productive ical Version 2 2 785K ical is a popular X based calendar scheduler application which can help you keep track of single events and recurring events daily weekly monthly or yearly and sets off alarms to warn you of appointments C 1 12 Publishing This section contains packages that turn your Red Hat Linux system into a high quality typesetting workstation In fact the printed version of this document is produced using many of these tools groff Version 1 11a 2 941K B The groff text formatting system can be used to create professional looking documents on both paper and a computer screen All the man pages are processed with groff so you ll need this package to read man pages groff gxditview Version 1 11a 70K
34. Then choose the Configuration option from one of the remaining windows This will open a dialog box like the one shown in figure 10 4 Here you can type the full path to the RPMs you d like to look at Choosing the Save button will save this path making it the default for future glint sessions The Default button restores the path to the one that glint used when it started After changing this path and closing the dialog box you can use the Available button to view the packages available in the new location 10 4 Package Manipulation 179 You have to close all of your available windows and reopen one before changing your package directory will have any affect Package path mnt cdrom RedHat RPMS Figure 10 4 Configuration Window 10 4 Package Manipulation 10 4 4 Querying Packages The easiest way to query a single package or group is to use the query option from the icon s context sensitive menu If you want to query a more diverse set of packages select them all and use the Query button in one of the windows Using either of these methods creates a window like the one shown in figure 10 5 If you choose only one package it will look a bit different however so some of this won t apply Figure 10 5 Query Window On the very left of the window is a list of the packages that have been queried Selecting one of them will change the information in the rest of the window You may step through them in order by using the Nex
35. You can run it on text files and it will interactively spell check This means it will tell you about words it doesn t know and will suggest alternatives when it can less Version 332 138K less is a text file viewer much like more only better m4 Version 1 4 117K This is the GNU Macro processing language It is useful for writing text files that can be parsed logically Many programs use it as part of their build process mawk Version 1 2 2 126K Mawk is a version of awk which is a powerful text processing program In some areas mawk can outperform gawk which is the standard awk program on Linux nenscript Version 1 13 24K nenscript is a print filter It can take ASCII input and format it into PostScript output and at the same time can do nice transformations like putting 2 ASCII pages on one physical page side by side patch Version 2 5 94K Patch is a program to aid in patching programs You can use it to apply diff s Basically you can use diff to note the changes in a file send the changes to someone who has the original file and they can use patch to combine your changes to their original perl Version 5 004m4 12 155K HWA Perl is an interpreted language optimized for scanning arbitrary text files extracting information from those text files and printing reports based on that information It s also a good language for many system management tasks The lang
36. apache Version 1 3 2 1 904K Apache is a full featured web server that is freely available and also happens to be the most widely used apache devel Version 1 3 2 257K This package includes the source code and for Apache 1 3 1 as well as the apxs binary for building dynamic shared objects DSOs This package needs to be installed if you want to compile or develop additional modules for Apache autofs Version 3 1 1 100K autofs is a daemon which automatically mounts filesystems when you use them and unmounts them later when you are not using them This can include network filesystems CD ROMs floppies and so forth bind Version 8 1 2 496K Includes the named name server which is used to define host name to IP address translations and vice versa It can be used on workstations as a caching name server but is generally only needed on C 9 Networking one machine for an entire network bootp Version 2 4 3 101K This is a server for the bootp protocol which allows network administrators to setup networking information for clients via an etc bootptab on a server so that the clients can automatically get their networking information While this server includes rudimentary DHCP support as well we suggest using the dhcpd package if you need DHCP support as it is much more complete cleanfeed Version 0 95 7b 107K Cleanfeed is an automatic filter for INN that removes spam from incomin
37. ecce eene eee 311 media problems sssssssse 312 Microsoft mouse ooooooccccccccocccnnos 334 mouse Microsoft ooooocooococrocc 334 multiple OS installations 313 NeoMagic support for 5 332 A dak ster res 349 Netscape problems sssse 333 network administration 348 NT dual booting with 321 PAM explanation of ooooccccoccooooo 335 PCT error messages ise dena 344 Plug anid Play 1 eco komen 343 printer Setup ekremis inad bn edere 350 printouts icorrect s s surrisi iinit 350 programs not running s s s 327 Quake running under Linux 326 RAM problems ssis onn re nee 335 Red Hat LINUX conocio 307 Red Hat Linux versions 351 Red Hat Linux obtaining 310 Red Hat Linux using 325 RPM sing a iaie anien ttes 346 secure shell obtaining 335 sendmail boot hangs 348 sendmail problems 349 signal 11 during install 320 signal 7 during install 320 slow system large RAM 336 SMP support enabling 340 sound card problems 343 A 311 SSH obtaining iiie eren n 335 system administration 335 technical support e s imasi isign 222 time incorrect eec nee 340 341 upgrade re
38. glint asks for confirmation showing a window like the one in figure 10 12 All of the packages that are about to be uninstalled are listed You should look at them all to ensure you re not about to remove something you want to keep Clicking the ves button will start the uninstallation process After it completes the packages and groups that have been removed will disappear from any windows they were in 11 System Administration This chapter is an overview of the Red Hat Linux system It will illustrate things that you may not know about the system and things that are somewhat different from other UNIX systems 11 1 Filesystem Structure Red Hat Software is committed to the Linux File System Standard a collaborative document that defines the names and locations of many files and directories We will continue to track the standard to keep Red Hat compliant While compliance with the standard means many things the two most important are compatibility with other compliant systems and the ability to mount the usr partition read only The usr partition contains common executables and is not meant to be changed by users Because of this the usr partition can be mounted from the CD ROM or from another machine via read only NFS The current Linux Filesystem Standard FSSTND document is the authoritative reference to any FSSTND compliant filesystem but the standard leaves many areas undefined or extensible In this section we provide an
39. help to get the list of server names You also need to specify a monitor type If you don t the installation will assume a generic monitor capable of 640x480 60hz Use the monitor option to specify something other than the default Again Xconfigurator help willlist all valid monitor types If your monitor isn t listed you can enter the actual monitor specifications by using the hsync and vsync options for horizontal and vertical sync rates respectively The rates may be single numbers representing kilohertz and megahertz as appropriate groups of numbers separated by commas or two numbers separated by a dash signifying a range For example xconfig hsync 31 5 35 5 50 65 vsync 50 70 H 3 The Kickstart File An example for a machine where the video card can be autoprobed properly would be xconfig monitor tatung cml4uhe An example for a machine where nothing is probed and the monitor isn t in the list might be xconfig server Mach64 hsync 31 5 35 5 50 65 vsync 50 70 H 3 16 rootpw Setting the Root Password You can put the root passwd in a kickstart file in the clear in which case it would go over the network in the clear on an NFS install or you can specify that an encrypted password is to be used To specify an unencrypted password in the kickstart file use the rootpw keyword followed by the cleartext password rootpw mypasswd If you would rather use an encrypted password grab it out o
40. koules Distribution Red Hat Linux Colgate Version 2 Vendor Red Hat Software Release 2 Build Date Mon Sep 02 11 59 12 1996 Install date none Build Host porky redhat com Group Games Source RPM koules 1 2 2 src rpm Size 614939 Summary SVGAlib action game multiplayer network 9 4 Other RPM Resources 173 Description This arcade style game is novel in conception and xcellent in execution No shooting no blood no guts no gore The play is simple but you still must develop Skill to play This version uses SVGAlib to run on a graphics console e Now you want to see what files the koules RPM installs You would enter rpm qlp koules 1 2 2 1386 rpm The output is usr man man6 koules 6 usr lib games kouleslib start raw usr lib games kouleslib end raw usr lib games kouleslib destroy2 raw usr lib games kouleslib destroyl raw usr lib games kouleslib creator2 raw usr lib games kouleslib creatorl raw usr lib games kouleslib colize raw usr lib games kouleslib usr games koules These are just several examples As you use the system you will find many more uses for rpm 9 4 Other RPM Resources For more information on RPM check out the man page the help screen rpm help and the RPM documents available at http www rpm org There is also an RPM book available It s called Maximum RPM and is available from Red Hat Software and your local bookstore It contains a wealth of informa
41. lt path to filename gt rpm qf usr bin some executable One can usually join various query commands together so rem qi1 will give info and list all the files in the package To look in a rpm file that isn t installed simply add p to the query line rpm qilp somepackage 1 1 4 i386 rpm This example will list the information and the files contained in somepackage More Advanced More advanced usage can be found in the man page for rpm and at the web site http www rpm org Verification To see what files on the system may have changed from their initial settings you can use RPM to check up on them 348 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ rpm Va will give you a list of all files that have changed in one form or another since the package it is associ ated was installed This can be a lot of files and a lot may be changed due to post installation work To just see what packages have changed so that you can verify them more individually you can do the following rpm Va pipe awk print 2 xargs rpm qf sort u amp tmp filel Then look in the file tmp i1e1 for which packages have had changes from them E 10 Network Administration E 10 1 Boot hangs during sendmail Question I have installed Linux and it seems to initially start booting However it gets down to something called sendmail and then the machine seems to hang What is happening and what should I do Answer If after the install
42. mode permission bits have changed size file s size has changed uid owner s uid has changed gid owner s gid has changed md5 the md5 checksum has changed link the file is a symlink to the wrong place Figure 10 8 Possible Problems found by Verification To get more information on the problems found with a file double click on the file s path A window like the one shown in figure 10 9 lists the expected and current values of the attributes that are amiss 10 4 3 Installing New Packages Installing new packages from glint is very simple First look at the packages available for installation see the section 10 2 3 for how to do this You may select any number of these and query them if you re not sure what they are for installation in the same manner you select packages for verifica tion If you want to install a single package or group the context sensitive menus provide a shortcut for doing so Figure 10 10 shows a window with some packages selected for installation 182 Glint File Tetcisysconfig pcmcia scripts config Package pemcia cs 2 6 3a 2 Attribute Expected Current permissions 100755 100644 file size 6172 6133 checksum 393a0c05d2fb5176bfd0b2c32875c62a 83024ef8d2201a38f78266571f1b5384 Figure 10 9 Verification Details After you ve begun the installation a window appears like the one in figure 10 11 It tracks the progress of the installation so you ll know something is happening The top bar shows how muc
43. specify any driver options Please Note A partial list of optional parameters for CD ROMs can be found in Appendix D on page 301 If you have an ATAPI CD ROM and the installation program fails to find it in other words it asks you what type of CD ROM you have you must restart the installation and enter linux hdX cdrom Replace the X with one of the following letters depending on the interface the unit is connected to and whether it is configured as master or slave e a First IDE controller master e b First IDE controller slave e C Second IDE controller master e d Second IDE controller slave If you have a third and or fourth controller simply continue assigning letters in alphabetical order going from controller to controller and master to slave Once your CD ROM drive has been identified you will be asked to insert the Red Hat Linux CD ROM into your CD ROM drive Select Ok when you have done so After a short delay the next dialog box will appear Turn to Chapter 4 on page 43 to continue installing Red Hat Linux 3 4 2 Installing via NFS If you are going to install Red Hat Linux from an NFS served filesystem highlight NFS image and select OK 3 4 3 Network Driver Configuration Next the installation program will probe your system and attempt to identify your network card Most of the time the driver can locate the card automatically If it is not able to identify your network card you ll be asked to choose the
44. the Host name field Enter the hostname you are using in front of the domain name to form a fully qualified domain name FODN If your network has more than one nameserver you may enter IP addresses for additional nameservers in the Secondary nameserver and Tertiary nameserver fields 3 4 Selecting an Installation Method Choose OK to continue Plama aber your domain nas hart nema and the P addresses OF ony additional namesersers Tour host nama zhauld ba a ful ly qualifiad hart nama mh ar mbi me Lb oo oos GF you dont fere ay additional namara om r lara tha namaracomr amiriar hlank ter Host numer Secondary navarra U P gt Tertia ness Pr TTL at ate ear pd Fi amt pres Figure 3 10 Configuring Networking Please Note If you re doing an FTP installation head back to Section 4 6 on page 56 and pick up where you left off If you re doing an SMB installation head back to Section 4 7 on page 57 and continue from there If you re doing an NES installation read on 3 4 5 NFS Server Information The next dialog requests information about the NFS server see Figure 3 11 on the following page Enter the name which must be a fully qualified domain name or IP address of your NFS server and the name of the exported directory that contains the Red Hat Linux CD For example if the NFS server has the Red Hat Linux CD mounted on mnt cdrom enter mnt cdrom in Red Hat directory If the NFS server is exporting a mirror of
45. to boot see below 5 9 Installing LILO The first sector of your root partition is recommended if you are already using another boot loader on your system such as OS 2 s Boot Manager In this case your other boot loader will take control first You can then configure that boot loader to start LILO which will then boot Red Hat Linux A dialog box will appear that will let you select the type of LILO installation you desire see Fig ure 5 16 Select the location you wish to install LILO and press OK If you do not wish to install LILO press Skip Lilo Installation Mere do you wart to install the bootloader cra hid irrt nectar of boot partition Ca to Bebanne eb SES Figure 5 16 Installing LILO Please Note If you choose Skip you will not be able to boot your Red Hat Linux system directly and will need to use another boot method such as a boot diskette Use this option only if you know you have another way of booting your Red Hat Linux system 5 9 1 Adding Options to the LILO Boot Command Line Next the installation program will ask if you wish to add default options to the LILO boot command see Figure 5 17 on the following page Any options you enter will be passed to the Linux kernel every time it boots When you reviewed your computer s BIOS settings in Section 2 3 1 on page 10 if you found your computer accesses a hard drive in LBA mode check Use linear mode Select OK and press when finished Final
46. 105K Now all your favorite text adventure games can take on a new dimension with this X Windows interpreter for them C 12 4 Libraries This section lists packages containing various X related system libraries ImageMagick devel Version 4 1 0 1 415K This is the ImageMagick development package It includes the static libraries and header files for use in developing your own applications that make use of the ImageMagick code and or APIs Xaw3d Version 1 3 278K Xaw3d is an enhanced version of the MIT Athena Widget set for X Windows that adds a 3 dimensional look to the applications with minimal or no source code changes Xaw3d devel Version 1 3 644K Xaw3d is an enhanced version of the MIT Athena Widget set for X Windows that adds a 3 dimensional look to the applications with minimal or no source code changes This package includes the header files and static libraries for developing programs that take full advantage of Xaw3d s features gnome core Version 0 20 1 1 019K Basic programs and libraries that are virtually required for any GNOME installation GNOME is the GNU Network Object Model Environment That s a fancy name but really GNOME is a nice GUI desktop environment It makes using your computer easy powerful and easy to con figure gtk Version 1 0 6 1 175K The X libraries originally written for the GIMP which are now used by several other programs as well gtk devel Version 1 0 6
47. 30 SHAME joc ates cae Sate O 32 User interface 29 virtual consoles oooooccccccccoccccccooo 31 installation classes 00 00 cece cece eee eee 2 installation continuing 605 43 installation starting iiser pianinie na 29 34 installations multiple OS s 313 installing packages ooooococccoocccocccccooo 60 installing packages with glint 181 lj 198 Intel specific information 7 9 15 18 20 24 26 34 J Jaz drive configuration 000 339 kernel ice rice 28 building tree ia nets 197 200 CUSTOM ori ras 197 200 initrd image fOr uoces desee pres 200 A bac ett ted erem vine 197 monolithic 2 tre enm merenti 200 VETSION 2 2 croatas rev riu a TET Apa 3 kernel daemon errem mere rete 156 kernel drivers secet etr eee ne ee renes 28 kernel OPS vs cases meteps eere t tote dettes 34 A ed aet pA seed Ae et 156 adding modules ssssuue 157 changing modules 00 5 157 module options ssssssssss 157 festarting esce pei REPRE RE 158 keyboard mapping under X 331 keyboard navigation installation program 30 keyboard type selecting oooooocccoocooooo 35 keymap see keyboard type selecting kickstart file cdrom keyword sssesusus 382 clearpart keyword sssuse 383 device keyword nec
48. 4 Installation Methods ALPHA Alpha owners should take a moment to review the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum particularly the first chapter It covers aspects of the installation process that differ from a typical Red Hat Linux Intel installation SPARC People with SPARC systems should take a moment to read Appendix F on page 353 This appendix covers aspects of the installation process that differ from a typical Red Hat Linux Intel installation You can install or upgrade Red Hat Linux via any of several different methods Each method works best in different situations and has different requirements But before we discuss each installation method let s take a look at an issue that may affect some of you 2 4 Installation Methods 2 4 4 PCMCIA Support During the Installation INTEL This section is specific to Intel based computers only Most Intel based laptop computers support PCMCIA also known as PC Card Computers that support PCMCIA devices contain a controller having one or more slots in which a PCMCIA device can be installed These devices may be modems LAN adapters SCSI adapters and so on When installing Red Hat Linux Intel on a PCMCIA capable computer it is important to note if a PCMCIA device will be used during installation For example if you want to install Red Hat Linux Intel from a CD ROM and your CD ROM drive is connected to a PCMCIA adapter the installation program will require PCMCIA support Lik
49. 6 3 The X Window System sbin telinit 5 Please Note You will need to be logged in as root in order to use telinit Also note that you should rot be running anything else on your Red Hat Linux system when you change run levels as any running programs may be killed by the run level change If everything is configured properly after a short delay you should see an xdm login screen Log in verifying that an X desktop appears Then log out to make sure that xdm reappears If it does your system is configured properly to automatically start X If there are problems you can go back to run level 3 using telinit ie sbin telinit 3 or by rebooting Editing etc inittab Thefile etc inittabis used to among other things determine the system s default run level We need to change the default run level from 3 to 5 therefore we ll need to edit etc inittab Using the text editor of your choice change this line in etc inittab id 3 initdefault When you re done it should look like this id 5 initdefault Please Note Make sure you change only the number 3 to be 5 Do not change anything else otherwise your Red Hat Linux system may not boot at all When you ve made the change exit the editor and use this command to review your handiwork less etc inittab Press the key to page through the file Q will exit If everything looks OK it s time to reboot Rebooting Refer to Section 6 2 4 on page 90 to properly reboot your Red Hat
50. 9 11 14 15 25 33 46 353 SSH obtaining nerenin trek Ia pL De P i 335 standard groups ecrire nis see te ees 190 standard USAS aiii er tee 190 starting installation 00 cece eee 34 starting installation program 32 starty command scissa reser ever ee sate 94 strategy repartitioning cece eee eee 22 structure filesystem 000 ee eee eee 185 Su command seres e trees e e euet ect 89 super user becoming with SU ooooooooooo 89 support from mailing lists 106 support from Usenet ooooocoocccccoccoocccccos 107 support technical sse cree rene 217 swap partitions for SPARC ssusl 363 swap space initializing oooooooocoooo 56 SWapOff c eceviissi eor s Php XX Ra darebbies 103 186 A O races Ee SIR EVA an 103 186 sysconfig informati n lt s essari aeni rea 204 SYSLINUX sonoras tirnean eoe ao nene 81 system administration 185 335 System Commander oooooccccccoccccccccnconos 81 system configuration 109 see linuxconf system shutdown 6 6 ese eeeee 90 214 SYSV BUE drain se ane tients bti bet et nA 211 directories used by oooocccccccccccco 212 runlevels used by ooooococococoooooo 213 tasks DASI i oco Eze ARM eda Y Ra que 86 TCP Wrapper scssi enntre sites eel ee qus 201 A ex infe eoe baane A oe 202 technical SUPpOrt ooooocccccococcccccconocnnnos 2
51. A commonly used bootstrap loader for Linux systems based on the SPARC processor SLIP An acronym for Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP is a protocol that permits TCP IP com munication over serial line typically over a dial up modem connection SMB Short for Server Message Block SMB is the communications protocol used by Windows based operating systems to support sharing of resources across a network 373 374 Glossary Source code The human readable form of instructions that comprise a program Also known as sources Without a program s source code it is very difficult to modify the program SPARC ARISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer architecture developed by Sun Microsystems Supplemental Diskette A diskette required for certain types of Red Hat Linux installations Swap Also known as swap space When a program requires more memory than is physically available in the computer currently unused information can be written to swap thereby freeing memory Swap space is located on a hard disk some operating systems support swapping to a file but Linux swaps to a dedicated swap partition System Call A system call is a routine that accomplishes a system level function on behalf of a process TCP IP An acronym for Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is the name given to the networking standard commonly used on the Internet today Torvalds Linus See Linus Torvalds UID Short for User ID The means by
52. Configuration With Linuxconf The three sets of numbers above correspond to class a b and c networks respectively The classes are used to describe the number of IP addresses available as well as the range of numbers used to described each The numbers above have been set aside for private networks Please Note You cannot use these IP addresses if you connect to the Internet If you want your network to be connected to the Internet or think you might want to at some point in the future do yourself a favor and get yourself non private addresses now Nameserver Specification A nameserver and default domain are also needed to establish a network connection The name server is used to translate host names such as private network comto their corresponding IP ad dress such as 192 168 7 3 The default domain tells the computer where to look if a fully qualified hostname isn t specified Fully qualified means that the full address is given so foo redhat com is the fully qualified hostname while the hostname is simply oo If you specified your default do main as redhat com then you could use just the hostname to connect successfully For example ftp foo would be sufficient if your search domain is redhat com while ftp foo redhat com would be required if it wasn t To specify the nameserver open gt Networking Name server specification DNS Nameservers are ranked according to the order in which they are accessed so it s not
53. Itis played by controling the motion of blocks which continue to fall from the top of the screen One can move them left and right as well as rotate the jewel segements The object is to get the most points before the grim reaper ends the fun xlander Version 1 2 23K A very hard game but lots of fun nonetheless Try to manuver the lunar lander to a safe and nonviolent landing xpat2 Version 1 04 459K In 1989 Dave Lemke Heather Rose Donald R Woods and Sun Microsystems Inc created the xsol solitaire game also known as klondike under DOS and the rules of some other patience games Its main features are variable rule sets and different card sets for different resolution monitors xpat2 X Patience is a collection of these assorted solitaire card games that will truly try your pa tience xpilot Version 3 6 2 1 574K xpilot is a fast paced action game with multiplayer networking capabilities that make it full of hours of enjoyment The basic object of them game is to kill and fly need more be said xpuzzles Version 5 4 1 497K 291 292 Package List An assortment of geometric puzzles and toys including an electronic version of Rubik s cube and a dinosaur cube program xtrojka Version 1 2 3 181K Similar to xjewels or tetris this game presents you with the challenge of keeping the playing area clear of falling blocks A variation on the addictive classic xzip Version 180
54. Linux Web Pages Errata Pages http www redhat com support docs errata html Technical Support http www redhat com support Technical Support HOWTO http www redhat com support support howto html Supported Hardware http www redhat com support docs hardware html Mailing List Information http www redhat com mailing lists Red Hat Linux Documentation http www redhat com support docs rhl Official home of Linux http www li org Generic information on a number of topics http www redhat com linux info http www best com aturner RedHat FAQ Excellent general Linux resources http www linuxnow com http www linuxhq com http sunsite unc edu LDP Excellent Linux developer sites http news freshmeat net http developer redhat com dresses Email Addresses You can get documents from the following automated reply ad Latest fixes for newest Red Hat release errata redhat com Hardware list hardware compat redhat com How to get support support howtofredhat com This FAQ document faq redhat com Tips on getting PPP to work ppp tips redhat com FTP servers There are also many Red Hat mirrors Please see Section E 12 1 on page 351 Red Hat FTP server ftp ftp redhat com RPM FTP server ftp ftp rpm org Usenet newsgroups For these newsgroups pick one when asking a question cross posting between multiple newsgroups is frowned upon Foranswers comp
55. Much has changed support for more esoteric hardware huge increases in reliability and the growing use of Linux by companies around the world But much still remains the same Linux is still developed by people world wide Linus is still in volved Red Hat Software is still located in North Carolina still trying to make Linux easier for people to use And Red Hat Linux is still package based always has been always will be Since the release of version 4 0 Red Hat Linux runs on three leading computing platforms Intel compatible PCs Digital Alpha computers and Sun SPARC equipment Our unified source tree and the benefits of RPM Red Hat Package Management technology enable us to deploy Red Hat Linux for each platform with a minimum of effort This in turn enables our users to manage and port software between these platforms as easily as possible We make Red Hat Linux available by unrestricted FTP from our site and many mirror sites on the Preface Internet Red Hat Linux is also available on CD ROM For current information on our product offer ings and links to other Linux resources please check Red Hat Software s web site at http www redhat com On most systems Red Hat Linux is easy to install the installation program can walk you through the process in as little as 15 minutes The system itself is very flexible With RPM you can install and uninstall individual software packages with minimal effort Because of RPM Red Hat Lin
56. Note Please read all of the installation instructions before starting this will prepare you for any decisions you need to make and should eliminate potential surprises Starting the Installation This chapter explains how to start the Red Hat Linux installation process We ll cover the following areas in this chapter e Getting familiar with the installation program s user interface e Starting the installation program e Selecting an installation method By the end of this chapter the installation program will be running on your system and the appro priate installation method will have been selected 3 1 The Installation Program User Interface The Red Hat Linux installation program uses a screen based interface that includes most of the on screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces They may look a little different than their more graphical counterparts Figures 3 1 on page 31 and 3 2 on page 32 are included here to make them easier to identify Here s a list of the most important widgets e Window Windows also referred to as dialog boxes in this manual will appear on your screen throughout the installation process At times one window may overlay another in these cases 30 Starting the Installation you may only interact with the window on top When finished with that window it will disappear allowing you to continue with the window that was underneath e Text Input Text input lines are regio
57. Project LDP are available in usr doc on your system The directory usr doc HOWTO contains the ASCII versions of all the available HOWTOs at the time your Red Hat Linux CD ROM was mastered They are compressed with gzip to save space so you ll need to decompress them before reading One way of reading compressed HOWTOs without cluttering your disk with uncompressed versions is to use z1ess zless 3Dfx HOWTO gz The zless command uses the same keystrokes as less so you can easily move back and forth through a HOWTO usr doc HOWTO mini contains the ASCII versions of all the available mini HOWTOs They are not compressed and can be viewed with more or less usr doc HOWTO other formats html contains the HTML versions of all the HOWTOs and the Linux Installation and Getting Started guide To view things here just use the web browser of your choice usr doc FAQ contains ASCII versions and some HTML versions of some popular FAQs includ ing the RedHat FAQ They can be viewed using more or less or in the case of HTML files with the web browser of your choice 7 1 4 The locate Command When you don t know the full name of a command or file but need to find it you can usually find it with Locate locate uses a database to find all files on your system Normally this database gets built from a cron job every night This won t happen however if your machine isn t booted into Linux all the time So if that is the case you may occas
58. SMB Image If you are installing from a Windows shared drive Requires a supplemental diskette Please refer to Section 3 4 8 on page 42 to select the SMB installation method 3 4 4 Installing From CD ROM If you are going to install Red Hat Linux from CD ROM select CD ROM and select Ok The installation program will then prompt you to insert your Red Hat Linux CD ROM into your CD ROM drive When you ve done so select Ok and press Enter The installation program will then probe your system and attempt to identify your CD ROM drive It will start by looking for an IDE also known as ATAPI CD ROM drive If one is found the installation will continue If the installation program cannot automatically detect your CD ROM drive you will be asked what type of CD ROM you have You can choose from the following types 37 38 Starting the Installation SCSI Select this if your CD ROM is attached to a supported SCSI adapter the installation program will then ask you to choose a SCSI driver Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter You may specify options for the driver if necessary however most drivers will detect your SCSI adapter automatically Other If your CD ROM is neither an IDE nor a SCSI CD ROM it s an other Sound cards with proprietary CD ROM interfaces are good examples of this CD ROM type The installation program presents a list of drivers for supported CD ROMs choose a driver and if necessary
59. Sash is a very simple statically linked shell It includes simplified versions built in commands like Is dd and gzip Sash can be quite usefull for system recovery tcsh Version 6 07 09 487K B tcsh is an enhanced version of csh the C shell with additional features such as command history filename completion and fancier prompts zsh Version 3 0 5 953K zsh is an enhanced version of the bourne shell with these features very close to ksh sh grammar with csh additions most features of ksh bash and tcsh 75 builtins 89 options 154 key bindings short for loops ex for i c echo i select shell functions and many more C 11 Utilities This section lists packages that provide various utilities for your Red Hat Linux system Because there are so many we ve split them into different subsections C 11 1 Archiving This section lists packages that provide utilities for data archiving 271 272 Package List bzip2 Version 0 9 0b 239K Bzip2 compresses files using the Burrows Wheeler block sorting text compression algorithm and Huffman coding Compression is generally considerably better than that achieved by more con ventional LZ77 LZ78 based compressors and approaches the performance of the PPM family of statistical compressors The command line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU Gzip but they are not identical cpio Version 2 4 2 68K 5 cpio copies fi
60. The package contains the gxditview program which can be used to format and view groff documents in X Windows For example man pages can be read using gxditview lout Version 3 08 3 427K 237 238 Package List The Lout system reads a high level description of a document similar in style to LaTeX and produces a PostScript file which can be printed on many laser printers and graphic display devices Plain text output is also available Lout offers an unprecedented range of advanced features including optimal paragraph and page breaking automatic hyphenation PostScript EPS file inclusion and generation equation formatting tables diagrams rotation and scaling sorted indexes bibliographic databases running headers and odd even pages automatic cross referencing multilingual documents including hyphenation most European languages are supported including Russian formatting of C C programs and much more all ready to use Furthermore Lout is easily extended with definitions which are very much easier to write than troff of TeX macros because Lout is a high level language the outcome of an eight year research project that went back to the beginning lout doc Version 3 08 2 069K This package includes the complete Lout documentation including the user and expert manuals written in Lout and with PostScript output Good examples of writing large docs with Lout sgml tools Version 1 0 7 1 997K SGML Tools
61. The partition marked as the default will be the partition LILO will boot if there is no user input during the boot process Initially the root partition for your Red Hat Linux installation will be selected as the default If you d like to change this use the arrow keys to highlight the partition you d like to make the default and press F2 The asterisk should move to the selected partition When you ve finished select Ok and press Space 5 9 2 Alternatives to LILO If you do not wish to use LILO to boot your Red Hat Linux system there are a few alternatives Boot Diskette You can use the boot diskette created by the installation program if you elected to create one LOADLIN can load Linux from MS DOS unfortunately it requires a copy of the Linux kernel and an initial ram disk if you have a SCSI adapter to be available on an MS DOS partition The 5 10 Finishing Up 81 doviabls Paetitions The boot mr Red Hat uses can Dont other opsrat Lg gjuter ar wall You need bai tall ma what partitions yu sold Like to be aile to bari and what Label wou want to urs for ash af tham Ivica Partition Daft bot Lahal dari hid Linux matisa Ade Lipo ratius FE Febecta the debat par titi Figure 5 18 Selecting Bootable Partitions only way to accomplish this is to boot your Red Hat Linux system using some other method e g from LILO on a diskette and then copy the kernel to an MS DOS partition LOADLIN is available from
62. There were ways around this the most obvious being a non intel based motherboard The VIA motherboards are a good option here and very often can be found with 1 meg of cache or even a little more rarely 2 meg These boards can cache between 512 and 1 gig of memory depending on the exact variation of the chipset E 9 5 Red Hat 5 X problems with old applications Question Iam trying to use an old application that is compiled with libc5 libraries When I run it I immediately get SEGV errors or similar problems What is going on and what can I do Answer The problem with crashing libc5 applications can be due to several items 1 Before after the upgrade there was installed another version of libc that didn t get obsoleted by the upgrade process or placed libc5 libraries in a place that causes conflict To find out if this is the case do this rpm qa grep libc It should produce output similar to this 337 338 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ glibc devel 2 0 5c 12 libc 5 3 12 24 glibc debug 2 0 5c 12 rpm 2 4 10 1glibc rpm devel 2 4 10 1glibc glibc profile 2 0 5c 12 giibo 2 0 50 12 If you see items like 1ibc debug 5 3 12 180rlibc 5 4 44 2 you will need to remove these packages for example rem e libc debug andrun ldconfig v 2 Your etc 1d so conf file has been changed from an optimal setting For optimal loading set your etc Id so conf file in the following order usr i486 linuxaout
63. Version 0 98 1 8 194K This package includes a hdimage file that will be installed in var lib dosemu directory if you need some version of DOS to start using dosemu Generally dosemu requires you to have some version of DOS available to bootstrap your hdimage files before first use or to have partitions formatted and installed with DOS If you have neither you can use this image that is already bootable with FreeDOS You will need to edit your etc dosemu conf file to add this image to the list of drives used by dosemu xdosemu Version 0 98 1 26K This is a version of the DOS emulator that is designed to run in an X windows session It provides VGA graphics support as well as mouse support C 1 5 Engineering This section contains packages for those of you that are into engineering spice Version 296 769K SPICE is a general purpose circuit simulation program for nonlinear dc nonlinear transient and lin ear ac analyses Circuits may contain resistors capacitors inductors mutual inductors independent voltage and current sources four types of dependent sources transmission lines and the four most common semiconductor devices diodes BJT s JFET s and MOSFET s units Version 1 0 24K The units program converts quantities expression in various scales to their equivalents in other scales The units program can only handle multiplicative scale changes C 1 6 Graphics This section contains packages that
64. Version 2 7 149K B The diff utilities can be used to compare files and generate a record of the differences between files This record can be used by the patch program to bring one file up to date with the other AII these utilities except cmp only work on text files faces Version 1 6 1 139K The faces package is for use mainly with exmh You can take a photo of something and turn it into a face which can be transmitted in all email and will show up in exmh and other mailers faces xface Version 1 6 1 20K These are the utilities to handle X Face mail headers They are called by mail readers to display an face from a message gawk Version 3 0 3 2 288K This is GNU Awk It should be upwardly compatible with the Bell Labs research version of awk It is almost completely compliant with the 1993 POSIX 1003 2 standard for awk Gawk can be used to process text files and is considered a standard Linux tool gecko Version 1 5 66K C 11 Utilities newt based front end for the linuxconf system This is the default interface to linuxconf on a Red Hat system if the X Window System is not available that is if the DISPLAY environment variable is not set grep Version 2 2 258K B This is the GNU implementation of the popular grep nix utility It allows for the fast locating of strings in text files ispell Version 3 1 20 2 386K This is the GNU interactive spelling checker
65. a Red Hat Linux CD ROM a supported CD ROM drive and a means of starting the installation program INTEL Intel systems will need to use the boot diskette and the supplemental diskette if PCMCIA sup port is required There is an alternate method of installing from CD ROM that uses no diskettes but requires that the system be running DOS We ll discuss this approach known as autoboot in Section 3 2 1 on page 34 For now note that PCMCIA support is not available when using autoboot Please Note The Red Hat Linux Intel CD ROM can also be booted by newer computers that support bootable CD ROMs Not all computers support this feature so if yours can t boot from CD ROM you ll have to use a boot diskette or autoboot from DOS to get things started Note that you may need to change BIOS settings in your computer to enable this feature If you ve determined that this installation method is most applicable to your situation please skip ahead to Section 2 5 on page 18 2 4 3 Installing From an FTP Site If you don t have a Red Hat Linux CD ROM or a CD ROM drive but you do have network access then an FTP installation may be for you When installing via FTP the Red Hat Linux packages you select are downloaded using FTP across the network to your computer and are installed on your hard drive How To Do It When doing an FTP install you ll need LAN based access to a network a dialup connection via modem won t cut it If your Local Are
66. a window of configured devices with a row of available options see figure 8 42 on the next page To add a device first click the Add button then select the type of interface you want to configure from the box that appears See Figure 8 43 on the facing page Please Note There is now a clone button available in net cfg This button can be used to create a clone of an already existing interface By using clone interfaces it is possible for a laptop to have one Ethernet interface defined for a work LAN and a clone Ethernet device defined for a home LAN PPP Interface Adding a PPP interface can be as simple as supplying the phone number login name and password in the Create PPP Interface dialog shown in Figure 8 44 on page 162 If you need to use PAP authentication for your PPP connection choose Use PAP authentication In many cases some degree of customization will be needed to establish a PPP connection Choosing the Customize button will allow you to make changes to the hardware communication and networking settings for the PPP interface 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel 161 Figure 8 42 Configured Interfaces Figure 8 43 Choose Interface Type 162 System Configuration rato PPP mierina Figure 8 44 Create PPP Interface SLIP Interface In order to configure a SLIP interface you must first supply a phone number login name and password This will supply the initial parameters for the chat script n
67. address and architecture are separated by a dot resulting in this symlink name 0A0002FE SUNAM The last step is figuring out what this symlink should point to There are two choices If you want to use an NFS mounted root use the file kernels vmlinux If you would rather use a ramdisk use the file images tftpboot img Place the appropriate file in the TFTP server s directory and create the symlink In this example we re using the image that includes a ramdisk 359 360 Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC ln s tftpboot img 0A0002FE SUNAM Network Boot Commands You re now ready to boot If you re going to boot t f tpboot img simply use the following com mand in new command mode boot net On the other hand if you re going boot from vmlinux and use an NFS mounted root use this com mand boot net linux nfsroot nfs server IP address path to RH image Replace nfs server ip address with the NFS server s IP address and path to RH image with the path to the exported directory containing the appropriate Red Hat Linux SPARC files SPARC systems with PROM versions less than 2 0 should use this boot command appending the usual NFS root argument if required b le F6 Choosing an Installation Method Once your SPARC systems has booted and the installation program is running you ll be asked to choose an installation method unless you ve booted directly from CD ROM in which case a CD ROM installa
68. all the necessary bits and pieces into a cohesive distribution relieving newbies from some of the more esoteric aspects of bootstrapping a new operating system on their PCs However unlike other distributions this one was fundamentally different The difference Instead of being a snapshot of a hard disk that had a working copy of Linux on it or a set of diskettes from which different parts of the operating system could be dumped this distribution was based on packages Each package provided a different piece of software fully tested configured and ready to run Want to try a new editor Download the package and install it In seconds you can give it a try Don t like it Issue a single command and the package is removed If that was all there was to it this distribution would be pretty nifty But being package based meant there was one additional advantage This Linux distribution could be easily upgraded Software development in the Linux world is fast paced so new versions of old software come out continually With other distributions upgrading software was painful a complete upgrade usually meant deleting everything on your hard drive and starting over By now you ve probably guessed that the group of programmers in North Carolina is Red Hat Soft ware and the package based distribution is Red Hat Linux Since Red Hat Linux s introduction in the summer of 1994 Linux and Red Hat Software have grown by leaps and bounds
69. also be used in conjunction with a rescue disk which will give you the tools necessary to get an ailing system back on its feet again e Use It When Another Operating System Overwrites LILO Other operating systems may not be as flexible as Red Hat Linux when it comes to supported boot methods Quite often installing or updating another operating system can cause the master boot record originally containing LILO to be overwritten making it impossible to boot your Red Hat Linux installa tion The boot diskette can then be used to boot Red Hat Linux so you can reinstall LILO Given these reasons to create a boot diskette you should seriously consider doing so Select Yes and press to create a boot diskette Next you ll see a dialog box directing you to insert a blank To do this you ll need to create a rescue diskette from the rescue img image contained in the images directory of your Red Hat Linux CD ROM Appendix B on page 225 explains how to do this 77 78 Finishing the Installation A custom bocbdisk provides a wm of booting Lrrbo your Linux pbm without depending an tha normal baatlaader Thin ir useful LF you don t wart to install Lilo on njstem mother operating myrbam rara lila ar lila damt wr ith your hardware configuration A custom bootdiak ca abso ba ured uith tha Pad Het raros inep making iz much aariar ta Peor From prame joio Fal Lures Mould you Libs bo oreste 4 Dbogtdisk for your sb Ca Lao eta eon Chere s
70. and write it to a file in a variety of formats C 12 7 Window Managers This section lists packages containing various window managers and related files Unlike other graphical user interfaces on other operating systems your Red Hat Linux system lets you choose which window manager you d like to run on top of X The packages in this section let you choose from several window manager styles T This is a joke not a typo 295 296 Package List AfterStep Version 1 5 3 384K AfterStep is a continuation of the BowMan window manager which was originally put together by Bo Yang BowMan was based on the fvwm window manager written by Robert Nation Fvwm was based on code from twm And so on It was originally designed to emulate some of the look and feel of the NEXTSTEP user interface but has since taken steps towards adding more useful requested and neat features especially in 1 4 version The changes which comprise AfterStep s personality were originally part of bowman development but due to a desire to move past simple emulation and into a niche as its own valuable window manager AfterStep designers decided to change the project name and move on Important features of AfterStep include 1 Wharf a free floating application loader which can Swallow running programs and also can contain Folders of more applications 2 Gradient filled TitleBars with 5 button help zap ac tion tasks iconize maximise shade stick am
71. another computer then make sure your modem is installed and that the cables are arranged properly If you re using a network card make sure it is installed properly and that the cables are correctly connected Regardless of what network configuration you specify if every phone line or cable is not in place you ll never get connected We ll start with modem connections and then move on to using network cards Adding Modem PPP SLIP connections Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt Networking PPP SLIP PLIP 138 System Configuration Select Add Select the type of connection Enter the Phone number login name and password Select Use PAP authentication only if necessary only available for PPP accounts aN oS gr Je Select Accept Adding Modem PPP SLIP connections General Overview There are several pieces of information you will need to get from your ISP Internet Service Provider or systems administrator before getting your PPP or SLIP account working In the case of some providers you may have to sort through directions on how to set up a PPP connection on a Linux system Some ISPs are ill equipped to handle individuals using Linux Don t worry you can still get connected you just need some additional information from your ISP The following is what you need for a connection with Red Hat Linux The ISP re
72. be between 300 MB and 700 MB depending on how many packages you plan to install If at all possible try to be generous with the usr partition Any RPM based packages you install later will in general use more space from usr than from any other partition A home partition This is where users home directories go the size of home depends on how many users you plan to have on your Red Hat Linux system and what they might store in their home directories ALPHA The following partition is specific to Red Hat Linux Alpha installations 2 7 Disk Partitions A MILO partition Alpha owners that will be using MILO to boot their systems should create a 1 5 MB DOS partition where MILO can be copied after the installation is complete Additionally your circumstances may warrant creating one of more of the following partitions A usr local partition Traditionally usr 1ocal has been used to hold things you wish to keep separate from the rest of your Red Hat Linux system such as software that is not available as an RPM package The size depends on the amount of such software you anticipate putting on your system A usr src partition There are two things that normally are stored in usr src on a Red Hat Linux system Linux Kernel Sources The complete sources for the Linux kernel are stored here and new kernels are built here At present the kernel sources are approximately 30MB in size Keep in mind that you ll want to h
73. booting sssssssss 342 formatting partitiONS oooooocccccccccccnccoo gt 59 framebu ffer sai ti 363 Frequently Asked Questions see FAQs friends impressing with RPM 171 ESSTND oeirdiocicc e v ee tai 186 FStOO 338 FTP ANONYMOUS cerraron 202 paces vivero exec bb rette eps ere 202 ftphosts ee cr vb ede onec ie 202 PUSO no 202 FTP installation 066 0c cece eee eee eee 16 INDEX FTP installation for SPARC 361 IPP Site MUTOYS 2 x exte bere Lead 351 Future Domain TMC 3260 usus 318 getting started seco oet Ren ee ea xii GIMP nakani ne eise Red CH eed Sacs echa s 4 A ex ebbe mined see glint Cintia 175 available packages oooooocoooooo o 178 installing packages with 181 MENUS card Ead x e pna dae 177 package display ssssssss 176 package manipulation 179 querying packages sseessses 179 removing packages with 183 selecting packages sssuuue 177 STAM ia pe PUERUM DPI E bons 176 uninstalling packages with 183 upgrading packages with 182 verifying packages 000 180 glint configuration tineri diini aikan 178 BlOSSaEy oreen Eene SE EE ve eda du Pues 365 group CCOO esne ines 126 group management ssssssssssessss 126 group modificati0N o
74. controls access to various resources in a com puter system Packages Files that contain software and written in a particular format that enables the software to be easily installed and removed PAM An acronym for Pluggable Authentication Modules PAM is an authentication system that controls access to Red Hat Linux Partition Table The partition table is a section of a disk drive s storage space set aside to define the partitions that exist on that disk drive Partition Type Partitions contain a field that is used to define the type of filesystem the partition is expected to contain The partition type is actually a number although many times the partition type is referred to by name For example the Linux Native partition type is 82 Note that this number is hexadecimal Partition A segment of a disk drive s storage space that can be accessed as if it was a complete disk drive PC Card See PCMCIA PCMCIA Acronym for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association This organi zation produced a series of standards that define the physical electrical and software characteristics of small credit card sized devices that can contain memory modems network adapters and more Also known as PC Cards these devices are mainly used in laptop computers although some desktop systems can use PCMCIA cards too Permissions The set of identifiers that control access to files Permissions consist of three fields user group and
75. daemons uucp Version 1 06 1 2 012K UUCP is a Unix to Unix transfer mechanism It is used primarily for remote sites to download and upload email and news files to local machines If you didn t already know that you probably don t need this package installed vixie cron Version 3 0 1 54K B cron is a standard UNIX program that runs user specified programs at periodic scheduled times vixie cron adds a number of features to the basic UNIX cron including better security and more powerful configuration options 243 244 Package List C 4 Development This section contains packages of interest to programmers Red Hat Linux comes with a very power ful and rich set of tools for the programmer so there are several different subsections here C 4 1 Building This section contains packages that help programmers easily build programs autoconf Version 2 12 524K GNU s autoconf is a tool for source and Makefile configuration It assists the programmer in cre ating portable and configurable packages by allowing the person building the package to specify various configuration options autoconf is not required for the end user it is needed only to generate the configuration scripts automake Version 1 3 777K Automake is an experimental Makefile generator It was inspired by the 4 4BSD make and include files but aims to be portable and to conform to the GNU standards for Makefile variab
76. diskette when asked to insert it do so and select OK The installation program will then display a progress bar as the supplemental diskette is loaded Next turn to Chapter 4 on the facing page and follow the directions there 3 4 8 Installing via SMB If you would like to install Red Hat Linux from a disk shared by a Windows system or by a Linux system running the Samba SMB connectivity suite select SMB image and select Ok SMB installa tions require a supplemental diskette when asked to insert it do so and select Ok The installation program will then display a progress bar as the supplemental diskette is loaded Next turn to Chapter 4 on the next page and follow the directions there Continuing the Installation 4 1 Upgrading or Installing After you choose an installation method the installation program prompts you to either install or upgrade see Figure 4 1 on the following page 4 1 1 Installing You usually install Red Hat Linux on a clean disk partition or set of partitions or over another instal lation of Linux Please Note Installing Red Hat Linux over another installation of Linux including Red Hat Linux does not preserve any information from the prior installation Make sure you save any important files If you wish to perform a full install choose Install and skip to section 4 2 on the next page 44 Continuing the Installation installation Parth Would dou Like to install a
77. driver that supports your network card and to specify any options necessary for the driver to locate and recognize it 3 4 Selecting an Installation Method 39 3 4 4 Configuring TCP IP Networking After the installation program has configured your network card it presents several dialogs for con figuring your system s TCP IP networking The first screen shown in Figure 3 7 allows you to select from one of three approaches to network configuration Hew hold tha P information ba mat f your opima Adainistrator grat you am P addeess choose statio IP poems HF CL at etei baant PIRE EL Figure 3 7 Selecting Method of Network Configuration e Static IP address You must supply all the necessary network related information manually e BOOTP The necessary network related information is automatically provided using a boot p request e DHCP The necessary network related information is automatically provided using a dhcp request Please Note The BOOTP and DHCP selections require an active properly configured bootp or dhcp server running on your local area network If you choose BOOTP or DHCP your network configuration will be set automatically and you can skip the rest of this section If you ve selected Static IP address you ll need to specify all the networking information yourself Figure 3 8 on the following page contains example networking information similar to what you ll be needing Please Note The inf
78. file appropriately WindowMaker Version 0 20 1 2 977K WindowMaker is a window manager designed to emulate the look and feel of part of the NEXTSTEP tm GUI It s supposed to be fast relatively small feature rich and easy to configure with a simple and elegant appearance borrowed from NEXTSTEP tm fvwm Version 1 24r 550K fvwm is a small fast and very flexible window manager It can be configured to look like Motif and has a useful button bar C 12 X11 297 fvwm2 Version 2 0 46 1 471K fvwm is a version of the popular Feeble Virtual Window Manager fvwm2 icons Version 2 0 46 599K This package contains icons bitmaps and pixmaps for fvwm and fvwm2 wmakerconf Version 1 1 1 515K wmakerconf is a GTK based configuration tool for the window manager WindowMaker Support of all WindowMaker attributes Font selection browser pixmap preview browser color se lection dialog shortcut dialog file selection dialog Tooltips with short description of every attribute New attributes can be simply integrated by changing the wmakerconf proplist wmconfig Version 0 5 47K This is a program that will generate menu configurations for different window managers available for the X11 system It is an attempt to gain some form of abstractization of the menu configuration across some window managers Currently it supports FVWM2 FVWM95 Afterstep MWM IceWM KDE C 12 8 XFree86 This section li
79. from Red Hat Software or one of its distributors and you re missing one or more of the items listed above please let us know One thing to keep in mind is that Red Hat Software partners with companies international and domestic so that we can make Red Hat Linux available to you in the most convenient form Because of this you might find that your Red Hat Linux boxed set may not have been actually produced by Red Hat Software Not sure how to identify our official boxed set Here s how The bottom of our box has an ISBN number next to one of the bar codes That ISBN number should be in the form 1 888172 xx y Where xx and y may vary If your box has an ISBN number in this form and you re missing some thing feel free to call us at 1 888 733 4281 1 919 547 0012 outside the USA or to send mail to sales redhat com If your box has a different ISBN number or none at all you ll need to contact the company that produced your boxed set Normally third party producers will include their logo and or contact information on the outside of the box an official Red Hat Linux boxed set has only our name and contact info on the outside If your Red Hat Linux boxed set is complete please skip ahead to section 2 2 4 on the following page 2 2 3 No Boxed Set No Problem Of course not everyone purchases a Red Hat Linux boxed set It s entirely possible to install Red Hat Linux using a CD created by another company or even via FTP In
80. ftp sunsite unc edu pub Linux system boot dualboot and sunsite s various mirror sites SYSLINUX is an MS DOS program very similar to LOADLIN it is also available from ftp sunsite unc edu pub Linux system boot dualboot and sunsite s various mirror sites Some commercial bootloaders such as System Commander are able to boot Linux but still require LILO to be installed in your Linux root partition 5 10 Finishing Up After you have completed LILO installation the installation program will prompt you to prepare your system for reboot see Figure 5 19 on the next page Don t forget to remove any diskette that might be in the diskette drive Unless you decided to skip the standard LILO installation in which case you ll need to use the boot diskette created during the installation After your computer s normal power up sequence has completed you should see LILO s standard prompt which is boot At the boot prompt you can do any of the following things e Pressing Causes LILO s default boot entry as defined by the dialog box shown in Figure 5 18 to be booted 82 Finishing the Installation Cangratulatianz inrtallatian iz complata Panos tha floppy fram tha deriva and prarr ratun ta reboot For informertion on fixes whioh aee arai Lite for thiz ralaara of Pad Hat Linux comrmult tha Errata 5 bles Teon tara refit oom InFormetion on conf igue ing your aystes Ls susi labls in tha part inctall chapter of t
81. functional The problem currently is that this work is still in catchup mode and may not work for people with the latest cards Our current suggestion is to try the following when debugging Adaptec 2940 problems 1 Try the latest boot images from tp ftp redhat com pub redhat updates 2 The AHA 2940 is like most Adaptec cards extremely sensitive to termination issues having active termination on BOTH ends of the bus can help a lot 3 SCSI Hard drives that have on drive termination seem as a general rule to supply active termi nation whereas SCSI CD ROM drives and SCSI tape drives that can be configured for on drive termination seem as a general rule to supply only passive termination Therefore try making a hard drive the last device on the bus 4 If a SCSI based system doesn t work when you have sync negotiation and disconnect enabled for your SCSI devices but DOES work OK when you disable sync negotiation and or discon nect for your SCSI peripherals then suspect bad cables and or bad or less than adequate termination 5 HP C3725S SCSI drives do not work at all well with the AHA 2940AU perhaps due to a prob lem with the drive but just as likely due to some problem problems with the AHA 2940 driver in the Linux 2 0 30 kernel 6 For some large drives you have to disable the default option in the Adaptec SCSI BIOS Ex tended BIOS translation for DOS drives gt 1 GByte This option causes the BIOS to use a translat
82. game a game where one must try to stack odd shaped blocks together perfectly This game requires X Windows to work properly flying Version 6 20 212K This is a package of games that run under X Windows It contains pool snooker air hockey and other table games WARNING This software could become addictive and could cause serious levels of sleep deprivation or loss of mobility in the legs if used at extreme levels paradise Version 2 3p19 413K Netrek is a very popular Internet based arcade game You fly around with a team of players shooting at and capturing planets from the enemy another team A good way to drop out of college spider Version 1 0 51K spider is a particularly challenging double deck solitaire Unlike most solitaires it provides extraor dinary opportunities for the skillful player to overcome bad luck in the deal by means of careful analysis and complex manipulations xbill Version 2 0 183K This package has seen increased popularity with the dawn of the Linux age Very popular at Red Hat The object of the game To seek out and destroy all forms of Bill to disestablish new and alien operating systems and to boldly go where no geek has gone before xbl Version 1 0h 176K A three dimensional version of a popular arcade game xboard Version 4 0 0 588K xboard gives you an easy to use graphical interface to the GNU chess program allowing you to enjoy hours of mind b
83. gt Networking gt PPP SLIP PLIP 4 Select the configuration to modify 141 142 System Configuration Pertworkirg Glen br Basic host imime Hare serene rgecifc ation if Anning and gateways Cira ln ghe routes bo nehoagrks her routes bo host routes to aerate local re the routed daemon Hari name search path Babam Informa ation Sie PX meros reug PPP SLIP PLIP Server paks Esparjed file systems MF 5 F aiya for virus hosts UCF dini En unix mop PPR iP ip cosbgeradon Type of imera SLIP inca m IPP Aca cancel Custonite Hew iS decer and moder scheduled dos Mil delivery syrien isendr Emi Figure 8 20 SLIP Interface Screen 5 Change the desired settings most are on the Communications tab 6 Select Accept Modifying a PPP or SLIP Configuration General Overview You can edit an existing configuration as well as delete it by selecting it from the list on the PPP SLIP PLIP configurations screen Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open gt Networking gt PPP SLIP PLIP You will then be presented with the choicePPP SLIP PLIP configurations screen see fig ure 8 17 on page 139 Select the configuration you would like to modify or delete 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf lp PEPSI confgerstens Type of imertace PPP imiertace ppp PPP imartaca nga Basic host imiarmadion
84. help you work with graphics related material ghostscript Version 4 03 2 737K Ghostscript is a PostScript interpretor It can render both PostScript and PDF compliant files to de vices which include an X window many printer formats including support for color printers and popular graphics file formats ghostscript fonts Version 4 03 3 679K 233 234 Package List These fonts can be used by the GhostScript interpreter during text rendering giftrans Version 1 12 2 20K This program can convert and manipulate GIF images from the command line It is most useful for making a color transparent for web sites libgr progs Version 2 0 13 1 388K This package includes various utility programs for manipulating JPEG files for use by libgr programs libungif progs Version 3 0 285K This package contains various programs for manipulating gif image files xfig Version 3 2 2 2 241K This program gives you all the features you need to create basic to intermediate level vector graph ics including bezier curves lines rulers and more zgv Version 3 0 168K Zgv is a picture viewer capable of displaying GIF files as defined by CompuServe with the excep tions listed in the RESTRICTIONS section It is also capable of displaying JPEG JFIF files using the Independant JPEG Group s JPEG software PBM PGM PPM files as used by pbmplus and netpbm Microsoft Windows and OS 2 BMP files Targa TGA file
85. in the package window brings up a small context sensitive menu The exact items it contains depends on exactly where you press it They all contain options to select or deselect the item and many let you install uninstall query upgrade or verify the item you clicked on There s more information on how to do these things later To choose an item from a context sensitive menu press and hold the right mouse button on a icon While still holding the right button down move the mouse pointer over the item you d like to select which will then become highlighted Release the right mouse button to select that item and make the menu disappear 10 2 2 Selecting Packages To select a single package click the left mouse button on it You ll notice a thin border appear around the package s icon as shown in figure 10 2 which shows that it s currently selected To unselect it click the left mouse button on it and the border will disappear The number of packages currently selected is always displayed at the bottom of the window A group s folder icon displays the number of packages within that group that have been selected or A11 if all have been selected Path X11 Games Video Query Uninstall Verify Configure Available Exit Packages selected 2 Figure 10 2 Selecting Packages in Glint The context sensitive menu for a package also allows easy selection and unselection Using the se lect and unselect options on a package s i
86. into the next subject We Need Feedback If you spot a typo in the Installation Guide or if you ve thought of a way to make this manual better we d love to hear from you Please send mail to docs redhat com Be sure to mention the manual s identifier Inst 5 2 Print RHS 10 98 That way we ll know exactly which version of the guide you have If you have a suggestion try to be as specific as possible when describing it If you ve found an error please include the section number and some of the surrounding text so we can find it easily We may not be able to respond to every message sent to us but you can be sure that we ll be reading them all I Couldn t Have Done it Without Thanks go out to the past authors of this manual A great deal of their work is still here A great big Thank You is also owed to the Red Hat Linux 5 2 development team for putting up with the many xiii xiv Preface questions comments and pleading requests for reviews of this manual Without them I wouldn t be here writing this you wouldn t be there reading this and things wouldn t be nearly as much fun Thanks guys Thanks are also due to all the readers of past Installation Guides that took the time to send corrections suggestions and even the occasional well done I ve tried to incorporate as much of your feedback as possible pagecount and deadlines permitting Keep the feedback coming it s the only way I know whether you re get
87. is a hypertext based system Any highlighted text that appears is a link leading to more information Use to move the cursor to the link and press to follow the link Pressing p returns you to the previous page n moves you to the next page and U goes up one level of documentation To exit info press control x followed by control c The best way to learn how to use info is to read the info documentation on it If you read the first screen that info presents you ll be able to get started 7 2 Help from the Internet Community 7 2 1 Red Hat Mailing Lists If you can t find help for your problem on line and you have WWW access you should see http www redhat com support mailing lists Here you can search the archives of the 7 2 Help from the Internet Community 107 redhat list Many questions have already been answered there The subscription addresses for our lists follow this format list name request redhat com Simply replace 1ist name with one of the following applixware list axp list blinux list cde list gnome announce gtk list hurricane list linux alert linux security m68k list pam list redhat announce list redhat devel list redhat install list redhat list redhat ppp list rpm list sound list sparc list To subscribe send mail to the address of the list you want to subscribe to with subscribe in the Subject line To unsubscribe send mail to the address of the list you want to unsubscr
88. is similar in structure to the usr directory It has the following subdi rectories which are similar in purpose to those in the usr directory usr local bin l doc 187 188 System Administration ete games include info lib man sbin rT STE The var directory Since the FSSTND requires that you be able to mount usr read only any programs that write log files or need spool or lock directories probably should write them to the var directory The FSSTND says var is for variable data files This includes spool directories and files administrative and log ging data and transient and temporary files The following directories should be subdirectories of var var log catman lib local named nis preserve run lock tmp spool at cron lpd mail mqueue rwho smail uucp news 11 2 Special Red Hat File Locations System log files such as wtmp and lastlog go in var log The var lib directory also con tains the RPM system databases Formatted man pages go in var catman and lock files go in var lock The var spool directory has subdirectories for various systems that need to store data files 11 1 2 usr local in Red Hat Linux In Red Hat Linux the intended use for usr local is slightly different from that specified by the FSSTND The FSSTND says that usr local should be where you store software
89. linux only sees 64 megs of it What is going on and how can I fix it 336 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Answer There are a couple of things that could be causing Linux to not see all your memory On some 386 systems you need to compile your kernel with Limit memory to 16M enabled On most systems the reason is that the BIOS has a limit of how much memory it will tell the OS is present in the machine even though the board can have more Common limits seen with this problem are 16M 32M 64M and 128M To get around this we need to explicitly specify the amount of memory to the kernel at boot time via the mem lt actual memory goes here gt flag In the following example we have a 32M machine but only 16M are being seen by Linux At the LILO prompt we type LILO linux mem 32M After the machine boots we use the free command to see if the larger amount of memory was recog nized by the kernel If so we can add an append line to the etc 1ilo conf file and rerun lilo to make it happen permanently The example from above could look like the following boot dev sda map boot map install boot boot b prompt timeout 50 image boot vmlinuz 2 0 32 label linux root dev sdal initrd boot initrd 2 0 32 img read only append mem 32M Do not forget to run lilo after editing the file E 9 4 Problems with machine speed and large RAM Question Ihave over 64 Megs in my pentium or greater machine however it s
90. make 2 2 based kernel packages available as soon as the kernel has been released For those of you looking for more excitement in your lives this also means that the 2 1 development kernels may also be easily installed 1 2 2 Traffic Shaping Support Red Hat Linux 5 2 also includes both kernel support and utilities for traffic shaping This is great for Internet service providers that need more complete control over their bandwidth utilization If you re interested in this feature make sure you install the shapecfg package you will then be able to run the traffic shaping configuration tool located in sbin shapecfg 1 2 3 Enhanced Sound Support The sndconfig sound configuration utility now recognizes more sound cards as well as the stan dard sound hardware present in SPARC systems 1 2 4 Enhanced Printer Support The printtool printer configuration utility now supports the configuration of NetWare based re mote printers 1 2 5 Updated PCMCIA Support Red Hat Linux 5 2 has updated PCMCIA support Some of the latest PCMCIA cards may now be used New Features Of Red Hat Linux 5 2 1 3 Miscellaneous New Features These new features defy categorization e Window Maker window manager included e Apache 1 3 included e GIMP 1 0 1 included 1 3 1 Window Maker Included The popular Window Maker window manager is now included with Red Hat Linux 5 2 If you re interested in using Window Maker run the script usr X11R6 bin wmaker inst
91. modules are tightly bound to the version of the kernel most modules built from one version of a kernel will not load properly on a system running another kernel version Mount Point The directory under which a filesystem is accessible after being mounted Mount The act of making a filesystem accessible to a system s users Nameserver In TCP IP networking terms a nameserver is a computer that can translate a human readable name such as foo bar com into a numeric address such as 10 0 2 14 Netmask A netmask is a set of four numbers separated by periods Each number is normally represented as the decimal equivalent of an eight bit binary number which means that each number may take any value between 0 all eight bits cleared and 255 all eight bits set Every IP address consist of two parts the network address and the host number The netmask is used to determine the size of these two parts The positions of the bits that are set in the netmask are considered to represent the space reserved for the network address while the bits that are cleared are considered to represent the space set aside for the host number NFS An acronym for Network File System NFS is a method of making the filesystem on a remote system accessible on the local system From a user s perspective an NFS mounted filesystem is indistinguishable from a filesystem on a directly attached disk drive Glossary Operating System A collection of software that
92. mount point of while you may decide that another partition should have a mount point of home size in megs gt is the size of the partition in megabytes You can optionally specify that the partition is growable by adding the grow option Note that making a partition growable does not mean that you can later increase its size Instead a growable partition will be automatically resized to use all available unpartitioned free space after all fixed size partitions have been created Since the amount of unpartitioned free space can vary and you probably want to use it all by tagging partitions as growable you can easily make sure no space is wasted If you have multiple partitions tagged as growable the free space is split evenly among them Note that you can also limit the size of growable partitions with the optional maxsize argument Here s an example of kickstart partitioning in action Let s say you know the smallest disk out of a set of machines you plan to kickstart install is 1GB You d like to use the same kickstart file You could use the following partitioning scheme zerombr no clearpart all part size 250 part swap size 50 part usr size 500 grow maxsize 800 part tmp size 100 grow When defined this way the installation program will first clear all partitions It will then set up a 250MB root filesystem followed by a 50MB swap partition Next the installation program will create H 3 The Ki
93. ne treport 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown 209 etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg lt interface name gt letc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg interface name clone name The first file defines an interface while the second file contains only the parts of the definition that are different in a clone or alternative interface For example the network numbers might be different but everything else might be the same so only the network numbers would be in the clone file while all the device information would be in the base ifcfg file The items that can be defined in an ifcfg file depend on the interface type The following values are common to all base files e DEVICE name where name is the name of the physical device except dynamically allocated PPP devices where it is the logical name e IPADDR addr where addr is the IP address e NETMASK mask where mask is the netmask value e NETWORKzadar where addr is the network address e BROADCAST addr where addr is the broadcast address e GATEWAYzaddr where addr is the gateway address e ONBOOTzanswer where answer is one of the following yes This device should be activated at boot time no This device should not be activated at boot time e USERCTL answer where answer is one of the following yes Non root users are allowed to control this device no Non root users are not allowed to control this device e BOOTPROTO proto where prot
94. of the RPC mechanism This portmapper supports hosts allow deny type access control ppp Version 2 3 5 275K This is the daemon and documentation for PPP support It requires a kernel greater than 2 0 which is built with PPP support The default Red Hat kernels include PPP support as a module sendmail Version 8 8 7 553K B Sendmail is a Mail Transport Agent which is the program that moves mail from one machine to another Sendmail implements a general internetwork mail routing facility featuring aliasing and forwarding automatic routing to network gateways and flexible configuration If you need the ability to send and receive mail via the internet you ll need sendmail squid Version 1 1 22 919K Squid is a high performance proxy caching server for web clients supporting FTP gopher and HTTP data objects Unlike traditional caching software Squid handles all requests in a single non blocking I O driven process Squid keeps meta data and especially hot objects cached in RAM caches DNS lookups supports non blocking DNS lookups and implements negative caching of failed requests If you are tight on memory check out the NOVM version of this package C 9 Networking Squid supports SSL extensive access controls and full request logging By using the lightweight In ternet Cache Protocol Squid caches can be arranged in a hierarchy or mesh for additional bandwidth savings Squid consists of a main server pr
95. of hardware supported by Red Hat Linux SPARC can be found at Red Hat Software s World Wide Web site at http www redhat com hardware The following list is current as of the time this manual was produced e sun4c architecture machines IPC SS1 etc 354 Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC sun4m architecture machines Classic S55 SS10 etc bwtwo cg3 cg6 TCX framebuffers 24 bit on the TCX cg14 framebuffer in cg3 mode SCSI and Ethernet on all of the above type 4 and type 5 keyboards and mice external SCSI drives CD ROM drives external and internal SCSI Ether SBUS expansion cards Any original equipment Sun monitor for the above framebuffers Unsupported Hardware The following list contains hardware that is currently unsupported VME based sun4m machines such as the 4 690 SPARC 5 Model 170 machines sun4d 551000 SS2000 sun4u UltraSparcl UltraSparc2 EnterPrise UltraSparc servers sun4 architecture Eurocard sun4c machines called the sun4e under Solaris2 4 and others are not supported These are VME bus sun4c machines to which the kernel has not been ported yet The following types of CD ROMs are unsupported for more information on CD ROM com patibility issues please visit http saturn tlug org suncdfag All NEC models Some Toshiba XM 4101B revisions Toshiba XM 3201B AppleCD 300 Plus on older SPARC PROM Apple CD600i F2 Installation Overview 355 F2 Installation Overvi
96. old e cp usr src linux arch i386 boot zImage boot vmlinuz e edit etc lilo conf e run sbin lilo You can begin testing your new kernel by rebooting your computer and watching the messages to ensure your hardware is detected properly 199 200 System Administration 11 6 2 Making an initrd image An initrd image is needed for loading your SCSI module at boot time The shell script sbin mkinitrd can build a proper initrd image for your machine if the following conditions are met e The loopback block device is available e The etc conf modules file has a line for your SCSI adapter for example alias scsi hostadapter BusLogic To build the new initrd image run sbin mkinitrd with parameters such as this sbin mkinitrd boot newinitrd image 2 0 12 where boot newinitrd image is the file to use for your new image and 2 0 12 is the kernel whose modules from 1ib modules should be used in the initrd image not necessarily the same as the version number of the currently running kernel 11 6 3 Building a monolithic kernel To build a monolithic kernel you follow the same steps as building a modularized kernel with a few exceptions e When configuring the kernel only answer Yes and No to the questions don t make anything modular e Omit the steps make modules make modules install e Edit the file etc rc d rc sysinit and comment out the line depmod a by inserting a 4 at the beginning of the line 11
97. os comp os For questions comp os linux comp os linux linux linux announce answers advocacy development apps 310 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ comp os linux development system comp os linux hardware comp os linux m68k comp os linux misc comp os linux networking comp os linux prog comp os linux setup comp os linux x E 5 General Questions E 5 1 How can I get Red Hat Linux Question Iam looking to acquire a copy of Red Hat Linux How can I do this Is there more than one way to do this Answer Red Hat Linux is available on CD directly from Red Hat Software or from various Red Hat Linux resellers it is also available via FTP from many sites around the world See Sections E 4 on page 308 and E 12 1 on page 351 E 5 2 How dol get new updates to Red Hat as they happen Question Ihave a problem with a package I would like to see if an update to that package has been made available from Red Hat Where can I look for this Answer Keep your eye on the Red Hat Linux Errata See Section E 2 on page 307 Also check the cont rib directory on our FTP mirrors for packages that users have contributed We also make periodic announcements to the redhat announce list mailing list E 5 General Questions 311 E 5 3 Are mailing lists available for Red Hat Linux Question Iam looking for other people who use Red Hat Linux so that I can discuss a problem I would l
98. own nameserver to speed up name resoultions net tools Version 1 46 190K This is a collection of the basic tools necessary for setting up networking on a Linux machine It 261 262 Package List includes ifconfig route netstat rarp and some other minor tools nfs server clients Version 2 2beta37 10K This package contains client programs that interact with NFS servers It is not needed to mount NFS volumes At the moment the only program in it is showmount which can be used to show exported and mounted filesystems tcp wrappers Version 7 6 242K With this package you can monitor and filter incoming requests for the SYSTAT FINGER FTP TEL NET RLOGIN RSH EXEC TFTP TALK and other network services C 9 2 Daemons This section lists packages that provide various network related daemons Daemons are programs that are run automatically to perform various system functions am utils Version 6 0a16 1 978K Am utils is the next generation of the popular BSD Automounter Amd Am utils includes many additional updates ports programs features bug fixes and more Amd is the Berkeley automount daemon It has the ability to automatically mount filesystems of all types including NFS filesystems CD ROM s and local drives and unmount them when they are not being used any more The default setup allows you to cd net hostname and get a list of directories exported from that host
99. package list We hope you ll agree You may also notice that some packages have different versions and that packages listed here are not mentioned in the installation program and vice versa Any differences in package versions are normally due to the normal bug fixing process It s possible that missing or extra packages are the result of last minute changes prior to pressing CDROMs Also note that all the packages in the Base group and subgroups are always installed therefore you will not see them mentioned explicitly during the installation process Using the Package List After Installation This list can come in handy even after you ve installed Red Hat Linux You can use it search for documentation Here s how 1 Find the package in this list 2 Note the package name The very first thing listed in bold at the start of each package descrip tion 3 Enter the following command taking care to enter the package name exactly as it is shown in the list the package name is case sensitive rpm qd package name Replacing package name with the actual name of the package of course If you installed the package you should get a list of filenames Each file contains documentation relating to the package you specified Here are some of the types of filenames you ll see e usr man something n This is a man page You can view it by using the man command for example man something You might also need to include t
100. packaged by Red Hat are installed into usr src redhat by default 342 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Rebuilding and improving on rpms is beyond the scope of this answer The book Maximum RPM and the man pages are good sources of information on this E 9 14 Failure mounting CD ROMS Question Linux recognizes my CDROM but when I try to mount it I get mount failed What do I do Answer If your system was installed properly simply typing mount mnt cdrom should work If it does not you must edit your etc fstab file Here is an example of entry in etc fstab For more details see the fstab man page ie man fstab CD ROM device directory filesystem type and options dev hdc mnt cdrom iso9660 noauto ro 0 0 To find out what the CD ROM device is type dmesg less and scan it for information regarding your CD ROM If you wish to mount the CD ROM without adding this to your etc fstab mount t iso9660 dev hdc mnt cdrom E 9 15 Booting Linux from floppy Question Ihave Linux installed on an IDE drive and for whatever reason I need to boot from floppy How can I boot my system from the install floppy Answer If you have installed Linux onto an IDE hard drive you can boot from the installation floppy using the following method Insert the installation floppy and restart the machine At the boot prompt type the following vmlinuz root dev hdXY Example vmlinuz root dev hdb5 E 9 System Adm
101. packages that contain a variety of Linux related information There is a lot of good information here unless you are low on disk space you should install these packages Note how ever that you probably don t need all the HOWTO packages in most cases howto and howto html will probably suffice faq Version 5 2 1 116K This is a package of the Frequently Asked Questions FAQ about Linux from sunsite unc edu It is one of the best sources of information about Linux gimp manual Version 1 0 0 17 979K This is release 1 0 0 of the GIMP User s Manual GUM This is the first stable release of the manual a product of almost a year of work It is available in HTML PS PDF and FM FrameMaker source code Please read COPYING for the license terms of the manual The manual is about 590 pages long and there have been several imporvments over previous ver sions Be sure to pay special attention to the new Gallery chaper which contains many nice images and a hints on how to make them The Gallery is a good example of what you can do with the GIMP All images in the manual is 100 pure GIMP images The HTML version is suitable for online manual PS and PDF are suitable if you want to print it on a regular printer or have a nice looking online manual The FM source code is only useful if you want to contribute to the Graphic Documentation Project Submissions to the GIMP User s manual will follow under the license agreement in the COPYING
102. partitioning your hard drive e Helping you get through the installation process Getting any supported hardware necessary for installation recognized by the installation program See http www redhat com hardware Assisting with the creation of a root and swap partition using the free space available on your hard drive Using the installation program to configure LILO to boot Red Hat Linux and one other operating system such as DOS Windows 95 or Windows NT already residing on your hard drive e Assisting with final configuration tasks such as The successful configuration of the X window system on supported hardware using either the Metro X or XFree86 software Additional configuration such as automatically starting X on reboot or changing customizing window managers is your responsibility Configuring a printer connected directly to the Red Hat Linux system enabling it to print text Setting up a mouse to be used with the text based console or with the X window system Getting access to the CD ROM so that information can be read from it Naturally although our installation support service will get your system running Red Hat Linux there are many other optional tasks that you might want to undertake such as compiling a cus tomized kernel adding support for devices not included in the installation process and so on For assistance with these tasks please consider the many books on Linux at your loc
103. placed in usr sbin Local only system administration binaries should be placed into usr local sbin At a minimum the following programs should be in sbin clock getty init update mkswap swapon swapoff halt reboot shutdown fdisk fsck mkfs lilo arp ifconfig route 11 1 Filesystem Structure The usr Directory The usr directory is for files that are shareable across a whole site The usr directory usually has its own partition and it should be mountable read only The following directories should be subdirectories of usr usr X11R6 bin dict doc re games include info lib local man sbin share SEC The X11R6 directory is for the X Window System XFree86 on Red Hat Linux bin is for executables doc is for random non man page documentation etc is for site wide configuration files include is for C header files info is for GNU info files lib is for libraries man is for man pages sbin is for system administration binaries those that do not belong in sbin and src is for source code The usr local Directory The FSSTND says The usr local hierarchy is for use by the system administrator when installing soft ware locally It needs to be safe from being overwritten when the system software is updated It may be used for programs and data that are shareable amongst a group of machines but not found in usr The usr local directory
104. problem goes away Also try swapping memory around in the motherboard slots to see if it is either slot or memory related The premier site on the net for this problem can be found at http www bitwizard nl sigll Answer Filipe Custsdio reported the following as a solution from upgrading 4 2 and earlier releases to 5 1 I had a repeating sig 11 problem whenever I tried to upgrade my Redhat 42 to 5 1 The problem was not with my hardware but with my RPM database A simple rpm rebuilddb solved it To best accomplish this you will should download the latest version of RPM from ftp ftp redhat com pub redhat updates Boot into your older version of linux Log in as root upgrade to the new version of RPM you downloaded and then rebuild the RPM database rpm Uvh rpm rpm rebuilddb E 6 Installation 321 E 6 12 Is there a Live Filesystem with the Red Hat CD ROM Question I would like to be able to use the live file system on the cdrom to boot Answer Red Hat Linux no longer supports the Live boot feature due to the change to a modular kernel Because of this change booting from read only file system is not practical The cdrom does contain data in its live section that can be executed in rescue mode but one needs to set the PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH environment variables E 6 13 Installing Linux and NT Question I have NT and would like to install Linux but I have heard there are problems with booting both OS s
105. queue It manages both local print ers and remote printers Windows SMB and NetWare NCP printers can also be configured procinfo Version 14 41K procinfo is a package to allow you to get useful information from proc proc is the kernel filesys tem This is a place you can go to acquire information from your running kernel procps Version 1 2 9 210K 5 A package of utilities which report on the state of the system including the states of running pro cesses amount of memory available and currently logged in users psacct Version 6 3 80K The tools necessary for accounting the activities of processes are included here psmisc Version 17 41K B This package contains programs to display a tree of processes find out what users have a file open and send signals to processes by name C 11 Utilities 281 quota Version 1 55 80K 8 Quotas allow the system administrator to limit disk usage by a user and or group per filesystem This package contains the tools which are needed to enable modify and update quotas raidtools Version 0 51beta6 115K Raidtools description rhbackup Version 0 2 29K rhbackup is a backup utility that can be used for local and remote backups This should be considered alpha quality software and should be used with care rhmask Version 1 0 9K rhmaskR is intended to allow the distribution of files as masks against other files This lets new ve
106. quick overview of the major sections in most man pages 104 Finding Documentation Name The name of the program or programs documented in the man page There may be more than one name if the programs are closely related Synopsis An overview of the program s command syntax showing all options and argu ments Description A short description of the program s function Options A list of all options with a short description of each often combined with the previous section See Also If present lists the names of other programs that are related in some way to this program Files If present contains a list of files that are used and or modified by the program History If present indicates important milestones in the program s development e Authors The people that wrote the program If you are new to Linux don t expect to be able to use man pages as tutorials they are meant as concise reference material Trying to learn about Linux using the man pages is similar to trying to learn how to speak English from reading a dictionary But there are other sources of information that may be more useful to those people just starting out with Linux let s continue our search for documentation 7 1 2 Package Documentation Many packages have README files and other documentation as part of the source package Pack ages built for Red Hat Linux define a standard place to install those documents so that y
107. related code bind devel Version 8 1 2 230K All the include files and the library required for DNS development for bind 8 x x C 9 4 News This section lists packages related to Usenet news inews Version 1 7 2 47K The inews program is used by some news readers to post news It does some consistency checking and header reformatting and forwards the article on to the news server specified in inn conf C 9 5 Utilities This section lists packages that provide handy utilities related to networking bind utils Version 8 1 2 471K Collection of utilities for querying name servers and looking up hosts These tools let you determine the IP addresses for given host names and find information about registered domains and network addresses bootpc Version 061 35K B w bootpc is the bootp client for Linux that will allow a linux machine to retrieve it s networking infor mation from a server via the network It sends out a general broadcast asking for the information which is returned comanche Version 0 6a 189K Comanche stands for COnfiguration MANager for apaCHE It is a front end for the Apache Config uration Server Project Apache is the most popular fast reliable Web server on the internet You can C 9 Networking find more about Apache at www apache org This package is working with RCS to provide you with accurate history of the changes for the apache config files dip Version 3 3 70
108. riores 244 jo 280 portmap i dated chang ha Rd Re Ks 264 postgresql coeeececeetes eere ee n teh stele 230 postgresql lt clientS oooooccccoccccccooooroccos 230 postgresql data ooooococccccccoccccccccnonoos 230 posteresgladevel aio oia rs 250 INDEX OF PACKAGES joe cT 264 Printtool EE 280 PLC E 280 procmail MT 243 PEO a 280 procps ATl id 294 PPSACCE aed acer AAA a 280 Susi uses etus eo 280 PWD isis scutes O vini snsas 242 pythonz s cecessd sca ee ea aaepe HERR pared 247 pythornsdevel i sert he tSv gora 247 python docs eene edet ree d tinea 247 PYTHONS ceci serere eer ree rae Ra 250 UOC exitio cde teet dtc tue Seat ta inire 281 raidtools oec e ere et mt 281 TOS sencPreyv v 4 uc av ve Ws teehee c Y rs 252 CE 267 sin 268 readlme iere petii cercerembe i erbe ENTES 260 readlne devel err ko cree h e heredes 250 redhat tel aSe coordenadas 242 IP bie a qan Elide eb nde eed e 286 ThbACkUP ssp ini 281 rhl alpha install addend en 256 rhl install euide en 4 ee rre dens 256 rl mask vesical 281 rhs iwdan ista etes aa 281 zhis printfiltets ouo stel mainte RET UMORE ds 281 PASO NP 281 punc e PPM IM E 281 fOOtles iva dev Vinh eT EY av us 242 Pot invasor 269 iji E 281 rpm deyel eran head 250 c M HO Saat aoe 269 IS INC cuis doo ira ii 236 TUS ciao cio wa T iii 269 alla Snrerocretalpetiubedndbretas 269 IM 269 DN a ct aditu ded 294
109. sereer specication Route snd gateways Cira lts aher routes Ep petearke gher routes bo hosts routes to altem ote local re the muted ds man Hori nane search path Hetero Inform abion E ran PX merce eup PPP SLIPIPLIP mamar pks Espen fle zurjeme HFS F aima far viriusi hosts UCF dnt to uris capyl LLL device and radar zx Fer do le dl hajr Wall delivery mejan deere Basic basic imanam special domain ruling Figure 8 17 PPP SLIP PLIP Configurations Screen between PPP SLIP and PLIP PPP is the most commonly used interface and is the default To set up a PPP connection select PPP and hit Accept You ll see the following fields e Phone number number used to access to remote system Modem port indicates where your modem is Should already be set Use PAP authentication checkbox check if you know that the system you are dialing into requires this Login name your login name for the PPP account Password your password for the PPP account PRY Pip comiguratians Comigurabio re zur so xo 139 140 System Configuration Herbworki ng Cieri tyk Basic host information PRESI configurations Typa of ivtariaca pap Hare persa rgsciicxian Routing and qateawyn se BLIP Defeats PLUR ahe raus m nets ther routes m hosts ra utes to berate local re the majed daemon Hasi name peanch path Herbwork Information arder FEX merce riug PPF SLIP PLIF Tamar sks
110. server was installed and I am left back at a shell prompt What could be wrong Answer When you get an error about no servers installed you should check to see if first the correct X server was installed and that the correct links have been set If you are using the latest Red Hat packages you will be using the xserver wrapper as a method to protect against various security problems usr X11R6 bin X should be a symbolic link to xserver wrapper and etc X11 X should be a symbolic link to the card specific X server that you use for example XF86 SVGA Here s an example of how you might create these symbolic links as root cd usr X11R6 bin ln sf xserver wrapper X cd etc X11 ln sf usr X11R6 bin XF86_SVGA X This should set the symbolic links correctly for your system E 8 X Window System E 8 2 Starting X only get grey screen Question When I start X all I see is a grey background and a X cursor Answer One of the most common reasons is that you are not using the correct command to start the X server The best command to start the X windows system is startx If you are using this command and only the gray screen is coming up there can be some other explanations First are you waiting long enough Due to either the speed of the processor the amount of memory less than 16 megs of ram or network problems it may take up to 6 minutes before X windows is fully operational In most cases this is an i
111. shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt gt Group definition 4 Select Add 5 Enter the Group name and optionally alternate members 6 Select Accept Creating a Group General Overview To create a new group e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt Group definition If you have more than 15 groups you will be given the option to select the groups by providing a prefix You may add a group directly from this screen or move on to the User groups screen To move on select choiceAccept with or without a prefix to add a new group hit choiceAdd Select Add at the bottom of the User groups screen 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 127 Users accounts Fiia erai Normal User accounts Tha liat of racosBs la lora D you Group dafiniions may want t fer a bi by providing Changa meni gaiciwond a prabe to bhach An ampi pra maana do show Special accounts al sacenda PPP gc court SLIP accaunts via nana lc ens pret UUCP accounts POP accaunts iria anh Anrepi Cancel And Virtual POP accaunti iral Emaii aiiai iar ial dd rh naa timan dear ler Paititi Pao amp account pale Bamlabig user shells Aualabie PPP hell rallado SLIP shells Wissen di tri day Fig stare Ipcud dus mts sDiuneg mer i Figure 8 11 Group Filter Screen Enter a group name You ma
112. soundcard XGetfile is a versatile file browser made for use in shell scripts xbanner Version 1 31 648K XBanner displays text patterns and images on the root window This allows users to customize both their normal X background and the background used on xdm style login screens xearth Version 1 0 188K Xearth displays a pseudo 3D globe that rotates to show the earth as it actually is including markers for major cities and Red Hat Software xfishtank Version 2 0 385K Enjoy an animated aquarium background on your screen with a variety of tropical fish swimming in it C 12 X11 287 xsnow Version 1 40 28K A continual gentle snowfall is accompanied by Santa Claus flying his sleigh around your screen Don t forget to shake the snow off those windows every now and then C 12 2 Applications This section lists packages containing various applications that run under X ImageMagick Version 4 1 0 2 427K ImageMagick is an image display conversion and manipulation tool It runs under X windows It is very powerful in terms of it s ability to allow the user to edit images It can handle many different formats as well gimp Version 1 0 1 7 347K The GIMP is an image manipulation program suitable for photo retouching image composition and image authoring Many people find it extremely useful in creating logos and other graphics for web pages The GIMP has many of the tools and filters you
113. starts to install packages A win 4 10 Selecting and Installing Packages 63 Bei Lot bons Appl ications B Size oF all selected padksesr SIH FD IE E FE aed deer ete ESI Figure 4 18 Selecting Packages dow entitled Install Status is displayed with the following information Package The name of the package currently being installed Size The size of the package in kilobytes Summary A short description of the package eae Installation Progress Bar A bar showing how complete the current package installa ion is Statistics Section This section has three rows labeled Total Completed and Remaining As you might guess these rows contain statistics on the total number of packages that will be installed statistics on the number of packages that have been completely installed and statistics on the packages that have not yet been installed The information tracked on these three rows includes Packages The number of packages Bytes The size Time The amount of time Overall Progress Bar This bar changes color showing how close to completion the entire instal lation is If you re doing an FTP installation a message box will pop up as each package is retrieved from the FIP site 64 Continuing the Installation Uri lad Repairs bes Some oF the packages uod ho selected to inctall require packagar you hraa nat selected EF uou just select OK all oF thora required packegar will b
114. tation libpng devel Version 1 0 1 332K The header files and static libraries are only needed for development of programs using the PNG library libstdc devel Version 2 8 0 1 090K This is the GNU implementation of the standard C libraries This package includes the header files and libraries needed for C development libtiff devel Version 3 4 1 372K 249 250 Package List This package is all you need to develop programs that manipulate tiff images libungif devel Version 3 0 237K Libraries and headers needed for developing programs that use libungif to load and save gif image files ncurses devel Version 4 2 6 418K This package includes the header files and libraries necessary to develop applications that use ncurses newt devel Version 0 30 116K These are the header files and libraries for developing applications which use newt Newt is a win dowing toolkit for text mode which provides many widgets and stackable windows postgresql devel Version 6 3 2 1 000K This package contains header files and libraries required to compile applications that are talking directly to the PostgreSOL backend server pythonlib Version 1 22 236K MWO This package contains code used by a variety of Red Hat programs It includes code for multifield listboxes and entry widgets with non standard keybindings among others readline devel Version 2 2 1 255K The rea
115. the usr sbin mouseconfig command 5 2 Configuring X Windows After setting up your mouse if you installed the X Windows packages you will have the opportunity to configure your X server If you did not choose to install the X Window System you may skip to Section 5 3 on page 68 5 2 Configuring X Windows 67 Which rarial part iz your sours ometaj to der CHI under B Adra d under B Adra UDUHd under Bas Tan Paese o cn Figure 5 2 Serial Mouse Port Selection 5 2 1 Configuring an XFree86 Server If you wish to use XFree86 the installation program launches the Xconfigurator utility Xconfigurator first probes your system in an attempt to determine what type of video card you have Failing that Xconfigurator will present a list of video cards Select your video card from the list and press Enter If your video card does not appear on the list XFree86 may not support it However if you have technical knowledge about your card you may choose Unlisted Card and attempt to configure it by matching your card s video chipset with one of the available X servers Once you have selected your video card the installation program installs the appropriate XFree86 server and Xconfigurator presents a list of monitors If your monitor appears on the list select it and press Enter Otherwise select Custom If you do select Custom Xconfigurator prompts you to select the horizontal sync range and vertical sync range of your monitor
116. the Red Hat Linux installation tree instead of a CD enter the directory which contains the RedHat directory For example if your NFS server contains the directory mirrors redhat i386 RedHat enter mirrors redhat i386 After a short delay the next dialog box will appear Turn to Chapter 4 on page 43 to continue in stalling Red Hat Linux 3 4 6 Installing From a Hard Drive If you are going to install Red Hat Linux from a locally attached hard drive highlight hard drive and select OK Before you started the installation program you must first have copied all the necessary files to a 41 Starting the Installation Please enter the follwing inforsstbonr 0 the ns or P nusber of our APS sere a ta directory an that arar cambainir Red Hst Lir For our eh bsoturs APS secum mas Pad Hat directory Ct Laos ear elemen Figure 3 11 Installing via NFS partition on a locally attached hard drive If you haven t done this yet please refer to Section 2 4 6 on page 18 Installing from a hard drive requires the supplemental diskette when you are directed to please insert it in your computer s diskette drive and select OK A progress bar will be displayed as the supplemental diskette is loaded Next turn to Chapter 4 on the next page and follow the directions there 3 4 7 Installing via FTP If you are going to install Red Hat Linux from an FTP site highlight FTP and select OK FTP installations require the supplemental
117. the installation classes please refer to section 2 6 on page 19 1 1 2 Improved Installation Guide The Red Hat Linux 5 2 Installation Guide has been improved with e Additional Linuxconf Documentation Chapter 8 contains more in depth descriptions of using Linuxconf to configure your Red Hat Linux system e Improved Installation Chapters The chapters covering the installation of Red Hat Linux have been expanded to include more detailed information in a more streamlined form e Glossary Appendix G contains a glossary of words some people might find confusing e All New FAQ Appendix E contains a newly updated set of frequently asked questions If you run into problems before or after the installation check it out 1 1 3 Support for Multiple SCSI Adapters The Red Hat Linux 5 2 installation program now supports systems with more than one SCSI adapter 1 1 4 Disk Druid Supported on All Platforms Disk Druid is now supported on the SPARC and Alpha versions of Red Hat Linux 1 2 System Administration Related Enhancements Red Hat Linux 5 2 has these features for system administrators e Linux 2 2 ready e Traffic shaping support 1 2 System Administration Related Enhancements e Enhanced sound support e Enhanced printer support e Updated PCMCIA support 1 2 1 Linux 2 2 Ready Red Hat Linux 5 2 has been engineered to be ready for the latest stable kernel version 2 2 x when it is finally released Red Hat Software will
118. the machine seems to hang when it reaches certain processes like sendmail apache or SMB there is probably a network problem The most common cause is that Linux can not look up the name of the machine you have called the box if you set up networking to have a machine name The machine is currently paused waiting for the network timeout of DNS lookups and will eventually bring up the login prompt Login in as root and check the usual culprits for a problem If you are directly on a network with a DNS server make sure the file etc resolv conf has the correct values for your machine s DNS server Check with your systems administrator that the values are correct If you are using Linux on a network without a DNS server or this box is going to be the DNS server then you will need to edit the etc hosts file to have the hostname and IP address so that the lookups will occur correctly The format of the etc host s file is 127 0 0 1 localhost localhost localdomain 192 168 200 1 mymachine mymachine mynetwork net Where the example machine is called mymachine E 10 Network Administration 349 E 10 2 Upgrade problems with Sendmail and 5 x Question Ihave upgraded to 5 x and sendmail is no longer relaying email like it used to What is going on Answer Due to various email spammers using unknowing Red Hat boxes as email relayers and some other problems we have turned this off by default in 5 x You can add the names of systems that yo
119. then prints a succession of hash marks as the package is installed as a sort of progress meter Installing packages is designed to be simple but you can get a few errors Package Already Installed If the package is already installed you will see rpm ivh foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo package foo 1 0 1 is already installed error foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm cannot be installed If you really want to install the package anyway you can use replacepkgs on the command line which tells RPM to ignore the error rpm ivh replacepkgs foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo HEHE HET EH EE EH AE FE FE AE FE FE HEE EEE EEE EE TA Conflicting Files If you attempt to install a package that contains a file that has already been installed by another packages you ll see rpm ivh foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo usr bin foo conflicts with file from bar 1 0 1 error foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm cannot be installed To cause RPM to ignore that error use replacefiles on the command line rpm ivh replacefiles foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo FE AE AE FE AE HET FE AE FE AE EEE FE FE HEE HEE EEE FE AE EE HEH 168 Package Management with RPM Unresolved Dependency RPM packages can depend on other packages which means that they require other packages to be installed in order to run properly If you try to install a package for which there is such an unresolved dependency you ll see rpm ivh bar 1 0 1 i386 rpm failed dependencies foo is needed by bar 1 0 1
120. then turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 SMB Turn to Section 4 7 on page 57 follow the instructions there then turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 45 46 Continuing the Installation 4 3 SCSI Support After you choose the appropriate installation class the installation program will probe your sys tem for SCSI adapters In some cases the installation program will ask you whether you have any SCSI adapters If you choose Yes the following dialog presents a list of SCSI drivers Choose the driver that most closely resembles your SCSI adapter The installation program then gives you an opportunity to specify options for the SCSI driver you selected most SCSI drivers should detect your hardware automatically however 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux At this point it s necessary to let the installation program know where it should install Red Hat Linux This is done by defining mount points for one or more disk partitions in which Red Hat Linux will be installed You may also need to create and or delete partitions at this time Please Note If you have not yet planned how you will set up your partitions please turn to Sec tion 2 7 on page 21 and review everything up to Section 2 8 on page 28 As a bare minimum you ll need an appropriately sized root partition and a swap partition of at least 16 MB The installation program then presents a dialog box that allows you to choose from two disk parti tioning tools see Figure 4 3 on
121. there are several such books on the market Red Hat sells the Linux Complete Command Reference This book contains the man page entries for hundreds of commands system calls and file formats all formatted for easy reading Best of all there is a comprehensive index and a searchable version of the book on CD ROM A book like this is invaluable for Finding the right command for a particular task Learning how to use that command properly e Task oriented information Many times you ll find that you d like to configure your Red Hat Linux system in a certain way but you re not sure where to begin In this case it s often a big help to see what others in similar circumstances have done This is where the Linux Documentation Project also known as the LDP can come in handy Each of their HOWTOs document a particular aspect of Linux from low level kernel esoterica to using Linux in an amateur radio station If you selected one of the various howto packages when you installed Red Hat Linux you ll find the HOWTOs on your system in usr doc HOWTO If on the other hand you d like a printed version of these documents Red Hat Software sells Linux Undercover which is a compendium of the most popular LDP documents 6 1 3 Documentation For Linux Gurus If you re a long time Red Hat Linux user you probably already know that the following pretty much says it all when it comes to documentation Use the Force Read the source There a
122. to effectively use your Red Hat Linux system after the installation Make sure you have access to the Red Hat Linux components required for installation Make sure you know your computer s hardware configuration and networking information Decide based on the first two tasks what method you will use to install Red Hat Linux NIP OM Determine where on your hard drive s Red Hat Linux will reside Let s start by making sure you have the documentation you ll need after you install Red Hat Linux Before You Begin 2 1 Getting Documentation Red Hat Linux is a powerful full featured operating system Unless you re a Linux wizard you re going to need documentation to make the most of your Red Hat Linux system Everyone should review Chapter 7 on page 101 for more information on available Linux documentation While many people find the resources described in chapter 7 to be very helpful people who are just starting to use Linux will likely need additional information The information that will be most helpful to you depends on your level of Linux expertise New To Linux If this is your first time using Linux or any Linux like operating system for that matter you ll need solid introductory information on basic Unix concepts For example O Reilly and Associates http www ora com produce a wide variety of Linux and Unix related books Give their more general titles a try Some Linux Experience If you ve used other Linux distri
123. to set up a TFTP server on a Red Hat Linux system simply install the latest tftp package using RPM and make sure the line in inetd conf that will run tftp is uncommented Don t forget to kill HUP inetd if you needed to make any changes to inetd conf Next you ll need to make a symlink describing the SPARC system to be booted and pointing to the file from which it should boot The name of the symlink contains two items 1 The IP address of the system to be booted in hexadecimal 2 A string describing the architecture of the system to be booted To convert the more common dotted decimal IP address into its hex equivalent convert each of the address four groups of numbers into hex If the resulting hex number is only one digit add a leading zero to it Then append all four hex numbers together For example take the IP address 10 0 2 254 Convert each set of four numbers into hex and add a leading zero where necessary 10 A or OA 0 0 or 00 222 or 02 254 FE or FE Therefore the IP address 10 0 2 254 in hex is 0A0002FE If you have perl available on a system you can use the following command modified to include your system s IP address of course to have your IP address converted for you perl e printf 02x x4 in 10 0 2 254 0a0002fe Here we ve had perl convert 10 0 2 254 for us The second part of the symlink name is the SPARC system s architecture For our example we ll use SUNAM The IP
124. unusual to see nameservers referred to as primary secondary tertiary and so on down the list if more than one is specified Each of these must be an IP address and not a name The computer has no way to re solve the name until it connects to a nameserver Screamingly obvious when stated but occasionally overlooked when people are simply asked to supply an address for a computer In addition to a default domain you can also specify search domains Search domains work differ ently they progress from one to six in a similar manner to the nameserver However they all take precedence over the default domain Keep this in mind when specifying search domains Search domains are not commonly used The one item not yet covered is the checkbox for DNS usage If you are running a small private net work with no Internet connection then using etc hosts files and keeping them all synchronized will work As you add more and more machines the complexity increases until it is easier to have a single machine run a DNS than to continue to sync etc hosts files There is another reason for not using DNS and that is if your network is going to use NIS instead Note that NIS can be used in conjunction with DNS So to sum it all up unless you know why using etc hosts or NIS would be best for your situation DNS is probably going to be your best choice You can add modify or delete entries from the etc hosts file using linuxconf Open gt Networking
125. user blarg decides they need to do something as root blarg bigdog blarg su Password root bigdog blarg As you can see after issuing the su command the user is prompted for a password the root pass word After it s been entered correctly the usual shell prompt is displayed But if you look closely you ll note that the shell prompt is different For one it starts with root indicating that the current user has changed The other difference is the prompt s ending character which changed from a dol lar sign to a pound sign This is a traditional way of indicating whether a shell is running as root or not 89 90 What Do Do Now It s also possible to use su to become another user To do this run su giving only the user s account name So to become user blarg one need only issue the command su blarg If you ran su from your own account you ll need to enter the other user s password in our example user blarg s pass word would be required However if you were already root no password is required as it would be somewhat redundant You ll find that su will come in handy particularly if you like most Linux users act as your own system administrator 6 2 4 Shutting Down Your Red Hat Linux System When you re done using your Red Hat Linux system you ll need to shut it down However this is a bit more involved than simply pressing the power switch Here s why Even though you may not be running any pr
126. video card or the autoprobe will fail If you think you installed the wrong X server for your video card you will have to install the correct one before it can be configured For instance if the CD is mounted on mnt cdrom and you need to install the S3 server enter the following commands cd mnt cdrom RedHat RPMS rpm ivh XFree86 583 3 1 2 1 1386 rpm In sf usr Xl1R6 bin XF86 S3 etc X11 X This will install the S3 server and make the proper symbolic link Xconfigurator To configure X Windows you must first select your video card Scroll down the list of supported cards until you locate the card in your machine Figure 6 1 may help you determine the video server that matches your hardware If your card is not listed it may not be supported by XFree86 In this case you can try the last card entry on the list Unlisted Card or a commercial X Windows server The next step is to select your monitor If your monitor is not listed you can select one of the generic monitor entries or Custom and enter your own parameters Custom monitor configuration is rec ommended only for those who have a sound understanding of the inner workings of CRT displays The average user should probably use one of the generic selections from the list After selecting a monitor you need to tell Xconfigurator how much video memory you have Move the highlight to the appropriate list entry and then press or to continue For the next step it is recom mended th
127. way or can be initiated via the World Wide Web After providing the information for the registration you will have a new menu allowing you to edit your registration information or open a trouble ticket Hurry and login now to open a ticket on the Web http www redhat com support register To open a support ticket via email all you need to do is send the support system a message with a Subject of registration nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn where nann nnnn nnnn nnnn is the registration number of the product for which you are requesting support For example if your regis tration number is fffe Offf ff00 00 the subject line should read Subject registration fffe Offf ff00 ff00 The square brackets the number sign and the word registration must be present If you wish you may add explanatory text to the subject line Subject registration fffe Offf ff00 ff00 CD ROM problem Once you ve opened a ticket support responses come to you with the support ticket number in the subject line 221 222 Getting Technical Support Subject ticket 12015 CD ROM problem To correspond about the same problem simply send a reply with the same subject Subject Re ticket 412015 CD ROM problem If you feel that the problem has been solved the ticket can also be closed by you Simply add c1ose to the same subject Subject Re close ticket 12015 CD ROM problem Once your problem is solved or your question answered the technici
128. which a user is identified to various parts of Red Hat Linux UIDs are numeric although human readable names are stored in the etc passwa file UNIX A set of Linux like operating systems that grew out of an original version written by some guys at a phone company Unmount The act of revoking access to a filesystem Note that the program that unmounts filesys tems is called umount Virtual Console Virtual consoles provides multiple screens on which a user may log in and run programs One screen is displayed on the computer s monitor at any given time a key sequence is used to switch between virtual consoles just kidding thank you Ken Thompson and Dennis Ritchie for your inspired operating system design Glossary Widget A standardized on screen representation of a control that may be manipulated by the user Scroll bars buttons and text boxes are all examples of widgets X Window System Also known as X this graphical user interface provides the well known windows on a desktop metaphor common to most computer systems today Under X application programs act as clients accessing the X server which manages all screen activity In addition client applications may be on a different system than the X server permitting the remote display of the applications graphical user interface XFree86 A free implementation of the X Window System 375 376 Glossary Kickstart Installations Due to the need for automated i
129. will re ceive a mail message containing the complete Errata Also included are URLs to each updated package and diskette image in the Errata By using these URLs you can then download any necessary diskette images Remember to use binary mode when transferring a diskette image For now concentrate only on the Errata entries that include new diskette images the filenames al ways end in img If you find an entry that seems to apply to your problem get a copy of the diskette images and create them using the instructions in Appendix B on page 225 2 3 Things You Should Know In order to prevent any surprises during the installation you should collect some information before attempting to install Red Hat Linux You can find most of this information in the documentation that came with your system or from the system s vendor or manufacturer Please Note The most recent list of hardware supported by Red Hat Linux can be found at Red Hat Software s World Wide Web site at http www redhat com hardware It s a good idea to check your hardware against this list before proceeding 2 3 1 Basic Hardware Configuration You should have a basic understanding of the hardware installed in your computer including e hard drive s Specifically the number size and type If you have more than one it s helpful to know which one is first second and so on It is also good to know if your drives are IDE or SCSI If you have IDE drives you shou
130. world The user field controls access by the user owning the file while the group field controls access by anyone matching the file s group specification As the name implies the world field controls access by everyone else Each field contains the sme set of bits that specify operations that may or may not be performed such as reading writing and executing PLIP Anacronym for Parallel Line Internet Protocol PLIP is a protocol that permits TCP IP com munication over a computer s parallel port using a specially designed designed cable 371 372 Glossary POSIX A somewhat mangled acronym for Portable Operating System Interface A set of standards that grew out of the UNIX operating system Process A process in somewhat simplistic terms can be considered to be one instance of a run ning program on a Linux system PS 2 Mouse A PS 2 mouse gets its name from the original computer in which this type of mouse was first used the IBM PS 2 A PS 2 mouse can be easily identified by the small round connector at the end of its cable RAM An acronym for Random Access Memory RAM is used to hold programs while they are being executed and data while it is being processed RAM is also volatile meaning that information written to RAM will disappear when the computer s power is turned off Reboot To restart the boot process See also Boot Red Hat Software A North Carolina software company Produces and markets sofware for the Linux opera
131. would expect to find in similar commercial offerings and some interesting extras as well The GIMP provides a large image manipulation toolbox including channel operations and layers effects sub pixel imaging and anti aliasing and conversions all with multi level undo This version of The GIMP includes a scripting facility but many of the included scripts rely on fonts that we cannot distribute The GIMP ftp site has a package of fonts that you can install by yourself which includes all the fonts needed to run the included scripts Some of the fonts have unusual li censing requirements all the licenses are documented in the package Get ftp ftp gimp org pub gimp fonts freefonts 0 10 tar gz and ftp ftp gimp org pub gimp fonts sharefonts 0 10 tar gz if you are so inclined Alternatively choose fonts which exist on your system before running the scripts gimp data extras Version 1 0 0 7 825K Patterns gradients etc for gimp This package isn t required but contains lots of goodies for gimp gimp devel Version 1 0 1 268K Static libraries and header files for writing GIMP plugins and extensions gimp libgimp Version 1 0 1 164K Libraries used to communicate between The GIMP and other programs which may function as GIMP plugins gv Version 3 5 8 411K gv allows to view and navigate through PostScript and PDF documents on an X display by provid ing a user interface for the ghostscript interpret
132. x rr fm ete Tata T Gad eae Pee ya ts me ate sd 270 CI Utilities ote eee Eke eS EGOS SAG a hehe t ES 271 CA XII uiuo Re SRS ee Bes RE BONES Pete Gore 286 General Parameters and Modules 301 DA CD ROM parameters sisas qe RE ew de RO RO a us 302 D SCSI parameters 5 23 9 9 a Y Gg ed 9r SEEN Ru Ro ROS EU d 302 D3 Ethernet param t rs 4 4 4 69 doe ne RARE RE LEY ATE 303 CONTENTS vii D 4 Network Module Listing 552i 232284 dco uk e por ee RU a i 304 E RedHatLinux Installation Support FAQ 307 EA Introdiiction 4224 2208 Eo nte ba Rue OUR S be HR SAS EAR ego 307 E2 Errata 2 23 4 25946 84549404 bone d Rx En UR REN Qe E S 307 E3 Contacting Red HatSoftware 22e 308 E4 General Resources List eee 308 E 5 General Questions 310 E 6 Installation 4x 220445 4405 Kee BREE ee eG aa EY ESR RE Be 312 EZ Using Red Hat Linux s srst 5565 Masha GRAUE Eo baad had bee ee OG OS 325 E S XWindow System scs aUe ee bead Bae EES TAGS weed OR EOS we 328 E9 System Administration saso 6 es es br totonde g Errea UY 335 E 10 Network Administration es 348 E 11 Printer Administration 4 25 22 bee eee ee hem eee ee 350 E 12 Appendix Long answers s 2 404 254 464 RR SERRE EA RE EG 351 F Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC 353 El Supported Hardware s lt uw ik GS Gee aw ROG UR OY Rob ERE SON a 353 F2 Installation Overview pa csacsi eres 355 F3 Console Commiands 39e eee a ARE E Yeh EX EE PG E SESS 355 F4 Ramdi
133. you know the machines you ll be kickstart installing have either an Adaptec 1542 or a Buslogic SCSI card you can enter both in the kickstart file But be aware that the installation program uses only the first card found so order the device entries appropriately An example for an ISA 3com Ethernet card would be device ethernet 3c509 opts io 0x330 irq 7 Here s an example line for an Adaptec 1542 SCSI card device scsi ahal54x An example of a SoundBlaster CD ROM might look like this device cdrom opts io 0x240 H 3 The Kickstart File 383 H 3 7 keyboard Keyboard Type The next item you ll need to specify is the correct code for your keyboard type For US keyboards the type is us For the others please run the usr sbin kbdconfig program on an already installed Red Hat Linux system An alternative approach would be to set the keyboard type to us and run kbdconfig on the installed system to set it properly after the installation completes An example of this would be keyboard us H 3 8 Partitioning The hard drive in the machine must be partitioned before Red Hat Linux can be installed In this section we will describe how to specify disk partitioning in the kickstart file H 3 9 zerombr Partition table initialization First if you are installing Red Hat Linux on a new machine you should use the zerombr keyword to clear the current partition information This is a good idea because the partition table on n
134. you should just be able to type wmaker inst When asked for the name of the script to be updated simply press Enter The script will create the necessary files in your login directory Then make sure the new script file is executable by using this command chmod x xinitrc Now the next time you start X you ll be running Window Maker 1 3 2 Apache 1 3 Included Version 1 3 of the popular Apache web server software is included with Red Hat Linux 5 2 1 3 3 GIMP 1 0 1 Included Version 1 0 1 of the GNU Image Manipulation Program GIMP to its friends is included with Red Hat Linux 5 2 Before You Begin While installing Red Hat Linux is a straightforward process taking some time prior to starting the installation can make things go much more smoothly In this chapter we ll discuss the steps that should be performed before you start the installation Please Note If you are currently running a version 2 0 or greater Red Hat Linux system you can perform an upgrade Skim this chapter to review the basic issues relating to installation and read the following chapters in order following the directions as you go The upgrade procedure starts out identically to the installation procedure you will be directed to choose an installation or upgrade after booting the installation program and answering a few questions There are five things you should do prior to installing Red Hat Linux 1 Make sure you have sufficient documentation
135. your system This account gets used from time to time but should only be used when you know there s a need Leaving an unused account around is a target for people who d want to break into your system Deleting it requires you to recreate it every time you want to use it Disabling an account solves both problems by allowing you to simply select or de select a check box To disable an account e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open Config Users accounts gt Normal User accounts e De select the check box that states that The account is enabled Select the choiceAccept button at the bottom of the window and you re all set The account is disabled and can be enabled later using a similar method Enabling a User Account By default all newly created user accounts are enabled If you need to enable an account you can use Linuxconf to do it e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open Config 2 Users accounts gt Normal gt User accounts P Select the account you want to enable Select the The account is enabled check box and then select Accept at the bottom of the screen Deleting a User Account Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Op
136. 0 Version 3 1 1 6 553K This program emulates an IBM 3270 terminal commonly used with mainframe applications in an X window xanim Version 27070 712K Viewer for various animated graphic formats including QuickTime and FLiC xfm Version 1 3 2 680K xfm is a file manager for X windows that allows you to manipulate files and directories in an intuitive easy to understand manner as well as allowing you to extend itself with other programs xgopher Version 1 3 3 277K C 12 X11 Gopher a method of accessing information on the Internet is made easy with this X Windows gopher client Although gopher is less up to date than the WWW Xgopher can still open up a portal to the vast storehouse of information available on the Internet xloadimage Version 4 1 235K Xloadimage displays images in an X11 window loads them onto the root window or writes them into a file Many image types are recognized xmorph Version 1996 07 12 123K xmorph allows you to create fascinating morphs animated changes between two different images and provides the tools to do so in an intuitive and easy to comprehend manner xpaint Version 2 4 9 407K XPaint is a color image editing tool which features most standard paint program options as well as advanced features such as image processing algorithms It allows for the editing of multiple images simultaneously and supp xpdf Version 0 7a 745K Xpdf i
137. 1 a student from Finland began a post to the comp os minix newsgroup with the words Hello everybody out there using minix I m doing a free operating system just a hobby won t be big and professional like gnu for 386 486 AT clones The student was Linus Torvalds and the hobby he spoke of eventually became what we know today as Linux A full featured POSIX like operating system Linux has been developed not just by Linus but by hundreds of programmers around the world The interesting thing about this is that this massive world wide development effort is largely uncoordinated Sure Linus calls the shots where the kernel is concerned but Linux is more than just the kernel There s no management infrastructure a student in Russia gets a new motherboard and writes a driver to support a neat feature the motherboard has A system administrator in Maryland needs backup software writes it and gives it away to anyone that needs it The right things just seem to happen at the right time Preface Another interesting thing is that Linux can be obtained for absolutely no money That s right most of the software is available at no charge to anyone with the time and inclination to download it But not everyone has that much time What is Red Hat Linux Enter a group of programmers based in North Carolina Their goal was to make it easier for people to give Linux a try Like many other such groups their approach was to bundle
138. 1 kb 1024 bytes A size of 0 indicates no limit should be imposed Input Filter Filters convert printed files into a format the printer can handle Press Select to choose the filter which best matches your printer See Figure 8 33 on page 155 In addition to configuring print queues able to print graphical and PostScript output you can configure a text only printer which will only print plain ASCII text Most printer drivers are also able to print ASCII text without converting it to PostScript first simply choose Fast text printing when you configure the filter Please Note This only works for non PostScript printers 153 154 System Configuration e Suppress Headers Check this if you don t want a header page printed at the beginning of each print job For local printers the following information is also required e Printer Device Usually dev 1p1 the name of the port which the printer is attached to Se rial printers are usually on dev ttyS ports Note that you will need to manually configure serial parameters cad Eviter Ende Figure 8 32 Adding a Local Printer For remote printers the dialog box contains additionsl fields fill in the following information e Remote Host Hostname of the remote machine hosting the printer e Remote Queue Name of the queue to print to on the remote machine The remote machine must be configured to allow the local machine to print on the desired queue Typically etc hosts 1pd con
139. 17 PAO onsec idea one 222 how to send questions for 221 how to state problem for 221 ODtaining ssiusseiuitetrevenbeteiesee dg 219 OVEIVIEW ira 217 POS aia 219 Ma iii 220 VA ds 220 via snail mail 66 0 sees 220 Via WWW eee deere otr 220 where to send support request 222 test page Printer nics ioo se cete es Rena 155 TFTP setup SPARC install 359 time SETIN E cae ONES 163 time zone setting 66 sniene iiia a ees 69 time Incorrect iii ieee bee es 340 341 time setting ceres cie adiecta 149 token TING icio e iee eee xe re e pep IU 162 Torvalds Linus esie ek reus ix xii traffic shaping coria 3 uninstalling packages with glint 183 updates Obtaining isernia 310 UP rn x upgrade description of 00 sssr 44 upgrade performing 66eee eee 43 upgrade X problems after 6 4 333 upgrade related problems 317 upgrading packages with glint 182 upgrading NOW t0 cient e e ee d xii Usenet 35 2 risers teats n et aeo i pente 107 Red Hat specific groups 5 107 user accounts Creating airis 87 user interface installation program 29 user private groups oooooocoooccooccooo 189 190 user private groups rationale behind 192 Dro E 189 standard acis etre HER nes 190 sers addImng sostenere 114
140. 2 3 4 042K X server for cards built around chips from S3 including most 9 cards many Diamond Stealth cards Orchid Farenheits Mirco Crystal 8S most STB cards and some motherboards with built in graphics accelerators such as the IBM ValuePoint line XFree86 S3V Version 3 3 2 3 3 793K X server for cards built around the S3 Virge chipset C 12 X11 XFree86 SVGA Version 3 3 2 3 4 585K X server for most simple framebuffer SVGA devices including cards built from ET4000 chips Cirrus Logic chips Chips and Technologies laptop chips Trident 8900 and 9000 chips It works for Diamond Speedstar Orchid Kelvins STB Nitros and Horizons Genoa 8500VL most Actix boards the Spider VLB Plus It also works for many other chips and cards so try this server if you are having problems XFree86 VGA16 Version 3 3 2 3 3 594K Generic 16 color server for VGA boards This works on nearly all VGA style graphics boards but only in low resolution with few colors XFree86 W32 Version 3 3 2 3 3 458K X server for cards built around the ET4000 W32 chips including the Genoa 8900 Phantom 32i Her cules Dynamite cards Lead Tek WinFast S200 Sigma Concorde STB LightSpeed TechWorks Thun derbolt and ViewTop PCI XFree86 XF86Setup Version 3 3 2 3 575K XF86Setup is a graphical configuration tool for the XFree86 family of servers It allows you to con figure video settings keyboard layouts mouse type and other miscellaneous
141. 265 xdemineur see 291 ted snmp devel ii eee reme etat ERR 268 xdosemu eesse eee 233 ucd snmp utils 0 0 0 0 esse 268 xearth RN 286 Umbro nn 248 xevil Si 291 A A ena OS 272 XfIQ eee ee nnr eee 234 unitS eee ee lee llll 233 Xsara das arta 286 unzip mam 272 SEIN TH EE os 288 UrWSfODLls ciessserpupIzber i PEN Le EPERE ES 300 XFree86 sss 297 USC nda 288 XFree86 100dpi fonts sese 297 VSEE na eese Ups da Coi edes 283 XFree86 75dpi fonts sse 298 util linux occ ccc cece cee RR 283 XFree86 8514 2 cic cece ck ecsssecasvedennecees 298 UU rosana ans does 243 XFreeB6 AGX sss nne 298 XFree86 devel 66 c ccc cece cen eee e ee 299 XEte eB6 1128 A exei ert rd 298 V XREreeB6 libs eerte rene Er eret 299 vga cardgames isse 258 XFree86 Mach32 ssssssssssssssssss 298 Vga gamespack oooocococococonnoncnoconononos 258 XFree86 Mach64 oooooccccocccocccccccocccccnos 298 ViM COIOL A ssl 232 XEreeB6 Mach8 cess cc 298 VOMM Oi se ereen see capes e uei aq uen 232 XFree86 Mono esee 298 vitm enhariced AAA tete ee ees 232 XFree86 P9000 see t eee eees 298 vim minimal 0 ccccccccccccccccuccecceccee 232 O ebrei 298 O G D 232 XEtree86 53V isc cse red ree hire re nd 298 INDEX OF PACKAGES XFree86 5 VG ui oer minas mer e Senensi ies 299 XFree86 VGAT6 s rere sier eo tione erre ern 299 XFreeB6 W392 Loose veia P Vr VeE E rTA 299 XFree86 XF86Setup esses 299
142. 4 bootable CD ROM 00666 cece cence eens 34 booting rescue mode secrete tex kek es 215 o oi ai a8 Ce erp RE PIU Rd 215 using disketteS oooocoooooooooom 215 using LTO aw seco ge cgecrions teet che ehe b 215 single user ics iex heben oh ADR E A ee 212 booting from diskette 666 sees 342 booting from diskette for SPARC 357 booting from floppy reres errika cc RREA EAE 342 booting installation program 33 booting Linux c bee mand tensed eter eR re und 86 CD number two using 06 6 6 c eee e eee 341 CD problems ieceh rer era eter 312 CD ROM ATAPI idest sd tiunt ettet gdios Udo 37 ATAPI unrecognized 38 bootable soii 34 IDE Sn sivas end is 37 ou T HT 38 SCS E EEEE 38 CD ROM boot commands SPARC 358 CD ROM installation oocoococcccccccocoronos 15 CD ROM installation for SPARC 360 392 CD ROM module parameters 302 CD ROM mounting problems 342 changing passwords sssssuuu 119 120 changing root password 0000 00 121 changing time date 66 c scene 163 chkconfig utility creer ceret ee rn 214 class Installation eiie erue Ee Ext tete en 44 classes installation em 19 n a nn 69 clone network devices ooooooccoocccccoo 160 command not found 5 eec e vs 327 COMPOS TINUK essi eese tt tn te ete end 10
143. 4 rua ryrbam ar upgrada a nbn which alresdy tains Red Hart Linus 2 0 ar Later EA Rebanee e bos Cue selecta Figure 4 1 Upgrading or Installing 4 1 2 Upgrading The installation process for Red Hat Linux 5 2 includes the ability to upgrade from prior versions of Red Hat Linux version 2 0 and later which are based on RPM technology Upgrading your system installs the modular 2 0 x kernel as well as updated versions of the packages which are currently installed on your machine The upgrade process preserves existing configuration files by renaming them using a rpmsave extension e g sendmail cf rpmsave and leaves a log telling what actions it took in tmp upgrade log As software evolves configuration file formats can change so you should carefully compare your original configuration files to the new files before integrating your changes If you wish to upgrade your Red Hat Linux system choose Upgrade Please Note Some upgraded packages may require that other packages are also installed for proper operation The upgrade procedure takes care of these dependencies but it may need to install addi tional packages You will be shown the names of the required packages and you may then decide to install them or not You should install all such packages otherwise some of the upgraded packages may not work properly or at all 4 2 Installation Class After you choose to perform an upgrade or a full install the installation progra
144. 4 4 on page 39 for more information 5 4 Configuring the Clock Next the installation program presents a dialog to help you configure your Red Hat Linux system s timezone see Figure 5 4 on the next page If you wish to set the hardware CMOS clock to GMT Greenwich Mean Time also known as UTC or Coordinated Universal Time select Hardware clock set to GMT Setting your hardware clock to GMT means your Red Hat Linux system will properly handle daylight savings time if your timezone uses it Most networks use GMT Please Note If your computer runs another operating system from time to time setting the clock to GMT may cause the other operating system to display the incorrect time Also keep in mind that if more than one operating system is allowed to automatically change the time to compensate for daylight savings time it is likely that the time will be improperly set Select the timezone your system will be operating in from the list and press Enter If you wish to change your timezone configuration after you have booted your Red Hat Linux system you may use the usr sbin timeconfig command 5 5 Selecting Services for Start on Reboot Please Note If you re performing a workstation or server class installation this part of the instal lation is automatically done for you Please skip ahead to Section 5 6 on the following page Next you ll see a dialog box entitled Services see Figure 5 5 on page 71 Displayed in this box i
145. 6 2 In what order should install multiple operating systems Question I have a blank hard drive and would like to install DOS or Windows and Linux onto it What is the best method of doing this Answer It is recommended to install the non Linux operating system first and then installing Linux This allows the other OS to get comfortable with the hardware and possibly write values to the MBR that it would just over write if Linux was installed first You will probably need to do this in a several step method however Start the install but if the oper ating system allocates the entire drive for itself see if you can bail out early and use the operating system s native fdisk to create a primary partition of the size you want to leave for the OS 150 500 313 314 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ megs is average depending on your needs Then reboot and go through the install again and nor mally the OS will just use the space that you ve just set aside Once the install is finished you can then begin the Linux installation E 6 3 Are there alternate methods of installing Red Hat Linux Question I do not have a cdrom that will work with Linux and I can not install from the network Is there another method Answer If you cannot use a CD ROM or a network to install Red Hat Linux you can install Red Hat Linux from a hard drive just follow these steps You ll need a DOS partition that is formatted in FAT16 cr
146. 7 Compact Discs Linux Applications ssssssess 8 Compact Discs Red Hat Linux 7 components A obere xS yere rie 60 selecting for SPARC sssuul 362 components MISSING Kikek a aeaa 9 configuration SM ici see linuxconf anonymous FIP ciere sews cas 202 COCK T 69 ethernet ivo dees exer eurer Rer hE PIE 162 Bites eher obtu eate urs tede 178 o A ENS abes 159 AAA aaron nactbandiadreeieds 156 adding modules 157 changing modules 157 module options cec mes 157 restart a asiatica 158 LAN manager printer ooocooooccoccc o 154 loca PriMtet citar 154 NCP printers iiu i cess nectit da 154 NetWare printet se sroreki cress enenniasni 154 BetWOEPk eee casos E TUIS 68 158 network device adding 160 network dialogs 4 cesse ees 69 network rQuteS ooocoocoocccccccoocccccos 163 NES matara t ok side ta EN 202 A ittone te ert ERE Hor Fs 162 pocket network adapters 162 post installation 6 0 22 eee 83 jg 160 PE tutos ES 70 151 printer test pagers seeden iii 155 remote printer ser ranean a anina 154 selecting nameservers s s s e 159 Spo 362 A e Spa eal dae Deka 162 SMB ptihtet cisc voie roni pet OR 154 siii 109 O aia 69 A bibet etia EREA 69 token Xing cives xe Rr eres 162 A ser s nee Lente 66 KE ino i eaa d e te Fase 67 configuration
147. 7 Sendmail A default sendmail cf file will be installed in etc The default configuration should work for most SMTP only sites It will not work for UUCP sites you will need to generate a new send mail cf if you need to use UUCP mail transfers To generate a new sendmail cf you will need 11 8 Controlling Access to Services to install m4 and the sendmail source package Read the README file in the sendmail sources for more details on creating sendmail configuration files Also O Reilly amp Associates publishes a good sendmail reference entitled sendmail by Bryan Costales One common sendmail configuration is to have a single machine act as a mail gateway for all the ma chines on your network For instance at Red Hat Software we have a machine mail redhat com that does all our mail On that machine we simply need to add the names of machines for which mail redhat com will handle mail to etc sendmail cw Here is an example sendmail cw include all aliases for your machine here torgo redhat com poodle redhat com devel redhat com Then on the other machines torgo poodle and devel we need to edit etc sendmail cf to masquerade as mail redhat com when sending mail and to forward any local mail processing to redhat com Find the DH and DM lines in etc sendmail cf and edit them thusly who I send unqualified names to null means deliver locally DRmail redhat com who gets all local email traffic DHm
148. 9 Installation problems with the Adaptec 2920 Question Ihave an Adaptec 2920 During the install I do not see a choice for it why is that and what do I do Or I have a Future Domain TMC 3260 but when I specify options for it to be probed it isn t found during the install Answer The Adaptec 2920 does not use an Adaptec chip set but actually uses the Future Domain TMC3260 If the card is not found with an auto probe you will need to specify options for it When the installation menu asks you about SCSI choose options and enter the following setup called 1 port base io base interrupt level irq An example of this would be E 6 Installation setup called 1 port base 0xd000 interrupt level 9 If the above options do not work your card may have a newer BIOS that can t be probed correctly We are working on the problem but at this time do not have a satisfactory solution E 6 10 Problems with the Adaptec 274x 284x 294x cards Question I have an Adaptec SCSI card with the aic7xxx chipset 2940 2840 2740 3940 etc It is pretty common so why is it not fully supported by Red Hat Linux Answer The problem is that in the past Adaptec was not open about how their hardware worked which made it difficult to write a Linux driver for it However Adaptec has recently changed their position on this matter and Doug Ledford the current writer of the aic7xxx c SCSI code has made significant headway in making the 2940 very
149. AEreeS6 XneSE co ceeib oi SED REUS 299 O he ocean 299 li Add 291 Xgammion acre a 291 XgOpherus codd arrasa 288 KME o reno ainra Ya Ga voee E na T Raf 300 xjeWel aaron plat 291 xlander csicessssex ar enatis 291 xlispstat eiseseerexetarne x he eri deed ke red 248 XloadiMa ge eenn heredi rt da hs 289 XlOCKMOTE veinte cisne 295 XmallbOoxX A o vier ha t Pens 295 XMOCP ied arses de na 289 DOI Oia as 265 KOSVIEW uike E 295 RPA E E da ve tiem did 289 KPIZ ere O 291 pj ER 289 PUE cs emi qaaa qus 291 MPM iio rada acras 293 A O 250 A M 291 MEM uie cried eiie ss osa Said ack QNO e Sdn 289 XSCr ensavVer oss airada edad 295 ASNO Wario tease iota ai EQ acera cul 287 A erbe eor dale e dee era 295 XEM COLE eii iode ae P ER iaa 289 Pii f 295 Paar Hm 292 XN jester Soe cate diu to nan aba dine EE 289 XWDOS donnei s t epa aie etd Rete a Ag 252 RW Dee CU ET PEREEER 289 XWPICK A nette cman qo e Re ia eikai 295 Xiao ERE PEG 245 XZIP Secs keriu kia we radii bere anre 292 y pto iia cte ouest Papeete eder 268 ypbind P 270 YpSeEVi cerise degtretis de eese SRL rt seated ns 266 valeria 270 VEN arua ox ERAT n RA A dps gie Vet a dis 234 409
150. CD ROM Let s look at both starting with NFS H 3 4 nfs The NFS Installation Method For the NFS installation method you must include the NFS server s name and the directory to be mounted Here s an example nfs server hostname of server dir path to RH CD image 381 382 Kickstart Installations H 3 5 cdrom The CD ROM Installation Method For a CD ROM based kickstart installation simply use the following line cdrom H 3 6 device Optional Hardware Information The next set of items in the kickstart file are used to specify optional hardware information For most PCI based hardware you can omit this step as this information can be obtained directly from the hardware Note that IDE hard disks and common PCI cards fall into this category Any other hardware may need to be specified here To specify a device start with the device keyword followed by the type of device e ethernet for Ethernet cards e scsi for SCSI cards e cdrom for non SCSI non IDE CD ROM drives usually sound cards with proprietary CD ROM interfaces If a kernel module is required to support the device the module name follows the device type Finally if there are any parameters that are required by a device they can be specified by using the opts option Enclose the parameters in quotes after opts We ll show you some examples below Note that you can specify more than one type of device in a given kickstart file For example if
151. Esparjed fle piero F5 F aigo for virus hosts UU CF dini tn unes capri Accept carcel Help Taree device and modems nz haduled basics Mal delivery sytem jsendr Basic Figure 8 18 Type of Interface Screen Notice that the title bar is PPP interface pero pppo is the first PPP interface ppp1 would be the second and so on It s important to keep track of which interface you re using if you have more than one SLIP connections use s1 instead of ppp for their interface prefix With the exception of a PAP authentication option the entry screens for adding a PPP or a SLIP account are identical Enter the complete phone number for the remote machine and make sure to include any numbers required to access outside lines For example if you need to dial 9 and then the number and the computer you re connecting to has a telephone number of 555 0111 then you d enter 95550111 The next thing it asks you for is the modem port This is a drop down box of available ports If you re using a dual boot Linux Windows system and you know the COM port your modem is on the following map may be of use Map to Windows COM ports are as follows e cua0 COMI under MS DOS e cual COM2 under MS DOS e cua2 COM3 under MS DOS e cua3 COM4 under MS DOS 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Mahony cieni bares Basic host imiran Hare serene rgecificatan if Aang and qain Dewis ghe routes bo nehugrk
152. First label a blank formatted diskette appropriately eg Boot Diskette Supplemental Diskette etc Insert it into the diskette drive but don t issue a mount command After mounting the Red Hat Linux CD change directory to the directory containing the desired image file and use the following command changing the name of the image file and diskette device as appropriate dd if boot img of dev fd0 bs 1440k If you need to make another diskette label another diskette and run dd again specifying the appro priate image file Package List This appendix lists the packages that make up Red Hat Linux In each entry you ll find the following information e The name of the package e The packaged software s version number e The size of the packaged software in kilobytes e A short description of the software In addition some packages will have one or more of the following icons alongside the package name B This package is part of the Red Hat Linux base meaning that it is always installed Workstation class installations include this package Server class installations include this package Please Note This package list was automatically generated right before Red Hat Linux 5 2 went into production Because of the short timeframes involved you might find minor typesetting problems 228 Package List in the package lists However we felt that an up to date package list was more important than a picture perfect
153. G 2 format audio files through your PC s sound card MPEG audio files are popular for sending high fidelity music over the Internet and http www iuma com contains a large archive of MPEG 2 sound files mikmod Version 3 0 3 362K One of the best and most well known MOD players around for unix Play MOD and their brethren songs MikMod is a portable modules player originally written by Jean Paul Mikkers MikMak for DOS It has subsequently been hacked by many hands and now runs on many platforms this particular distribution intended to compile fairly painlessly in a Unix Linux environment It uses the OSS dev dsp driver including in all recent kernels for output and will also write wav files Supported file formats include mod stm s3m mtm xm and it The player uses ncurses for console output and supports transparent loading from gzip pkzip zoo archives and the loading saving of playlists 239 240 Package List playmidi Version 2 4 145K Plays MIDI sound files through a sound card synthesizer It includes basic drum samples for use with simple FM synthesizers playmidi X11 Version 2 4 46K X program for playing MIDI sound files through a sound card synthesizer It includes basic drum samples for use with simple FM synthesizers sox Version 12 14 349K The self described swiss army knife of sound tools sox can convert between many different digi tized sound formats and perform simple
154. Hare serene specification i Anning and qat Cir ls ahe routes bo newark gher routes bo hoss routes to alim ate local ret the muted damon Hori nane search path Hataw Informa ation Syren FX merca reup PPP SLIP PLIP Saver pks Exparjed fle systems HFS F aliyo for virus hosts UUCF nt n unis capri dar devices and medar vc heuer trier Ml delivery syrien ieendr Buk basic Intonation special domain mating pamplex user muting masquercading nuez rai ja fas give Vinal email domain ur ae A AE Haee Coseancatos Metwneting FAP Figure 8 21 PPP Interface Customization Screen This will open the appropriate interface screen for your configuration If you wish to delete the configuration the handy Del button is there at the bottom of the screen The Modem port is on the Hardware tab and again is a drop down menu If you want to change the other settings you entered when you originally created the configuration you ll want to select the Communication tab The first Send field contains your login and the next Send field contains your password The Expect fields correspond to the login and password prompts which explains the ogin and ord entries Once you have made your changes you can test to see if your configuration is working Select Con nect from the bottom of the screen This will attempt to connect you to the remote system using the information you ve entered Once you ve finished configuring and testi
155. IA cards are small cards for everything from SCSI support to modems They are hot swappable they can be exchanged without rebooting the system and quite convienent This package contains support for numerous PCMCIA cards of all varieties and supplies a daemon which allows them to be hot swapped procmail Version 3 10 179K Red Hat Linux uses procmail for all local mail delivery In addition to regluar mail delivery duties procmail can be used to do many different automatic filtering presorting and mail handling jobs It is the basis for the SmartList mailing list processor sendmail cf Version 8 8 7 611K This package contains all the configuration files used to generate the sendmail cf file distributed with the base sendmail package You ll want this package if you need to reconfigure and rebuild your sendmail cf file For example the default sendmail cf is not configured for UUCP If you need to send and receive mail over UUCP you may need this package to help you reconfigure sendmail sendmail doc Version 8 8 7 1 219K This package includes release notes the sendmail FAQ and a few papers written about sendmail The papers are available in PostScript and troff sysklogd Version 1 3 105K B This is the Linux system and kernel logging program It is run as a daemon background process to log messages to different places These are usually things like sendmail logs security logs and errors from other
156. Intel kernel on or for a machine that uses a clone processor for example one made by Cyrix or AMD it is recommended to choose a Processor type of 386 If you wish to build a kernel with a configuration file usr src linux config that you have already created with one of the above methods you can omit the make mrproperandmake con fig commands and use the command make dep followed by make clean to prepare the source tree for the build The next step consists of the actual compilation of the source code components into a working pro gram that your machine can use to boot The method described here is the easiest to recover from in the event of a mishap If you are interested in other possibilities details can be found in the Kernel HOWTO or in the Makefile in usr src linux on your Linux system e Build the kernel with make boot e Build any modules you configured with make modules e Move the old set of modules out of the way with rm rf lib modules 2 0 29 o1d mv lib modules 2 0 29 lib modules 2 0 29 old Of course if you have upgraded your kernel replace 2 0 29 with the version you are using e Install the new modules even if you didn t build any with make modules install If you have a SCSI adapter and made your SCSI driver modular build a new initrd image see Section 11 6 2 note that there are few practical reasons to make the SCSI driver modular in a custom kernel In order to provide a redundant boot sour
157. K These are the development libraries and header files for UCD SNMP This will allow the network administrator to write programs for use with network management ucd snmp utils Version 3 5 3 731K These are the various utilities for use with UCD SNMP Contains utils such as snmpwalk snmptest and more yp tools Version 2 0 153K This implementation of NIS for linux is based on the YP stuff for FreeBSD It is a special port for glibc 2 x and libe 5 4 21 This implementation only provides NIS clients You must already have a NIS server running some where You can find one for linux on http www vt uni paderborn de kukuk linux nis html Please read the NIS HOWTO too biff Version 0 10 16K The biff client and comsat server are an antiquated method of asynchronous mail notification Al though they are still supported most users use their shells MAIL variable or mail under csh variants to check for mail or a dedicated application such as xbiff or xmailbox bootparamd Version 0 10 17K Some notably Sun s network boot loaders rely on special boot server code on the server in addition to rarp and tftp servers This server is compatible with the SunOS bootparam clients and servers finger Version 0 10 30K Finger is a simple protocol which allows users to find information about users on other machines This package includes a standard finger client and server The server runs from etc inetd c
158. Linux system Congratulations You re now fully graphical well your system is at least Changing Your Desktop Thanks to wmcon ig it s easy to change the appearance of your desktop Simply select the Prefer ences menu entry and under WM Style you ll be able to pick from several different desktop also known as window manager styles If you want to learn more about the nuts and bolts behind the scenes read the wmconfig man page for more information 95 96 What Do Do Now Virtual Consoles and X Note that even if you re running X you still have access to the regular character cell user interface That s because Red Hat Linux uses virtual consoles while X is running To switch to a virtual console press Ctr Alt En where is any one of the first six function keys When switching virtual consoles you should see a standard login prompt at this point you can login and use the system normally on any or all of the virtual consoles When you d like to go back to your X session simply press E7 Please Note Some people remap keys under X if you do this be aware that your X keyboard mappings will only be active when in X This can be confusing if for example you ve swapped the and Caps Lock keys under X as you will have to use two different keystrokes to switch between X and non X virtual consoles Handy X Based Tools There are several tools that can make life easier for the new Red Hat Linux user They per
159. Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt File systems 4 Select Add 136 System Configuration 5 Enter the host name where the filesystem resides 6 Enter the path to the remote filesystem in the Volume field For example var spool mail 7 Specify the mount point on your system For example mnt oo Select Accept Adding NFS Mounts General Overview NFS stands for Network FileSystem It is a way for computers to share sections of their local filesys tem across a network These sections may be as small as a single directory or include thousands of files in a vast hierarchy of directories For example many companies will have a single mail server with individuals mail files served as an NFS mount to each users local systems To add an NFS mount e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open Config gt File systems gt P e On the NFS volume screen see figure 8 15 on the page before select Add The three fields on the Base tab are what you ll need to concern yourself with e Server The host name of the machine the desired filesystem resides on For example foo bar com e Volume The filesystem you wish to add For example var spool mail e Mount point Where in your system you want the remote file system accessible from For example
160. Met ro X you will need to do the following cd usr X11R6 lib X11 xkb keymap cp xfree86 metro This will solve many of the problems experienced However it isn t a full solution due to the fact that some of the XFree86 mappings are out of date with modern keyboards If you still experience prob lems with the keyboard settings you will need to use the xmodmap and xev commands to correct the problems Please send these corrections to bugs xfree86 org so that they can be corrected in the main distributions E 8 7 XLibrary problems compiling or running programs Question I get an error message that libX can t be opened or I can t compile X apps due to missing libraries Answer More than likely the required libraries are not installed You will need to re install the packages to get them Insert the Red Hat Linux installation cdrom mount mnt cdrom cd mnt cdrom RedHat RPMS rpm Uvh force XFree86 devel XFree86 libs Xaw3d This should install most of the X libraries that you might need If you still get the error it may be due to the fact that the requested library is part of a package we do not provide qt x orms mot i f etc 332 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ E 8 8 Xand AGP video cards Question Ihave an AGP graphics card Is it supported Answer AGP cards were not supported in XFree86 before version 3 3 2 If you have 3 3 2 installed on your system then Xconfigurator should show which AGP cards
161. Red Hat Linux 5 2 The Official Red Hat Linux Installation Guide Red Hat Software Inc Research Triangle Park North Carolina Copyright 1995 1996 1997 1998 Red Hat Software Inc Red Hat is a registered trademark and the Red Hat Shadow Man logo RPM the RPM logo and Glint are trademarks of Red Hat Software Inc Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Motif and UNIX are registered trademarks of The Open Group Alpha is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation SPARC is a registered trademark of SPARC International Inc Products bearing the SPARC trade marks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems Inc Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners ISBN 1 888172 19 3 Revision Inst 5 2 Print RHS 10 98 Red Hat Software Inc 4201 Research Commons Suite 100 79 T W Alexander Drive P O Box 13588 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 919 547 0012 redhat redhat com http www redhat com While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book the publisher assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of the information con tained herein The Official Red Hat Linux 5 2 Installation Guide may be reprodu
162. S Configuration 203 export filesystems to other systems and mount filesystems exported from other machines 11 10 1 Mounting NFS Filesystems Use the mount command to mount a NFS filesystem from another machine mkdir mnt local Only required if mnt local doesn t exist mount bigdog mnt export mnt local In this command bigdog is the hostname of the NES fileserver mnt export is the filesystem that bigdog is exporting and mnt local is a directory on my local machine where we want to mount the filesystem After the mount command runs and if we have the proper permissions from bigdog we can enter 1s mnt local and get a listing of the files in mnt export on bigdog 11 10 2 Exporting NFS Filesystems The file that controls what filesystems you wish to export is etc exports Its format is directory hostname options the options are optional For example mnt export Speedy redhat com would allow speedy redhat comto mount mnt export but mnt export Speedy redhat com ro would just allow speedy to mount mnt export read only Each time you change etc exports you need to tell the NFS daemons to examine it for new information One simple way to accomplish this is to just stop and start the daemons etc rc d init d nfs stop etc rc d init d nfs start The following will also work killall HUP rpc nfsd rpc mountd See the following man pages for more details nfsd 8 mountd 8 and exports 5 Another good refe
163. SCSI devices are disk drives SCSI tape drives scanners and tape drives are also common Sector When referring to disk drives the number of fixed size normally 512 byte areas that can be accessed by one of the disk drive s read write heads in one rotation of the disk without that head changing position See Also Geometry Serial Mouse A serial mouse is a mouse that is designed to be connected to a computer s serial port A serial mouse can be easily identified by the rectangular shaped connector at the end of its cable setgid A system call that can be used to set the GID of a process Programs can be written using setgid such that they can assume the group ID of any group on the system setuid A system call that can be used to set the UID of a process Programs can be written using setuid such that they can assume the user ID of any process on the system This is considered a possible security problem if a program is setuid root Shadow Password Normally each user s password is stored encrypted in the file et c passwd This file must be readable by all users so that certain system functions will operate correctly How ever this means that copies of user s encrypted passwords are easily obtained making it possible to run an automated password guessing program against them Shadow passwords on the other hand store the encrypted passwords in a separate highly protected file making it much more difficult to crack passwords SILO
164. Script fonts With newer releases of ghostscript quality versions of the standard 35 Type 1 PostScript fonts are shipped They were donated and licenced under the GPL by URW The fonts dir was specially made to match the original Adobe names of the fonts e g Times Helvetica etc With XFree86 these fonts are a must to have xinitrc Version 1 6 9K This package contains the basic X windows startup script used by the startx command General Parameters and Modules This appendix is provided to illustrate some of the possible parameters that may be needed by certain drivers It should be noted that in most cases these additional parameters are unnecessary Also included is a list of network hardware and the associated modules required by that hardware Please keep in mind that if a device you are attempting to use requires one of these parameters and support for that device is not compiled into the kernel the traditional method of adding the parameter to the LILO boot command will not work Drivers loaded as modules require that these parameters are specified when the module is loaded The Red Hat Linux installation program gives you the option to specify module parameters when a driver is loaded For more information concerning the device support compiled into the kernel used by the Red Hat Linux installation program please refer to Section 2 8 on page 28 One of the more commonly used parameters the hdX cdrom parameter can be ente
165. Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open gt gt gt Select the user account Select Passwd Enter the user s new password Reenter the user s new password in the Confirmation field SN DAT PF WN o Select Accept 120 System Configuration lasers accounts Miia liscr accounts Grua dations Changa meri pariciwoed Special accounts PPP cams SLIP accaunts via nanal ic uL CF accounts POP aceaunts inia any Virtual POP accaunta iral Eniail aliis iur El dS iri vnm rl Hear ls eri Paititi Paword amp account police n alabe user diik h alabe PPP shell n alabie SLE sheik Massage OT the day Fig stare local diva nts Gd Lid sar Niue rad mona ee ikar isfrmatos au must spacify az Hast Du rama and mas Pell nam Base infa Powteger man stares r The accourt e anablgd Figure 8 8 User Information Screen Changing a User s Password General Overview e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt gt This will open the Users ac counts tab see figure 8 5 on page 117 e If you have more than 15 accounts on the system Linuxconf will provide you with a filter screen see figure 8 4 on page 116 You can use this to select a smaller range of accounts than the full list To get the full list select Ac
166. a Network has Internet access you can use one of the many FTP sites that mirror Red Hat Linux You can find a list of mirror sites at ftp ftp redhat com pub MIRRORS If your LAN doesn t have Internet access all is not lost If there is a computer on your LAN that can accept anonymous FTP requests simply put a copy of the Red Hat Linux distribution on that system and you re ready to go Please Note Your FTP server must be able to handle long filenames INTEL For an FIP installation you must use both the boot and supplemental diskettes You will need to have a valid nameserver configured or you must specify the IP address of the FTP server you will be using You will also need the path to the Red Hat Linux directory on the FTP server If you ve determined that this installation method is most applicable to your situation please skip 2 4 Installation Methods ahead to Section 2 5 on the next page 2 4 4 Installing From an NFS Server If your system doesn t have a CD ROM drive but you do have network access then an NFS installa tion may be for you When installing via NFS the Red Hat Linux packages you select are NFS served to your computer from an NFS server system The packages are then installed on your hard drive How To Do It If you wish to perform an NFS installation you will need to mount the Red Hat Linux CD ROM on a machine that supports ISO 9660 file systems with Rock Ridge extensions The machine must also suppo
167. a inrtallad Packaga Pacquiramant ree Frea Figure 4 19 Unresolved Dependencies At this point there s nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed How quickly this happens depends on the number of packages you ve selected and your computer s speed Once all the packages have been installed please turn to the next chapter to finish your installation of Red Hat Linux Finishing the Installation 5 1 Configuring a Mouse Next the installation program will probe your system and try to find a mouse Some mice may be detected automatically in this case a dialog box is displayed showing the port on which the mouse was found You may then be asked to give additional information such as whether you have a two button mouse and would like it to emulate a three button mouse Make the appropriate selections and continue to the next section More commonly you will see a screen similar to the one in Figure 5 1 on the next page The installation program s best guess as to your system s mouse type will be highlighted If the mouse type is not accurate use the 1 and 1 keys to scroll through the different mouse types In general you should use the following approach to selecting your system s mouse type e If you find an exact match for your mouse in the list highlight that entry e If you find a mouse that you are certain is compatible with your mouse highlight that entry e Otherwise select one of
168. a removable cartridge and meant to be read written in a compatible drive Glossary Distribution An operating system usually Linux that has been packaged so as to be easily in stalled Domain Name A domain name is used to identify computers as belonging to a particular orga nization Domain names are hierarchical in nature with each level in the hierarchy being separated from other levels with a period pronounced dot For example Foo Incorporated s Finance de partment might use the domain name finance foo com Driver See Device Driver Dual Boot The act of configuring a computer system to boot more than one operating system The name is something of a misnomer as it is possible to boot more than the two operating systems the word dual implies EIDE An acronym for Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics which is a newer version of the IDE interface standard EIDE makes larger and faster disk drives possible most systems sold today use EIDE Errata Errata is Latin for Ooops When software is found to have bugs quite often the software is fixed and released as errata Red Hat Linux is no exception to the rule we have an Errata web pageathttp www redhat com errata Extended Partition A segment of a disk drive that contains other partitions See Partition FAQ An acronym for Frequently Asked Questions Linux information is often presented in the form of lists of questions and answers called FAOs fdisk f
169. a swap partition and you re sure one exists make sure you have set the partition type to Linux swap see Section 4 4 on page 46 for information on how this is done with Disk Druid or di sk 4 6 ForFTP Installations Only If you are not performing an FTP installation please skip ahead to Section 4 7 on the next page 4 7 For SMB Installations Only What partition would you Like to ura for ramp rpaca Thix alll destro ame inforsation already on the partition fa n Es Ca to eta pd Figure 4 12 Initializing Swap Space If you are performing an FTP installation please mark this place in the manual because you ll be re turning here later Turn to Section 3 4 3 on page 38 This section will guide you through the necessary network configuration dialog boxes When you get to the FTP Setup dialog box come back here OK you re back You should have entered all the necessary network information and should now be looking at the FTP Setup dialog box Here s where you point the installation program at the FTP site of your choice see Figure 4 13 on the next page Enter the name or IP address of the FTP site you are installing from and the name of the directory there which contains the RedHat directory for your architecture For example if the FTP site contains the directory pub mirrors redhat i386 RedHat enter pub mirrors redhat 1386 If you are not us ing anonymous FTP or if you need to use a proxy FTP server if y
170. able e Free space in an actively used partition is available Let s look at each scenario in order Using Unpartitioned Free Space In this situation the partitions already defined do not span the entire hard disk leaving unallocated space that is not part of any defined partition If you think about it an unused hard disk also falls into this category the only difference is that all the space is not part of any defined partition In this case you can simply create the necessary partitions from the unused space Using Space From An Unused Partition Last year you replaced that tiny 105MB hard drive on your Windows system with a 1 2GB monster You partitioned it into two equal parts figuring that you d use the C drive really the drive s first partition for Windows and the D drive really the drive s second partition for your collection of freeware programs downloaded from the Internet Well you d been so used to using C that you never put anything of substance on D If you find yourself in this situation you can use the space allocated to the unused partition In this case you ll first need to delete the partition and then create the appropriate Linux partitions in its place You can either delete the partition using DOS fdisk or you ll be given the opportunity to do so during a custom class installation Using Free Space From An Active Partition This is the most common situation It is also unfortunately the harde
171. ackages and libraries adding more features E 6 Installation For Red Hat Linux version 4 2 the minimum disk space requirements include at least 16 MB for a swap partition and 60 MB for basic installation with no X development tools or TeX See http www redhat com support docs hardware htmlformore information on disk space requirements Not suprisingly with 5 2 the minimum disk space is larger If you choose a custom install and deselect all automatically selected packages you will need at least a 16 MB swap partition and 120 MB for a basic installation with no X development tools or Tex If you are installing via the workstation or server class installation methods you will need to have 450MB free for a workstation install and 1620 MB free for a server install Of course these installation methods may install many items an expert may not wish to install In that case a custom install is more flexible as you can include or remove items at will In general the following is a good average for a typical custom install boot kernel partition 20 MB swap partition 16 127 MB 500 MB home Depends on how many users you ll have on the system and how much space each account needs Any additional space can be allocated to a partition which you can name whatever you like ie stuff private test If you plan to run a server you should configure it a bit differently adding a tmp partition and a var partition E
172. age Management with RPM Upgradability With RPM you can upgrade individual components of your system without com pletely reinstalling When you get a new release of an operating system based on RPM such as Red Hat Linux you don t need to reinstall your machine as you do with operating sys tems based on other packaging systems RPM allows intelligent fully automated in place upgrades of your system Configuration files in packages are preserved across upgrades so you won t lose your customizations Powerful Querying RPM is also designed to have powerful querying options You can do searches through your entire database for packages or just certain files You can also easily find out what package a file belongs to and where it came from The files an RPM package contains are in a compressed archive with a custom binary header containing useful information about the package and its contents allowing you to query individual packages quickly and easily System Verification Another powerful feature is the ability to verify packages If you are worried that you deleted an important file for some package simply verify the package You will be notified of any anomalies At that point you can reinstall the package if necessary Any configuration files that you modified are preserved during reinstallation Pristine Sources A crucial design goal was to allow the use of pristine software sources as dis tributed by the original authors of the softw
173. ail redhat com who I masquerade as null for no masquerading DMredhat com With this type of configuration all mail sent will appear as if it were sent from redhat com and any mail sent to torgo redhat com or the other hosts will be delivered to mail redhat com Please be aware that if you configure your system to masquerade as another any email sent from your system to your system will be sent to the machine you are masquerading as For example in the above illustration log files that are periodically sent to root poodle redhat comby the cron daemon would be sent to root mail redhat com 11 8 Controlling Access to Services As a security measure most network services are managed by a protective program called a TCP wrapper The protected services are those listed in etc inetd conf that specify usr sbin tcpd tcpd can allow or deny access to a service 201 202 System Administration based on the origin of the request and the configuration in etc hosts allow and etc hosts deny By default Red Hat Linux allows all service re quests To disable or limit services you can edit etc hosts allow Here is an example etc hosts allow file ALL redhat com redhat com in talkd ALL in ntalkd ALL in fingerd ALL in ftpd ALL This configuration allows all connections from redhat com and redhat com machines It also allows talk finger and ftp requests from all machines tcpd allows much more sophistic
174. al bookstore or various on line resources A starting point in your on line search for Linux information should always be http www redhat com support for information specific to Red Hat Linux or A 2 Getting Support 219 http www redhat com linux info for more general Linux information Another good resource is http www linux org Red Hat Software can only support customers that have purchased the official Red Hat Linux Box set If you have obtained Red Hat from any other publisher you must contact them for support Examples of other publishers would be e Macmillan Sams Cheapbytes e Pacific Hi Tech PHT Infomagic Linux Systems Labs LSL e ADRAS Computing Also RHL Intel obtained via any of the following methods does not qualify for support from Red Hat Software e Red Hat Linux PowerTools Archive e Downloaded via FTP on the Internet e Included in a package such as Applixware or Motif e Copied or installed from another user s CD A 2 Getting Support As of August 1997 Red Hat Software put a new Technical Support system online The support system automatically routes questions to support technicians This document describes how to use the Red Hat Software technical support system A 2 1 Registration In order to receive technical support for your Red Hat Software product you have to register it Every official Red Hat product comes with a Registration Card Your product registration number appea
175. all Red Hat Linux releases between 2 0 and 4 2 inclusive were based on libc 5 This package includes these libraries and other libraries based on libc 5 allowing old applcications to run on glibc libc 6 based systems libelf Version 0 6 4 74K This library gives you access to the internals of the ELF object file format It lets you poke around in the various different sections of an ELF file check out the symbols etc libg Version 2 7 2 8 1 897K B This is the GNU implementation of the standard C libraries along with additional GNU tools This package includes the shared libraries necessary to run C applications libgr Version 2 0 13 206K This package is a library for handling various graphics file formats including FBM PBM PGM PNM PPM and REL libjpeg Version 6b 243K This package is a library of functions that manipulate jpeg images along with simple clients for manipulating jpeg images libjpeg6a Version 6a 131K This package is a library of functions that manipulate jpeg images along with simple clients for manipulating jpeg images libpng Version 1 0 1 244K The PNG library is a collection of routines used to crate and manipulate PNG format graphics files The PNG format was designed as a replacement for GIF with many improvements and extensions libstdc Version 2 8 0 366K B This is the GNU implementation of the standard C libraries along with add
176. an handling your support ticket can close the ticket This can also be done by you via the website Either method will result in a message from the support system stating the ticket is closed and contain a summary of the problem and the solution You can open a new ticket for your next support question All past correspondence will be saved in the database under the old ticket number and can be accessed with your account at any time Where to Send Them The address for Red Hat s Technical Support System is support redhat com all support ques tions should go there There are also several related addresses e For a copy of the Red Hat FAQ Frequently Asked Questions with answers send mail to faq redhat com e For a copy of the Red Hat PPP Tips tips on setting up a PPP connection send mail to ppp tips redhat com A 3 Support FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Here are a few questions that the Red Hat Support Staff see frequently along with the answers Question I ve sent several messages to the Red Hat Support System and I ve gotten absolutely no response Is anybody there Answer Check your registration information to make sure your email address is correct You can check it by logging in at http www redhat com support register Question I know I have already registered but I keep getting a message from the support system telling me I m not registered Is the system broken A 3 Support FAQ Frequently Asked Que
177. ands in particular can be found in The Sun Hardware Reference by James W Birdsall It can be found at ftp ftp picarefy com pub Sun Hardware Ref parts The file part2 contains an in depth description of the various ROM monitors present in older Sun Systems In general the new style boot command is boot followed by a descriptive device name such as floppy cdrom or net The old style boot command is b followed by a device specifier in the form xx a b c Where xx is used to specify the device type such as sd for SCSI disks a is the controller number b is the device s unit number and c is the partition number Please refer to The Sun Hardware Reference if you have an older SPARC system and require additional information on its boot command syntax 356 Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC F4 Ramdisk based Installation Criteria When the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation starts normally a ramdisk is loaded into memory This ramdisk contains data and programs required to perform the installation and is approximately 4 MB in size Since the ramdisk takes memory away from the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation program your SPARC system must have at least 12 MB of memory in order to sucessfully use a ramdisk based installation For SPARC systems with less than 12 MB of RAM another approach is available It is known as an NFS mounted root As the name implies instead of using a ramdisk to hold parts of the Red Hat Lin
178. anguage that is designed to be embedded in other applications This package includes tclsh a simple example of a tcl application TCL is very popular for writing small graphical applications because of the TK widget set which is closely tied to it tclx Version 8 0 3 1 942K TclX is a set of extensions to make it more suitable for common Unix programming tasks It adds or enhances support for files network access debugging math lists and message catalogs It can be used with both tcl and tcl tk applications tix Version 4 1 0 6 2 709K Tix is a add on for the tk widget set which adds many complex widgets which are built from tk building blocks The extra widgets include combo box file selection notebooks paned windows 247 248 Package List spin controls and hierarchical list boxes tk Version 8 0 3 5 227K Tk is a X Windows widget set designed to work closely with the tcl scripting language It allows you to write simple programs with full featured GUI s in only a little more time then it takes to write a text based interface Tcl Tk applications can also be run on Windows and Macintosh platforms tkinter Version 1 5 1 639K A graphical interface for Python based on Tcl Tk and used by many of the configuration tools umb scheme Version 3 2 1 211K UMB Scheme is an implementation of the language described in the IEEE Standard for the Scheme Programming Language December 1990 xlispsta
179. ard drivers There are a few things that you should know about sndconfig Plug and Play Aware sndconfig is able to detect and automatically configure Plug and Play sound cards such as the Sound Blaster 16 PnP The configuration information is stored in the etc isapnp conf file along with the configuration information for any other Plug and Play devices In order to ensure that no configuration will be lost sndconfig saves your original etc isapnp conf fileas etc isapnp conf bak 97 98 What Do Do Now Modifies etc conf modules sndconfig modifies the module configuration file etc conf modules by adding information about the module options required for your sound card Note that sndconfig saves your original etc conf modules file as etc conf modules bak To set up your sound card run usr sbin sndconfig Note that you must be root in order to run sndconfig If your system contains a Plug and Play sound card sndconfig will identify it and configure it appropriately If you do not want sndconfig to probe for Plug and Play sound cards run sndconfig with the noprobe option It is also possible to manually specify the settings for your sound card to do so run sndconfig with the noautoconfig option If sndconfig cannot automatically identify your system s sound card or you ran sndconfig with the noprobe option you ll be asked to select the type of sound card you have See Figure 6 2 Use the 1 and 1 keys t
180. are With RPM you have the pristine sources along with any patches that were used plus complete build instructions This is a big advantage for several reasons For instance if a new version of a program comes out you don t necessarily have to start from scratch to get it to compile You can look at the patch to see what you might need to do All the compiled in defaults and all of the changes that were made to get the software to build properly are easily visible this way This goal may only seem important for developers but it results in higher quality software for end users too We would like to thank the folks from the BOGUS distribution for originating the pristine source concept 9 2 Using RPM RPM has five basic modes of operation not counting package building installing uninstalling upgrading querying and verifying This section contains an overview of each mode For complete details and options try rpm help or turn to Section 9 4 on page 173 for more information on RPM 9 2 1 Installing RPM packages typically have file names like 00 1 0 1 1386 rpm which includes the package name oo version 1 0 release 1 and architecture i386 Installing a package is as simple as rpm ivh foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo HREEE EH HHT EE ER ERE EE HERE EE HH 9 2 Using RPM 167 As you can see RPM prints out the name of the package which is not necessarily the same as the file name which could have been 1 rpm and
181. are supported If you do not already have 3 3 2 you may want to consider upgrading to this release Please see their web page at http www xfree86 org for more details E 8 9 Having X start at boot up Question How do I have X start up at boot versus having to type startx everytime Answer To enable X to run at boot time and using xdm to log in you need to change the file etc inittab Edit your etc inittab file Replace this line id 3 initdefault With this one id 5 initdefault Save your changes and reboot the machine Note you could also manually change init levels to 5 but we find that rebooting the machine is actually less error prone E 8 10 NeoMagic problems Question My computer has a NeoMagic graphics card chipset how can I get X to work E 8 X Window System 333 Answer The NeoMagic cards are NOW supported by XFree86 s X servers Red Hat worked with Precision Insight on making freely available servers for NDA hardware like the NeoMagic that people using any Linux distribution can download and use E 8 11 Problems with X after upgrading from RHL 4 1 Question Iupgraded from 4 1 or earlier and now when I use startx the machine seems to hang at a grey screen Answer The problem is that releases prior to 4 2 installed Xclients in every user s home directory which calls fvwm95 2 cmd FvwmM4 debug etc X11 TheNextLevel However this window manager doesn t exist in 5 x The
182. as a direct result of customer feedback Some people have expressed confusion over all the different terms and acronyms that seem to surround computer technology in general and Linux in particular For those people we ve added a glossary While it s not our goal to include a complete data processing dictionary with every copy of Red Hat Linux if you think a particular word should be present but is not feel free to let us know via docs redhat com As the linuxconf system configuration tool continues to mature we ve created a new system con figuration chapter containing task based linuxconf documentation as well as those vestiges of the control panel tools that still remain Our goal is to continue adding linuxconf documentation what you see here is just a first step in that process We ve also worked on the Frequently Asked Questions section of the Installation Guide adding more of the timeless questions that seem to persist from release to release while weeding out version specific questions that if you think about it will always be somewhat dated given the nature of printed documentation The package list has proven to be quite popular this time we ve improved it by adding icons showing whether a given package is part of one of several pre defined sets of packages All of this has resulted in the Installation Guide putting on a little weight 100 pages to be exact This is a trend that we expect to continue which leads us right
183. as utilities needed to create new dictionaries dump Version 0 3 123K dump and restore can be used to backup extended 2 ext2 partitions in a variety of ways e2fsprogs Version 1 12 843K B This package includes a number of utilities for creating checking and repairing ext2 filesystems eject Version 1 5 34K 5 This program allows the user to eject media that is autoejecting like CD ROMs Jaz and Zip drives and floppy drives on SPARC machines ext2ed Version 0 1 283K This is a package to allow for hacking of your extended two file systems It is for hackers only and should only be used by experienced personnel If you aren t sure if this is you it isn t Also do not smoke near this software You have been warned This is not a recording getty ps Version 2 0 7j 122K 5 getty and uugetty are used to accept logins on the console or a terminal They can handle answer a modem for dialup connections although mgetty is recommended for that purpose glint Version 2 6 1 227K Glint is a graphical interface to the RPM package management tool It allows you to browse packages installed on your system verify and query those package It allows allows you to update packages with new versions and install new packages hdparm Version 3 3 36K B This is a utility for setting Hard Drive parameters It is useful for tweaking performance and for doing things like spinning down hard drives to
184. ase note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto korean Version 5 2 14 272K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into korean Please note that not all C 5 Documentation the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto polish Version 5 2 15 832K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into polish Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto ps Version 5 2 6 417K These are the PostScript versions of the HOWTOs You can view them with ghostview or print them on PostScript printers howto serbian Version 5 2 37K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into serbian Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto sgml Version 5 2 8 498K These are the SGML versions of the HOWTOs They are the source files that the HOWTOs are built from using linuxdoc sgml howto slovenian Version 5 2 2 137K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into slovenian Please note
185. at com so that they can be worked on E 9 18 Unknown PCI messages Question When the system boots up I see a message that says I have unknown PCI hardware What does this mean Answer The error unknown PCI device can occur for several reasons The first and most harmless one is that PCI isn t responding to Linux s queries in a way it understands but Linux is able to keep going The more common occurrence is that the system hangs on querying PCI bus cards and cannot get any further Since this is a hardware problem in the kernel there is not much that RedHat can do except point you to the maintainer of that section of the kernel They may be able to let you know what is going on and may want to look at what hardware you do have in your system so they can better handle it in the future The maintainer can be reached at linux pcisupportGcck uni kl de Please include the following information e proc pci e your exact hardware description Try to find out which device is unknown It may be your main board chip set PCI CPU bridge or PCI ISA bridge e If you can t find the actual information in your hardware booklet try to read the references of the chip on the board E 9 19 LILO and modules Question I used to be able to specify options to LILO to get various hardware recognized However now those options don t seem to do anything Why is this and what can I do E 9 System Administration Answer Due to the
186. at you select the default No Clockchip Setting entry but experienced users may want to select a specific clockchip 6 3 The X Window System 93 Selecting your Server If you are unsure what chipset you have the best way to find out is usually to look at the card Figure 6 1 lists which chipsets and boards require which servers Pick the one that best matches your hardware Server Chipset 8514 IBM 8514 A Boards and true clones AGX All XGA graphics boards I128 9 Imagine 128 including Series II boards Mach32 ATI boards using the Mach32 chipset Mach64 ATI boards using the Mach64 chipset Mach8 ATI boards using the Mach8 chipset Mono VGA boards in monochrome P9000 Diamond Viper but not the 9100 and Others S3 39 Boards most Diamonds some Orchids Others S3V Boards using the S3 ViRGE including DX GX VX chipset SVGA Trident 8900 amp 9400 Cirrus Logic C amp T ET4000 53 ViRGE Others VGA16 All VGA boards 16 color only W32 All ET4000 W32 cards but not standard ET4000 s Figure 6 1 XFree86 X Servers Finishing Up If later you want to increase your refresh rate for your monitor you can edit the config file by hand or you can run Xconfigurator again and pick a monitor from our list that more closely matches the specs of your monitor The final configuration step consists of selecting the video modes that you want to include in your XF86Config file Use the arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the lis
187. ated access control using a combination of etc hosts allowand etc hosts deny Read the tcpd 8 and hosts access 5 man pages for complete details 11 9 Anonymous FTP Setting up anonymous FTP is simple All you need to do is install the anon ftp rpm package which you may have already done at install time Once it is installed anonymous FTP will be up and running There are a few files you might wish to edit to configure your FTP server etc ftpaccess This file defines most of the access control for your ftp server Some of the things that you can do are set up logical groups to control access from different sites limit the number of simultaneous FTP connections configure transfer logging and much more Read the ftpaccess man page for complete details etc ftphosts The ftphosts file is used to allow or deny access to certain accounts from various hosts Read the ftphosts man page for details etc ftpusers This file lists all the users that are not allowed to ftp into your machine For example root is listed in etc ftpusers by default That means that you can not ftp to your machine and log in as root This is a good security measure but some administrators prefer to remove root from this file 11 10 NFS Configuration NFS stands for Network File System and is a way to share files between machines as if they were on your local hard drive Linux can be both an NFS server and an NES client which means that it can 11 10 NF
188. ath X11 Games Strategy Me xdemineur 1 1 1 man pica dose Packages selected 3 4867kb Figure 10 10 Packages Selected for Installation Total Finished Remaining Packages 3 0 3 kbytes 4867 605 4262 Time 00 02 40 00 00 20 00 02 20 xpilot 1126kb Figure 10 11 Installation Progress If you run out of disk space during an installation the install will fail However the package which was being installed when the error occurred may leave some files around To clean this up reinstall the package after you ve made more disk space available 10 4 4 Uninstalling Packages Uninstalling a package is not the same as upgrading one When a package is uninstalled any files it uses that are not needed by other packages on your system are removed Changed configuration files are copied to lt filename gt rpmsave so you can reuse them later Like verifying and querying packages you can remove a package through the buttons on the right of the glint window or through a context sensitive menu Remember that when you make a choice 183 184 Glint from a group s menu the operation is performed on all of the packages in that group so be careful You ve selected the following packages to uninstall Name Version Release xpilot 3 4 0 acm 4 7 xlander ues xdemineur 1 1 xtetris 2 6 cxhextris 1 0 xbill 1 1 Are you sure you want to do this Yes Figure 10 12 Uninstall Window Once you ve begun the uninstall
189. ation Select Primer Connect Lon Hoa ps this pe liter connected EE pd LAR Hanger mr d Cato eta Cae selecta Figure 5 6 Selecting Printer Type Every print ques hich print jbr ara directed bir needs s ns bofis lpr aed a apl director arrgciatmi with it Bhat nea and directory rhauld be gse Foe this quae Hume of queer Spaal diractary Cmampes selecta Figure 5 7 Standard Printer Options 5 6 Configuring a Printer 73 Hhat dasica ix yar printer connected La trots that dera lp ia quisas let to LTL Printer ule ETERNA Auto debterted portst dea por Hat Beterbad dara pil Ratected Ade lp Mot Rrteertes Tan at nn een Figure 5 8 Local Printer Device Ta ura a recta pd print quas you maed to ruppluy ihe hostrume of the printer seras ad the queue nume an that amar which jahr hold ba placed in Panata horin Rewobs quer Tan Feuer co o Chere selecta Figure 5 9 Remote Ipd Printer Options Finishing the Installation 5 6 3 LAN Manager Printers If you selected LAN Manager as your printer s connection type you ll see a dialog box similar to the one in Figure 5 10 4 LAN Hose Pr ire Options To prirmt to 5 LAN manager primb uod need ta provide tha LAR manager hart nama this iz not alga tha rama 55 the machines TOP IF hosting am possibly the P mddrarr of tha print mars ar wall ar tha hea nama For the primer pos ulah to aesa an anm apa Loss ura names arl pem
190. ave additional free space for building kernels and you may want to keep more than one version of the kernel available Sources For RPM Based Packages If a source package file aka SRPM is installed the files are stored here Note that unless specified otherwise any packages built will also use a build directory located here Again the size of this partition would depend on the amount of software you anticipate build ing A tmp partition As the name implies the tmp partition is for temporary files Creating a partition dedicated to tmp is a good idea for larger multiuser systems or network server machines The reason is that many active users can fill the root partition which is where tmp is located It s not necessary to dedicate a partition to tmp on single user workstations A var partition Your Red Hat Linux system will write to log files in var 10og Files queued for printing will normally be written to var spool These are just two examples of data that is written to var Unless otherwise configured var will be part of the root filesystem and normally will not have much available free space If you anticipate a lot of print mail or log activity on your system you might want to consider creating a partition dedicated to var In general only multiuser or server systems would make effective use of a separate var filesystem An opt partition Some third party software is designed to install itself un
191. awrite cd dosutils rawrite exe 3 When prompted for a disk for the boot image enter MmagesMooot img 4 Then change floppies and run rawrite again When prompted enter images supp img If you are in Linux or another Linux like operating system you can mount the CD ROM and use dd to write the data to floppy With Linux you could do the following dd if mnt cdrom images boot img of dev fd0 bs 72k dd if mnt cdrom images supp img of dev fd0 bs 72k E 6 5 What is the difference between Linux and DOS disk names Question I have an IDE system and I am confused by how Linux sets up drives in comparison to DOS Can you explain this Answer Linux sets up the drive system in a very different manner than DOS and this can be rather confusing Instead of calling the first hard drive C Linux uses a combination of letters signifying what kind of BUS sd for SCSI hd for IDE and in which order the drive was detected Finally a number is added onto the end to specify which partition on the drive is being referenced For IDE hard drives the layout depends on which IDE channel the drive is on and whether it is the master or slave on that channel 316 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Channel Jumper hdx ide0 master hda ide0 slave hdb idel master hdc idel slave hdd ide2 master hde ide2 slave hdf ide3 master hdg ide3 slave hdh ide0 primary idel secondary ide2 tertiary ide3 quaternary
192. be providing all the information and entering it yourself DHCP and bootp retrieve their information from a remote server of the corresponding kind If you re not sure what option to choose talk to your systems administrator If you re the systems administrator and you re not sure Figure 8 23 Adaptor 1 select Manual and consider a career in the food services industry DHCP and bootp Required fields e Net device The type of network card you are using for example eth0 would be the appro priate entry to use the first Ethernet card e Kernel module The correct module based on your network card for further information see the list below 145 146 System Configuration For DHCP and bootp configurations you only need to specify the Net device and the Kernel module For the Net device you will choose from a list where the eth prefix represents ethernet cards the arc specifies an arcnet card and the t x specifies token ring cards A complete list of network cards and their respective modules can be found in Section D 4 on page 304 For the most recent up to date list please see our website at http www redhat com The netmask information will be set by default though depending on what kind of network you are setting up or becoming a part of you may need to specify this If you are connecting to an ISP ask them for the information Most likely it will be 255 255 255 0 the default Required fields for Manual Conf
193. ble before changing the time or date Package Management with RPM The Red Hat Package Manager RPM is an open packaging system available for anyone to use and works on both Red Hat Linux as well as other Linux and UNIX systems Red Hat Software encourages other vendors to take the time to look at RPM and use it for their own products RPM is distributable under the terms of the GPL For the end user RPM provides many features that make maintaining a system far easier than it has ever been Installing uninstalling and upgrading RPM packages are all one line commands and all the messy details are taken care of for you RPM maintains a database of installed packages and their files which allows you to perform powerful queries and verification of your system During upgrades RPM handles configuration files specially so that you never lose your customizations a feature that is impossible with straight tar gz files For the developer RPM allows you to take source code for software and package it into source and binary packages for end users This process is quite simple and is driven from a single file and optional patches that you create This clear delineation of pristine sources and your patches and build instructions eases the maintenance of the package as new versions of the software are released 9 1 RPM Design Goals Before trying to understand how to use RPM it helps to have an idea of what the design goals are 166 Pack
194. boots using SysV init as well as the differences between the init used in older Linux releases and SysV init Init is the program that gets run by the kernel at boot time It is in charge of starting all the normal processes that need to run at boot time These include the getty processes that allow you to log in NFS daemons FTP daemons and anything else you want to run when your machine boots SysV init is fast becoming the standard in the Linux world to control the startup of software at boot time This is because it is easier to use and more powerful and flexible than the traditional BSD init 211 212 System Administration SysV init also differs from BSD init in that the config files are in a subdirectory of etc instead of residing directly in etc This directory is called rc d In there you will find rc sysinit and the following directories init d rcO rcl rc2 res rc4 ECO rc6 Oo 000000 init d contains a bunch of scripts Basically you need one script for each service you may need to start at boot time or when entering another runlevel Services include things like networking nfs sendmail httpd etc Services do not include things like setserial that must only be run once and then exited Things like that should go in rc local or rc serial If you want rc local it should be in etc rc d Most systems include one even though it doesn t do much You can also include an rc serial in et c rc dif you need to
195. butions or a Linux like operating system you ll probably find what you re looking for in some of the more in depth reference material available Red Hat Software s Linux Undercover and Linux Complete Command Reference are great for overall documentation while O Reilly s more specialized titles are valuable when you need a lot of information on a particular subject Old Timer If you re a long time Red Hat Linux user you probably don t need us telling you what documentation to read Thanks for reading this far We also discuss the issue of additional documentation in Chapter 6 on page 83 2 2 Getting the Right Red Hat Linux Components If you ve purchased the Red Hat Linux boxed set you re ready to go However mistakes occasion ally happen so now is a good time to double check the contents of your boxed set If you haven t purchased a Red Hat Linux boxed set skip to Section 2 2 3 on page 9 2 2 1 Contents of the Red Hat Linux Boxed Set The Red Hat Linux boxed set contains the following items e The Red Hat Linux Installation Guide e The Alpha Installation Addendum 2 2 Getting the Right Red Hat Linux Components e Red Hat Linux CDs 1 and 2 e The Linux Applications CD Dw Boot diskette e License and Registration information Let s take a quick look at each item Installation Guide The Red Hat Linux Installation Guide is what you re currently reading It contains the information necessary to insta
196. can contain other groups which allows for flexible locations of packages Groups are used to place packages that perform similar functions in similar locations For example Red Hat includes many application programs such as editors and spreadsheets All of the text based ones appear in the Applications group Inside of that group there is another grouping for all of the editors that are shipped By convention groups are written in the same way as UNIX paths The top most group is written first and subsequent groups follow with a slash separating the group names This means that an X based drawing program appears in the X11 Applications Graphics group To view the packages and subgroups within a group double click the left mouse button on a group s folder icon The window then changes to show what that package contains The top line of the package display shows which group you re currently looking in as well as the groups leading to the current one To return to the previous group you were looking at double click on the Back folder which is always in the upper left hand corner of the folder area though it often gets scrolled away 10 2 The Package Display If you d like to examine a subgroup in a new window double click the middle mouse button on its folder If your mouse has only two buttons click both This will create a new window with that group in it 10 2 1 Context Sensitive Menus Pressing the right mouse button on any icon
197. ccccoooocccos 97 Sound drivers cuina eeu a ck re deren 97 sound support enhancements ssssssssesesseseeee 3 source code availability Of oooo 311 SPARC boot method choosing 555 357 booting from diskette ooooooooocooooo 357 CD ROM boot commands 358 CD ROM installation suuse 360 choosing installation method 360 console commands sss 355 disk partitioning 005 362 diskette boot commands 357 ETIPunstallation rere et 361 hard disk installation 361 installation overview ssus 355 installation with serial terminal 361 network boot commands 358 INDEX NES installation i cocer e ene 361 NFS mounted root installation using 356 overview of information specific to 353 ramdisk critelia oooocccoccccccccc o 356 selecting components sssuuus 362 SILO config ration cce esee enne 362 supported hardware suu 353 swap partitions 0 cece cece 363 unsupported CD ROMs 354 unsupported hardware 354 using network boot commands 360 using RARP during install 359 using TFTP during install 359 X WINDOWS 35er eer RU eee died 363 SPARC COMPuter comicios cines I ee ene x SPARC specific information 8
198. ce to protect from a possible error in a new kernel you should keep the original kernel available Adding a kernel to the LILO menu is as simple as re naming the original kernel in boot copying the new kernel to boot adding a few lines in etc lilo conf and running sbin lilo Here is an example of the default etc 1ilo conf file shipped with Red Hat Linux boot dev hda map boot map install boot boot b prompt timeout 100 image boot vmlinuz label linux root dev hdal read only 11 6 Building a Custom Kernel Now you must update etc lilo conf If you built a new initrd image you must tell LILO to use it In this example of etc 1ilo conf we have added four lines at the bottom of the file to indicate another kernel to boot from We have renamed boot vmlinuz to boot vmlinuz old and changed its label to o1d We have also added an initrd line for the new kernel boot dev hda map boot map install boot boot b prompt timeout 100 image boot vmlinuz label linux initrd boot initrd root dev hdal read only image boot vmlinuz old label old root dev hdal read only Now when the system boots and you press Tab at the LILO boot prompt two choices will be shown LILO boot linux old To boot the new kernel 1inux simply press Enter or wait for LILO to time out If you want to boot the old kernel 01d simply enter old and press Enter Here is a summary of the steps e mv boot vmlinuz boot vmlinuz
199. ced and distributed in whole or in part in any medium physical or electronic so long as this copyright notice remains intact and unchanged on all copies Commercial redistribution is permitted and encouraged but you may not redistribute it in whole or in part under terms more restrictive than those under which you received it Printed in Canada Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 23 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 New Features Of Red Hat Linux 5 2 Installation Related Enhancements eee System Administration Related Enhancements ooo Miscellaneous New Features 2 rs Before You Begin Getting Documentation lt s ibaa op RR SOR E RUSO A Getting the Right Red Hat Linux Components less Things You Should Know s ios sese e hr E RR ERREUR Installation Methods ee sag due kac o Romo RARE AVE SOEUR GR SG X Xe ROS Need a Supplemental Diskette eA Installation Classes o o Disk Partitions o p seed era a eee oe A A A Note About Kernel Drivers e o It You Have Problems aa o le nk bi 2 10 One Last Note els 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Starting the Installation The Installation Program User Interface 1 ee Starting the Installation Program a s ae e e y a a e e E a a aea a a Beginning theInstallation A Selecting an Installation Method ee A N e m al CONTENTS 4 Continuing the Installati
200. cept without changing any of the parameters For detailed information on the various filters select the Help button on the Filter control screen e Select the account whose password you wish to change This will open the User information tab see figure 8 8 e Select Passwd from the options at the bottom of the screen Linuxconf will then prompt you to enter the new password There is also a field called Confirmation where you will need to type the password again This is to prevent you from mistyping the password 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 121 Passwords must be at least 6 characters in length They may contain numbers as well as a mix of lowercase and uppercase letters If you decide against changing the password just hit Cancel Once you have entered the new password select Accept Changing the root Password Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open Contig gt gt Change root password Enter the current root password Select Accept Enter the new root password Reenter the new root password in the Confirmation field go ON Gv gr e Select Accept Changing the root Password General Overview Changing the roots password isn t handled in the same manner as changing a user s password Be cause of both the importance and security considerations surrounding root access linuxconf requires you to verify t
201. ch An ampi pras mans do show Special accounts all ara PPP accaunts SLIP accaunis via normal ic Login Perfos UUCP accounts Full sara POP accaunts inia any Virtual POP accaunts dna LA From Eniail alira Un Ts iar ial ald ri gus naa timan uer es Falicies ac CENCE P aw rd 2 account pale Acce Cante Aagilablg user shells i alabe PPP shells Buglabie SLE inlita Massa df tra day Fig stare local diva nts Dung mer i Figure 8 4 Filter Control Screen group here you can specify the group associated with the account The default is a group that s the same as the login name So jsmith would have the group jsmith Supplementary groups here is where you can specify any additional groups We suggest that if you want to add a user to a group or groups you do so here rather than changing the group field Group names should be separated by spaces The default for this field is blank meaning no supplementary groups Home directory specifies the home or login directory for the account The default is home login where loginis replaced by the login name A home directory is your starting point in the directory structure when you log in or if in X for each xterm window opened This is also where account specific preference files are stored Command interpreter specifies the location of the command interpreter Command inter preters are usually referred to as shells The default is displayed in the drop
202. changed at the end of 1996 to PostgreSQL PostgreSQL runs on Solaris SunOS HPUX AIX Linux Irix FreeBSD and most flavours of Unix postgresq l clients Version 6 3 2 1 131K This package includes only the clients and client libraries needed to access an PostgreSQL server The server is included in the main package If all you need is to connect to another PostgreSQL server the this is the only package you need to install In this package there are client libraries available for C C and PERL as well as several command line utilities you can use to manage your databases on a remote PostgreSQL server postgresql data Version 6 3 2 780K This packages includes an initial database structure directory for PostgreSOL For a quick startup on PostegreSQL it is recommended to install this package with your PostgreSOL backend server altough it is not required If you choose to not install this package you will have to create the initial database yourself using initdb command and possibly modify the postgresql startup script if you choose a directory other than var lib pgsql for storing your databases C 1 Applications C 1 3 Editors In this section we have an assortment of packages that provide basic and in some cases not so basic file editing capabilities ed Version 0 2 103K B This is the GNU line editor It is an implementation of one of the first editors under nix Some programs rely on it but in gene
203. cific to Intel compatible computers ALPHA Alpha owners may skip ahead to Section 2 7 5 on the next page SPARC owners may skip ahead to Section 2 7 5 on the following page BIOS Related Limitations Impacting LILO LILO is subject to some limitations imposed by the BIOS in most Intel based computers Specifically most BIOSes can t access more than two hard drives and they can t access any data stored beyond cylinder 1023 the 1024th cylinder of any drive Note that some recent BlOSes do not have these limitations but this is by no means universal All the data LILO needs to access at boot time including the Linux kernel are located in the boot directory which is normally part of the root partition known as Here are the guidelines you must follow if you are going to use LILO to boot your Red Hat Linux system On First Two IDE Drives If you have 2 IDE or EIDE drives boot must be located on one of them Note that this two drive limit also includes any IDE CD ROM drives on your primary IDE controller So if you have one IDE hard drive and one IDE CD ROM on your primary controller boot must be located on the first hard drive only even if you have other hard drives on your secondary IDE controller On First IDE Or First SCSI Drive If you have one IDE or EIDE drive and one or more SCSI drives boot must be located either on the IDE drive or the SCSI drive at ID 0 No other SCSI IDs will work On First Two SCSI D
204. ckstart File 385 a usr partition of at least 500MB remember it s growable but it cannot grow beyond 800MB Finally the last line will create a tmp partition of at least 100MB again it s growable So for that 1GB system you would end up with a 250MB root a 50MB swap a 550MB usr and a 150MB tmp partition If another system has a 2GB drive you would get a 250MB root a 50MB swap a 800MB usr and a 900MB tmp H 3 12 install and upgrade Install Upgrade Selection The next item to specify is whether you are doing a fresh install or an upgrade of an already installed system For a fresh install use install For an upgrade of an existing system use upgrade Keep in mind that for upgrades the only items that matter are e installation media CD ROM or NFS e device specification if necessary e keyboard setup install updgrade specification which should be upgrade of course LILO configuration H 3 13 mouse Mouse Configuration To define the type of mouse your system has you must use the mouse keyword Run mouseconfig help on an already installed Red Hat Linux for a list of mouse types Depending on the type of mouse you may also need to specify the device to which the mouse is attached The default device is correctly set for bus mice For serial mice the default device is dev cua0 but can be overridden with the device option followed by the device name such as cual For example for a three but
205. co a 242 407 408 INDEX OF PACKAGES tetexcafmi ia zebra eer ed EE Red 238 SAXIO S CEODS is PURO eden ae 243 o A atre ern Ede ti nici 238 VIO CK A ENORMES TEN 273 tete dla ei RERO RES 238 tetex dvipSsss eis eeteru r ir 238 W tetex latex ocio ida caida i ed ide 239 letexekdvi esie cde essent ede co e MPa died 239 Wget see nnne 236 GRIEG itr PI be ese cue tua e Md 239 Wire 275 textutils esses nene 286 WindowMaker sss 296 ipe ie E M M 270 winakerconf iisced dais ek mers Fade yas 297 He sey NK E USE 283 wmconfig sess ee 297 timeconfig nM TEMP 283 A ets andes ter a du E ME E 286 HIME MH ERE NEE 270 A 265 timetOol meciocidnicd cds 283 n i e e ese ese eee nei 237 X nb M HOP EE E 247 E eeeane toe 248 A Bergan tenet dad ERA 297 tkinter A RIA 248 x3270 ee a rr 288 A ae tate a eeeaatenc jal 293 XAN M sse eene 288 tksysv DURER MN AAN AA NURSE 283 Xaw3d S due br dic ensue RO TR B TERI A DRE URN an A PESE rie ra 292 tmpwatch ETEEN AE ERR 283 Xawad devel ccoo cai ici cien id 292 traceroute asain pandgev a aR T Semon 268 xbanner eeeeeeee eene 286 A etui Carb ble Sane domat 288 Xbill oes eee et e 290 ES ee cae ee pede A N 275 MIME os daas dox tom fats vede a ee se MEE EAE 290 E 237 N 290 ao 258 XDOING 0 eee e 290 tunel perre rir innon EEE AREE 283 Xxchomp sseeee 290 Xconfiguratot micro re es EET ARA 294 XCp Stale 2 14 ala days 294 U xdalicloGk 242 opus Iren Ia er eR Mesi e 294 UCA MP eese osea diately PES
206. con selects or unselects that package while those op tions on a group s folder icon select and unselect all of the packages in that group Using these menu options makes selecting groups of packages much quicker than selecting each package individually 177 178 Glint 10 2 3 Viewing Available Packages ey 5 ir E instal Daemons Shells Games Documentation Applications Development Base Packages selected 0 0kb ie Upgrade Ey Figure 10 3 Available Window To see what packages are available for you to install choose the Available pushbutton from any glint window After a few moments a new window like the one shown in figure 10 3 will appear The differences in the title and buttons indicate that this window is listing packages you may install Navigating through these packages and selecting them is the same as in the other glint windows If you get an error message from glint saying that it can t find any RPMs see the section below on Configuration 10 3 Configuration The only configuration information glint needs is the path to new RPMs When you re using your Red Hat Linux CD ROM this will probably be mnt cdrom RedHat RPMS which is the default path for glint If you download new RPMs from the Internet or want to install RPMs via a NFS mounted CD ROM this path will probably be different for you To change this path first be sure to close all of the windows listing available packages you may have open
207. conserve power C 11 Utilities helptool Version 2 4 23K The help tool provides a unified graphical interface for searching through many of the help sources available including man pages and GNU texinfo documents info Version 3 12 193K 5 The GNU project uses the texinfo file format for much of its documentation This package includes a standalone browser program to view these files ipfwadm Version 2 3 0 85K This is the IP firewall and accounting administration tool It is useful if you need to run a firewall a machine that acts as a secure gateway to the Internet isapnptools Version 1 15a 175K These programs allow ISA Plug And Play devices to be configured on a Linux machine This program is suitable for all systems whether or not they include a PnP BIOS In fact a PnP BIOS adds some complications because it may already activate some cards so that the drivers can find them and these tools can unconfigure them or change their settings causing all sorts of nasty effects If you have for example plug and play network cards that already work I suggest you read section 4 on the format of the configuration file below very carefully kbd Version 0 96a 1 080K This package contains utilities to load console fonts and keyboard maps It also includes a number of different fonts and keyboard maps kbdconfig Version 1 8 2 23K B This is a terminal mode program for setting the k
208. counts tab see figure 8 5 on the page before e If you have more than 15 accounts on the system Linuxconf will provide you with a filter screen see figure 8 4 on page 116 You can use this to select a smaller range of accounts than the full list To get the full list select Accept without changing any of the parameters For detailed information on the various filters select the Help button on the Filter control screen e Select the account you wish to modify This will open the User information tab 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Users accounts Hori al liscr accounts Grua dations Chonga meri pariciwoed Special accounts PPP accum SLIP accaunts via mamal ic UUCP accounts POP aceaunt inia ani Virtual POP accaunta iral Eniail aliis iur El nS iri Vn rl Hear ls bri Paititi Paword amp account police Alba user iiki Buglabie PPP shell n alabe SLE ihiihi Massage giiia day Fig stare local diva nt aiii cain Mine cong moa La run rer informa jenih passerend fau must galar fea new passend Bini Ta make vere poe have anier it cameciy Parmam Canem Accent conce Hom Figure 8 7 Change Password Screen On the User information screen the information can be changed as desired To implement the changes select Accept If you decide against making any changes select Cancel This guarantees that no changes are made Changing a User s Password Quick Reference
209. creen Unix mail client Features include MIME support color POPS support message threading bindable keys and threaded sorting mode nmh Version 0 27 4 353K nmh mail handling system with POP support nmh is a popular mail handling system but includes only a command line interface It is an important base however for programs like xmh and exmh pine Version 4 04 3 071K Pine is a very full featured text based mail and news client It is aimed at both novice and expert users It includes an easy to use editor pico for composing messages Pico has gained popularity as a stand alone text editor in it s own right It features MIME support address books and support for IMAP mail and MH style folders C 1 8 Math This section contains packages of interest to the mathematician in all of us bc Version 1 05a 128K bc is a text mode calculator of sorts It has many extended features such as base translation It can also accept input from stdin and return output dc is the RPN version gnuplot Version 3 6 940K This is the GNU plotting package It can be used to graph data in an X window or to a file C 1 9 Networking This section contains network related packages arpwatch Version 2 1a4 117K Arpwatch and arpsnmp are tools that monitors ethernet or fddi activity and maintain a database of ethernet ip address pairings 236 Package List libpcap Version 0 4 123K Libpcap is a syst
210. ct with it f2c Version 19970805 819K f2c is a Fortran to C translation and building program It can take fortran source code convert it to C and then use gcc to compile it into an executable fort77 Version 1 14a 11K This is the driver for f2c a fortran to C translator gcc Version 2 7 2 3 2 041K The GNU C compiler a full featured ANSI C compiler with support for K amp R C as well GCC provides many levels of source code error checking tradionaly provided by other tools such as lint produces debugging information and can perform many different optimizations to the resulting object code This contains the back end for C and Objective C compilers as well guavac Version 1 2 2 564K Guavac is a standalone compiler for the Java programming language It was written entirely in C and should be portable to any platform supporting Gnu s C compiler or a similarly powered system guile Version 1 2 634K Guile a portable embeddable Scheme implementation written in C Guile provides a machine inde pendent execution platform that can be linked in as a library when building extensible programs C 4 Development guile devel Version 1 2 1 949K What s needed to develop apps linked w guile kaffe Version 1 0 b1 1 495K This is Kaffe a virtual machine designed to execute Java bytecode This machine can be configured in two modes In one mode it operates as a pure bytecode interprete
211. ctory Note that the Red Hat Linux boot diskettes are in MS DOS format making it easy to copy the kickstart file under Linux using the mcopy command or if you insist you can also use Windows Although there s no technological requirement for it most diskette based kickstart installations install Red Hat Linux from CD ROM H 1 2 On the Network Network installations using kickstart are quite common because system administrators can easily automate the installation of many networked computers quickly and painlessly In general the ap proach most commonly used is for the administrator to have both a BOOTP DHCP server and an NFS server on the local network The BOOTP DHCP server is used to give the client system its net working information while the NFS server serves the actual files used during the installation Often these two servers run on the same physical machine but there is no requirement for this To do a network based kickstart installation you must have a BOOTP DHCP server on your net work and it must include configuration information for the machine you are attempting to install The BOOTP DHCP server will be used to give the client its networking information as well as the location of the kickstart file If a kickstart file is specified by the BOOTP DHCP server the client sys tem will attempt an NFS mount of the file s path and will copy the specified file to the client using it as the kickstart file The exact settings require
212. d Hat Linux Obt tning cuui eee ara mieu 310 obtaining updates tO oooccocooooo 310 USING n 325 Wliatitis iive e etc eI re ER eere YS X Red Hat Linux boxed set contents of 6 Red Hat Lin x CDS cite bte ed eget 7 RedHat Linux FAQ esessevei mehr x etn 307 Red Hat Linux versions 6 0000 351 Red Hat Linux methods of installing 14 Red Hat newsgroups ooooooccccccocccccncooo 107 Red Hat Package Manager see RPM Red Hat Software mailing listS ooooooooooo o 106 107 applixware list ssssuuu 107 ror c nation 107 blinux listz pecore diee esatta 107 cde list gMoMe aNNOUNCe 6 6s eee eee en 107 GERAIS ied ceto datio ea ooa t nies 107 hutincane list cessere ette tend 107 A gray ate aleuasece 107 linux s cutity i cc cec Steins wets 107 mb8k list eee erret eere 107 pam list redhat announce list 107 redhat develliSt ooooooooooo oo 107 redhat install list oo o ooo 107 redhat list ecce rer ene 107 redhat ppp list 107 pal dica 107 sonda iaa 107 400 A e Pa eerte 107 A ueria sanii Raised 107 Red Hat Software contacting oooooooo 308 Red Hat specific file locations 189 registration information sisse 8 remote lpd printer configuring 70 71 removing packages with glint 183 repartitioning strategy
213. d Printer Op tions see Figure 5 7 on page 72 Enter the name of the queue and the spool directory you d like to use or accept the default information The dialog box you ll see next depends on the printer connection type you selected Turn to the section that corresponds to your printer connection type 5 6 Configuring a Printer What muice hu ld ba automatically charted Pre FD hor are LIC E M Figure 5 5 Selecting Services Local Section 5 6 1 Remote Ipd Section 5 6 2 LAN Manager Section 5 6 3 on page 74 5 6 1 Locally Attached Printers If you selected Local as your printer s connection type you ll see a dialog box similar to the one in Figure 5 8 on page 73 Enter the printer device name in the field provided As a convenience the installation program attempts to determine which printer ports are available on your computer Select Next and press Space Now turn to Section 5 6 4 on page 74 to continue 5 6 2 Remote Ipd Printers If you selected Remote Ipd as your printer s connection type you ll see a dialog box similar to the one in Figure 5 9 on page 73 Enter the name of the computer to which the printer is directly connected in the Remote hostname field The name of the queue on the remote computer that is associated with the remote printer goes in the remote queue field Select Next and press Space Now turn to Section 5 6 4 on page 74 to continue 71 72 Finishing the Install
214. d to the access control list Launch your web browser and enter the following URL http host 98 Replacing host with your system s hostname of course You should see the main linuxconf page Note that you will need to enter your system s root password to gain access beyond the first page Adding a User Account Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open Config gt Users accounts gt Normal 4 Select Add 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Enter the account s login and full names Enter information in other fields only as necessary Select Accept Enter the initial password for the account A ND op Reenter the initial password for the account in the Confirmation field 10 Select Accept Adding a User Account General Overview Adding a user is one of the most basic tasks you will encounter in administering your system To add a user e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt gt This will open the Users ac counts tab see figure 8 5 on page 117 e If you have more than 15 accounts on the system Linuxconf will provide you with a filter screen see figure 8 4 on the next page You can use this to select a smaller range of accounts than the full list To get the full list select Accept without chan
215. d vary depending on the BOOTP DHCP server you use Here s an example for the DHCP server shipped with Red Hat Linux filename usr new machine kickstart next server blarg redhat com Note that you should use f ilename for the kickstart file s name or the directory in which the kicstart file resides and next server to set the NFS server name If the filename returned by the BOOTP DHCP server ends with a slash then it is interpreted as a path only In this case the client system mounts that path using NFS and searches for a specially named file The filename the client searches for is ip addr kickstart The ip addr section of the filename should be replaced with the client s IP address in dotted decimal notation For example the filename for a computer with an IP address of 10 10 0 1 would be 10 10 0 1 kickstart Note that if you don t specify a server name then the client system will attempt to use the server that answered the BOOTP DHCP request as its NFS server If you don t specify a path or filename the client system will try to mount kickstart from the BOOTP DHCP server and will try to find the kickstart file using the same lt ip addr gt kickstart filename as described above H 2 Starting a Kickstart Installation 379 H 2 Starting a Kickstart Installation To begin a kickstart installation you must boot the system from a Red Hat Linux boot diskette and enter a special boot command at the boot prompt
216. der opt Unless an opt partition is created software that attempts to install itself under opt will end up on the root partition which may not have sufficient free space Of course this is not the only way of solving the opt problem it is also possible to create an opt symbolic link to another partition with more space such as usr A boot partition While many of the partitions mentioned here make sense only for very large active systems this partition might be very useful on a small system where free space is tight If you recall back in Section 2 7 4 on page 25 we discussed the various limitatons imposed by the standard PC BIOS and how these limitations impact the LILO bootloader All the files LILO needs to access at boot time are in the boot directory Since the files including the 27 28 Before You Begin Linux kernel in boot only take up a megabyte or so if you re having trouble finding space fora 100 MB root partition in a place where LILO can getat it you might have better luck trying to squeeze in a 5 10 MB generously oversized partition for boot You ll still need to create a root partition but it can now be located anywhere on your system the BIOS restrictions only apply to the partition holding boot 2 8 A Note About Kernel Drivers During installation of Red Hat Linux there are some limits placed on the filesystems and other drivers supported by the kernel However after installation there is su
217. disk isa utility program that is used to create delete or modify partitions on a disk drive Filesystem A filesystem is the method by which information is stored on disk drives Different operating systems normally use different filesystems making it difficult to share the contents of a disk drive between two operating systems However Linux supports multiple filesystems making it possible to for example read write a partition dedicated to Windows Floppy A somewhat historical term for a small mass storage device in a removable cartridge and meant to be read written in a compatible drive See diskette 1Well it should be 367 368 Glossary Formatting The act of writing a filesystem on a disk drive FQDN An acronym for Fully Qualified Domain Name An FQDN is the human readable name that includes a computer s hostname and associated domain name For example given a hostname of foo and a domain name of bar com the FODN would be foo bar com FTP Anacronym for File Transfer Protocol Also the name of a program that as the name implies permits the copying of files from one system on a network to another Gateway In networking terms refers to a device that connects one or more computers on a net work to other networks The device may be specialized hardware such as a router or may be a general purpose computer system configured to act as a gateway Geometry When referring to disk drives the physical c
218. dix B on page 225 for instructions on writing the image file to a diskette Make sure you label the boot and ramdisk diskettes appropriately Diskette Boot Commands For SPARC systems with a PROM version of 2 0 or greater the proper boot command when in new command mode is boot floppy On the other hand SPARC systems with PROM versions less than 2 0 should use the following command at the prompt b fd Please Note There have been reports that some systems with pre 2 0 PROMs cannot boot the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation program from diskette If you find this to be the case with your SPARC system you will need to use another boot method 357 358 Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC F 5 2 Booting From CD ROM If your SPARC system has a fully Sun supported CD ROM drive you can boot directly from the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM For SPARC systems with a PROM version of 2 0 or better use the following command when in new command mode boot cdrom SPARC systems with PROM versions less than 2 0 may not be able to boot from a CD ROM at all although we ve received reports that at least some PROM 1 3 systems have been able to boot from CD ROM Theoretically if your SPARC system has a CD ROM at SCSI id 6 the following command should boot the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation program b sd 0 6 0 Unfortunately due to a lack of resources Red Hat Software has not been able to test this boot com mand If one of ou
219. dline library will read a line from the terminal and return it using prompt as a prompt If prompt is null no prompt is issued The line returned is allocated with malloc 3 so the caller must free it when finished The line returned has the final newline removed so only the text of the line remains rpm devel Version 2 5 5 232K The RPM packaging system includes a C library that makes it easy to manipulate RPM packages and databases It is intended to ease the creation of graphical package managers and other tools that need intimate knowledge of RPM packages slang devel Version 0 99 38 472K This package contains the slang static libraries and header files required to develop slang based ap plications It also includes documentation to help you write slang based apps svgalib devel Version 1 3 0 751K These are the libraries and header files that are needed to build programs which use SVGAlib SV GAlib allows programs to use full screen graphics on a variety of hardware platforms and without the overhead X requires xpm devel Version 3 4j 217K Allows you to develop applications that display bitmaps in X Windows C 4 Development 251 zlib devel Version 1 1 3 162K The zlib compression library provides in memory compression and decompression functions in cluding integrity checks of the uncompressed data This version of the library supports only one compression method deflation but other a
220. do serial port specific things at boot time The chain of events is as follows e The kernel looks in several places for init and runs the first one it finds e initruns etc rc d rc sysinit e rc sysinit does a bunch of necessary things and then runs rc serial if it exists e init runs all the scripts for the default runlevel e initruns rc local The default runlevel is decided in etc inittab You should have a line close to the top like id 3 initdefault From this you d look in the second column and see that the default runlevel is 3 as should be the case for most systems If you want to change it you can edit etc inittab by hand and change the 3 Be very careful when you are messing with the inittab If you do mess up you can fix it by rebooting and doing LILO boot linux single 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown This should allow you to boot into single user mode so you can fix inittab Now how does it run all the right scripts If you enter 1s 1 on rc3 d you might see something like lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 17 3 11 Sl10network gt init d network lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 16 3 11 S30syslog init d syslog lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 14 3 32 S40cron gt init d cron lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 14 3 11 S50inet init d inet lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 13 3 11 S60nfs gt init d nfs lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 15 3 11 S70nfsfs gt init d nfsfs lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 18 3 11 S90lpd gt init d lpd in
221. doesn t want to work with it What can I do to fix it Answer It has been found that the 2 button Microsoft Mouse of version 2 1A or greater is a smart mouse It has been speculated that it is looking for wakeup signals from Windows or it will not respond back to the computer This causes X and or gpm to not work with Linux because the mouse is not responding in a way these programs are expecting To reset the mouse to work with these programs you can follow one of several methods Use mouseconfig to set things up before running X E 9 System Administration 335 mouseconfig kickstart device cuaX where X is either 0 for com 1 or 1 for com2 Another solution is to get gpm 1 13 run as gpm t pnp R and configure XFree8 6 for MouseSystems Protocol with dev gpmdata as the device E 9 System Administration E 9 4 Questions about PAM Question What is PAM Why use it Answer PAM is a standard adopted by other unices such as Solaris 2 6 For more information on PAM please read http www redhat com linux info pam E 9 2 Questions about Secure Shell Question How can I setup Secure Shell SSH on my linux system Answer Due to United States export restrictions on encryption technology Red Hat Linux can not be shipped with ssh The site tp ftp replay comhas set up various downloads of ssh and PGP E 9 3 Problems with Linux finding all a machines RAM Question My machine has 128 Megs of RAM however
222. down box User ID the number associated with each user account This is automatically generated by the system when the account is created The User account creation screen has a number of fields only the login name is required though filling in the Full name field is strongly recommended Once you have entered the login name and 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf any other desired information select the Accept button at the bottom of the screen If you decide Dir accounts Horn User accounts Grup der nions Chonga rol pinni Special account PPP waun SLIP accaunts via mamai ik UUCP accounts POP acraunts inia anb Virtual POP accaunti dal Eniall aiias users accounts jenih John T Smith 2211 lz Ip 4 irr aliaa iri bom ae ront 15 Vira timan uir allis nai mail f Paititi neers neum B Password amp account policie opener npersipr 11 Araabia user ailh mel upper 15 Bualabie PPP shells AFTER shells Massage di tfr day Fig star local dris nts Dung sra uz rai aras sjo ad Figure 8 5 Users Accounts Screen against creating a new user hit Cancel instead Upon hitting Accept linuxconf will prompt you to enter the password There is also a field called Confirmation where you will need to type the password again This is to prevent you from mistyping the password Passwords must be at least 6 characters in length They may contain numbers as well as a mix of lowercas
223. e s an example Let s say that you want to see the man page for the swapon system call So you type man swapon You will actually get the man page for swapon 8 which is actually the command used to control swapping Using the chart above you can see that what you want is a system call and is located in section 2 You can then type man 2 swapon All of this is because man searches the man directories in the order shown above which means that the swapon 8 man page would be found before the swapon 2 man page You can also search the man pages for strings You do this using man k string to search for This won t work however unless the makewhatis database has been created Under Red Hat Linux this is done by a cron job overnight If you don t leave your sys tem running overnight the database won t get created If that is the case run the following command as the root user etc cron weekly makewhatis cron Once you ve done that note that it might take a while you could enter man k swapon That command would return man k swapon swapon swapoff 2 start stop swapping to file device swapon swapoff 8 enable disable devices and files for paging and swapping So you can see that there are pages in section 2 and 8 both referring to swapon and swapoff in this case How to Read a Man Page Man pages provide a great deal of information in very little space Because of this they can be difficult to read Here s a
224. e and uppercase letters Hit Accept when finished Modifying a User Account Quick Reference wo oO m Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open Config gt Users accounts gt Normal gt User accounts Select the user account Modify entries as desired au can esi ad nr delete unei Sotori fasd le abd a nex Bariniin 117 118 System Configuration lasers ait cunts Miia liscr accounts Grua dafinlons Changa rol pariciwoed Special accounts PPP gc cork SLIP accaunts via mmal ic UUCP accounts POP acaunmts jail andy Winia POP accaunts iniail lear accaual reatos au must spacify az Hast Da name and thea fell name Base infa Powteger man ones r The arcpunt e anablgd Ful ngre ae buen 1 hs viria domain wer aliadi Supplementary growps Palicios Hones d reclz niis pe Paword amp account police n alabe user diik h alabe PPP adh n alabo SLE sheik Massage giiia day Fig stare local diva nt ic Lid sara so rad mona re Carga User Copa hin hash Figure 8 6 User account creation 6 Select Accept Modifying a User Account General Overview e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt gt This will open the Users ac
225. e ene ene 80 commercial products oooccccooooo 81 LOAIDLIN caerse pitas ads pA eet pe 80 SYSLINUX choisie nr eti eh Ree 81 installing eee tepida nes 78 MBR installing ON sirsenis 78 root partition installing on 78 LILO and modules es 344 LILO BIOS related issues o ooooooocoomooo 25 LILO partition related issues 25 LILO removing sisse rek rh pret a eek 322 Linux booting ai e eve ATA 86 defined cce cd ix INDEX USO tencion ios Seka 325 Linux Applications CD ooooooocccccccccccccccos 8 Linux Documentation Project see LDP 105 Linux reMOVING 6 cece 322 Linux like O S creating installation diskette with 226 UCM e ovt case anoo os dation satay damned 110 account management with 114 115 account modification with 117 118 changing password with 119 120 changing root password with 121 date setting with eres 149 deleting account with 123 124 deleting group with 127 128 disabling account with 122 123 enabling account With 123 filesystem review with suu 133 group creation with 4 126 group management with 126 group modification with 129 130 modem configuration with 137 138 nameserver specification with 147 network configura
226. e to abandon any changes you ve made while in Disk Druid and would rather use fdisk instead you can select the Back button and press Space If you want to continue using Disk Druid but would like to start over press E5 and Disk Druid will be reset to its initial state When You re Finished Once you ve finished configuring partitions and entering mount points your screen should look something like the one in Figure 4 7 on the facing page Select OK and press Space Then turn to Section 4 5 on page 56 4 4 2 Using fdisk If you d rather use disk to manage partitions this is the section for you Once you ve selected fdisk you ll be presented with a dialog box entitled Partition Disks see Figure 4 8 on the facing page In this box is a list of every disk on your computer Move the highlight to the disk you d like to partition select Edit and press Space You will then enter fdisk and can partition the disk you selected Repeat this process for each disk you want to partition When you re done select Done 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux 53 E Current Risk Partitions Jum 1 Limas natia ARPA Linux ratis aar zpaal pd T SH rH Linux nativum Limo ss rbd WEH Linux nativa Ame Local Lir natus Fi manes irisa Gem CH4 Tatal Figure 4 7 Partitions and Mount Points Defined Ta install Pad Hat Linux ymu murt hraa at laart ana paritbon oF 50 HP dedicated to Limo Me suggest plaine that partiti
227. earch to find the one that is best for your situation INTEL As a convenience to our customers we provide the fips utility This is a freely available program that can resize FAT File Allocation Table partitions It s included on the Red Hat Linux Intel CD ROM in the dosut ils directory Please Note Many people have successfully used fips to repartition their hard drives However because of the nature of the operations carried out by fips and the wide variety of hardware and software configurations under which it must run Red Hat Software cannot guarantee that fips will work properly on your system Therefore no installation support whatsoever is available for fips use it at your own risk That said if you decide to repartition your hard drive with fips it is vital that you do two things e Perform a Backup Make two copies of all the important data on your computer These copies should be to removable media such as tape or diskettes and you should make sure they are readable before proceeding e Read the Documentation Completely read the fips documentation located in the dosutils fipsdocs subdirectory on Red Hat Linux Intel CD 1 Should use decide to use fips be aware that after fips runs you will be left with two parti tions the one you resized and the one fips created out of the newly freed space If your goal is to use that space to install Red Hat Linux you should delete the newly created parti tion either by using
228. eate a directory called RedHat in it From there you will need to copy the items from the cdrom E in our example over to the hard drive C in our example Here s what you would do mkdir C RedHat mkdir C RedHat base mkdir C RedHat RPMS copy E RedHat base C RedHat base copy E RedHat RPMS C RedHat RPMS If you do not have enough disk space for copying the entire RPMS directory tree over to your hard drive you will need to look in the file RedHat base comps file for the RPMS that are needed in the base and in any other sections you feel you need Once you have done this you can start the install and choose a Hard Drive install You will be asked to insert the supplemental floppy Once the supplemental disk has been loaded you will be presented with the next screen on the install When asked to select the partition containing the Red Hat Linux files do so and the install will proceed from there E 6 4 Where are the floppies Question My box didn t include floppy disks or my floppy disks are bad What can I do E 6 Installation 315 Answer We are sorry for the problem The cdrom contains all the data to make new boot and supplemental floppies for your system To make new floppies under DOS Win95 NT or even Linux Be aware that this process will overwrite any data on the 1 44 Megabyte floppies Here s how it s done 1 Boot DOS and change directory to the CD ROM 2 Enter the dosutils directory and run r
229. eatures to the standard vi program The vim common package contains files such as help that are needed by any vim binary in order to run vim enhanced Version 5 3 1 214K The VIsual editor iMproved is an updated and feature added clone of the vi editor that comes with almost all UN X systems It adds multiple windows multi level undo block highliting and many other features to the standard vi program This package contains a version of vim which has many of the extra features that have recently been introduced to vim such as perl and python interpreters vim minimal Version 5 3 427K B The VIsual editor iMproved is an updated and feature added clone of the vi editor that comes with almost all UN X systems It adds multiple windows multi level undo block highliting and many other features to the standard vi program The vim minimal package installs a version of vim into bin vi that is suitable for running when only the root partition is present C 1 4 Emulators In this section are packages that let your Red Hat Linux system run programs meant for other oper ating systems dosemu Version 0 98 1 1 721K C 1 Applications This package enables you to run a number of DOS programs under Linux This package includes an image with DOS C kernel MS DOS 3 31 compatible and FreeDos utilities You should be able to start up the DOS emulator by logging in as root and typing dos at the prompt dosemu freedos
230. ecom mend the following layout as a compromise between single partition simplicity and multi partition flexibility Please Note If you plan to install all the software packages that come with Red Hat Linux you will need to use the larger partitions sizes shown here In fact you may want to increase the sizes above our recommendations to allow for future growth without needing to repartition A swap partition Swap partitions are used to support virtual memory If your computer has 16 MB of RAM or less you must create a swap partition Even if you have more memory a swap partition is still recommended The minimum size of your swap partition should be equal to your computer s RAM or 16 MB whichever is larger The largest useable swap partition is roughly 127 MB so making a swap partition larger than that will result in wasted space Note however that you can create and use more than one swap partition although this is usually only necessary for large server installations A root partition The root partition is where the root directory resides It only needs to contain things necessary to boot your system as well as system configuration files A root partition of 50 MB to 100 MB works well for most systems INTEL Don t forget the LILO constraints we mentioned in Section 2 7 4 on the page before A usr partition The usr partition is where much of the software on a Red Hat Linux sys tem resides This partition should
231. ecommend a reference such as HTML The Definitive Guide by Chuck Musciano amp Bill Kennedy published by O Reilly amp Associates Finding Documentation Red Hat Linux includes thousands of pages of online documentation to help you learn how to use the system The man pages info documents and plain text files included provide information on almost every aspect of Linux If you ve installed it Red Hat Linux also includes documentation produced by the Linux Documentation Project 7 1 OnLine Help When you are looking for general help on commands and error messages the best place to start is right on your system There are several different sources of information at your fingertips e Man Pages Authoritative reference material for commands file formats and system calls e Package Documentation Many packages include additional documentation RPM can help you find it e HOWTOs and FAQs Helpful information from the Linux Documentation Project e The locate Command A command that can help bridge the gap between a command and its documentation info Pages Hypertext documentation without the Web 102 Finding Documentation Let s take a look at each information source 7 1 4 Man Pages Almost every command on your system has an associated man page This is documentation that you can get to instantly should you have questions or problems For example if you were having trouble with the 15 command you could use man to
232. edhat com linux info ldp LDP gs node5 html http www best com aturner RedHat FAQ For a complete description of supported hardware please visit http www redhat com support docs rhl intel rh50 hardware intel html E 7 2 Running Quake and Quake Il Question Iheard I can run Quake on my linux system How do I set this up Answer In order to get Quake to run on your system you need to download the Quake Linux program from http www idsoftware com archives quakearc html E 7 3 Getting colors with Is Question How come I don t see colors when I run ls When I am using my old Linux the filenames all have different colors Answer In order to allow the color option you must edit bashrc This line must be placed in the file alias ls ls color auto E 7 Using Red Hat Linux 327 E 7 4 Compiled programs dont run Question Ihave installed Red Hat Linux When I attempt to run a simple program I compiled the following happens a out bash a out command not found Ihave used other versions of Linux and never had such a problem in running programs What is going on Answer The problem is that according to the computer shell the program isn t there The computer shell the part of the OS that runs your commands finds programs using a very strict path setting that figures out where items are If you type the following you will see what your PATH variable is set to echo SPATH One of the items that should
233. eeded to establish a SLIP connection When you choose Done a dialog titled Edit SLIP Interface appears that enables you to further customize the hardware communication and networking parameters for your SLIP interface PLIP Interface To add a PLIP interface to your system you only have to supply the IP address the remote IP address and the Netmask You can also select if you want to activate the interface at boot time Ethernet Arcnet Token Ring and Pocket Adaptor Interfaces If you are adding an eth ernet arcnet token ring or pocket adapter to your computer you will need to supply the following information e Device This is determined by netconfig based on the devices already configured e P Address Enter an IP address for your network device e Netmask Enter the network mask for your network device The network and broadcast addresses are calculated automatically based on the IP address and netmask you enter e Activate interface at boot time If you want the device to be configured automatically when your machine boots select this by clicking on the box e Allow any user to de activate interface Check this if you want any user to be able to activate or deactivate the interface e Interface configuration protocol If you have a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network and would like to use it to configure the interface choose the appropriate option otherwise choose none 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel 163
234. eems sluggish when doing anything If I tell Linux to use only 64Megs with the mem 64M machine it seems to speed up What is going on and can I do anything about it E 9 System Administration Answer The most likely answer to this problem has to do with the motherboard of the computer Many motherboards limit the L2 cache to be able to access up to 64 megs The ones that we know of to be affected by this problem are the NX I believe this was only for pentium 60 90 FX VX and TX boards from Intel These are limited to a maximum of 512K of L2 cache There may be other boards that have this problem but these are our current canidates The following is from a user who researched the problem for us typically have a maximum of 512k of L2 cache either on the motherboard or in a COAST module looks a little like a DIMM but a bit shorter and can only cache up to 64 meg If linux utilizes memory the same way as Microsoft OS s do it goes from the top of the memory stack and works its way down This can result in a pretty significant slowdown unless you really need the aditional memory The exception to this was the HX chipset which was also the only chipset i think that could handle dual or quad processor pentium boards and even MMX However the vast majority of HX boards that I have seen also required a TAG ram chip to cache over 64 meg and still had a limit as to how much it could cache the exact number escapes me at the moment
235. eese eter eto mxree bre ees 193 SONVICES crono ace Rea staat see ea Bade 194 PAM explanation of 6 6 2 cece eee 335 parameters CD ROM modules 302 parameters ethernet modules 303 parameters module ssssseess 301 partition P lolo MERC E AEE 27 O GENA E PORFEDCPPEY 26 POPE TRE EOM 27 A tbt e EE ORARE DEA 27 VASE E scena tx sac No n cese s 26 Just local c sestertia npa Bo cud 27 PUSE Cidra isa 27 A INO TEPPERPPRERRE 27 MIO eirca herr xr RE Ro aries 27 FOOL cie RR LEAN poro etd us 26 SWAP ia Bua ne daa 26 Parcial aida 21 INDEX 399 how MANY occ beer e ed ns 26 LILO issues related to Luuu 25 nonsdestru ctive erroneo cen 24 other operating systems 4 24 using free SPACE coi deed esses ede e dan 23 using in use partition 08 23 using unused partition 23 partitions changing table Of ooooccccccocccocc 55 A ian E E E ENE 46 TOMAMOS 250s epinis aE eet 59 n mbetring OE s cessset eur ise aee seas 22 password A nea ed eo a RU E nay 76 LE AAA A ERES Kn ee 87 changing cce recibe ee ee Eb OI e 88 Shadow eer O EEE EEE TREES 196 PCI error messages isi eere serere prin ces 344 PCMCIA s ppoOtt asciende 35 enhancementS iriiri Aa 3 PCMCIA support during installation 15 PUP cuore n 28 162 jor see PLIP Plug and Plays ect e xe Rekord un 97 343 pluggable au
236. eir own field Normally you will want to ignore the Other arguments field Some modules normally take no arguments just in case they have an Arguments field which allows you to enter configuration information Trascscosver 0 Ad UI Aene rad Figure 8 37 Editing Module Options Changing Modules To change which module gets invoked to provide a generic service such as an ethernet card or SCSI host adapter module you need to delete the old one and add a new one To delete a module select it by clicking on it then click on Remove Then click on Add to add the new module as explained in the following section If you have changed your SCSI controller scsi hostadapter remember to make a new initial ramdisk with the sbin mkinitrd command as documented in section 11 6 2 on page 200 Adding Modules To add a module of any type click on the Add button You will be presented with a dialog box Figure 8 38 on the following page asking you to choose a module type Ethernet is et h Token Ring is tr SCSI controllers are scsi hostadapter and so on Click OK to continue to the next dialog box If there is more than one module which can be used for the module type you have chosen you will be presented with a dialog box Figure 8 39 on the next page which asks which 157 158 System Configuration Figure 8 38 Adding a module module you want to use and may also ask for specifics about the type of module for ethernet for exa
237. elative to its mount point Consider the following example e ALinux System system root directory foo mount point for the CD ROM e A CD ROM CD ROM s root directory images a directory of images on the CD ROM images old a directory of old images So if the above describes the individual filesystems and you mount the CD ROM at foo the new operating system directory structure would be e ALinux System with the CD ROM mounted system root directory foo CD ROM root directory foo images a directory of images on the CD ROM 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 133 foo images old a directory of old images To mount a filesystem make sure to be logged in as root or become root using the su command For the latter type su at the shell prompt and then enter the root password Once you are root type mount followed by the device and then the mount point For example to mount the first diskette drive on mnt floppy you would type the command mount dev fd0 mnt floppy At installation Red Hat Linux will create etc fstab This file contains information on devices and associated mount points The advantage to this file is that it allows you to shorten your mount commands Using the information in etc fstab you can type mount and then either the mount point or the device The mount command will look for the rest of the information in etc fstab It s possible to modify this file b
238. electa Figure 5 15 Creating a Boot Diskette diskette in your computer s diskette drive Select Ok and press when you ve done so After a short delay your boot diskette will be done After removing it from your diskette drive label it clearly Note that if you would like to create a boot diskette after the installation you ll be able to do so If you boot your system with the boot diskette instead of LILO make sure you create a new boot diskette if you make any changes to your kernel For more information please see the mkbootdi sk man page 5 9 Installing LILO Please Note If you re performing a workstation or server class installation this part of the instal lation is automatically done for you Please skip ahead to Section 5 10 on page 81 In order to be able to boot your Red Hat Linux system you usually need to install LILO the LInux LOader You may install LILO in one of two places The Master Boot Record MBR is the recommended place to install LILO unless the MBR al ready starts another operating system loader such System Commander or OS 2 s Boot Man ager The master boot record is a special area on your hard drive that is automatically loaded by your computer s BIOS and is the earliest point at which LILO can take control of the boot process If you install LILO in the MBR when your machine boots LILO will present a boot prompt you can then boot Red Hat Linux or any other operating system you configure LILO
239. electing files for backup and restore is very similar to the Midnight Commander interface and allows easy traversal of directories Recursively selected directories are supported Incremental backup and automatic most recent restore are defaults settings SCSI ftape zftape and removable drives are supported time Version 1 7 17K The time utility is used as a sort of stopwatch to time the execution of a specified command It can aid in the optimization of programs for maximum speed as well as a number of other uses timeconfig Version 2 4 44K B This is a simple tool for setting both the timezone and the way your system clock stores the time It runs in text mode using a simple windowing system timetool Version 2 3 22K Timetool is a graphical interface for setting the current date and time for your system tksysv Version 1 0 35K This is a graphical tool for manipulating run levels It allows you to control what services get started and stopped for every run level tmpwatch Version 1 5 1 8K This package provides a program that can be used to clean out directories It recursively searches the directory ignoring symlinks and removes files that haven t been accessed in a user specified amount of time tunelp Version 1 3 9K tunelp aids in configuring the kernel parallel port driver usernet Version 1 0 7 26K A program that makes it easy for users to bring us
240. eleted too much type q and no changes will occur Once you have removed the Linux partitions you can reboot the box with Cont rol Alt Delete instead of continuing with the install E 6 17 Using Loadlin Question Icant use LILO to boot my machine and have heard of something called LOADLIN How do I set it up to work Answer At the DOS prompt you can type for example C gt CD LOADLIN C LOADLIN gt LOADLIN zimage dev hdb1 ro vga ask Or if you want to load a big kernel together with a RAM disk C LOADLIN gt LOADLIN bzimage dev ram rw initrd diskimage or if you have more parameters than will fit into the 128 byte DOS command line C LOADLIN gt LOADLIN params An example params file is test par Please read it If write behind caching is supported by the cache program you should run smartdrv C before LOADLIN is called 323 324 C LOADLIN gt smartdrv C C LOADLIN gt loadlin Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ do this to sync your disk usually not needed for DOS 6 2 but it doesn t hurt It would be much smarter to use a batch file something like this SMARTDRV C C LOADLIN LOADLIN C LOADLIN ZIMAGE root dev hdb2 ro vga 3 So you could simply type LINUX BAT and you are on the road A sample LINUX BAT file is provided with the LOADLIN package E 6 18 Post Installation Problems with booting computer Question I have installed Linux without error
241. eleting partitions with 51 drive summary screen 0005 48 editing partitions with 52 function KEYS os sci nier eer hn 49 mult platform support for 2 problems adding partitions 51 starting over 66 cece S cece eens 52 MASH ETE 47 when finished With oooooooooomoo 52 disk names DOS versus Linux cese sek emere 315 disk partitioning SPARC ssssn 362 disk space requirements 000 312 disk partitioning 2 eene ens 21 disk based installation for SPARC 361 diskette DO s 77 boot creating eere ci ceci 225 supplemental creating suus 225 diskette boot commands SPARC 357 diskette making under Linux like O S 226 diskette making with MS DOS 226 diskette based bOOtidg oooooocccoccococoo 342 diskettes i ici sciisac iria 8 18 Dm M 8 images updated oococcocccccccccococccos 10 supplemental 55 eee eme 8 18 diskettes missing from box sssuu 314 documentation snis eisi ee nre ed Ren 101 experienced user sssssssssssss 85 FAQS 105 finding ceseecce erit tirir PA eH ePURR 104 finding appropriate oooccccococcccccc 83 first time USERS iiis desse aaa dee ens 84 CUPO coda bpm ide iret 85 HOWTOS iis foie sc ue REC E ERR ERE 105 HTM ev
242. em independent interface for user level packet capture Libpcap provides a portable framework for low level network monitoring Applications include network statistics collection security monitoring network debugging etc Libpcap has system independent API that is used by several applications including tcpdump and arpwatch lynx Version 2 8 1 2 031K This a terminal based WWW browser While it does not make any attempt at displaying graphics it has good support for HTML text formatting forms and tables ncftp Version 2 4 3 170K Ncftp is a ftp client with many advantageous over the standard one It includes command line editing command histories support for recurisive gets automatic logins and much more rsync Version 2 1 1 188K rsync is a faster flexible replacement for rcp allowing rapid and network efficient synchronization of files or directories on different machines by transferring just the differences between those directories in a compressed form It doesn t need either machine to have a copy of what is on the other A technical report describing the rsync algorithm is included in this package tcpdump Version 3 4 215K Tcpdump prints out the headers of packets on a network interface It is very useful for debugging network problems and security operations wget Version 1 5 2 352K GNU Wget is a freely available network utility to retrieve files from the World Wide Web using HTTP and FTP
243. ementary groups field accordingly make sure all the group names are sepa rated with a space character 5 Select Accept 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each additional user to be added Modifying Group Membership General Overview We ll start by detailing the group definitions method e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt gt Group definitions 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf If you have more than 15 groups you will be given a filter screen see figure 8 11 on page 127 to narrow your choice of groups by specifying a prefix e With or without a prefix select Accept at the bottom of the screen e Select the group you wish to modify This will open the Group specification screen see fig ure 8 13 on page 129 e Add or remove each user from the Alternate members field Make sure that all of the user names are separated by a space character e Once you ve done this select Accept which can be found at the bottom of the screen This will automatically update each user account with the group showing up in the Supplementary groups field if added or absent if removed Adding and removing groups can also be done by modifying each individual user account e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open Config Users accounts Normal
244. en Config gt Users accounts User accounis 124 System Configuration 4 Select the account you wish to delete 5 On the User information screen select Del 6 On the Deleting account screen choose the appropriate option for the account s data 7 Select Accept Deleting a User Account General Overview Please Note While there are a couple options that let you retain files associated with an account any information or files deleted are gone and effectively unrecoverable Take care when using this option To delete an account e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open Config Users accounts gt User accounts On the User accounts screen see figure 8 5 on page 117 select the account you wish to delete At the bottom of the User information screen see figure 8 8 on page 120 select Del to delete the account Linuxconf will then prompt you with a list of options The default option is to archive the account s data The archive options has the following effects 1 Removes the user from the user accounts list 2 Takes everything contained in the user s home directory and archives it using tar and gzip compression storing the resulting file in a directory called o1daccounts For an account named useraccount the file name would be useraccount 1998 10 10 497 tar gz The date indicates when the account was deleted and the n
245. enit ek nura Y I DEP ERI 105 info PAGS cies con ees then herr aera ved 106 locate command eren ens 105 makewhatis searching with 103 tiampapes dde ee EAEEREN RA 102 PATH aaa iaa ines 102 searching aa terse acd torie e Ere Seed Sa ERG 103 SCHON ici 102 online A sabe kresp pex bee ed 101 package documentation 104 PAM ois Di Rainn dA 196 REAIDDMEBS 3355259 erri ane 104 documentation how to improve xiii documentation obtaining additional 6 drivers SOU iaa 97 drivers kernel 0 0 c cece cece cence eee 28 editor s acknowledgements xiii editor s notes iii in xii eInacs doeet dale a Pai o e ba 106 enabling accounts isy ierta eai ia 123 e E EEE 10 errata information obtaining 307 error 111 nd t X ics eem 330 ethernet ainia 162 ethernet module parameters 303 ethernet supporting multiple cards 303 expert installation mode sssssuuu 33 exporting NFS filesystems 0 055 203 FAQ 1023rd cylinder boot problem 321 Accelerated X problems with 334 Adaptec 274x 284x 294x sssus 319 Adaptec 2920 crevoes epe eh PY EE HRS 318 Adaptec ait X cicer eter rech ccd es 319 applications older csse 337 ATAPI CDROM problems 316 boot hanas osasi enetan or pes 348 boot problem 1023rd cylinde
246. ent to allow the connection if it fails then standard password authentication is done New modules can be added at any time and PAM aware applications can then be made to use them For instance if you have a one time password calculator system and you can write a module to sup port it documentation on writing modules is included with the system PAM aware programs can use the new module and work with the new one time password calculators without being recom piled or otherwise modified in any way 11 4 2 Services Each program which uses PAM defines its own service name The login program defines the service type login ftpd defines the service type ftp etc In general the service type is the name of the program used to access the service not if there is a difference the program used to provide the service 11 4 3 The Configuration Files The directory etc pam d is used to configure all PAM applications This used to be etc pam conf in earlier PAM versions while the pam conf file is still read if no etc pam d entry is found its use is deprecated Each application really each service has its own file A file looks like this FSPAM 1 0 auth required lib security pam_securetty so auth required lib security pam_pwdb so shadow nullok auth required lib security pam_nologin so lib security pam pwdb so lib security pam cracklib so lib security pam pwdb so shadow nullok use authtok session required lib secur
247. ep This old saying can be applied to just about any endeavor we re going to apply it to learning to use your Red Hat Linux system Learning to use a Linux system effectively can be a long rewarding journey where you find that you can easily do things that people with other operating systems can only dream of But like all journeys you ve got to start somewhere and take that first step And the first step you need to take is to get yourself some documentation This cannot be stressed enough without documentation you will only become frustrated at your inability to get your Red Hat Linux system working the way you want Here s what you should look for in terms of Linux documentation e An brief history of Linux Many aspects of Linux are the way they are because of historical precedent There is also a Linux culture that again is based to a great deal on past history A bit of knowledge about the history of Linux will serve you well particularly as you interact with more experienced Linux users on the Internet e An explanation of how Linux works While it s not necessary to delve into the most ar cane aspects of the Linux kernel it s a good idea to know something about how Linux is put together This is particularly important if you ve been working with other operating systems some of the assumptions you hold about how computers work may not transfer from that op erating system to Linux A few paragraphs that discuss how Linux work
248. ept at the bottom of the screen If you have more than 15 groups you will be given a filter screen see figure 8 11 on the page before to narrow your choice of groups by specifying a prefix e On the User groups screen see figure 8 12 select the group you wish to delete e You ll be presented with the Group specification screen see figure 8 13 on the next page 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 129 Lara aot cunts Groep specticaon Momia ee User accounts Pau suit specify ai least tha name Grua dations Chenga mal pinni Base into Special accounts PPP ge courts Dapp mame SLIP accaunts via maimai it Group UUCP accounts ad A POP meraunts jail andi A emale members Virtual POP accaunts diaii Eniail alisa irr aliii iri Vna dumm bear aliis Palicies Paw rd amp account palco n alabie user ifii Bualable PPP Hiki Available SLIP sel Massage al thea day Fig stare ipcul diva nts Dung caius us rasi aras Figure 8 13 Group specification screen e Select Del to delete the group Linuxconf will then prompt you to confirm the deletion Choose yes to delete the group The group s files will still remain and their respective owners will still have sole control over them The group name will be replaced with the deleted group s ID The files may be assigned to a new group by using the chgrp command More information on chgrp can be found by typing the com mand info chgrp or man chgrp at the shell prompt If a n
249. er tkmc Version 4 1 35 560K Midnight Commander is a visual shell much like a file manager only with way more features It is tk X window wersion Its coolest feature is the ability to ftp view tar and zip files and poke into RPMs for specific files The tk version of Midnight Commander is not yet finished though C 12 6 Utilities This section lists packages containing utilities related to the X window system 293 294 Package List Xconfigurator Version 3 79 266K This is the Red Hat X Configuration tool It is based on the sources for xf86config a utility from XFree86 It has a nicer user interface added to make it easier for the end user NOTE use mouseconfig to change your mouse type then re run Xconfigurator to set X up for your new mouse type ee Version 0 3 654K The Electric Eyes image viewer lets you view and manipulate images in a variety of formats gnome linuxconf Version 0 14 96K Graphical user interface for the linuxconf configuration system mgetty viewfax Version 1 1 14 93K This package includes an X11 fax viewer with zooming facilities mkxauth Version 1 7 15K mkxauth aids in the creation and maintenance of X authentication databases Xauthority files Use it to create a Xauthority file or merge keys from another local or remote Xauthority file Remote Xauthority files can be retrieved via ftp using ncftp or via rsh For security mkxauth does
250. er gv is based upon an earlier program known as 288 Package List ghostview mxp Version 1 0 52K This is a very fast Mandelbrot set generator for X Windows It lets you select regions to zoom in on and allows you to control other aspects of fractal generation netscape common Version 4 06 6 601K Files shared between the Netscape Navigator and Netscape Communicator web browsers netscape communicator Version 4 06 9 987K Netscape Communicator is the industry leading web browser It supports the latest HTML stan dards Java and JavaScript It also includes full featured Usenet news reader as well as a complete email client Information on the Netscape Communicator license may be found in the file usr doc netscape common 4 06 LICENSE netscape navigator Version 4 06 6 795K Netscape Navigator is the industry leading web browser It supports the latest HTML standards Java and JavaScript Information on the Netscape Navigator license may be found in the file usr doc netscape common 4 06 LICENSE transfig Version 3 2 1 275K TransFig is a set of tools for creating TeX documents with graphics which are portable in the sense that they can be printed in a wide variety of environments usermode Version 1 4 1 539K Several graphical tools including a tool to help users manage floppies and other removable media and a tool to help the user change his or her finger information x327
251. er boot problem 321 Accelerated X problems with 334 account management ssssssssss 114 115 account modification ooooocococccooo 117 118 ACCOUNS ost eie pnescibete meia E TTET 87 Cheatin ee taux dE ncteuecaen 87 acknowledgments 000 a xii Adaptec 274x 284x 294x ccce 319 Adaptec 2920 cuatro th eren eres 318 Adaptec CON necia 319 addendum Alpha ooooccocccccccccococccccnnooo 7 administration systeM 0666s esse ee 185 AGP support under X 2 icc eret en 332 Alpha addendum 0006 cece cece eens 7 Alpha computer csse x Alpha specific information6 9 11 14 15 20 25 26 33 46 97 153 AMID em 198 anonymous FIP kesri rpaezrsPckrUp enr ener rus 202 Apache accesso upexos ek eher rhe y ener 4 100 Apache web server configuring 100 applications older eee 337 ATAPI CD ROM unrecognized arginina 38 ATAPI CDROM problems with 316 AULOBOOE cascara Re Ren 34 autostart selecting services for 69 basic system tasks 00sec cece e ee eeee 86 BIOS issues related to LILO Lsu 25 boot disk tte creen er ch here prir atsit 77 boot hangs iia 348 boot method selection for SPARC 357 boot problem 1023rd cylinder 321 boot problems scene hme Remb Here a 324 boot proCess essere sannindi be mers d 20
252. er controllable network devices up and down and to check on the status of those devices util linux Version 2 8 752K B util linux contains a large variety of low level system utilities necessary for a functional Linux sys tem This includes among other things configuration tools such as fdisk and system programs such as login 283 284 Package List C 11 6 Terminal This section lists packages that provide utilities related to terminal handling dialog Version 0 6 88K Dialog is a utility that allows you to build user interfaces in a TTY text mode only You can call dialog from within a shell script to ask the user questions or present with choices in a more user friendly manner See usr doc dialog samples for some examples Screen Version 3 7 4 358K Screen is a program that allows you to have multiple logins on one terminal It is useful in situations where you are telnetted into a machine or connected via a dumb terminal and want more than just one login C 11 7 Text This section lists packages that provide utilities related to the handling and manipulation of text diffstat Version 1 25 13K diffstat provides a number of statistics on a patch generated by diff including number of additions number of removals and total number of changes It can be useful for example to find out what changes have been made to a program just by feeding the update patch to diffstat diffutils
253. er d LAR ameg hart LAH mer Pr Shara nm leer us Parraard CL Rufe ea ads Chee selecta FL mest press Figure 5 10 LAN Manager Printer Options Enter the necessary information in the fields provided Select Next and press Space 5 6 4 Finalizing Printer Setup Next you ll see a dialog box entitled Configure Printer see Figure 5 11 on the facing page Select the printer type that most closely matches your printer Select Next and press to continue After selecting the printer type you will see a dialog box similar to the one in Figure 5 12 on the next page Set the paper size and resolution appropriately The Fix stair stepping of text check box should be checked if your printer does not automatically perform a carriage return after each line Finally you ll see a dialog box that contains all the information pertaining to your printer see Fig ure 5 13 on page 76 Verify that the information is correct If everything looks OK select Done If you need to make changes select Edit You can also select Cancel if you d rather not configure a printer at this time If you select Done you will be given the option to configure another printer or you may continue with the installation 5 6 Configuring a Printer 75 E or gues Printer Mist tyme of primer do uod feras HP Laser et Plus HP Paintlat HP Paiatiet 2 HP Paintlet 3038 and deck let 12308 OH 3345 byte inter Imagen larare Hiteubishi CF
254. er discusses Red Hat Software s support e Whatitis e How to get it e Frequently asked questions A 1 An Overview of Our Support Policy Red Hat Software provides 90 day installation support for people that have purchased the Official Red Hat Linux product Red Hat will provide support to registered purchasers of the Red Hat Linux Boxed Set This support will be provided by means of electronic mail In the case that the user doesn t have access to e mail fax support will be provided for those requests submitted with complete registration numbers In order to receive support it is necessary to register the product via the World Wide Web at http www redhat com support registeror by sending mail including the registration num berto register redhat com 218 Getting Technical Support After registering successfully support may be obtained by sending a specially formatted message to support8redhat com The message format is described in the support HOW TO located at http www redhat com support register support how2 html This e mail will then be delivered to Red Hat Software support where it will be distributed to a Red Hat Support Engineer As the name implies installation support centers on helping you successfully install Red Hat Linux on your computer This includes support in three distinct areas e Answering questions you may have prior to installation such as Hardware compatibility issues Basic approaches to
255. ernate method of executing remote commands All of these servers are run from inetd and configured through etc inetd conf and PAM The rexecd server is disabled by default but the rest are enabled rusers Version 0 10 36K The rusers server and client both included in this package allow users to find out what users are logged into various machines on the local network rwall Version 0 10 17K The rwall client sends a message to an rwall daemon running on a remote machine which relays the message to all of the users on the remote machine The rwall daemon is run from etc inetd conf and is disabled by default on Red Hat systems rwho Version 0 10 23K The rwho program displays what users are logged into all of machines on the local network which are running the rwho daemon Both the rwho client and daemon are provided in this package samba Version 1 9 18p10 3 248K 269 270 Package List Samba provides an SMB server which can be used to provide network services to SMB sometimes called Lan Manager clients including various versions of MS Windows OS 2 and other Linux machines Samba also provides some SMB clients which complement the built in SMB filesystem in Linux Samba uses NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBT protocols and does NOT need NetBEUI Microsoft Raw NetBIOS frame protocol This release is known as the Locking Update and has full support for Opportunistic File Locking In addition this upda
256. ernseeemeee 382 diskette based 0 6 2 cece eee 378 format OF 56 524 e pete exe bete 379 install keyword coimmecconscinsacin ses 385 keyboard keyword sesusuus 383 lang keyword oirre parien EERS aS 380 lilo keyword crecer rere opt 387 mouse keyword cion sesees eres 385 network keyword ssssssss 380 network based oooooocccccccoccccccccooo 378 MES keyword cete see rhe a as 381 package selection specification 388 part keyword eee eere p ee ad 384 post installation configuration 389 rootpw keyword eren 387 timezone keyWord oricine a 386 upgrade keyword sseeesus 385 xconfig keyword ooooooomococccocoooccc 386 zerombr keyword sssssuus 383 kickstart installations oooooooccooocoo 377 disk partitions i eises esee sii da co 383 diskette based 545 reete 378 file format esset suse tosta ades 379 file locations scr Nee ken gaa heres aes 377 network based 00 cece eee 378 partitions pois vies ve Rede re TIS 383 SATUN E oso cosas tarevi raupena na a 379 LAN manager printer configuring 70 74 language Selina 35 laptops installing iier oec rer mene ens 317 Oia id ut NUS dat 101 105 library problems under X sssuuee 331 license information 66 00 cece ee eee ee 8 TO TE 78 186 fete MMO CONE isis 199 Adding options to iere een 79 alternatives to ice e
257. erprinter C 1 Applications tetex latex Version 0 9 6 443K LaTeX is a TeX macro package The LaTeX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their documents rather than the form The ideal very difficult to realize is to have no formatting commands like switch to italic or skip 2 picas in the document at all instead everything is oH done by specific markup instructions emphasize start a section tetex xdvi Version 0 9 1 025K xdvi is a program which runs under the X window system It is used to preview dvi files such as are produced by tex and latex texinfo Version 3 12 505K The GNU project uses the texinfo file format for much of its documentation This package includes the tools necessary to create info files from texinfo source files as well as an emacs interface to all these tools C 1 13 Sound This section contains packages that let you use your Red Hat Linux system s sound capabilities aumix Version 1 13 47K This program provides a tty based interactive method of controlling a sound cards mixer It lets you adjust the input levels from the CD microphone and on board synthesizers as well as the output volume cdp Version 0 33 36K This program allows you to play audio CD s on your computers CDROM drive It provides a version with a full screen interface as well as a command line version maplay Version 1 2 70K This program plays MPE
258. es some uses atra fdir mej ba pratarrad Which taal would you Likes to ura Carta ease Done Figure 4 3 Selecting Disk Setup Method 4 4 1 Using Disk Druid If you selected Disk Druid you will be presented with a screen that looks like figure 4 4 on the next page While it may look overwhelming at first it really isn t Let s go over each of Disk Druid s three sections The Current Disk Partitions Section Each line in the Current Disk Partitions section represents a disk partition You ll note that this section has a scroll bar to the right which means that there might be more partitions than can be displayed at one time If you use the T and 1 keys you can see if there are any additional partitions there Each line in this section has five different fields Mount Point This field indicates where the partition will be mounted when Red Hat Linux is installed and running Device This field displays the partition s device name Requested The Requested field shows the minimum size requested when the partition was defined Actual The Actual field shows the space currently allocated to the partition Type This field shows the partition s type 47 48 Continuing the Installation Linu nativa Linux natus Linux native Linux mun Lim nativa Lir natos EL ES Iria Gem CHA Tatal Fiii UE FA FIE NEAR Figure 4 4 Disk Druid Main Screen Another Type of Partition As you scroll t
259. estion For whatever reason I want to remove LILO from the Master Boot Record MBR of my machine How do I do this Answer There are several methods to removing LILO from the master boot record of the machine Inside of Linux you can replace the MBR with an earlier saved version of the MBR using the sbin lilo command sbin lilo u In DOS NT and Windows 95 you can use the fdisk command to create a new MBR with the undoc umented flag mbr This will rewrite the MBR to ONLY boot the primary DOS partition fdisk mbr E 6 16 Removing Linux from your hardware Question For whatever reason I want to remove Linux from my hard drive I tried using DOS s fdisk and it shows non DOS partitions but it can t remove them What do I need to do E 6 Installation Answer If you need to remove linux from a hard drive and have attempted to do this with the default DOS fdisk you are having the Partitions exist but they don t exist problem The best way to remove non DOS partitions is with a tool that understands partitions other than DOS You can do this with the installation floppy by doing the following Start the installation select install versus upgrade and when it comes to partitioning the drive choose fdisk In fdisk type p to print out the partition numbers and remove the Linux partitions with the d command If satisfied with the changes you have made you can quit with a w and the changes will be saved to disk If you d
260. ew Installing Red Hat Linux on a SPARC system is slightly more complex than installing Red Hat Linux Intel mostly due to differences in machine architecture In general the main steps to a suc cessful installation are 1 Determine which console commands your SPARC systems supports Determine whether you have sufficient memory to use a ramdisk based installation Determine how you will boot the installation program 2 3 4 Determine what installation method you will use 5 Determine whether you will install Red Hat Linux SPARC from a serial terminal 6 Load and run the Red Hat Linux installation program Let s look at each of these steps in more detail F3 Console Commands SPARC systems have two different types of boot commands available depending on the version of the system s console PROM Systems with a PROM version less than 2 0 use what is known as the old style boot command while systems whose PROM is at version 2 0 or greater can use either the old or the new style boot commands If your SPARC system s console prompt is ok then your system is in new command mode and can use the new style boot command In general it s preferable to use the new style boot command if your system supports it Of course it s possible to use the old style boot command but you ll need to know a bit more about your hardware configuration An excellent reference on older Sun hardware in general and the old style boot comm
261. ew group is created and the deleted group s ID is specified then the new group will have access to the deleted group s files Don t worry linuxconf doesn t recycle old group numbers any more than it does old user IDs so it won t happen by accident Modifying Group Membership There are two ways to modify the list of users that belong to a group You can either update each user account itself or you can update the group definitions In general the fastest way is to update each of the group definitions If you re planning on changing more information for each user than just the group information then updating each user account may prove easier 130 System Configuration Modifying Group Membership Quick Reference Under Groups 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt gt Group definitions 4 Select the group to which you wish to add or remove users 5 Add or remove new users to the Alternate members opt field make sure all user names are separated with a space character 5 Select Accept Modifying Group Membership Quick Reference Under Users 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open Config gt Users accounts gt Normal gt User accounts 4 Select a user to which you wish to add or remove groups Adjust the Suppl
262. ew hard drives is usually bogus Here s an example of zerombr on a new system zerombr yes On the other hand if you are installing machines that have a valid partition table even if you want to change part or all of it you should use zerombr this way zerombr no H 3 10 clearpart Removing partitions based on partition type The next command is optional but can come in handy If you d like to remove all partitions or just any Linux related partitions you can use clearpart For example to clear all partitions of type Linux native and Linux swap you could add this line clearpart linux To clear all partitions from a disk this line would do the trick 384 Kickstart Installations clearpart all The only options clearpart supports are linux and all H 3 11 part Partition definition The next step is to specify the partitions you want to create These will only be created using the system s unpartitioned free space In other words if the machine had Windows related partitions and you had done clearpart linux those Windows partitions would remain untouched You must enter one partition per line using the following format part lt mntpt gt size size in megs grow maxsize size in megs gt This part line was broken to make it more readable mntpt is the location you are going to mount that partition in your installed system for example the root partition would have a
263. ewise if you are going to use one of the network based installation methods you will need PCMCIA support if your network adapter is PCMCIA based Please Note You don t need install time PCMCIA support if you re installing Red Hat Linux on a laptop and using the laptop s built in CD ROM drive PCMCIA support is dependent on two things 1 The type of PCMCIA controller in your computer system 2 The type of PCMCIA device that you wish to use during the installation While nearly every PCMCIA controller and most popular PCMCIA devices are supported there are some exceptions For more information please consult the Red Hat Linux Hardware Compatibility List at http www redhat com hardware The main thing to keep in mind is that if you require install time PCMCIA support you will need a supplemental diskette We ll show you how to do this after you ve determined which installation method is best for you ALPHA PCMCIA support is not available for the Alpha SPARC PCMCIA supportis not available for the SPARC 2 4 2 Installing From a CD ROM If you have a Red Hat Linux CD ROM and your computer has a supported CD ROM drive you should consider this installation method Installing directly from CD ROM is the most straightfor ward approach When installing from CD ROM the packages you select are read from the CD ROM and are installed on your hard drive 15 16 Before You Begin How To Do It As the name implies you ll need
264. eyboard map for your system Keyboard maps are necessary for using non US default keyboards Kbdconfig loads the selected keymap before exiting and configures your machine to use that keymap automatically after rebooting kernelcfg Version 0 5 58K Red Hat Linux kernelcfg provides a GUI interface which allows you to easily administrate your kerneld configuration Idconfig Version 1 9 5 109K 5 ldconfig scans a running system and sets up the symbolic links that are used to load shared libraries properly It also creates etc ld so cache which speeds the loading programs which use shared li braries lilo Version 0 20 1 437K B Lilo is repsonsible for loading your linux kernel from either a floppy or a hard drive and giving it control of the system It can also be used to boot many other operating sysetms including the BSD variants DOS and OS 2 277 278 Package List linuxconf Version 1 12r5 7 324K B Linuxconf has an easy to navigate user interface that is accessible from a text console a web interface and a GUI interface Linuxconf has the ability to manage Networking Host information IP Address Hostname etc IP Subnet allocation Resolving Name Servers Routing and Gateways NIS IPX Interface Setup PPP and Slip Dialout NFS File Systems Named DNS Zones and Secondaries Reverse Lookup Sendmail Virtual Email Domains UUCP IP Aliasing DCHP BOOTP Server RARP Server Input Firewalling Output Firewa
265. f etc passwd or wherever you have the encrypted version stored and add the iscrypted option rootpw iscrypted encryptedpasswdstring H 3 17 lilo LILO Configuration For machines that use LILO Intel based systems you can specify the LILO configuration using the lilo keyword The default line can be as simple as this lilo This will install LILO in the hard drive s master boot record MBR and automatically configure boot entries for your Linux installation as well as a DOS or Windows installation if one is present If you don t want LILO installed in the MBR you can do so with by using the 1ocation option There are three possible places where LILO can be installed e mbr put LILO on the master boot record default e partition put LILO on the beginning of the root partition 388 Kickstart Installations e none don t install LILO at all in which case you ll need your own method of booting the installed system You can also use the append option to add an append line to the Linux boot entry This is handy if you need to do things like set memory sizes etc For example to install LILO on the MBR on a machine with 128MB of RAM you would add the following 1i10 line lilo append mem 128M location mbr Due to the new kernel in Red Hat Linux 5 2 the mem boot time option shouldn t be necessary but we needed an example H 3 18 packages Package Selection You can use the packages keyword to s
266. f gxditvieW ooooooocococccoccncccooncn o 237 e ani 259 Placa bee pro here ke eon ole hue huic 292 gtkx devel susi esce beer Eeene die twas bbs 292 A sce a roe re due 246 ro M We 246 guil devel ireeteteche nere he tes 247 Data sd ei 287 fel D 272 WA Pani ck EE A EEEE 276 h lptaol pts testet ue PRA UCHAR S 277 Howto arista neike i QU e Fires 253 howto chinese sssri eee eer meten 253 howto croatian 2 6 6 cece cece 254 howto Vi e oe xber nen iia 254 INDEX OF PACKAGES howto freneh esee eser amc ta 254 howto g tman Lecce eere net Ree EE 254 howto greek ci sereebxe Ee PRUPTR e Er TA 254 howtoshtmio stas dao 254 howto indonesian sse 254 howto italiab ice pere aves 254 HOWtO JAPANESE viciado iaa 254 ThOWtO KOPCAM sion ocio in me aaa iii 254 howto polishi derer erret ehe 255 lioWtO DS sores sve ere no 255 howto serbian iones e Cos E EN A een 255 howto sgtn i e ekeazaxsa seres her prre 255 howto slovenian c et eret e 255 howto sparishi i cesses eee nte nene 255 howto swedish ooooccccococcccccococcancoos 255 howto turkish os csi erre irei inei 255 daran 237 ImageMa glck unas orar aa 287 ImageMagick devel ssseesusss 292 Map erien ono etica 263 arado diese die 293 imlibscfgeditOE nie sua e eiat es 293 A tee 293 diaria 252 adsl aaa 255 MW ate 266 ijj D M bin 277 initseripts Yasser tebe wen alin Ae
267. f you choose No your Red Hat Linux system will be a standalone workstation If you choose Yes you may configure networking as described below If you are installing Red Hat Linux via NFS FTP or SMB you have already entered temporary net working information that was used during the installation The install program offers you three choices see Figure 5 3 LAR networking har already bean Donfigured M uou wart tor A Bent set up neteorking CT Cb Lao etapa e boat FL mest press Figure 5 3 Network Configuration Options e Keep this setup Keeps the network configuration you used during the installation All the networking information you entered previously becomes part of your system s permanent configuration e Reconfigure network now The installation program presents the network configuration dialogs in Section 3 4 3 on page 38 The values you used during installation will be filled in as 5 4 Configuring the Clock defaults Choose this if your system will be installed on a network other than the one you used to install Red Hat Linux e Don t setup networking Don t set up networking at all Your system will not have network ing configured Choose this if you installed your system over a network but it will be used as a standalone workstation 5 3 1 Network Configuration Dialogs If you elected to configure networking at this time you will be presented with a series of dialog boxes Please turn to Section 3
268. fact that the kernels built by Red Hat after 4 0 use a modular kernel interface many of the options that worked with either a different Linux or in Red Hat Linux prior to 4 0 no longer work Instead you will have to supply items in the etc conf modules file so that either kmod or kerneld will be able to load them correctly into kernel space E 9 20 Changing LILO default boot Question Currently when the machine boots LILO defaults to running Linux I would like it to boot my other operating system How can I accomplish this Answer To change the default OS that Linux boots into you will need to edit the etc lilo conf file and change the order of the OS s that LILO looks at In the following example we change the order of booting so that DOS gets booted by default instead of Linux pico etc lilo conf here is the old version boot dev hda map boot map install boot boot b prompt timeout 50 image boot vmlinuz 2 0 31 label linux root dev hda2 read only other dev hdal label dos table dev hda change it to the following boot dev hda map boot map install boot boot b 345 346 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ prompt timeout 50 other dev hdal label dos table dev hda image boot vmlinuz 2 0 31 label linux root dev hda2 read only Save your changes to the file and leave the editor Run the command sbin lilo v The updated lilo will then be written to the boot device O
269. fdisk under your current operating system or while setting up partitions during a custom class installation 2 7 3 Disk Partitions and Other Operating Systems If your Red Hat Linux partitions will be sharing a hard disk with partitions used by other operat ing systems most of the time you ll have no problems However there are certain combinations of Linux and other operating systems that require extra care Information on creating disk partitions compatible with other operating systems is available in several HOWTOs and Mini HOWTOs avail able on the Red Hat Linux CD in the doc HOWTO and doc HOWTO mini directories In particular the Mini HOWTOs whose names start with Linux are quite helpful INTEL If Red Hat Linux Intel will coexist on your machine with OS 2 you must create your disk parti tions with the OS 2 partitioning software otherwise OS 2 may not recognize the disk partitions During the installation do not create any new partitions but do set the proper partition types for your Linux partitions using the Linux fdisk 2 7 Disk Partitions 2 7 4 One Last Wrinkle Using LILO INTEL LILO the LInux LOader is the most commonly used method to boot Red Hat Linux on Intel based systems Being an operating system loader LILO operates outside of any operating system using only the Basic I O System or BIOS built into the computer hardware itself This section describes LILO s interactions with PC BIOSes and is spe
270. file The HTML version of the manual while convenient for an online manual is not the same quality of the PDF or PostScript formats Improvements will be made to the HTML version later This release was under a time constraint For other formats of this manual check ftp manual gimp org pub manual howto Version 5 2 9 803K This is the best collection of Linux documentation there is It was put together on Apr 15 1998 If you want to find newer versions of these documents see http sunsite unc edu linux For the versions in this package see usr doc HOWTO howto chinese Version 5 2 13 708K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into chinese Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install 253 254 Package List howto croatian Version 5 2 1 872K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into croatian Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto dvi Version 5 2 3 306K These are the dvi versions of the HOWTOs Probably only useful to TeX hackers howto french Version 5 2 38 101K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into french Please note that not all the files have been translated so you m
271. form a workstation class installation If your system already runs Windows a workstation class installation will automatically configure your system to dual boot using LILO 2 6 2 The Server Class Installation A server class installation is most appropriate for you if you d like your system to function as a Linux based server and you don t want to heavily customize your system configuration What Does It Do A server class installation removes all existing partitions on your system so choose this installation class only if you re sure you have nothing you want saved When the installation is complete you ll find the following partitions e A 64MB swap partition e A 16MB partition mounted as boot in which the Linux kernel and related files are kept e A 2MB partition mounted as dos in which the MILO boot loader is kept e A larger the exact size is dependent on available disk space partition mounted as in which all other files are stored 2 7 Disk Partitions A 256MB partition mounted as e A partition of at least 512MB mounted as usr e A partition of at least 512MB mounted as home A 256MB partition mounted as var This approach to disk partitioning results in a reasonably flexible filesystem configuration for most server class tasks Please Note You will need approximately 1 6GB of free disk space in order to perform a server class installation 2 6 3 The Custom Class Installatio
272. form tasks that either require root access or can only be done by memorizing arcane commands They all require X to run so you ll need to get that set up first These tools are e User Information Tool Makes it easy to update your gecos or basic account information Run usr bin userinfo to start it e User Password Tool Changing passwords is simple with this tool It s started by running usr bin userpasswd e Filesystem Mounting Tool Makes mounting and unmounting filesystems simple Every user mountable filesystem must have the user option present in etc fstab see the mount man page for more information on the user option Run usr bin usermount to start it e Network Device Tool Starting and stopping network interfaces becomes a point and click operation with this tool Run usr bin usernet to start this tool Requires that every inter face to be controlled by usernet is configured to be user controllable This can be done by using net cfg and selecting the interface s Allow any user to de activate interface checkbox 6 4 Configuring Your Red Hat Linux System For Sound By default the only sound you ll hear out of your newly installed Red Hat Linux system is the ordinary boring default beep If your computer system has sound hardware chances are you can make it work under Red Hat Linux In some cases particularly with non Intel systems sucessfully getting sound support to work requires a kernel rebuild Howeve
273. g 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt Networking gt Client tasks gt Basic host information The Host name tab will request a host name which should be specified as localhost localdomain Skip this tab Select the tab for Adaptor 1 Hebacrking Cieni bake Basic hret imorradion Rrarirsg and gateways Desi ahe muras m neteagrks gha mue m heds routes bo aiem gie Inc sl the rowed daran Hori nane search path FX merce setup PPP SLIP PLIP Tamar pasts E pored fle suckin HF UUCP Unt fn unis paper my FS RS held ke Essi jH basic intonation pii T hana server specific ation E Meteor Information Syrian F aiga dar virus hasi hil dalveny mein dared This host basic coer guration WOU are alid da control fie pararadar which arn specific da db hot and ralakad ds nain connection da he local erue Host mare Adamar 1 2 a r Enabled TE Contig roda v Manual Diep Binip Primen rame doris itane rapi F addres Heim apa f Mel device enn T keme module IC i Wo port opi a ee E al The first item on this screen is a checkbox to indicate whether this adaptor is enabled or not It should be checked if this is the one you intend to use Below that is a choice of Config modes Manual means that you will
274. g newsfeeds dhcp Version 2 0b1pl6 437K This is the second release of the dhcp package from the Internet Software Consortium It provides a server and a relay agent dhcpcd Version 0 70 34K B dheped is an implementation of the DHCP client specified in draft ietf dhc dhcp 09 when r option is not speci fied and RFC1541 when r option is specified It gets the host information IP address netmask broad cast address etc from a DHCP server and configures the network interface of the machine on which it is running It also tries to renew the lease time according to RFC1541 or draft ietf dhc dhcp 09 gated Version 3 5 10 2 248K GateD is a routing daemon that handles multiple routing protocols and replaces routed and egpup GateD currently handles the RIP BGP EGP HELLO and OSPF routing protocols The gated process can be configured to perform all routing protocols or any subset of them It is curently maintained by Merit imap Version 4 4 1 419K IMAP is a server for the POP Post Office Protocol and IMAP mail protocols The POP protocol allows a post office machine to collect mail for users and have that mail downloaded to the user s local machine for reading The IMAP protocol provides the functionality of POP and allows a user to read mail on a remote machine without moving it to his local mailbox inn Version 1 7 2 3 217K INN is a news server which can be set up to handle USENET news as
275. g the installation and after the installation as well To direct a system to use DHCP to obtain its networking configuration use the following line network bootproto dhcp To direct a machine to use BOOTP to obtain its networking configuration use the following line in the kickstart file H 3 The Kickstart File network bootproto bootp The line for static networking is more complex as you must include all network configuration infor mation on one line You ll need to specify e IP address e netmask e gateway IP address e nameserver IP address Here s an example static line network bootproto static ip 10 0 2 15 e netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 10 0 2 254 nameserver 10 0 2 1 Please Note The entire network configuration must appear on one line We ve wrapped it here to make it easier to read Note that there are two restrictions you must keep in mind should you use the static method e Allstatic networking configuration information must be specified on ore line you cannot wrap lines using a backslash for example e You can only specify one nameserver here However you can use the kickstart file s post section described in Section H 3 19 on page 389 to add more nameservers if needed H 3 3 Installation Methods The next required item is the installation method This item directs the installation program to the rest of the files required to install Red Hat Linux There are two choices NFS or
276. get more information by entering man 1s This will bring up the man page for 1s The man page is viewed through the 1ess program which makes it easy to page forward and back ward screen by screen so all of the options to 1ess will work while in a man page The more important keystrokes for 1ess are e d to quit e to page down line by line to page down page by page e b to page back up by one page e J followed by a string and to search for a string e N to find the next occurrence of the previous search There are times when it s just a lot more convenient to read something from a sheet of paper Pro viding you have a working printer you can print man pages as well If you don t have Postscript printing capability and just want to print ASCII you can print man pages with man COMMAND lpr If you do have a postscript printer you will probably want to print with man t COMMAND lpr In both of those commands substitute COMMAND for the command you are trying to get help for Sometimes you ll find that certain system components have more than one man page Here is a table showing the sections that are used to divide man pages 7 1 On Line Help 103 Section Contents I usercommands system commands system calls library calls devices file formats games miscellaneous kernel internals Tcl Tk commands 5S ON DUB WN OC This is also the order in which the sections are searched This can be important her
277. ging any of the parameters For detailed information on the various filters select the Help button on the Filter control screen e Select Add This will open the User account creation tab see figure 8 6 on page 118 The User account creation tab is where you enter all the information on the new account There are a number of fields you should be aware of some required some optional Required Fields e Login name the name of the account Usually all lowercase letters First or last names initials or some combination thereof are fairly common login names For a user named John T Smith smith john jts or smith would be common user names Of course spike or something else works just fine too You can also use numbers so jts2 would be fine if you had a second person with the same initials There is no default for this field Optional Fields e Full name this is the name of the user or the account For an individual it would be their name John T Smith for example If the account represents a position rather than a person the full name might be the title So an account called webmaster might have a full name of Red Hat Webmaster or just Webmaster There is no default for this field 115 116 System Configuration Uaita accounts Fiia c onbel Hori al User accounts Tia fiit 0f usara Hi do a SD VD Group dafiniions may want n fer a bil by prosa Changa meni p aiiwoed a probo sa
278. h of the current package whose name is listed inside of it has been installed while the bottom graph shows how much of the total installation has been finished The number of packages package sizes and time estimates are continually updated If a problem occurs during the installation a window will appear listing any errors that occurred If this happens you should correct the problems and then try again After the installation has completed the package and groups that have been installed are moved from the available window to the main glint window to show you that they have been successfully installed Upgrading Packages When a new version of a package has been released it is easy to install it on your system Select the packages from the window of available packages in the same way you select packages for installation Both the Upgrade button and the context sensitive menus will begin the upgrade During the upgrade you ll see a progress indicator like the one for installing packages When it s finished the installed packages will appear in the the main glint windows and any old versions of the packages will be removed It is much better to use the upgrade option than to uninstall the old versions of a package and then install the new one Using upgrade ensures that any changes you made to package configuration files get preserved properly while doing it manually could cause those changes to be lost 10 4 Package Manipulation P
279. h the GNU C compiler gcc strace Version 3 1 114K Strace prints a record of each system call another program makes including all of the arguments passed to it and the system call s return value xxgdb Version 1 12 95K xxgdb is a graphical interface to GNU s debugger It has the ability to display source files as they are executed set breakpoints and singlestep through or over commands all with an easy to use graphical X Windows interface C 4 3 Languages This section lists the packages containing various programming languages basic Version 1 20 52K This is a BASIC language interpreter You can use it to run programs written in BASIC For those who may not know BASIC is an archaic language used only to learn early fundamentals of programming and it isn t very good for that either bin86 Version 0 4 70K This package provides an assembler and linker for real mode 80x86 instructions Programs that run in real mode including LILO and the kernel s bootstrapping code need to have this package installed to be built from the sources bit Version 2 4f 4 096K BLT provides extra widgets and commands for tk programs It includes graphing widgets table geometry management and folder widgets ctags Version 2 0 3 77K A better ctags which generates tags for all possible tag types macro definitions enumerated values values inside enum function and method definitions enum st
280. h the control panel applications can also be done using linuxconf In addition linuxconf supports both character cell and graphical user interfaces Please refer to Section 8 1 on page 110 for an introduction to linuxconf The control panel is a launching pad for a number of different system administration tools See Fig ure 8 29 on page 152 These tools make your life easier by letting you configure things without remembering configuration file formats and awkward command line options To start the control panel start the X Window System as root with startx and type control panel in an xterm You will need to be root to run the control panel tools successfully You can do this as well if you already have X running as a normal user Just type su c control panel and then type the root password when prompted If you plan to do other tasks as root you 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel Ee Conil Toia Gate E tre Control parl Achai conigaratian Shukra A e cl Corral anita ib Conigure supearusar ached Archive coni garaiari Sitch system pirika Corral PRR EL IPP IE links Tum oT firzeialling Cano iia and charra hg dab amp tine F ajiri IGG adam aiai Frapare regurt Satan informiatian menini aga Rid nk ds nate deca IP routine dable IP pouting talia Broad a Fit Tes ferra o andi cada por Ea wasin must gat ita dana ans lirie roe Et Siam Bata in CMOS _ univarsal donna
281. hanged once logged in If you don t remember it follow the steps as if you never had a login and re enter the registration numbers and information Registering via Email If you don t have access to the World Wide Web but you do have access to Internet mail you can send registration details to register redhat com Please include the following information e Contact Information name address city state province country zip postal code and tele phone and fax numbers also your support ID if you have one e Product Information name of product you are registering product registration number very important architecture you re using the product on Intel Alpha AXP or Sparc and what you re using the product for File Server Internet Server Workstation Home Computer or Other e System Information CPU i386 i486 i586 1686 PentiumPro AXP21164 AXP21064 Sparc4C Sparc4M CPU speed MHz amount of RAM MB hard drives num ber size type partitions video card CD ROM drive any network card and other hardware components SCSI or ISDN adaptors etc Registering via Fax or Snail Mail Although a mail in portion is provided with your registration card we do not recommend registering via fax or snail mail if you have access to either the World Wide Web or Internet mail if you do so your registration is likely to be delayed considerably If you do wish to register via fax fax a copy of your registration card t
282. haracteristics of the disk drive s internal organization Note that a disk drive may report a logical geometry that is different from its physi cal geometry normally to get around BIOS related limitations See also Cylinder Head and Sector GID Short for Group ID The means by which a user s membership in a group is identified to various parts of Red Hat Linux GIDs are numeric although human readable names are stored in the etc group file Group Groups are a way of assigning specific access rights to certain classes of users For example all users working on Project X could be added to group xpro j System resources such as disk space devoted to Project X could then be configured to permit only members of xpro j full access Hard Disk A hard disk contains rotating magnetic media in the shape of a disk that spin rapidly Small heads float over the surface of each disk and are used to write to and read from the disk as it rotates Head When referring to disk drives the number of read write heads within a disk drive For each platter in a disk drive there are normally two heads for each platter one for each surface although one surface may go unused See also Geometry Hostname A hostname is a human readable string of characters used to identify a particular com puter system 118n See Internationalization Glossary IDE An acronym for Integrated Drive Electronics which is the name of a standard interface used to con
283. hardware oooooccccccoooocccc 10 finding with Windows 11 configuration video oooooccccocoocccccccoooo gt 13 configure Apache boca ead oix di rh aceite hs 100 WWW server 100 console commands for SPARC 355 consoles virtual pesien roe uE cece eee eee e ees 31 control panel isis sees enun see controlpanel controlpa el secs cesse thee eb REIR OE DAS 150 Copyright asi li ii Costales BEY senso ctx da e dA ea 201 CSLIP vias ion ob M 28 2 T ea a8 198 daemon kernel ooooooocccocccoccccccoro 156 date Setas atan ibid 163 date setting cuidan anida 149 dd creating installation diskette with 226 default boot using LILO ooooocccconcco 345 deleting accounts sosiaa AERE 123 124 deleting groups 2 cece ceca ee 127 128 dependencies packages suuuesus 62 desktop changing esce eret ees 95 destructive partitioning sssssssssss 23 devices network clone 1 522222 en ees 160 directories Jeter e EE eoe etica 186 p Ren TT 186 PS iria ratore n Gigi ne ee tone 186 IU ida 187 Just loca licita 187 189 INES A A A ME 188 disabling accounts riiai anii en 122 123 Disk Druid cevasosinertas er been e seeni 46 abORUng a eae a pee C eed e 52 adding NFS With oooooccccccoccoccc 52 adding partitions with 50 DUO icon 49 INDEX current partitions screen 05 47 d
284. hat you currently have access to the root account e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open Config Users accounts Normal Change root password P The screen is a little confusing because neither the title nor the description really explains the screen s purpose Linuxconf seems to be asking for the new password which isn t actually the case Instead linuxconf wants the current root password to verify access to the root account Linuxconf does re quire root access to run but once running there s nothing to keep anyone from sitting down at the computer if the person using linuxconf steps out for a minute The potential pitfalls are extensive If the person who was originally using linuxconf logs out of root they won t be able to get back into it A lack of validation would also give free reign over the computer to whoever had changed root s password Once you have entered root s current password it will prompt you for a new password There is also a field called Confirmation where you will need to type the password again see figure 8 7 on page 119 This is to prevent you from mistyping the password Passwords must be at least 6 122 System Configuration Usiri accounts Horn ai Usir accounts Grua duefirons Chonga rol password Special accounts PPP account SLIP accaunts six nanmal bc UUCP aint cunts POP accaunts inii anb Winia POP ac
285. he fficial Bad Hat Linux User Guide CT eb Lao ea e boe Chee selecta Figure 5 19 Ready for Reboot e Entering a Boot Label followed by Causes LILO to boot the operating system corresponding to the entered boot label e Doing Nothing After LILO s timeout period which by default is five seconds Lilo will automatically boot the default boot entry Do whatever is appropriate to boot Red Hat Linux You should see one or more screens worth of messages scroll by Eventually you should see a login prompt Congratulations Your Red Hat Linux installation is complete If you re not sure what to do next turn to Chapter 6 What Do I Do Now Now that your installation of Red Hat Linux is complete you might be wondering What do I do now If so this chapter is for you We ll start with some basic things you should know in order to properly start and stop your Red Hat Linux system Then we ll show you how to do some post installation configuration so you can set things up just the way you want it But before we do any of that let s talk about documentation 6 1 Getting the Documentation That s Right For You As we mentioned in Section 2 1 on page 6 it is critical to make sure you have documentation that is appropriate to your level of Linux expertise There is no more certain way to make your experience using Red Hat Linux a failure than to not have the documentation you need when you need it As the name im
286. he buttons provided Click on the Close button when you are finished looking at the packages 10 4 2 Verifying Packages Verifying a package checks all of the files in the package to insure they match the ones present on your system The checksum file size permissions and owner attributes are all checked against the database This check can be used when you suspect that one of programs files has become corrupted due to the installation of new programs Choosing the packages to verify is the same as choosing the packages to query Select the packages and use the Verify button or choose the Verify entry from a context sensitive menu A window opens like the one in figure 10 7 The three columns in this window describe the package with a problem in it the file that has the problem and a brief description of the discrepancies that were found While the check is running 10 4 Package Manipulation 181 Package File Problem sendmail 8 6 12 2 fetc sendmail cf size md5 sendmail 8 6 12 2 fvarflog sendmail st size md5 pemcia cs 2 6 3a 2 fetc sysconfig pcmcia scripts config mode size md5 pemcia cs 2 6 3a 2 fetcirc dirc5 d S45pcemcia checking Figure 10 7 Verify Window the current file being checked appears as the last element in the list and the problem is listed as checking A full list of the problems that can be found through verification appears in figure 10 8 Problem Description missing The file is no longer on your system
287. he file s ending number in the man command as in man n something e usr X11R6 man something nx This is a man page for part of the X Window System View these files the same way as a regular man page e usr doc something Files under usr doc can be in any number of different formats Sometimes the end of the filename can provide a clue as to how it should be viewed html An HTML file View with the web browser of your choice txt A text file View with cat or less ps A Postscript file You can print it to a Postscript printer or you can view it with gv gz A file compressed with gzip If you make a copy of the original file you can use gunzip to decompress it you ll probably want to keep the original file compressed to save space You can then view the file as you would normally The zless command combines gunzip and less and makes it possible to read compressed text files without making interim copies There are other more elegant ways to work with compressed files but this approach will work for those just starting to use Linux C 1 Applications In general most of the documentation files you ll find will be one of those listed above If in doubt it s a good bet that the file is text You can always try the ile command to see if the file s contents can be identified e usr info Files in usr info are meant to be viewed using the info or Emacs Info mode If you use Emacs press IJ f
288. he kernel to mount the root filesystem This program creates such a ramdisk image using information found in etc conf modules mkisofs Version 1 12b4 138K This is the mkisofs package It is used to create ISO 9660 file system images for creating CD ROMs Now includes support for making bootable El Torito CD ROMs mkkickstart Version 1 0 4K This package writes kickstart descriptions from the current machine allowing you to generate auto matic builds of the machine and clone it mktemp Version 1 4 7K B mktemp is a small utility that interfaces to the mktemp function call to allow shell scripts and other programs to use files in tmp safely modemtool Version 1 21 15K The modem tool is a graphical simple configuration tool for selecting which of your serial ports is connected to a modem modutils Version 2 1 85 577K B The Linux kernel allows new kernel pieces to be loaded and old ones to be unloaded while the kernel continues to run These loadable piecs are called modules and can include device drivers and filesystems among other things This package includes program to load and unload programs both automatically and manually mount Version 2 8a 107K B Mount is used for adding new filesystems both local and networked to your current directory struc ture The filesystems must already exist for this to work It can also be used to change the access types the kernel uses for already
289. he next step Adding an NFS Mount Red Hat Linux also allows you to mount read only NFS volumes when your system boots this allows directory trees to be shared across a network To do so press F2 1f you have not selected a network related installation method you will be presented with several dialog boxes concerning 55 56 Continuing the Installation network configuration Turn back to Section 3 4 4 on page 39 for more information Fill them in appropriately You will then see a dialog box entitled Edit Network Mount Point Enter the NFS server s hostname the path to the NFS volume and the local mount point for that volume see Figure 4 11 O Poebbtion Tek ou may nou mount other partitions ulthin pour Ti lentos Ham users Like ta ura rsparats petition for jur and Jhaoama far axampla You may also mount our MIS or 47 partitions to make them visible to Linux Edit Hatsark Hant Paint Cape selecta Figure 4 11 Adding an NFS Mount 4 5 Initializing Swap Space After you ve created partitions for Red Hat Linux the installation program looks for swap partitions see Figure 4 12 on the next page If it finds any it asks whether you want to initialize them Select the partition s you wish to initialize as swap space using if you wish to check the partitions for bad blocks make sure the Check for bad blocks during format box is checked Choose OK and press Space If the installation program can t find
290. he one for the print queue After you have added your print queue you may need to restart the printer daemon 1pa To do so choose Restart Ipd from the Ipd menu You may print a test page for any print queue you have configured Select the type of test page you would like to print from the Tests menu 156 System Configuration Figure 8 35 Printing a Test Page 8 2 2 Kernel Daemon Configuration Red Hat Linux includes kerneld the Kernel Daemon which automatically loads some software and hardware support into memory as it is needed and unloads it when it is no longer being used The tool shown in Figure 8 36 manages the configuration file for kerneld While kerneld can load some things such as filesystems without explicit configuration it needs to be told what hardware support to load when it is presented with a generic hardware request Figure 8 36 Kernel Module Management For instance when the kernel wants to load support for ethernet kerneld needs to know which 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel ethernet card you have and if your ethernet card requires special configuration it needs to know about that too Changing Module Options To change the options being given to a module when it is loaded click on the line to select it then click the Edit button kernelcfg will bring up a window which looks like Figure 8 37 The options kernelcfg knows about normally all available options will each have th
291. hich can emulate a VT100 or a computer with terminal emulation software will work fine Boot as you would normally and at the SILO prompt enter linux serial The installation program runs on the first serial port at 9600 baud 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit often called 9600 8 N 1 Theinstallation program can run in color if your serial terminal supports color Note that a computer running kermit and connected to your SPARC system will display in color At any prompt dialog during a serial installation any dialog with an OK button you can press Ctr Z to start a subshell To return to the installation program enter exit at the shell prompt When the installation is complete simply boot normally and Red Hat Linux should come up on your serial terminal Please Note If you want to have a headless installation you must use a serial terminal to perform the installation and make sure you disable GPM 361 362 Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC F8 Installation Selecting System Components For an explanation of system components please see Section 4 10 1 on page 60 Important When selecting system components to install for Red Hat Linux SPARC choosing to install Everything without choosing Select individual packages could result in serious problems and possibly an unbootable Red Hat Linux SPARC system Here s why e The last kernel to be installed will be a multi processor kernel which will fail to work
292. hile these tools do make life easier for the Red Hat Linux user we began a search for a system configuration tool with even more flexibility and power Our search ended with the inclusion of linuxconf into Red Hat Linux 5 1 in June of 1998 Now with this version of Red Hat Linux we ve been able to more fully document the more popular aspects of system configuration using linuxconf Note that we said more popular aspects One of linuxconf s greatest strengths the incredible range of configuration options under its control is actually a liability when it comes time to docu 110 System Configuration ment them all Rest assured however that we will continue to expand linuxconf documentation as new versions of Red Hat Linux are released But what about the control panel tools They re still there While linuxconf at present can do nearly everything the control panel tools can there are two areas in which the control panel still holds the upper hand e Printer configuration e Kernel daemon control To that end we ve left the control panel documentation in this manual as the second half of this chapter But now let s take a look at linuxconf 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Linuxconf is a utility that allows you to configure and control various aspects of your system and is capable of handling a wide range of programs and tasks Fully documenting linuxconf could be a separate book in its own right and certainl
293. hrough the Current Disk Partitions section you might see an Unallocated Requested Partitions title bar followed by one or more partitions As the title implies these are partitions that have been requested but for one reason or another have not been allocated A common reason for having an unallocated partition is a lack of sufficient free space for the partition In any case the reason the partition remains unallocated will be displayed after the partition s mount point The Drive Summaries Section Each line in the Drive Summaries section represents a hard disk on your system Each line has the following fields Drive This field shows the hard disk s device name Geom C H S This field shows the hard disk s geometry The geometry consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders heads and sectors as reported by the hard disk Total The Total field shows the total available space on the hard disk Used This field shows how much of the hard disk s space is currently allocated to partitions Free The Free field shows how much of the hard disk s space is still unallocated Bar Graph This field presents a visual representation of the space currently used on the hard disk The more pound signs there are between the square braces the less free space there is In Figure 4 4 the bar graph shows no free space 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux Please Note The Drive Summar
294. ibe from with unsubscribe in the Subject line Then to send mail to the list you just send it to the address above without the request in the name 7 2 2 USENET Newsgroups Another good source of help is the comp os linux hierarchy on USENET If you are familiar with news you should check it out Red Hat Specific Newsgroups Red Hat Software currently hosts a number of newgroups specifically for users of our software You can either read these groups directly from news redhat com or ask your news admin to add the redhat hierarchy to their news server 108 Finding Documentation System Configuration After installing your Red Hat Linux system it s easy to think that the decisions you made during the installation are engraved in granite never to be changed again Nothing could be further from the truth One of the main strengths of Linux is that the operating system can be configured to do just about anything Here at Red Hat Software we ve worked hard to try to make system configuration as easy and accessible as possible To that end we ve worked hard on two fronts e By developing system configuration tools in house e By working with outside developers of world class system configuration tools Anyone familiar with Red Hat Linux over the years has probably seen what we call our control panel system configuration tools These tools have been developed by Red Hat Software to make system configuration easier And w
295. ication for the first hard drive is C To specify the root directory on the C drive you would use C V Under this arrangement there are two filesystems the one on A and the one on C In order to specify any file on a DOS Windows filesystem you must either explicitly specify the device on which the file resides or it must be on the system s default drive which is where DOS infamous C prompt comes from that s the default drive in a system with a single hard drive Under Linux it is possible to link the filesystems on several mass storage devices together into a single larger filesystem This is done by placing one device s filesystem under a directory on another device s filesystem So while the root directory of a diskette drive on a DOS machine may be referred to as A V the same drive on a Linux system may be accessible as mnt floppy The process of merging filesystems in this way is known as mounting When a device is mounted it is then accessible to the system s users The directory under which a mounted device s filesystem becomes accessible is known as the mount point In the previous paragraph s example mnt floppy was the diskette drive s mount point Note that there are no restrictions other than common con ventions as to the naming of mount points We could just as easily mounted the floppy to long path to the floppy drive One thing to keep in mind is that all of a device s files and directories are r
296. ices and System Summary report type is the most complete 2 3 2 Video Configuration If you will be installing the X Window System you should also be familiar with the following e your video card The card s make and model number or the video chipset it uses and the amount of video RAM it has Most PCI based cards are auto detected by the installation program 13 14 Before You Begin e your monitor The unit s make and model number along with allowable ranges for horizon tal and vertical refresh rates 2 3 3 Network related Information If you will be connected to a network be sure you know your e IP address Usually represented as a set of four numbers separated by dots such as 10 0 2 15 netmask Another set of four numbers separated by dots An example netmask would be 255 255 248 0 gateway IP address Yet another set of four dot separated numbers For instance 10 0 2 254 e one or more name server IP addresses One or more sets of dot separated numbers 10 0 2 1 might be the address of a name server e domain name The name given to your organization For instance Red Hat Software has a domain name of redhat com hostname The name of your computer A computer might be named pooh for instance Please Note The information given above is an example only Do rot use it when you install Red Hat Linux If you don t know the proper values for your network ask your network administrator 2
297. iconductor a semiconductor technology used in many integrated circuits Now often used to describe the low level hardware that contains a personal computer s BIOS and the computer s hardware clock Cylinder When referring to disk drives the number of different positions the disk drive s read write heads can take over the unit s disk platters When viewed from above the platters each head position describes an imaginary circle of different diameters on the platter s surface but when viewed from the side these circles can be thought of as a series of cylinders nested within each other hence the term See also Geometry Daemon A daemonis program that runs without human intervention to accomplish a given task For example 1pd is a daemon that controls the flow of print jobs to a printer Dependencies When referring to packages dependencies are requirements that exist between packages For example package oo may require files that are installed by package bar In this ex ample bar must be installed or else oo will have unresolved dependencies RPM will not normally allow packages with unresolved dependencies to be installed Device Driver Software that controls a device that is connected to or part of a computer Disk Drive See Hard Disk Disk Druid Disk Druid is a component of the Red Hat Linux installation program that is used to partition disk drives during the installation process Diskette A small mass storage device in
298. id starts up it spawns a configurable number of dnsserver processes each of which can perform a single blocking Domain Name System DNS lookup This reduces the amount of time the cache waits for DNS lookups Squid is derived from the ARPA funded Harvest project ucd snmp Version 3 5 3 2 105K This is a derivative of the original Carnegie Mellon University Simple Network Management Proto col version 2 SNMPv2 It is useful for managing networks and doing accounting wu ftpd Version 2 4 2b18 297K wu ftpd is the daemon background program which serves FTP files to ftp clients It is useful if you wish to exchange programs between computers without running a network filesystem such as NFS or if you with to run an anonymous FTP site in which case you will want to install the anonftp package xntp3 Version 5 93 2 043K This package contains utilities and daemons to help synchronize your computer s time to UTC stan 265 266 Package List dard time It includes ntpdate a program similar to rdate and xntpd a daemon which adjusts the system time continuously ypserv Version 1 3 5 261K ypserv is an implementation of the standard NIS YP networking protocol It allows network wide distribution of hostname username and other information databases This is the NIS server and is not needed on NIS clients C 9 3 Development This section lists packages that are related to the development of networking
299. ies section is displayed only to indicate your computer s disk configuration It is not meant to be used as a means of specifying the target hard drive for a given partition This is described more completely in Section 4 4 1 on the next page Disk Druid s Buttons These buttons control Disk Druid s actions They are used to add and delete partitions and to change partition attributes In addition there are buttons that are used to accept the changes you ve made or to exit Disk Druid entirely Let s take a look at each button in order Add The Add button is used to request a new partition When selected a dialog box will appear containing fields that must be filled in Edit The Edit button is used to modify attributes of the partition currently highlighted in the Current Disk Partitions section Selecting this button will cause a dialog box to appear Some or all of the fields in the Edit Partition dialog box may be changed depending on whether the partition information has already been written to disk or not Delete The Delete button is used to delete the partition currently highlighted in the Current Disk Partitions section Selecting this button will cause a dialog box to appear asking you to confirm the deletion Ok The Ok button causes any changes made to your system s partitions to be written to disk You will be asked to confirm your changes before Disk Druid rewrites your hard disk partition table s
300. iguration e Primary name domain the primary name is the name of your computer while the domain is how your network is specified For example foo bar com foo is the primary name and bar comis the domain e IP address this is the address of the machine and will follow the pattern of x x x x For example 192 168 0 13 e Net device type of network card you are using eth0 would be the appropriate entry to use the first ethernet card e Kernel module the correct module based on your network card Information on net devices and kernel modules is described above The appropriate primary name domain and IP address will depend on whether you are adding the computer to an existing network or creating a new network For connecting to an existing network contact your systems administra tor for the information Getting a network connected to the Internet is beyond the scope of this book and we recommend the following starting point TCP IP Network Administration 2nd Edition by Craig Hunt O Reilly and Associates If you re setting up a private network that won t ever be connected to the Internet then you can choose any primary name domain name you would like and have several choices for IP addresses See Figure 8 24 Addresses available 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 10 5 12 14 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 172 16 9 1 172 28 2 5 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 192 168 0 13 Figure 8 24 Private Address Ranges 8 1 System
301. ike to use Red Hat Linux to fix Or I am having problems with Red Hat Linux that are outside of the installation support that was provided Where can I turn to for answers Answer In general mailing lists and newgroups are the best way of getting in touch with other Red Hat Linux users Many of the applicable mailing lists and newsgroups are listed in Section E 4 on page 308 E 5 4 Does Red Hat Linux include source code Question I need to make changes to a program that came with Red Hat Linux Does Red Hat Linux include source code for this program Answer Yes We include the exact source code that was used to build the distribution From release 2 0 on Red Hat Linux has been built with the RPM packaging system RPM only uses pristine source the same as what you d find at the author s site possibly including a Red Hat supplied patch The sources along with any patches are contained in a source RPM file To install a source RPM use the following command rpm iv packagename n nn r src rpm RPM installs sources under the redhat source tree which is usr src redhat by default you can configure the directory using the topdir command in etc rpmrc Spec files packagename n nn spec are installed in usr src redhat SPECS while source archives and patch files go in usr src redhat SOURCES To unpack the source once it s installed change to usr src redhat SPECS and use the following command rpm bp packagename n n
302. in building customized kernels In the past you were required to compile support into your kernel if you wanted to access a particular hardware or filesystem component For some hardware configurations the size of the kernel could quickly reach a critical level To require ready support for items that were only occasionally used was an inefficient use of system resources With the ca pabilities of the 2 0 x kernel if there are certain hardware components or filesystems that are used infrequently driver modules for them can be loaded on demand For information on handling kernel modules see Chapter 8 2 Section 8 2 2 Many people new to Linux often ask why should I build my own kernel Given the advances that have been made in the use of kernel modules the most accurate response to that question is unless you know why you need to build your own kernel you probably don t So unless you have a specific reason to build a customized kernel or you re just the curious sort you may skip ahead to Section 11 7 on page 200 11 6 1 Building a modularized kernel These instructions provide you with the knowledge required to take advantage of the power and flexibility available through kernel modularization If you do not wish to take advantage of mod ularization please see Section 11 6 3 for an explanation of the different aspects of building and in stalling a monolithic kernel It is assumed that you have already installed the kernel headers and ker
303. ing Red Hat Linux at the LILO prompt If you elected to install LILO and you entered boot labels for other partitions containing other operating systems your computer will be configured to dual boot This means that you can enter the name of the operating system you want to boot at the LILO Boot prompt If you press the key at the LILO prompt you ll see a list of the operating systems LILO can boot for you Select the entry for your Red Hat Linux installation and you re off and running e Booting from a diskette If you created a boot diskette when you installed Red Hat Linux you can boot from that to get Linux running Make sure the diskette is inserted in your com puter s first diskette drive and start the boot sequence by applying power pressing the reset button or typing the Ctrl Alt and keys simultaneously 6 2 2 Logging In Logging Out After Red Hat Linux boots you ll see something similar to this on your screen Red Hat Linux release 5 1 Manhattan Kernel 2 0 34 on an i586 login As you might guess from the last line it s time to log in 6 2 Basic System Tasks Logging In The first time you log into your Red Hat Linux system you ll have to log in as root This is the name of the user account that has full access to everything on the system Normally the root account is only used when performing system administration tasks such as creating new user accounts shutting down the system etc That s because r
304. ing a Linux like operating system 226 Making Installation Diskettes B 1 Making a Diskette Under MS DOS To make a diskette under MS DOS use the rawrite utility included on the Red Hat Linux CD in the dosutils directory First label a blank formatted 3 5 inch diskette appropriately eg Boot Diskette Supplemental Diskette etc Insert it into the diskette drive Then use the following commands assuming your CD is drive d GN d D gt ed dosutils D dosutils gt rawrite Enter disk image source file name images boot img Enter target diskette drive a Please insert a formatted diskette into drive A and press ENTER D dosutils gt rawrite first asks you for the filename of a diskette image enter the directory and name of the image you wish to write for example images boot img Then rawrite asks for a diskette drive to write the image to enter a Finally rawrite asks for confirmation that a formatted diskette is in the drive you ve selected After pressing to confirm rawrite copies the image file onto the diskette If you need to make another diskette label another diskette and run rawrite again specifying the appropriate image file B 2 Making a Diskette Under a Linux like O S To make a diskette under Linux or any other Linux like operating system you must have permis sion to write to the device representing a 3 5 inch diskette drive known as dev d0 under Linux
305. ing procedure to get addi tional configuration information e With Windows running click on the My Computer icon using the secondary normally the right mouse button A popup menu should appear e Select Properties The System Properties window should appear See Figure 2 1 on the following page Note the information listed under Computer in particular the amount of RAM listed e Click on the Device Manager tab You will then see a graphical representation of your com puter s hardware configuration Make sure the View devices by type button is selected At this point you can either double click on the icons or single click on the plus sign 3J to look at each entry in more detail See Figure 2 2 on page 13 Look under the following icons for more information 11 12 Before You Begin ETC Nul 4 Figure 2 1 Windows System Properties Window Disk drives You will find the type IDE or SCSI of hard drive here IDE drives will normally include the word IDE while SCSI drives won t Hard disk controllers You can get more information about your hard drive controller here CDROM Here is where you ll find out about any CD ROM drives connected to your com puter Please Note In some cases there may be no CD ROM icon yet your computer has a func tioning CD ROM drive This is normal depending on how Windows was originally installed In this case you may be able to glea
306. inistration 343 Where X is the Linux drive letter and Y is the partition on the drive you installed the root partition to E 9 16 Linux and Plug and Play Question Ican t get my Plug and Play card to work Answer The 2 0 xx kernels do not directly support the Plug and Play PNP protocol You will need to either disable PNP on the card via jumpers or card setup tools You can also change your boot method to use Loadlin exe from Windows as windows would then have set up the PNP hardware Finally you can try using the isapnptools programs First type this pnpdump etc isapnp conf This will create a configuration file that you will need to edit to choose the settings used for each card Then type isapnp etc isapnp conf to set up the devices See http www roestock demon co uk isapnptools for more information E 9 17 Problems with Sound Card Question Ican t get linux to setup my sound card Answer First make sure that your sound card is on the list of supported sound cards Also have you up graded to the latest soundconf ig from here ftp ftp redhat com pub sound sndconfig You ll also need the latest kernel with sound module support If you haven t already you should download and install these packages 344 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ The sound engineer recommends downloading the sound tools mentioned above and reporting problems to the sound 1listfredhat com http archive redh
307. ion type by using the 1 and keys 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux e Allowable Drives This field contains a list of the hard disks installed on your system with a check box for each If a hard disk s box is checked then this partition may be created on that hard disk If the box is not checked then partition will never be created on that hard disk By using different check box settings you can direct Disk Druid to place partitions as you see fit or let Disk Druid decide where partitions should go e Ok Select this button and press when you are satisfied with the partition s settings and wish to create it e Cancel Select this button and press when you don t want to create the partition Problems When Adding a Partition If you attempt to add a partition and Disk Druid can t carry out your request you ll see a dialog box like the one in Figure 4 6 In the box are listed any partitions that are currently unallocated along with the reason they could not be allocated Select the Ok button and press to continue Note that the unallocated partition s are also displayed on Disk Druid s main screen though you may have to scroll the Current Disk Partitions section to see them Jisk Pactitions linallacated Partition There ara currantl unallacated partition present in the List of requested partitions The unallacated partitian r arca thew balos along uith the reason they uere nat allocated Figure 4 6 Unalloca
308. ion Modules is a way of allowing the system admin istrator to set authentication policy without having to recompile programs which do authentication With PAM you control how the modules are plugged into the programs by editing a configuration file Most Red Hat Linux users will never need to touch this configuration file When you use RPM to install programs that need to do authentication they automatically make the changes that are needed to do normal password authentication However you may want to customize your configuration in which case you need to understand the configuration file 11 4 1 PAM Modules There are four types of modules defined by the PAM standard auth modules provide the actual authentication perhaps asking for and checking a password and set credentials such as group membership or kerberos tickets account modules check to make sure that the authentication is allowed the account has not expired the user is allowed to log in at this time of day etc password modules are used to set passwords session modules are used once a user has been authenticated to make it possible for them to use their account perhaps mounting the user s home directory or making their mailbox available 193 194 System Administration These modules may be stacked so that multiple modules are used For instance rlogin normally makes use of at least two authentication methods if rhosts authentication succeeds it is suffici
309. ion scheme of 255 heads 63 sectors per track LILO does not like this After disabling everything works OK windows95 installation Linux and LILO installation dual boot 319 320 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ 7 Make sure that on a SCSI chain that the drive you are installing to is SCSI ID 0 or 1 if you have no IDE drives in the system Otherwise your system may not be able to boot 8 Others have found that using the conservative slow settings no tagged queuing 5MB s etc fixes problems 9 Another problem found with some systems is that if SCAM support is turned on turning it off has solved the problem E 6 11 Signal 11 or Signal 7 problems during install Question During the install I get a fatal signal 11 or signal 7 What does this mean and what can I do Answer Signal 11 s and signal 7 s are errors indicating a hardware error in memory or on the bus This can be due to problems in executables or with the hardware of the system The Linux kernel uses more capabilities of the CPU cache and memory and tends to expose marginally operating hardware The first thing to do is check to see if you have the latest installation and supplemental floppies from Red Hat Check the errata for updates and also the FTP site to see if newer versions are available If the latest images still fail it may be due to hardware Common suspects are memory or CPU cache Try turning off the CPU cache in the BIOS and see if the
310. ionally want to run the following command etc cron daily updatedb cron You will need to be root on your system when doing that That will allow 1ocate to work properly So if you know you need to find all the finger files you could run 105 106 Finding Documentation locate finger It should return something like usr bin finger usr lib irc script finger usr man manl finger 1 usr man man8 in fingerd 8 usr sbin in fingerd One thing to note however is that Locate not only returns hits based on file name but also on path name So if you have a home djb finger directory on your system it would get returned along with all files in the directory 7 1 5 info Pages While man is the most ubiquitous documentation format info is much more powerful It provides hypertext links to make reading large documents much easier and many features for the documenta tion writer There are some very complete info documents on various aspects of Red Hat especially the portions from the GNU project To read info documentation use the info program without any arguments It will present you with a list of available documentation If it can t find something it s probably because you don t have the package installed that includes that documentation Install it with RPM and try again If you re comfortable using emacs it has a built in browser for info documentation Use the Ctrl h i key sequence to see it The info system
311. ipt are also available The standard ANSI color sequences are used where available Manual pages and info documentation are also provided Isik Version 1 18 33K The UNIX lock file lister Islk attempts to list all the locks held on the local files of the executing system i e on the active inodes The locks may come from local processes or remote ones on NFS clients served by the executing system Note Linux and PTX 2 1 9 IsIk don t report on locks held by remote NFS client processes Isof Version 4 37 534K Lsof s name stands for LiSt Open Files and it does just that It lists information about files that are open by the processes running on a UNIX system macutils Version 2 0b3 201K This is a set of utilities for manipulating files from the Macintosh Popular utilities like macunpack hexbin and binhex are included mtools Version 3 9 1 481K Mtools is a collection of utilities to access MS DOS disks from Unix without mounting them It supports Win 95 style long file names OS 2 Xdf disks ZIP JAZ disks and 2m disks store up to 1992k on a high density 3 1 2 disk sharutils Version 4 2 217K The shar utilities can be used to encode and package a number of files binary and or text in a special plain text format This format can safely be sent through email or other means where sending binary files is difficult smbfs Version 2 0 1 50K This package includes the tools necessary
312. ire volumes No information on Size or Partition type is available for these partitions either Additional information on these filesystems should you have any available will be contained under gt File systems gt 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 135 dg sss local deii mta 4 Dl uni Yau cam eig add cr delete mounts save ibas and gartikirr Suloct fado la asc to ads a sew dafinibun Sal quaia dafauit sora the pension Same upon rre Sue rene 7 Dan el horarias fra epochs rn Lio a FT she me LLO daraus Lirios baor la Moos LM LILO Linus comiguaratiarrs LLO other OS conf girar da a bori configuration unie Lom kamal yi hava camplles Miji L daiaurl boot riide Be Conil Control parai Activate conmiguratian uber A ela ce Conka andes echt Conmigure suparusar scheduh ACA Pam c onmiguaratia rri Tiiri aitor eril NFS alae Figure 8 15 NFS Volume Screen The screen is similar to the Local volume screen see figure 8 14 on the facing page with some notable differences in the information provided for each entry e Source This will be the name of the machine serving the filesystem followed by the re mote directory For example foo var spool mail where foo is the machine serving the directory and var spool mail is the directory being served e FsType This will always be nfs Adding NFS Mounts Quick Reference 1 Start
313. ironment If you have used some of the Micro oft Windows programming IDE s and longed for an X Windows equivalent this is what you have been looking for Also included are the text mode equivalents of the X programs enabling you to use xwpe no matter what your development environment may be This package includes the basic xwpe libraries and the text mode programs the X Windows pro grams are contained in the xwpe X11 package C 4 7 Version Control This section contains packages that allow the programmer to implement various forms of version control over their programs cvs Version 1 10 2 3 024K CVS is a front end to the rcs 1 revision control system which extends the notion of revision control from a collection of files in a single directory to a hierarchical collection of directories consisting of revision controlled files These directories and files can be combined together to form a software release CVS provides the functions necessary to manage these software releases and to control the concurrent editing of source files among multiple software developers rcs Version 5 7 487K C 5 Documentation The Revision Control System RCS manages multiple revisions of files RCS automates the storing retrieval logging identification and merging of revisions RCS is useful for text that is revised frequently for example programs documentation graphics papers and form letters C 5 Documentation This section lists
314. is a SGML based text formatter which allows you to produce a variety of output formats You can create PostScript and dvi with LaTeX plain text with groff HTML and texinfo files from a single SGML source file tetex Version 0 9 41 786K TeX formats a file of interspersed text and commands and outputs a typesetter independent file called DVI which is short for DeVice Independent TeX capabilities and language are described in The TeXbook by Knuth tetex afm Version 0 9 2 134K PostScript fonts are or should be accompanied by font metric files such as Times Roman afm which describes the characteristics of the font called Times Roman To use such fonts with TeX we need TFM files that contain similar information afm2tfm does that conversion tetex doc Version 0 9 24 455K This package contains the documentation files from the teTeX system Because of their big size the documentation is now separated in its own subpackage tetex dvilj Version 0 9 375K Dvilj and siblings convert TeX output dvi files into HP PCL i e HP Printer Control Language commands suitable for printing on a HP LaserJet HP LaserJet IIP using dvilj2p HP LaserJet 4 using dvilj4 and fully compatible printers tetex dvips Version 0 9 831K The program dvips takes a DVI file file dvi produced by TeX or by some other processor such as GFtoDVI and converts it to PostScript normally sending the result directly to the las
315. is given the installation will continue unattended unless it comes across another missing item 380 Kickstart Installations e Lines starting with a pound sign 7 are treated as comments and are ignored Let s take a look at each item in order H 3 1 lang Language Setting The first item that must appear is the language setting The language you specify will be used during the installation as well as to configure any language specific aspect of the installed system The language specification must be a two letter ISO language code such as en for English de for German fr for French and so on For example to set the language to English the kickstart file should contain the following line lang en H 3 2 network Networking Configuration The next item is the network configuration information This line is used to tell the system how it should configure networking for itself It is optional and if omitted the system will be configured for stand alone operation There are three different methods of network configuration e DHCP e BOOTP e static The DHCP method uses a DHCP server system to obtain its networking configuration As you might guess the BOOTP method is similar requiring a BOOTP server to supply the networking configura tion The static method requires that you enter all the required networking information in the kickstart file As the name implies this information is static and will be used durin
316. isallows all root rlogin attempts If you wish to allow them in which case we recommend that you either not be internet connected or be behind a good firewall you can simply remove that line Second pam_nologin so checks etc nologin as specified above Third if pam_rhosts auth so authenticates the user PAM immediately returns success to rlogin without any password checking being done If pam rhosts auth so fails to authenticate the user that failed authentication is ignored Finally if pam rhosts auth so has failed to authenticate the user the pam pwdb so module performs normal password authentication Note that if you do not want to prompt for a password if the securetty check fails you can change the pam_securetty so module from required to requisite 196 System Administration 11 4 4 Shadow Passwords The pam_pwdb so module will automatically detect that you are using shadow passwords and make all necessary adjustments Please refer to Section 11 5 for more information on the utilities that sup port shadow passwords 11 4 5 More Information This is just an introduction to PAM More information is included in the usr doc pam directory including a System Administrators Guide a Module Writers Manual an Application Developers Manual and the PAM standard DCE RFC 86 0 In addition documentation is available from the Red Hat web site at http www redhat com linux info pam 11 5 Shadow Ultilities Suppo
317. it lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 11 3 11 S99local gt rc local What you ll notice is that there are no real files in the directory Everything there is a link to one of the scripts in the init d directory The links also have an S and a number at the beginning The S means to start this particular script and a K would mean to stop it The number is there just for ordering purposes Init will start all the services based on the order they appear You can duplicate numbers but it will only confuse you somewhat You just need to use a two digit number only along with an upper case S or K to start or stop the services you need to How does init start and stop services Simple Each of the scripts is written to accept an argument which can be start and stop You can execute those scripts by hand in fact with a command like etc rc d init d httpd init stop to stop the httpd server Init just reads the name and if it has a K it calls the script with the stop argument If it has an S it calls the script with a start argument Why all these runlevels Some people want an easy way to set up machines to be multi purpose I could have a server runlevel that just runs httpd sendmail networking etc Then I could have a user runlevel that runs xdm networking etc 11 11 3 Init Runlevels Generally Red Hat Linux runs in run level 3 full multiuser mode The following runlevels are defined in Red Hat Linux
318. itional GNU tools This package includes the shared libraries necessary to run C applications 259 260 Package List libtermcap Version 2 0 8 55K B This is the library for accessing the termcap database It is necessary to be installed for a system to be able to do much of anything libtermcap devel Version 2 0 8 11K This is the package containing the development libaries and header files for writing programs that access the termcap database It may be necessary to build some other packages as well libtiff Version 3 4 602K This package is a library of functions that manipulate TIFF images libungif Version 3 0 37K GIF loading and saving shared library Saving uses an uncompressed gif algorithm that does not use LZW compression ncurses Version 4 2 2 334K B The curses library routines give the user a terminal independent method of updating character screens with reasonable optimization This implementation is new curses ncurses and is the approved replacement for 4 4BSD classic curses which is being discontinued ncurses3 Version 1 9 9e 317K The curses library routines give the user a terminal independent method of updating character screens with reasonable optimization This implementation is new curses ncurses and is the approved replacement for 4 4BSD classic curses which is being discontinued newt Version 0 30 122K B Newt is a windowing toolkit f
319. ity pam pwdb so account required password required password required The first line is a comment Any line that starts with a character is a comment Lines two through four stack up three modules to use for login authorization Line two makes sure that if the user is trying to log in as root the tty on which they are logging in is listed in the etc securetty file if that file exists Line three causes the user to be asked for a password and the password checked Line four checks to see if the file etc nologin exists and if it does displays the contents of the file and if the user is not root does not let him or her log in Note that all three modules are checked even if the first module fails This is a security decision it is designed to not let the user know why their authentication was disallowed because knowing why it was disallowed might allow them to break the authentication more easily You can change this 11 4 User Authentication with PAM 195 behavior by changing required to requisite if any requisite module returns failure PAM fails immediately without calling any other modules The fifth line causes any necessary accounting to be done For example if shadow passwords have been enabled the pam pwdb so module will check to see if the account has expired or if the user has not changed his or her password and the grace period for changing the password has expired The sixth line subjects a newly changed passw
320. iza Jima ik Aital A dada iiiki Directory holding Red Hate Figure 4 15 Selecting Partition for HD Install Space If you wish to check for bad blocks while formatting each filesystem select Check for bad blocks during format Select OK and press Space 4 10 Selecting and Installing Packages After your partitions have been configured and selected for formatting you are ready to select pack ages for installation You can select components which group packages together according to function individual packages or a combination of the two 4 10 1 Selecting Components Components group packages together according to the functionality they provide For example C Development Networked Workstation or Web Server Select each component you wish to install and press Space Selecting Everything which can be found at the end of the component list installs all packages included with Red Hat Linux see Figure 4 17 on page 62 Selecting every package will require over 700 MB of free disk space If you wish to select or deselect individual packages check the Select individual packages check box 4 10 Selecting and Installing Packages What partition would you Like ta format Ha rtranglg maggart formatting all of the system partitions inoluding fe Puse md ver hara iz m need to format hom arc Jurr lacal if they furs already bean configured during previous install Chere selecta Figure 4 16 Formatting Partition
321. l need to enter the SMB server name It s important to note that the name expected here is the server s Microsoft Networking name and not a fully qualified domain name Next enter the name of the shared volume Since different implementations of the SMB protocol handle share names differently you might find that the case of the share name is important In most cases no pun intended entering the share name in lower case seems to work best Next enter the account name and password In general the account name should be guest A password which is case sensitive must be present If the share is made available without a password it will most likely not work After entering all the required information select Ok and press Space If everything is working properly there will be a slight delay as the list of available packages is read by the installation pro gram If you are doing a workstation or server class installation please turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 Otherwise turn to Section 4 9 on the facing page to continue installing Red Hat Linux 4 8 For Hard Drive Installations Only Plasa aber tha following information a tha rama ar P mabe af yor HI mrar the les o aues eh lok contains Pad Hat Linus far your architectura Cart bebe eines Figure 4 14 Installing via SMB 4 8 For Hard Drive Installations Only If you are not performing a hard drive installation please skip ahead to Section 4 9 Otherwise read on
322. lated problems 317 INDEX versions of Red Hat Linux 351 Windows NT dual booting with 321 X alternatewindow managers 330 customizing window managers 329 grey screen Only sesioen a nad 329 NeoMagic support for 332 NOt Staring xis obra Pete ei 328 problems after upgrade 333 starting automatically 332 X library problems ssssse 331 X window Syst m esini aiin ies 328 X AGP support of 2 0c cece 332 X error 111 ous ui cue eoe er neenon 330 X keyboard mapping 4 331 Zip drive IDE version 339 Zip drive parallel port version 339 BAO S civic ec 105 FAT32 filesystems accessing oooooooooooo 134 PIS c 46 OVerVIeW OF teins onerosa be 54 UM TP C US 52 features new to 5 2 00 cece cece cece nnne 1 feedback how to give iiie e xiii filesystem how to T View Jis site eed e deed ees 133 OVERVIEW OE oss cs corea venit bone 131 statidard ii cal tires 186 A bre tbe eile 185 filesystem configuration sssssssse 55 Other partitions eei cece intres 55 FOO Par o 55 filesystems NFS exporting of ooooooccccccocococcco 203 INES mounting OF seccion ple ace e en 203 finishing installation seriye irimas nsa 65 fips partitioning utility 8 24 floppies missing from box ssuuuu 314 floppy based
323. ld check your computer s BIOS to see if you are accessing them in LBA mode 2 3 Things You Should Know memory The amount of RAM installed in your computer e CD ROM Most importantly the unit s interface type IDE SCSI or other interface and for non IDE non SCSI CD ROMs the make and model number IDE CD ROMs also known as ATAPI are the most common type in recently manufactured PC compatible computers SCSI adapter if one is present The adapter s make and model number network card if one is present The card s make and model number mouse The mouse s type serial PS 2 or bus mouse protocol Microsoft Logitech Mouse Man etc and number of buttons also for serial mice the serial port it is connected to On many newer systems the installation program is able to automatically identify most hardware However it s a good idea to collect this information anyway just to be sure ALPHA In addition to the latest hardware compatibility list on Red Hat Software s website owners of Alpha based systems should refer to the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum for more information on supported hardware configurations SPARC In addition to the latest hardware compatibility list on Red Hat Software s website SPARC owners should refer to Section F 1 on page 353 for a list of supported hardware Learning About Your Hardware With Windows If your computer is already running Windows 9x you can use the follow
324. les and targets libtool Version 1 2b 485K GNU libtool is a set of shell scripts to automatically configure UNIX architectures to build shared libraries in generic fashion make Version 3 76 1 247K The program make is used to coordinate the compilation and linking of a set of sources into a pro gram recompiling only what is necessary thus saving a developer a lot of time In fact make can do a lot more read the info docs pmake Version 1 0 123K The program make is used to coordinate the compilation and linking of a set of sources into a pro gram recompiling only what is necessary thus saving a developer a lot of time In fact make can do a lot more read the info docs Pmake is a particular version of make which supports some additional syntax not in the standard make program Some berkeley programs have Makefiles written for pmake C 4 2 Debuggers This section contains a number of packages that make it easier to find bugs in a program ElectricFence Version 2 0 5 44K C 4 Development Electric Fence is a libary that can be used for C programming and debugging You link it in at compile time and it will warn you of possible problems such as free ing memory that doesn t exist etc gdb Version 4 17 0 4 1 251K This is a full featured command driven debugger It allows you to trace the exectuion of programs and examine their internal state at any time It works for C and C compiled wit
325. les into or out of a cpio or tar archive which is a file that contains other files plus information about them such as their file name owner timestamps and access permissions The archive can be another file on the disk a magnetic tape or a pipe cpio has three operating modes gzip Version 1 2 4 227K B This is the popular GNU file compression and decompression program gzip Iha Version 1 00 52K This is an archiving and compression utility It is mostly used in the DOS world but can be used under Linux to extract DOS files from LHA archives ncompress Version 4 2 4 30K B ncompress is a utility that will do fast compression and decompression compatible with the original nix compress utility Z extensions It will not handle gzipped gz images although gzip can handle compress images tar Version 1 12 471K B GNU tar saves many files together into a single tape or disk archive and can restore individual files from the archive It includes multivolume support the ability to archive sparse files automatic archive compression decompression remote archives and special features that allow tar to be used for incremental and full backups If you wish to do remote backups with tar you will need to install the rmt package as well unarj Version 2 41a 25K The unarj program is used to uncompress arj format archives which were somewhat popular on DOS based machines unzip
326. lgorithms may be added later and will have the same stream interface This package contains the header files and libraries needed to develop programs that use these zlib C 4 5 System This section lists the packages containing system level development tools linuxconf devel Version 1 12r5 2 706K This package provides the components needed to develop linuxconf modules outside of the linuxconf source tree The kit is also needed to develop standalone utilities using the linuxconf user interface toolkit C 4 6 Tools This section contains packages that provide the usual assortment of tools that programmers require binutils Version 2 9 1 0 14 4 537K QWA Binutils is a collection of utilities necessary for compiling programs It includes the assembler and linker as well as a number of other miscellaneous programs for dealing with executable formats bison Version 1 25 154K This is the GNU parser generator which is mostly compatible with yacc Many programs use this as part of their build process Bison is only needed on systems that are used for development byacc Version 1 9 52K This is a public domain yacc parser It is used by many programs during their build process You probably want this package if you do development cdecl Version 2 5 74K This is a package to translate English to C C function declarations and vice versa It is useful for programmers cproto Version 4 4 84K Cpro
327. lib usr i486 linux libc5 lib usr openwin lib usr X11R6 1lib E 9 6 Problems with fstool Question When I run fstool I get a message that says a partition seems to have been deleted and asks if I want to remove it from etc stab Answer The fstool program is not working properly with current versions of t c1 and shouldn t be used It should have been obsoleted but slipped through the cracks First we will have to fix the etc fstab file since fstool may have corrupted it The areas that seem to be changed by stoo1 are usually the cdrom and swap Here are sample lines note that you will need to change the actual partitions to match those on your system dev sda2 swap swap defaults dev cdrom mnt cdrom iso9660 noauto ro You should now remove the fstool program using rpm rpm e fstool If you are running 5 1 or later please use the 1inuxconf program E 9 System Administration 339 E 9 7 Configuring the Jaz drive and Linux Question How do I configure my Jaz drive under linux Answer Documentation on using Jaz with Linux can be found on the cdrom in doc HOWTO mini Jaz Drive and on the system in usr doc HOWTO mini Jaz Drive E 9 8 Problems with Parallel Port Zip drive Question How do I use my parallel port zip drive Answer Here s something you can try edit etc conf modules and add the following line to the others alias scsi_hostadapter ppa If you need to send the ppa driver any options about
328. ll Red Hat Linux In addition it contains information about aspects of the operating system that are unique to Red Hat Linux ALPHA Alpha Installation Addendum The Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum contains additional information of interest to owners of Alpha based computer systems It contains information that will make installation of Red Hat Linux more straightforward The Alpha Installation Addendum is only included in Red Hat Linux Alpha boxed sets CDs 1 and 2 These two Compact Discs contain the entire Red Hat Linux distribution including source code CD 1 contains all the binary packages built for the type of computer Intel Alpha or SPARC that you have CD 2 contains the source packages that were used to build the binary packages on CD 1 Before You Begin Linux Applications CD INTEL This Compact Disc contains demonstration versions of a number of commercial Linux software products For more information please refer to the README file on this CD Please Note This CD and its contents are completely unsupported by Red Hat Software All ques tions and issues concerning any software on this CD should be directed to the responsible company and not Red Hat Software Boot Diskette INTEL This diskette is used to start the installation process for Red Hat Linux Intel Depending on your computer s configuration and the type of installation you select you may or may not need the boot diskette I
329. lling Blocking Fire walling IP Masquerading Packet Accounting Mail to Fax Gateway User Accounts User and Group management PPP Acounts Slip Accounts UUCP Accounts POP Only Accounts Virtual Email Domain Accounts Email Aliases For Normal and Virtual Domains Policies For Passwords and User Accounts Available User Shells Crontab Management Shadow Management File Systems Local Partition Man agement etc fstab NFS Volume Management Samba Volume Management coming soon Swap File and Partition Management User and Group Disk Quotas File Permissions Boot Mode Lilo Con figuration Default Boot Mode Runlevel Definitions And more logrotate Version 2 6 41K B Logrotate is designed to ease administration of systems that generate large numbers of log files It allows automatic rotation compression removal and mailing of log files Each log file may be handled daily weekly monthly or when it grows too large losetup Version 2 8a 7K Linux supports a special block device called the loopback device which maps a normal file onto a virtual block device This package contains programs for setting up and removing the mapping between files and loopback devices Block loopback devices should not be confused with the networking loopback device which is con figured with the normal ifconfig command Ipr Version 0 33 168K This package manages printing services It manages print queues sends jobs to local printers and remote
330. ls and con ventions that make user and groups easier to manage and more useful The easiest way to manage users and groups is through linuxconf see Chapter 8 However you can also use adduser to create a new user from the command line 189 190 System Administration 11 3 4 Standard Users Table 11 3 1 lists the standard users set up by the installation process this is essentially the etc passwd file The group id GID in this table is the primary group for the user See section 11 3 3 for details on how groups are used User UID GID Home Directory Shell root root bin bash bin bin daemon sbin adm var adm Ip var spool Ipd sync sbin bin sync shutdown sbin sbin shutdown halt sbin sbin halt var spool mail news var spool news uucp var spool uucp Operator root games usr games usr lib gopher data home ftp mail NO XNOo040Nn o Figure 11 1 Standard Users 11 3 2 Standard Groups Table 11 3 2 lists the standard groups as set up by the installation process this is essentially the etc group file 11 3 3 User Private Groups Red Hat Linux uses a user private group UPG scheme which makes UNIX groups much easier to use The UPG scheme does not add or change anything in the standard UNIX way of handling groups It simply offers a new convention for handling groups Whenever you create a new user by default he or she has a unique group The scheme works as follows User Private G
331. ls idos 273 jr A ae eos der e iaa ll 268 MA M 252 yz 290 LO Lita rx exact ex rper Ea eet red ps 246 A emere ka 257 Dre notas basta ot buda uiae 269 ES eer edis 296 TOW ai o 297 EV WI ICONS aaa 297 Iwhols 2 1 ii auda ER a eee EE gH PER 267 Pa 263 no P 284 POC a ecce va reds aa vae e daa va eve dra oa PUT c 246 O O DN e ub Ie E 258 ed deve ios vo dore e eee tese 248 A vente eet prep Fer ice isa 245 INDEX OF PACKAGES o zs cc O 258 gdbmesd vel a iile eee de mete 248 eco iria 284 BO oia tin 252 gel PS las 276 ghostseript A ker re ett e Pepe ER n 233 ghostscriptfontS ooooococcocccccccoccccnccos 233 A ener deseen ada 234 fano PEE 287 gimp data extras eseni e innn EE KEERT 287 gitpedevel sevi REET 287 a A eo serre 287 gimp manual mordisco 253 dad PRA SERRA IAE SA ena Md ud 274 p ER 258 Tip o w 249 PDC EDU esisin RE ERE RR Eten 249 glibe devel viniste 249 g beprofile cd ncnecacgere heed bee eere nrak 249 A 276 PIMP ts oh RA ORA DU EE Es 258 mp devel snute cenit e Cue bb Let 258 gnom COTe ssecissrercr ivive gr e a uere he eas 292 enome libs ciar RR UI anas 299 gnome libs devel 2 eese e emen 300 gnome linuxconf oris siste es eere nena 294 SNUCHESS v s cess woe depende eda edd 257 ONUPlLOUr ET 235 Dori S 252 EDDY dai dao 243 Spmadevellss cory diss cir ede tete dans 249 BIDS oie eub beber edd adden ou cena 285 i 237 grof
332. ly the installation program will display a screen similar to the one in Figure 5 18 on page 81 Every partition that may be bootable is listed including partitions used by other operating systems The Boot label column will be filled in with the word 1inux on the partition holding your Red Hat Linux system s root filesystem Other partitions may also have boot labels If you would like to add Finishing the Installation Lilo Dnstal Lat ion A Teu systems WLLL need io pass special options to tha kamal at boot tima for tha mjrtem to function properly EF you mead to pass boot options to the karmal ambr tham nou f you dont reed my arm retos pesas this blyk Cus eb Lao ea e bos Chee selecta Figure 5 17 LILO options boot labels for other partitions or change an existing boot label use the arrow keys to highlight the desired partition Then use the key to select the Edit button and press Space You ll then see a small dialog box permitting you to enter modify the partition s boot label Press Ok when done Please Note The contents of the Boot label column will be what you will need to enter at LILO s Boot prompt in order to boot the desired operating system However if you forget the boot labels defined on your system you can always press at LILO s Boot prompt to display a list of defined boot labels There is also a column labeled Default Only one partition will contain an asterisk under that column
333. m disk 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux Changing the Partition Table When you are finished partitioning your disks press Done you may see a message indicating that the installation program needs to reboot This is a normal occurrence after changing a disk s partition data it usually happens if you created changed or deleted any extended partitions After you press OK your machine will reboot Follow the same installation steps you did up until Partitioning Disks then simply choose Done 4 4 3 Filesystem Configuration The next dialog box contains a list of all disk partitions with filesystems readable by Red Hat Linux including partitions for MS DOS or Windows This gives you the opportunity to assign these parti tions to different parts of your Red Hat Linux filesystem The partitions you assign will be automat ically mounted when your Red Hat Linux system boots Select the partition you wish to assign and press or choose Edit then enter the mount point for that partition e g usr see Figure 4 10 Linu native Limo nert ias aar opal pd T SH rH Linux natisa p Limo ssi nut hdi HEH Linux nativa Ate Local Lir natibus Mr lus omae Les irisa Gem D H Tatal Uned Ja B zx FEE E ES Figure 4 10 Filesystem Configuration If you are performing an upgrade the installation program tries to find your root partition automat ically if it does it obtains all this information automatically and goes on to t
334. m will ask you to choose an installation class You may choose from the following installation classes 4 2 Installation Class Bhat tpa af machina ara you irwtallimg For mre Lu flazibility choos urtem Martortart tan Y A ease ene Figure 4 2 Installation Class e Workstation A workstation class installation will automatically erase all Linux partitions from your computer s hard drive s e Server A server class installation will automatically erase all partitions from your computer s hard drive s e Custom A custom class installation gives you complete control over partitioning related issues If you have installed Red Hat Linux in the past the custom class installation is most similar to past installations Please Note If you choose either Workstation or Server part or all of your computer s stored data ill be erased You will be asked to confirm your decision however please keep in mind that once the installation program receives your confirmation the erasure is irrevocable If you choose a workstation or server class installation you should turn to one of the following sections depending on the installation method you ve selected e CDROM Turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 e NFS Turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 e Hard Drive Turn to Section 4 8 on page 59 follow the instructions there then turn to Chap ter 5 on page 65 e FTP Turn to Section 4 6 on page 56 follow the instructions there
335. macs site lisp 11 4 User Authentication with PAM e But when a user creates a new file it is assigned the group of the users default group usually users To prevent this you enter chmod 2775 usr lib emacs site lisp which causes everything in the directory to be created with the emacs group e But the new file needs to be mode 664 for another user in the emacs group to be able to edit it To do this you make the default umask 002 e Well this all works fine except that if your default group is users every file you create in your home directory will be writable by everybody in users usually everyone e To fix this you make each user have a private group as their default group At this point by making the default umask 002 and giving everyone a private default group you can easily set up groups that users can take advantage of without doing any magic Just create the group add the users and do the above chown and chmod on the group s directories 11 4 User Authentication with PAM Programs which give users access to privileges of any sort need to be able to authenticate the users When you log into a system you provide your name and password and the login process uses those to authenticate the login to verify that you are who you say you are Other forms of authentication than passwords are possible and it is possible for the passwords to be stored in different ways PAM which stands for Pluggable Authenticat
336. me you boot your Red Hat Linux system If you wish to change your keyboard type after you have booted your Red Hat Linux system you may use the usr sbin kbdconfig command 3 3 3 PCMCIA Support Next the installation program will probe your system to determine if your system requires PEMCIA also known as PC Card support If a PCMCIA controller is found you ll be asked if you require 35 Starting the Installation What tyes of keyboard da you hra tr_f LatinS ir a Lat LA trt tra uk ia Figure 3 5 Selecting a Keyboard Type PCMCIA support during the installation If you will be using a PCMCIA device during the installa tion for example you have a PCMCIA ethernet card and you ll be installing via NFS or you have a PCMCIA SCSI card and will be installing from a SCSI CD you should select Yes Please Note This question applies only to PCMCIA support during the actual installation Your installed Red Hat Linux system will still support PCMCIA even if you say No here assuming that you select the pcmcia cs package during the subsequent installation If you require PCMCIA support you will then be asked to insert the supplemental diskette Select OK when you ve done so The installation program will then display a progress bar as the supplemental diskette is loaded Please Note If you are performing an installation in expert mode you will be asked whether PCM CIA support is required As you might imagine you mu
337. mergency Boot Diskettes The boot diskette created during installation of Red Hat Linux 5 2 may be used as part of a rescue diskette set For more information please read the file rescue txt in the doc on your Red Hat Linux 5 2 CD ROM A Handy Trick Have you ever rebuilt a kernel and eager to try out your new handiwork rebooted before running LILO And you didn t have an entry for an older kernel in 1ilo conf Read on Here s a handy trick In many cases it s possible to boot your Red Hat Linux Intel from the Red Hat Linux boot diskette with your root filesystem mounted and ready to go Here s how Enter the following command at the boot diskette s boot prompt linux single root dev hdXX initrd Replace the XX in dev hdxx with the appropriate letter and number for your root partition What does this do First it starts the boot in single user mode with the root partition set to your root partition The empty initrd specification bypasses the installation related image on the boot diskette which will cause you to enter single user mode immediately Is there a downside to this trick Unfortunately yes Because the kernel on the Red Hat Linux boot diskette only has support for IDE built in those of you with SCSI based systems won t be able to use this trick In that case you ll have to use the boot rescue diskette combination mentioned above 215 216 System Administration Getting Technical Support This chapt
338. mnt mail This is all you need to get the mount created Linuxconf will update your etc fstab file ac cordingly If you are aware of additional requirements please read the help file on the Volume specification screen and see the mount man page for more information Once you have entered the information select Accept 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 137 OESEL Li loca iia nts Ol iri sap ibas and gartikirr Sai quota dafautt sur fig pamah but indu Lit ULG daraus Linux boot la LILO Linus comigaratiarrs LLO other OS conigaratiar daian bori corr garain au ngu Limi m barrel yr Drs Cde Pol Cod L daiaurl boot node meil Control parai Activate conmiguratian Shunk e cal Corral anita aiii Conigure suparusar scheduh Archi c omiguaratia rri iriri aitor urls MES volume ole spaciicabae Was must estar fea apeciicadon of a volum ur partition and fra poilus mount poat sgg wo wai no arcad hes ciam in fna diesctory siesctuss of Per wortktason Base aote NFS opens vn WaT peer Figure 8 16 Volume Specification Screen 8 1 4 Getting Connected Network Configuration The first thing to determine when getting hooked up is whether you re connecting to a local area network such as a group of computers in an office or a wide area network such as the Internet Before continuing it s important to know what hardware you have and how you intend to connect If you re going to dial into
339. mon problems with Red Hat Linux In addition security holes for which a solution exists are generally on the errata page 24 hours after Red Hat has been notified You should always check there first E 3 Contacting Red Hat Software There are a number of different ways to contact Red Hat Software We ve listed them here as a handy reference e General Red Hat Software PO Box 13588 79 TW Alexander Dr Research Triangle Park NC 27709 USA http www redhat com ftp ftp redhat com redhat redhat com Sales tel 1 888 RED HAT1 toll free tel 1 919 547 0012 toll call fax 1 919 547 0024 http www redhat com products Support http www redhat com support Bugs Bugs should be entered via the Red Hat bug tracking system at http developer redhat com bugs report phtml Suggestions and requests for new features suggest redhat com Suggestions on improving Red Hat documentation docstredhat com E 4 General Resources List There are a large number of resources available for users of Red Hat Linux Some are provided by Red Hat Software and some are provided by other sources Also since a large number of questions about Red Hat Linux are comment to all Linux distributions we ve included pointers to other helpful resources even if they don t mention Red Hat Linux by name E 4 General Resources List 309 e Red Hat Linux Web Pages Main Red Hat Software Page http www redhat com e Generic
340. mounted filesystems This package is critical for the functionality of your system 279 280 Package List mouseconfig Version 3 0 8 61K B This is a text based mouse configuration tool You can use it to set the proper mouse type for pro grams like gpm It also can be used in conjunction with the Red Hat Xconfigurator to setup the mouse for the X Window System mt st Version 0 5 64K B The mt program can be used to perform many operations on tapes including rewind eject skipping files and blocks etc netcfg Version 2 19 165K Red Hat Linux netcfg provides a GUI interface which allows you to easily administrate your network setup ntsysv Version 0 9 4 19K B ntsysv provides a full screen tool for updating the etc rc d directory hierarchy which controls the starting and stopping of system services popt Version 1 1 1 10K Popt is a C library for pasing command line parameters It was heavily influenced by the getopt and getoptlong functions but it allows more powerfull argument expansion It can parse arbi trary argv style arrays and automatically set variables based on command line arguments It also allows command line arguments to be aliased via configuration files and includes utility functions for parsing arbitrary strings into argv arrays using shell like rules printtool Version 3 29 112K The printtool provides a graphical interface for setting up printer
341. mple you need to choose from eth0 eth1 etc When you are done click OK again to continue to specify any module options in the next dialog box Figure 8 39 which is the same as the dialog for editing a module Figure 8 39 Selecting from available modules Restarting Kerneld The changes that you make with the Kernel Daemon Configuration tool will be made in the etc conf modules file which kerneld reads whenever it is started Once you have made changes you can restart kerneld by clicking on the Restart kerneld button This will not cause any modules which are currently in use to be reloaded it will only notify kerneld to use the configuration when it loads more modules in the future 8 2 3 Network Configuration Please Note Documentation on network configuration using linuxconf can be found in Section 8 1 4 on page 137 The network configuration tool netc g shown in Figure 8 40 on the facing page is designed to allow easy manipulation of parameters such as IP address gateway address and network address as well as name servers and etc hosts Network devices can be added removed configured activated deactivated and aliased Ethernet arcnet token ring pocket ATP PPP SLIP PLIP and loopback devices are supported PPP SLIP PLIP 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel 159 Figure 8 40 Network Configuration Panel support works well on most hardware but some hardware setups may exhibit unpredictable beha
342. n As you might guess from the name a custom class installation puts the emphasis on flexibility Dur ing a custom class installation it is up to you how disk space should be partitioned You have com plete control over the packages that will be installed on your system You can also determine whether or not you ll use LILO to boot your system For those of you with prior Red Hat Linux installation experience you ve already done a custom class installation it is the same installation procedure we ve used past versions of Red Hat Linux 2 7 Disk Partitions Please Note If you intend to perform a workstation or server class installation and you already have sufficient unpartitioned disk space available you don t need to read this section and may turn to Section 2 8 on page 28 Otherwise please read this section in order to determine the best approach to freeing disk space for your Red Hat Linux installation In order to install Red Hat Linux you must make disk space available for it This disk space needs to be separate from the disk space used by other operating systems you may have installed on your computer such as Windows OS 2 or even a different version of Linux A disk can be divided into different partitions Each partition can be accessed as if it was a separate disk Furthermore each partition has a type that is used to indicate how information is stored in the partition For example there are different partition types u
343. n an external scripting language and more 229 230 Package List C 1 2 Databases This section contains packages that provide basic database support for Red Hat Linux postgresql Version 6 3 2 9 312K PostgreSQL Data Base Management System formerly known as Postgres then as Postgres95 PostgreSQL is an enhancement of the POSTGRES database management system a next generation DBMS research prototype While PostgreSOL retains the powerful data model and rich data types of POSTGRES it replaces the PostQuel query language with an extended subset of SOL PostgreSOL is free and the complete source is available PostgreSOL development is being performed by a team of Internet developers who all subscribe to the PostgreSQL development mailing list The current coordinator is Marc G Fournier Coe PPM This team is now responsible for all current and future development of PostgreSQL The authors of PostgreSQL 1 01 were Andrew Yu and Jolly Chen Many others have contributed to the porting testing debugging and enhancement of the code The original Postgres code from which PostgreSQL is derived was the effort of many graduate students undergraduate students and staff programmers working under the direction of Professor Michael Stonebraker at the University of California Berkeley The original name of the software at Berkeley was Postgres When SQL functionality was added in 1995 its name was changed to Postgres95 The name was
344. n a reboot the machine will boot into DOS as default now instead of Linux with a 5 second delay to give you time to choose linux at the boot prompt if you wish to boot to Linux E 9 21 Using RPM Question How do I use rpm What are some general commands that I will use with this command Also for whatever reason I think files have changed on my system but I don t know which ones Can RPM help Answer In general normal usage of the rpm command can be summarized as follows Installation Upgrading Removal To install a package rem ivh filename gt rpm ivh somepackage 1 1 4 i386 rpm To upgrade a package rpm Uvh lt filename gt rpm Uvh somepackage 1 1 5 i386 rpm To remove a package rpm e lt packagename gt E 9 System Administration 347 rpm ivh somepackage Also for upgrading or installing some packages you may need to use additional flags to force the install happen It is only recommended to use these if you know why these flags were needed force will overwrite files that are owned by other packages nodeps will install even if the package needs packages that were not installed Querying To see if a package is installed rpm q packagename gt rpm q somepackage To get info on an installed package rpm qi lt packagename gt rpm qi somepackag To list which files belong to a package rpm q1 packagename gt rpm ql somepackag To see what package a file belongs to rpm qf
345. n addition you may require a supplemental diskette again depending on your system s hardware configuration and the installation method you choose When we discuss the different installation methods later in this chapter we ll explain which diskettes are needed for each type of installation and give you instructions for producing any diskettes you require ALPHA Alpha owners should refer to the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum for information on which diskettes are required SPARC owners should turn to Section E 5 1 on page 357 for information on their diskette needs License and Registration Information The CD ROM case includes the the license terms for Red Hat Linux in addition to the license terms for any commercial software that may be included on the Red Hat Linux CD In addition information about registering your copy of Red Hat Linux with Red Hat Software can be found here Once registered you can receive installation support Red Hat Software s installation support program is discussed in Appendix A on page 217 Please Note There is an alphanumeric registration string printed on the CD ROM case It is used to register you for Red Hat Software s installation support Please make sure you don t lose your registration string you won t be able to get installation support without it 2 2 Getting the Right Red Hat Linux Components 2 2 2 Missing Something If you ve purchased the Official Red Hat Linux boxed set
346. n additional information by looking at the CD ROM driver loaded in your computer s config sys file Mouse The type of mouse present on your computer can be found here Display adapters If you re interested in running the X Window System you should write down the information you find here Sound video and game controllers If your computer has sound capabilities you ll find more information about that here Network adapters Here you ll find additional info on your computer s network card if you have one 2 3 Things You Should Know Bere Dedos Manager Hassan Pofies Pestenrnsanos de Viens deron br Epp O erre by gonneckicn ae Dirk dre E Cipla aapi a Gru Lage SHE PO B Floppy dick conie 2 Herd ith cantrallar ae Emad Horda Bt Houa m Ep Herek adapters a Chan dicas u Peas COM ELPT E Sound video and para cantiallarz EE Span dicas Figure 2 2 Device Manager Under Windows 95 e SCSI controllers If your computer uses SCSI peripherals you ll find additional info on the SCSI controller here While this method is not a complete substitute for opening your computer s case and physically examining each component in many cases it can provide sufficient information to continue with the installation Please Note This information can also be printed by clicking on the Print button A second window will appear allowing you to choose the printer as well as the type of report The All Dev
347. n spec 312 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ RPM unpacks the source into usr src redhat BUILD packagename n nn and applies any patches listed in the spec file For more information please read the RPM manual page and visit the RPM website at http www rpm org E 5 5 What do do if have media manual or CD problems Question I purchased the Red Hat Linux boxed set and have been having problems with the cd It looks like it is scratched or it just doesn t read I even tried it on another system What should I do Answer If you are experiencing physical problems with the product you received e g your manual is miss ing pages or your CD is scratched please contact the Sales Office at Red Hat Software Section E 3 on page 308 We ll make sure the problem is rectified promptly Please do not report these problems on the redhat list or to Red Hat Support as it is likely an isolated problem and your product simply needs to be replaced Note This is not a common problem but it does happen from time to time E 6 Installation E 6 1 How much disk space does Red Hat Linux Use Question Iam worried about how room Red Hat Linux will need to use on my hard drive How much disk space do I need to reserve for Red Hat Linux Answer As new features are added to software that software grows in size Red Hat Linux is no exception it has grown an average of 20 with each release due primarily to additional p
348. nd how to use the various system management and administration tools which accompany Red Hat Linux They also include an explanation of what s special about your Red Hat Linux system including where special files live and more Appendixes contain extra information about Red Hat Linux including an explanation on Red Hat Software s support offerings frequently asked questions etc xi xii Preface Quick Start Information Those of you that have installed Red Hat Linux Intel before and are in a hurry to get started need only boot from a boot diskette or the Red Hat Linux Intel CD ROM if your computer supports boot ing directly from CD ROM Next select the desired installation method If you are installing from an FTP site a hard disk or you ll be using a PCMCIA card during the installation you ll be prompted to insert a supplemental diskette In either case answer all questions as they are presented If you are attempting to install Red Hat Linux for either the Alpha or the SPARC you really should read Chapter 2 on page 5 It will refer you to information specific to your non Intel based system Upgrading from a Prior Version of Red Hat Linux The installation process for Red Hat Linux 5 2 includes the ability to upgrade from prior versions of Red Hat Linux 2 0 through 5 0 inclusive which are based on RPM technology Upgrading your system installs the modular 2 0 x kernel as well as updated versions of the packages that are ins
349. nd shadow passwords in general shapecfg Version 2 0 36 3K Configure and adjust traffic shaper bandwidth limiters This package requires a kernel that has sup port for the shaper module Currently this is the case with the 2 0 36 or later kernels and with late 2 1 X kernels sliplogin Version 2 1 1 52K Attaches a SLIP interface to standard input This is often used to allow dialin SLIP connections sndconfig Version 0 26 148K The Red Hat sound package includes the sndconfig tool whichs is a text based sound configuration tool You can use it to set the proper sound type for programs which use the devices dev dsp dev audio and dev mixer Sound settings are saved via the use of aumix and sysV runlevel scripts statserial Version 1 1 169K Statserial displays a table of the signals on a standard 9 pin or 25 pin serial port and indicates the status of the handshaking lines It can be useful for debugging problems with serial ports or modems swatch Version 2 2 129K Swatch is used to monitor log files When it sees a line matching a pattern you specify it can highlight it and print it out or run external programs to notify you through mail or some other means C 11 Utilities taper Version 6 9 874K This is a tape backup and restore program that provides a friendly user interface to allow back ing restoring files to a tape drive Alternatively files can be backed up to hard disk files S
350. ndication of a problem that can be solved faster CPU more memory or finding out what is broken in networking Another problem can be that the starting scripts are not able to execute some command You can try to get around this by creating a very simple xinitrc and running startx You may also check var log Xerrors for errors that might help you troubleshoot the problem E 8 3 Customizing the X window manager Question I would like to change the way Red Hat sets up my X window session How do I customize the X window manager Answer To customize any of the default window manager settings add or remove programs from the menus and or change which programs start up automatically you will need to change the files in etc X11 AnotherLevel Please see the man pages for xinit startx AnotherLevel fvwm2 FvwmM4 and wmconfig for more details To try other window managers not included with Red Hat Linux you may want ot look at http www plig org xwinman 329 330 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ E 8 4 Alternate default window managers Question I don t like the Win95 like window manager configuration How can I change it Answer If you don t like the look or feel of the default window manager setup you can select a different style from the Preferences menu and then clicking on WM Style menu If you are interested in changing to other window managers you will want to check out this web page http www plig
351. nect primarily disk and CD ROM drives to a computer system See also EIDE and ATAPI Intel Company responsible for producing the microprocessors that most commonly appear in PC compatible personal computers These processors include the 80386 80486 Pentium Pentium Pro and Pentium II Internationalization The practice of designing and writing programs that can be easily config ured to interact with the user in more than one language Often referred to as i18n due to the usn D number of letters between the starting i and the ending n IP Address IP addresses are the method by which individual computer systems or from a more strictly accurate interpretation the network interfaces on those computer systems are identified on a TCP IP network All IP addresses consist of four numbers each ranging from 0 to 255 and separated by periods Kernel The central part of an operating system upon which the rest of the operating system is based Library When speaking of computers refers to a collection of routines that perform operations that are commonly required by programs Libraries may be shared meaning that the library routines reside in a file separate from the programs that use them Library routines may also be statically linked to a program meaning that copies of the library routines required by that program are physi cally added to the program Such statically linked binaries do not require the existence of any lib
352. nel source packages and that you issue all commands from the usr src linux direc tory It is important to begin a kernel build with the source tree in a known condition Therefore it is recommended that you begin with the command make mrproper This will remove any configu ration files along with the remains of any previous builds that may be scattered around the source tree Now you must create a configuration file that will determine which components to include in your new kernel Depending upon your hardware and personal preferences there are three methods available to configure the kernel e make config An interactive text program Components are presented and you answer with Y yes N no or M module e make menuconfig A graphic menu driven program Components are presented in a menu of categories you select the desired components in the same manner used in the Red Hat Linux installation program Toggle the tag corresponding to the item you want included Y yes N no or M module e make xconfig An X Windows program Components are listed in different levels of menus components are selected using a mouse Again select Y yes N no or M module Please Note In order to use kerneld see Section 8 2 2 for details and kernel modules you must answer Yes to kerneld support and module version CONFIG MODVERSIONS support in the configuration 197 198 System Administration Please Note If you are building a Linux
353. ng your setup we recom mend using the usernet utility to control your dial up networking connection on a daily basis See the usernet man page for more information 143 144 System Configuration Pertworkirg Cien barks Basic host intarradion Nouns pemer Spec fc aan if Rrarirs and gateways Deis ghe routes bo nba ghe nutes t hoss routes to alemate local ra the muted daemon Hori nane search path Herbwork Infor ation Syren FX merca reug PPP SLIP PLIP Servera by Esparjed fle zyriemz MFI F aiya for virus hari UCR dnt in unt capy E LL deker ami madens PPEP ip costarens Type orinertaca SUP mertace em SLIP inortaco sii xr heuer tos Ml delivery eden gramir Basic basic imiona special domain muting comple user muting masqueradi ng nim mai do as gabrecay viua email dorar user ae ira rr rar winn 4i Accra Cancel Del Tomec ascormeci Hell Figure 8 22 SLIP Interface Customization Screen Other Network Connections Quick Reference Due to the number of possible choices and sub choices no quick reference is available for this section Other Network Connections General Overview Setting up a network connection over ethernet requires an entirely different type of setup Network connections to token ring or arcnet networks follow a similar procedure but will not be discussed here e First you will need to have an Ethernet card installed e then start Linuxconf by typin
354. not create any temporary files containing authentication keys moonclock Version 1 0 25K Displays the time of day and the current moon phase Colors change depending on time of day day night and the moon is displayed in a neat little wedge with a star field procps X11 Version 1 2 9 5K A package of X based utilities which report on the state of the system These utilities generally provide graphical presentations of information available from tools in the procps suite rxvt Version 2 4 7 448K Rxvtis a VT100 terminal emulator for X It is intended as a replacement for xterm 1 for users who do not require the more esoteric features of xterm Specifically rxvt does not implement the Tektronix 4014 emulation session logging and toolkit style configurability As a result rxvt uses much less swap space than xterm a significant advantage on a machine serving many X sessions xcpustate Version 2 5 32K XCPUSTATE is a snapshot performance monitor It was originally written by Mark Moraes to watch the load distribution on the CPUs on an Silicon Graphics Iris 4D 240 It has since been ported to a wide variety of multiprocessors and uniprocessors xdaliclock Version 2 10 74K The xdaliclock program displays a digital clock when a digit changes it melts into its new shape C 12 X11 It can display in 12 or 24 hour modes and displays the date when a mouse button is held down It has two large fonts buil
355. not be there is the current working directory cwd sometimes called the present working directory The cwd is known as so to execute commands in the cwd you need to either add the directory to your path or type something like the following a out E 7 5 MacMillan Red Hat Linux Boxed Set Documentation Question Ihave purchased the MacMillan boxed set of Red Hat and it says that it comes with extra on line documenta tion How do I install and read it Answer The MacMillan Complete Red Hat Linux Operating System comes with several books and parts of books as an added value These books are in PDF format and require that you use a PDF document reader on them The Linux Acrobat reader is included for this purpose To install the Reader you will need to do the following while logged in as the user root Insert the installation cdrom and issue the following commands 328 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ mount mnt cdrom mkdir tmp acro cd tmp acro tar xzvf mnt cdrom ebooks acrobat tar this will extract the files into the tmp acro directory INSTALL This will run the INSTALL script for your data I usually install them into the default location of usr local You can now run the command acroread and view the documentation in mnt cdrom ebooks E 8 XWindow System E 8 1 Missing server when using XFree86 Question When I try to start X with with the startx command I get errors that no
356. ns where you can enter information required by the installation program When the cursor rests on a text input line you may enter and or edit information on that line e Check Box Check boxes allow you to select or deselect a particular feature offered to you by the installation program When the cursor rests within a check box pressing causes the check box to toggle between a selected and unselected state e Text Widget Text widgets are regions of the screen that are devoted to the display of text At times text widgets may also contain other widgets such as check boxes It is possible that a text widget may contain more information than could be displayed at one time In these cases the text widget will have a scroll bar next to it if you position the cursor within the text widget you can then use the T and keys to scroll through all the information available e Scroll Bar Scroll bars provide a visual indication of your relative position in the information being displayed in a text widget Your current position is shown by a character which will move up and down the scroll bar as you scroll back and forth e Button Widget Button widgets are the primary method of interacting with the installation program By pressing these buttons you will progress through the series of windows that make up the installation process Buttons may be pressed when they are highlighted by the cursor e Cursor Although not a widget the c
357. nstallation Red Hat Software has created the kickstart installation method With this method a system administrator can create a single file containing the answers to all the questions that would normally be asked during a typical Red Hat Linux installation The kickstart installation method is powerful enough that often a single kickstart file can be used to install Red Hat Linux on multiple machines Please Note Kickstart installations can only be performed using the CD ROM and NFS installation methods FTP local hard disk or SMB installations cannot be automated using kickstart mode H 1 Where to Put A Kickstart File To use kickstart mode you must first create a kickstart file and make it available to the Red Hat Linux installation program Normally this is done by copying the kickstart file to the boot diskette or making it available on the network The network based approach is most commonly used as most kickstart installations tend to be performed on networked computers This also makes it easier to install Red Hat Linux on many computers as the kickstart files can be kept on single server system and read by the individual computers during the installation Let s take a more in depth look at the locations where kickstart file may be placed 378 Kickstart Installations H 1 1 On Diskette To perform a diskette based kickstart installation the kickstart file must be named ks cfg and reside in the boot diskette s top level dire
358. nstallation process does not care what the filenames look like but it is a good idea that you keep track of them You ll need a boot and supplemental diskette when installing from a hard drive 2 5 Need a Supplemental Diskette INTEL This section is specific to Intel based computers only If you are using an Alpha or SPARC computer please skip ahead to 2 7 on page 21 Here s a checklist that you can use to see if you ll need to create a supplemental diskette e Installing From a PCMCIA Connected CD ROM If you ll be installing Red Hat Linux from a CD ROM and your CD ROM drive is attached to your computer through a PCMCIA card you ll need a supplemental diskette 2 6 Installation Classes Installing using a PCMCIA Network Card If you will be using a PCMCIA network adapter during the installation you ll need a supplemental diskette FTP Install If you want to install Red Hat Linux via FTP you ll need a supplemental diskette Hard Drive Install If you ll be performing an install from a hard drive you ll need a supple mental diskette SMB Install If you want to install from an SMB shared drive you ll need a supplemental diskette If you ve determined you ll need a supplemental diskette you ll have to make one The supple mental diskette image file is supp img and is located in the images directory on your Red Hat Linux Intel CD Please turn to Appendix B on page 225 and follow the instructions there Then
359. nt Tool In order to create a new print queue choose Add Then select what type of printer is being added There are four types of print queues which can be configured with printtool 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel Local print queues are for printers attached to a printer or serial port on your Red Hat Linux system Remote print queues are attached to a different system which you can access over a TCP IP network SMB print queues are attached to a different system which uses LAN Manager type SMB networking NCP print queues are attached to a different system which uses Novell s NetWare network technology ALPHA NetWare print queues are not supported supported out of the box on Red Hat Linux Alpha Printer type Lacal Prater s Bemete Unie pd Geman s Lan Masagor Printer Shi Heare Printer HCP DE Camel Figure 8 31 Selecting a Printer Type After choosing the printer type a dialog box requests further information about the print queue See Figure 8 32 on the next page All types of print queues require the following information Queue Name What the queue will be called Multiple names can be specifed with the pipe character separating entries Spool Directory This is the directory on the local machine where files are stored before printing occurs Be careful to not have more than one printer queue use a given spool directory File Limit Maximum size print job accepted in kilobytes
360. nterface used during the Red Hat Linux installation process please turn to Section 5 1 on page 65 for more details 6 6 World Wide Web The World Wide Web is one of the hottest aspects of the Internet today Red Hat Linux lets you get in on the action in two ways as a web browser and as a web server Let s look at both 6 6 1 World Wide Web Browsers A variety of web browsers are available for Linux including freely distributable browsers such as arena lynx and grail The most popular commercial browsers are those from Netscape Communica tions Corporation And now they re available with Red Hat Linux 5 2 If you selected the net scape communicator or netscape navigator packages you re ready to surf Enjoy 100 What Do Do Now 6 6 2 World Wide Web Server If you installed the Apache web server from the apache package then your Web service is already up and running Just point your web browser at http localhost The default page shown is home httpd html index html Youcan edit this file or completely replace it to your liking All the CGI programs icons and html pages are stored in home httpd but this can be changed in the apache configuration files all of which are stored in etc httpd conf Logs of all httpd activity are kept in var log httpa Setting up your web site is as easy as adding your own HTML pages and links to the home httpd html1 directory For more informa tion on customizing your web server we r
361. ntire virtual console system completely disabling all console access vlock gives up these locks when either the password of the user who started vlock or the root password is typed C 11 3 File This section lists packages containing file related utility programs file Version 3 25 198K 5 This package is useful for finding out what type of file you are looking at on your system For example if an fsck results in a file being stored in lost found you can run file on it to find out if it s safe to more it or if it s a binary It recognizes many file types including ELF binaries system libraries RPM packages and many different graphics formats fileutils Version 3 16 868K B These are the GNU file management utilities It includes programs to copy move list etc files The ls program in this package now incorporates color Is findutils Version 4 1 155K This package contains programs to help you locate files on your system The find program can search through a hierarchy of directories looking for files matching a certain set of criteria such as a filename 273 274 Package List pattern The locate program searches a database create by updatedb to quickly find a file matching a given pattern git Version 4 3 17 698K GIT is a file system browser for UNIX systems An interactive process viewer killer a hex ascii file viewer an auto mount shell script and a per file type action scr
362. nux 2 0 Early Fall 1995 e Red Hat Linux 2 1 Late Fall 1995 e Red Hat Linux AXP 2 1 Beta Late Fall 1995 e Red Hat Linux AXP 2 1 January 1996 e Red Hat Linux 3 0 3 Picasso March 1996 e Red Hat Linux Rembrandt beta August 1996 e Red Hat Linux 4 0 Colgate October 1996 e Red Hat Linux 4 1 Vanderbuilt January 1997 e Red Hat Linux 4 2 Biltmore May 1997 e Red Hat Linux Thunderbird beta May 1997 e Red Hat Linux Mustang beta May 1997 e Red Hat Linux 5 0 Hurricane December 1997 e Red Hat Linux 5 1 Manhatten June 1998 e Red Hat Linux 5 2 Oct 1998 The current version of Red Hat Linux is 5 2 and is available for Intel 386 486 and various Pentiums Alpha various types and SPARC 352 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Information Specific to Red Hat Linux SPARC This appendix describes the differences between Red Hat Linux SPARC and Red Hat Linux Intel installations While it provides a good overview of these differences you will find it easier to read chapters 2 3 4 and 5 in order These chapters will refer you to the appropriate parts of this appendix at the appropriate time In addition there is a Linux SPARC homepage at http www geog ubc ca s linux html Ithasa wealth of information for people considering Red Hat Linux SPARC and is a great resource F1 Supported Hardware Red Hat Linux SPARC supports a variety of hardware based on the SPARC architecture The most recent list
363. o Red Hat Linux SPARC Glossary Alpha A RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer architecture developed by Digital Equipment Corporation IDE An acronym for AT Attachement Packet Interface ATAPI is the protocol by which CD ROM drives communicate with a computer system over an IDE interface Binary Although the base two numbering system used by computers is known as binary the word often refers to the executable form of a program Contrast with source code BIOS An acronym for Basic Input Output System On PC compatible systems the BIOS is used to perform all necessary functions to properly initialize the system s hardware when power is first applied The BIOS also controls the boot process provides low level input output routines hence its name and usually allows the user to modify details of the system s hardware configuration Boot Diskette A diskette used to start most Red Hat Linux installations Bootstrap See Boot 366 Glossary Boot Short for bootstrap The process by which a computer starts running an operating system when power is applied CISC An acronym for Complex Instruction Set Computer A design philosophy for computers whereby the processor is designed to execute a relatively large number of different instructions each taking a different amount of time to execute depending on the complexity of the instruction Con trast with RISC CMOS Originally an acronym for Complementary Metal Oxide Sem
364. o Red Hat Software at 1 919 361 2711 A 2 Getting Support A 2 2 Support Questions Technical support is a black art in most cases support technicians rely solely on communication with the customer to solve installation problems on hardware the technicians have never physically seen It is extremely important therefore to state your question clearly and concisely including detailed information such as e symptoms of the problem Red Hat Linux 5 2 doesn t recognize my CD ROM drive e when the problem began It stopped working yesterday e what changes you have made to your system around the time of the problem after I disconnected it from the IDE controller e any diagnostic output specifically related to the problem In the bootup messages it says Cannot find dev hdb device disconnected however this can be taken overboard don t send us your system logs unless we ask you for them e other relevant information I m using the floppy installation method from the CD How to Send Them Red Hat s support system is email based and is partially automated for this reason itis important to make sure you send support questions in the correct format so that your message will be recognized and routed to an appropriate support technician In order to receive technical support for your Red Hat Software product you must first register it Submitting trouble tickets can be sent in the traditional email
365. o is one of the following none No boot time protocol should be used bootp The bootp protocol should be used dhcp The dhcp protocol should be used The following values are common to all PPP and SLIP files e PERSISTzanswer where answer is one of the following yes This device should be kept active at all times even if deactivated after a modem hangup no This device should not be kept active at all times 210 System Administration MODEMPORT port where port is the modem port s device name for exmaple dev modem LINESPEED baud where baud is the modem s linespeed for example 115200 DEFABORT answer where answer is one of the following yes Insert default abort strings when creating editing the script for this interface no Do not insert default abort strings when creating editing the script for this inter face The following values are common to all PPP files DEFROUTE answer where answer is one of the following yes Set this interface as the default route no Do not set this interface as the default route ESCAPECHARSzanswer where answer is one of the following yes Use the pre defined asyncmap no Do not use the pre defined asyncmap This represents a simplified interface it doesn t let people specify which characters to escape However almost everyone can use an asyncmap of 00000000 anyway and it s possible to set PPPOPTIONS to use an arbi
366. o manually install the required packages you ll probably find it easier to re do the installation particularly if you re new to Linux XFree86 Configuration There are three methods for configuring XFree86 on your machine e Xconfigurator e xf86config e by hand 91 92 What Do Do Now Xconfigurator and xf86config are functional equivalents and should work equally well If you are unsure of anything in this process a good source of additional documentation is http www xfree86 org Xconfigurator is a full screen menu driven program that walks you through setting up your X server xf86config is a line oriented program distributed with XFree86 It isn t as easy to use as Xconfigurator but it is included for completeness If these utilities fail to provide a work ing XF86Config file you may have an unsupported card or you may need to write the config file by hand Usually the former is the case so check and make sure your card is supported before at tempting to write the config file yourself If your card is not supported by XFree86 you may wish to consider using a commercial X server If you have questions about whether or not your video card is supported you can check out http www xfree86 0rg for information on XFree86 The X Server Provided you selected the proper video card at install time you should have the proper X server installed When later running Xconfigurator or xf86config you need to make sure you select the same
367. o scroll through the different cards listed and position the highlight on the entry that matches your system s sound card Plesca ralact your card ryrtal CHES round chip Ens PudboPCE 1570 raatisaErrzani AudioP tI 1371 iE Sounds GERE udial iva bras Ultra p n mo edam cct ERES Figure 6 2 Selecting Sound Card Type If you ve run sndconfig with the noautoconfig option you ll see a screen similar to the one in Figure 6 3 on the facing page Here is where you can specify the settings for your sound card Using the key select a field Then use the arrow keys to select the desired setting for that field When finished select Ok and press Space After this screen you may see an informational dialog box saying that etc conf modules al ready exists select Ok and press to continue Finally sndcon ig will attempt to play a sound sample to verify proper configuration of your sound card If you can hear the sound sample make sure the speaker volume is turned up you re done 6 5 Mouse configuration Las Rat 99 Ew pr seit ings Please adjust the settings below to srtoh the dip mith rzattingr an your raund cand LO RR M A WP L de 5 B L bcn c ME NE m mena Tan at nn co cmn Figure 6 3 Configuring Sound Card 6 5 Mouse configuration To configure your mouse or reconfigure your mouse after installation enter the command usr sbin mouseconfig You will be presented with the same i
368. oggling chess action without having to learn complicated commands It may also be used as a front end for playing chess with other people across the Internet xboing Version 2 4 982K xboing is an X Windows game in the tradition of the classic Breakout arcade game The object is to keep a ball bouncing on the bricks until they break down Even more fun comes in later levels when you have to handle multiple balls and ball traps xchomp Version 1 0 36K C 12 X11 The classic arcade action game comes to your screen with xchomp the PacMan like game Not as extensive as the original game but still lots of fun xdemineur Version 1 1 26K This is a game of intense concentration where you must successfully determine the locations of mines through logic and deduction xevil Version 1 5 527K An action adventure game for X Windows in which you as a Ninja warrior kill everything in sight and explore if you survive xgalaga Version 1 6c 366K A clone of the old space arcade game Galaga It s Galaga you know how to play Galaga Ship follows the mouse button fires Auto fire by holding it down so no one accuses us of breaking their mouse xgammon Version 0 98 3 276K This version of the popular card board game backgammon allows you to play either against the computer or another human xjewel Version 1 6 49K Jewel is a game much like Domain Jewelbox which is a puzzle game like Tetris
369. ogram squid a Domain Name System lookup program dnsserver a program for retrieving FTP data ftpget and some management and client tools When squid starts up it spawns a configurable number of dnsserver processes each of which can perform a single blocking Domain Name System DNS lookup This reduces the amount of time the cache waits for DNS lookups Squid is derived from the ARPA funded Harvest project squid novm Version 1 1 22 911K The NOVM version of the squid will use less memory to do the proxy job at the expense of file de scriptors NOVM stands for NO Virtual Memory If you are tight on memory on your proxy cache server this might be for you Squid is a high performance proxy caching server for web clients supporting FTP gopher and HTTP data objects Unlike traditional caching software Squid handles all requests in a single non blocking I O driven process Squid keeps meta data and especially hot objects cached in RAM caches DNS lookups supports non blocking DNS lookups and implements negative caching of failed requests Squid supports SSL extensive access controls and full request logging By using the lightweight In ternet Cache Protocol Squid caches can be arranged in a hierarchy or mesh for additional bandwidth savings Squid consists of a main server program squid a Domain Name System lookup program dnsserver a program for retrieving FTP data ftpget and some management and client tools When squ
370. ograms when you re ready to shutdown that doesn t mean there s nothing running on your Red Hat Linux system To see what we mean issue this command ps ax Each one of the lines displayed by ps represents a process You can think of each process as being a running program Each process may be working with files and if you simply turn off your computer these processes won t have a chance to close those files and finish running in a clean manner So when the time comes to shut your system down you ll need some way of telling all these processes to finish up and exit cleanly And the way this is normally done is with the shutdown command The shutdown command can only be run by root so you ll need to either be logged in as root or you can use the su command to become root The basic syntax for shutdown is shutdown options time Please Note The shutdown program resides in sbin If your PATH environment variable does not include sbin you will need to include the full path when you enter the command i e sbin shutdown h now In most cases you should include one of the following options e h Halt the system when the shutdown is complete e r Reboot the system when the shutdown is complete If you don t include either option shutdown will bring your system into single user mode Un less you know why you want to be in single user mode you probably don t want to be in single user 6 3 The X Window System
371. ol A ar re 9th e eec 294 MOUM s sess ar esee pk celo ode CEA 279 niouseconfig eraa ieni conie or etes een 280 mpasesons Desde b pra dau ide nada nanan 275 DESEA lee SS Go RR a CRI 280 Mio eR M Er 274 mu ltimedi spend gr UTE eR 286 KnUtb das cdenenizRee em sDURPAP IUE Ue 235 MP ad a tS 288 InySteriOUS endo TA NR TER edad da 257 Tl B dal 256 INDEX OF PACKAGES n 267 D P rearea inani rere Ped GI denies 236 nCOImpress ciere is 272 DPS ao 267 A E ERPINPUPI B HIM atin 260 nc rses devel ic eese eode xn er kd ewes onsen 250 MIGUISCSS rodas 260 nies P 285 net tools iiic ere dulce yet muted need 261 MELEE esos oxedsm ot arse he tesa e erPRr epu ates 280 netkit base cananea 269 netscape common ssssssss o 288 netscape communicator sssssssssss 288 netscape navigator 66 cece ee eee eee 288 DW exse tirer eR EE 260 newt devel eere ee rr ree iia 250 DES ai 264 nfs server clients iiec crei i eere edes 262 i cai oie 293 o v nee PE eed aile Reale oe 235 uci Gu E 269 MIS SV EE 280 pj m 273 pr 260 A riesit raa ERE EEEE REEE 247 PAM E ii aa 241 panieonfig sitas ds AARE RRE 241 paradise cesses Ee E EEES 290 O da eundndirdodehereetead 242 A aieia eaa 285 jus 271 petlzceceesseiutaeeeseeas dr eniro eres sels 285 per MDb Lii dassecerkeenidksex cta 285 o OO 269 E 235 A e e pte Cile eon 257 A exer eem rH emt tina k EN aak 240 playmidizXll iua siveistee eere T UPC P en 240 jour
372. ol panel e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open Control gt Date amp Time The zone field is a pull down list that is long and extensive It is often designated by a large region and then a city or zone within it Examples include Europe Vienna and US Eastern There is a checkbox to Store date in CMOS in GMT format Hours are specified from 0 midnight to 23 11 150 System Configuration raktais hisbireriwcek deiinitian imorredon shw ohe net E mamai shoul ater het Linera rebate accep Primery reum dona foo ber can Users acc nanis Alias e rapi Homal User arc punis LE sn Group datnitions Comneno pd Change rra parpatad Special accounts Accan Cancel ra Hei PPP scaunr SLIP scouts vts nanmal Ir UUCP acc punts POP accounts resi anys virtual POP sorgune cal Email alias E usar aiae viua dorain user alases Folder Pesar amp account picie Avaliable user helle Availabe PPP helle Avaliable SLF shell Message of tes day E Figure 8 27 Host Network Definition Screen PM Months are specified by number as well For the year please specify all four digits All other fields should be self explanatory 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel Please Note The inclusion of linuxconf with Red Hat Linux 5 2 gives our customers a more compre hensive system configuration utility Most of what can be done wit
373. ollowed by l to view the main Info screen C 1 Applications As this section s name implies this is where you can find most of the applications available with Red Hat Linux We ve split the applications into several different categories to make finding things a bit easier If you noticed that we said most of the applications above you can find more apps by looking at X11 s application section towards the end of the appendix C 1 1 Communications This section contains packages that help you communicate either via fax on line chat or simple terminal emulation efax Version 0 8a 203K This is a program to send and receive faxes over class 1 or class 2 fax modems It has a nice interface to help facilitate faxing ircii Version 4 4 1 678K This is a popular Internet Relay Chat IRC client It is a program used to connect to IRC servers around the globe so that the user can chat with others ircii help Version 4 4 441K This package contains the help files and other documentation for the ircii client package Irzsz Version 0 12 14 322K This collection of commands can be used to download and upload files using the Z X and Y proto cols Many terminal programs like minicom make use of these programs to transfer files minicom Version 1 82 289K Minicom is a communications program that resembles the MSDOS Telix somewhat It has a dialing directory color full ANSI and VT100 emulatio
374. om 350 om EtherLin om EtherLink Plus om EtherLinkTa om EtherLin 3Com EtherLink XL 3Com Vortex series 3c590 3c592 3c597 3c595 3c590 0 3Com Boomerang 3c900 3c905 3c575 3Com Cyclone 3c905B NS8390 and clones Ansel Communications EISA ethernet adaptor Apricot 82596 Allied Telesis ATT700 eal lek pocket ethernet adaptor 800 seal e ud zu e VO 0 DE500 de4x5 0 DC21040 DC21041 C2 Lid DC21143 E D Link DE 600 Ethernet pocket adapter de600 0 a ink DE 6 au VG SEC HE de620 0 j 00 DE20 depca o DE202 DE210 DEAD Ether WORKS DE20S DEJO DENS esi HP J2573 Compex ReadyLink ENET100 VG4 Compex FreedomLine 100 VG BM token ring ibmtr o D 4 Network Module Listing 305 Cards Driver Module NEXU CD SS pne2k geize AMD net 9C 970 net net 9C 9 0A pcnet32 o PCnet PCI II 79C971A Allied Telesyn A12550 rt18139 0 Genius GF100TXR RTL8139 NDC Communications NE100TX E RealTek RTL8129 8139 Fast smc9194 o Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP tlan o Compaq Netelligent 10 100 TX PCI UTP Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3 P Compaq NetFlex 3 P Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10 100 TX UTP Compaq Netelligent 10 100 TX Embedded UTP Olicom OC 2183 2185 Olicom OC 2325 Olicom OC 2326 Compaq Netelligent 10 100 TX UTP Compaq Netelligent 10 T 2 PCI UTP Coax Accton EtherDuo Accton EN tulip o Adaptec ANA6901 C Adaptec ANA6911 TX C NET CNE 935 Cogent EM100 Cogent EM110 Cogent EM400 Cogen
375. on 43 41 Upgradingorlnstaling 2e 43 42 Installation Class eoe i si tu 44484 bey om ee dae ee ee a A we Be ES 44 439 SCSISupporb bt se ot Robb RR Eok ox hee heh Ga bee Rok EROR RUP ro n 46 44 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux o oo 46 45 Initializing Swap Space sso RR RR RUNE EGRE E EUR Era 56 46 ForFIPInstalationsOnly s o 4s sce 4 0085544 a ORR EG RAE EE ES 56 47 ForSMB Installations Only ees 57 48 For Hard Drive Installations Only ee 59 49 Formatting Partitions 3 c cue dee REUS ee Xu deese ux dus 59 4 10 Selecting and Installing Packages eee 60 5 Finishing the Installation 65 Bl Configuringa Mouse im ebd mh bg bd hehe bea a bose 65 5 2 Configuring X Windows s euo o mb de one Pe re ER doe os 66 5 3 Configuring Networking boc boe x Pe rhe be bode deer bed edna a 68 54 Configuring the Clock duo eR uerb Re bb Soe Ge id de 69 5 5 Selecting Services for Start on Reboot oo 69 5 6 Configuring a Pridler pos se b a a a RO os 70 5 7 Setting a Root PassWord 20 620 aa 76 5 8 Creating a Boot Diskette veces RE RH Se ROE ER REE ES 77 5 9 Installing LILO ws dokn Rr GRRE ARDS EAR ER RRS EER eh 78 5 400 Finishing Up 22 22k keane edna baG ete e fade Bee E S Eee ee oe 81 6 What Do Do Now 83 6 1 Getting the Documentation That s Right For You ooo ees 83 6 2 Basic System Tasks s 24 52 2440 23h RR EEG DG A EUR EAR A EUR oO 86 63
376. on an ana of tha lirrt bua hard drier in our sebas eo duod can boot imo Linu lth LIL Chee selecta Figure 4 8 Selecting a Disk for Partitioning Continuing the Installation An Overview of fdisk fdisk includes online help which is terse but useful Here are a few tips e The command for help is m e To list the current partition table use the p command see Figure 4 9 e To add a new partition use n e Linux fdisk creates partitions of type Linux native by default When you create a swap partition don t forget to change it to type Linux swap using the t command The value for the Linux swap type is 82 For other partition types use the 1 command to see a list of partition types and values e Linux allows up to four 4 partitions on one disk If you wish to create more than that one and only one of the four may be an extended partition which acts as a container for one or more logical partitions Since it acts as a container the extended partition must be at least as large as the total size of all the logical partitions it is to contain e It s a good idea to write down which partitions e g dev hda2 are meant for which filesys tems e g usr as you create each one e Please Note None of the changes you make take effect until you save them and exit disk using the w command You may quit disk at any time without saving changes by using the q command Figure 4 9 Sample Output Fro
377. on sun4c machines e The default X server will end up as XsunMono which may not work for most people If you do wish to install Everything choose Select individual packages as well Then deselect all the kernels except for one you wish to install kernel sparc works for most and all X servers except the one for your hardware XsunMono for bwtwo video cards Xsun for all 8 bit displays and Xsun24 for the supported 24 bit displays F9 SILO Configuration SILO configuration is nearly identical to LILO configuration See Section 5 9 on page 78 for more details Please Note Unlike LILO SILO cannot be configured to boot other operating systems during the installation However information on configuring SILO to boot other operating systems is available Please read the file README in usr doc silo docs after installation F 10 Partitioning Please Note If you decide to use Disk Druid to partition your system s hard drive be aware that at this time Disk Druid cannot write disk labels on the SPARC Therefore the drive must have a valid disk label on it prior to attempting to use Disk Druid A disk label can be written using fdisk after that Disk Druid should work normally There is one additional step required when partitioning a hard drive for Red Hat Linux SPARC You must create the third partition of every disk as type Whole Disk spanning from cylinder 0 to the end of the disk It shouldn t be used in any way but i
378. onf which must be modified to disable finger requests C 9 Networking ftp Version 0 10 83K This provides the standard Unix command line ftp client ftp is the standard Internet file transfer protocol which is extremely popular for both file archives and file transfers between individuals netkit base Version 0 10 53K This package provides the ping and inetd programs which are both used for basic networking ntalk Version 0 10 31K This package provides a client and daemon for the Internet talk protocol which allows one on one chatting between users on different systems pidentd Version 2 7 116K identd is a program that implements the RFC1413 identification server identd operates by looking up specific TCP IP connections and returning the user name of the process owning the connection routed Version 0 10 38K A number of protocols are available for automatic updating of TCP IP routing tables RIP is the simplest of those and this package includes a daemon which broadcasts RIP routing notification and handles incoming RIP packets rsh Version 0 10 95K Rsh rlogin and rcp are a suite of programs which allow users to run commands on remote machines login into other machines and copy files between machines All of these commands use rhosts style authentication This package includes the client and servers needed for all of these services as well as a server for rexec which is an alt
379. onf as etc foo conf rpmsave This means that your changes to the configuration file may not be forward compatible with the new configuration file in the package so RPM saved your original file and installed a new one You should investigate and resolve the differences between the two files as soon as possible to ensure that your system continues to function properly Since upgrading is really a combination of uninstalling and installing you can encounter any errors from those modes plus one more If RPM thinks you are trying to upgrade to a package with an older version number you will see rpm Uvh foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo package foo 2 0 1 which is newer is already installed error foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm cannot be installed To cause RPM to upgrade anyway use oldpackage on the command line f rpm Uvh oldpackage foo 1 0 1 i386 rpm foo EERE EE TE AE E RE E E E E E EE EE E EE RHEE EEE EERE EEE 9 2 4 Querying Querying the database of installed packages is accomplished with rpm q A simple use is rpm q foo which will print the package name version and release number of the installed package foo rpm q foo foo 2 0 1 170 Package Management with RPM Instead of specifying the package name you can use the following options with q to specify what package s you want to query These are called Package Specification Options e a queries all currently installed packages e f lt file gt will query the
380. oooocccoocooocc 129 130 OPS riesen estet hates aieo et ed 189 Standard isis venie onde ede Corb 190 user private 6 0 6 6 cee cece eee eee 189 190 tationale ias 192 Dalias tO WupIE RESTE PUR DES 186 214 hard disk installation for SPARC 361 hard drive installation oooooocoocoroo 18 hardware configuration sssssssssss 10 finding with Windows 11 hardware supported by SPARC 353 hostname ioi besadode tie ee thee ebd 159 hosts managing sey esaa cece eee eee 159 hosts allOW ve s ccarsdeenddeedeorsnaneaeas dates 202 example cr nica date d 202 Hosts dEn wes owed ees ab yet ahaa 202 THOW TOS ratas 105 EITML eset rinni ane ongni IEEE RR Shuey aed 100 IDE CDROM problems with 316 info Pages so neeiesaeihaw Ha reete E r Eii 106 information Alpha specific6 9 11 14 15 20 25 26 33 46 97 153 Intel specific 7 9 15 18 20 24 26 34 license ias ii DNE ER 8 registran omeri aE E EE severe 8 SPARC specific 8 9 11 14 15 25 33 46 information resQUICES ooooccoocccooccnnrccoso 308 information network sceescecr rr eases 14 information pre installation 10 init SysV style c cccsessseesess eene 211 ipu MT 200 Initscript utilities sissien i tree herr wees 214 install CEDRO Meios ere erba PER RE 15 36 component selection ooooooccomoc 60 A dew Red Ra erimus 43 fimishihe
381. oot s unrestricted access can wreak havoc if you enter the wrong command So be careful when logged in as root and use the root account only when needed To log in enter root at the login prompt Press the or Return key APassword prompt should appear Type the same password you entered back in Section 5 7 on page 76 pressing when done You should then see something like this root bigdog root f Congratulations You ve successfully logged in Next it s time to learn how to log out Logging Out When you re done using your Red Hat Linux system you should log out Although many shells have a logout command most people simply type Cir This should return you to the login prompt you first saw when you booted your Red Hat Linux system Please Note If you re using the X Window System your log out procedure will be different de pending on how you ve started X We ll cover this in more detail later Now that you know how to log in and out let s move on 6 2 3 Accounts and Passwords As we mentioned earlier it s a bad idea to use the root account all the time Inevitably you ll end up making a mistake and the access checks that normally protect you won t be there Well if you re not supposed to log in as root who exactly are you supposed to log in as Yourself of course But to do that you ll need to know how to add user accounts to your Red Hat Linux system Accounts As it turns out there are several diffe
382. ople editing the devel files in a devel directory Make a group called devel chgrp the devel directory to devel and add the all the devel users to the deve1 group Now all the devel users will be able to edit the devel files and create new files in the devel directory and these files will always retain their devel group Thus they will always be edit able by other devel users If you have multiple projects like devel and users who are working on multiple projects these users will never have to change their umask or group when they move from project to project The setgid bit on each project s main directory selects the proper group Since each user s HOME directory is owned by the user and their private group it is safe to set the setgid bit on the HOME directory However by default files are created with the primary group of the user so the setgid bit would be redundant User Private Group Rationale Since the UPG scheme is new many people have questions about it and they wonder why it is necessary The following is the rationale for the scheme e You d like to have a group of people work on a set of files in say the usr lib emacs site lisp directory You trust a few people to mess around in there but certainly not everyone e So you enter chown R root emacs usr lib emacs site lisp and you add the proper users to the group e To allow the users to actually create files in the directory you enter chmod 775 usr lib e
383. options It is slow however and requires the generic VGA 16 color server be available XFree86 Xnest Version 3 3 2 3 1 985K X server which runs in a X window XFree86 Xvfb Version 3 3 2 3 2 415K Virtual framebuffer X server XFree86 devel Version 3 3 2 3 7 652K Libraries header files and documentation for developing programs that run as X clients It includes the base Xlib library as well as the Xt and Xaw widget sets For information on programming with these libraries Red Hat recommends the series of books on X Programming produced by O Reilly and Associates XFree86 libs Version 3 3 2 3 1 863K This package contains the shared libraries most X programs need to run properly They are in a separate package to reduce the disk space needed to run X applications on a machine w o an X server over a network C 12 9 gnome This section contains packages that are related to the GNOME desktop environment gnome libs Version 0 20 556K 299 300 Package List Basic libraries you must have installed to use GNOME GNOME is the GNU Network Object Model Environment That s a fancy name but really GNOME is a nice GUI desktop environment It makes using your computer easy powerful and easy to con figure gnome libs devel Version 0 20 1 888K Libraries include files etc you can use to develop GNOME applications urw fonts Version 1 0 2 181K Free versions of the 35 standard Post
384. or n tha rasa pr P rambar of your E server D the directory on that server ponledinina Fad Hat Lire For your architec FTF gite nae 1 Fad Hat directory BEFEHL Figure 3 1 Installation Program Widgets press Enter To select an item with a check box move the cursor to the check box and press to select an item To deselect press a second time Pressing accepts the current values and proceeds to the next dialog it is usually equivalent to pressing the OK button Please Note Unless a dialog box is waiting for your input do not press any keys during the instal lation process it may result in unpredictable behavior 3 1 2 A Note About Virtual Consoles There is more to the Red Hat Linux installation program than the dialog boxes it presents as it guides you through the installation process In fact the installation program makes several different kinds of diagnostic messages available to you in addition to giving you a way to enter commands from a shell prompt It presents this information on five virtual consoles which you can switch between using a single keystroke These virtual consoles can be very helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Linux Messages displayed on the install or system consoles can help pinpoint the 31 32 Starting the Installation Scroll Current Disk Partitions Bar F mm Fick nad 7 Lirarc restive 1zTEH 1zTEH Linux nativos Ere Exc Lira nativa 17H 155H Linux pimp
385. or 1 if you have NO IDE drives in the system E 7 Using Red Hat Linux 325 If you need to gather more information for someone else either for official support or from the mailing lists newsgroups friends etc you can use the rescue mode Insert the installation floppy and at the boot prompt type linux rescue After a couple of screens that ask about hardware you will get a root prompt You will need to mount the linux root partition like is done in this example which has the partition as dev hda5 mkdir mnt mount dev hda5 mnt Then do the following lilo v r mnt Record the output of the command You can add more v s if you need more information If errors still occur you can send that output to the appropriate support group E 7 Using Red Hat Linux E 7 1 New to Linux Question Iam totally new to linux and don t know anything about how to use it or What is this root localhost lam seeing Answer Many users new to Red Hat Linux need additional documentation on learning Linux We are aware of this and are continuing to expand our documentation but should you require additional infor mation the following resources may be useful for you Books e Running Linux by Matt Welsh O Reilly Books e Linux for Dummies by various authors 326 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ e Red Hat Linux Unleashed Sams Publishing e Teach Yourself Linux in 24 Hours Sams Publishing Web Sites http www r
386. or text mode built from the slang library It allows color text mode applications to easily use stackable windows push buttons check boxes radio buttons lists entry fields labels and displayable text Scrollbars are supported and forms may be nested to provide extra functionality This pacakge contains the shared library for programs that have been built with newt as well as a usr bin dialog replacement called whiptail p2c Version 1 20 495K p2c is the Pascal to C translation system It is used to convert Pascal source code into C source code so that it can be compiled using a standard C compiler such as gcc readline Version 2 2 1 250K B The readline library will read a line from the terminal and return it allowing the user to edit the line with the standard emacs editing keys It allows the programmer to give the user an easier to use and more intuitive interface slang Version 0 99 38 164K Slang pronounced sssslang is a powerful stack based interpreter that supports a C like syntax It C 9 Networking has been designed from the beginning to be easily embedded into a program to make it extensible Slang also provides a way to quickly develop and debug the application embedding it in a safe and efficient manner Since slang resembles C it is easy to recode slang procedures in C if the need arises sox devel Version 12 14 518K Libraries that can be used to compile applications using s
387. ord to a series of tests to ensure that it cannot for example be easily determined by a dictionary based password cracking program The seventh line which we ve had to wrap specifies that if the login program changes the user s password it should use the pam pwdb so module to do so It will do so only if an auth module has determined that the password needs to be changed for example if a shadow password has expired The eighth and final line specifies that the pam pwdb so module should be used to manage the ses sion Currently that module doesn t do anything it could be replaced or supplemented by stacking by any necessary module Note that the order of the lines within each file matters While it doesn t really matter much in which order required modules are called there are other control flags available While optional is rarely used and never used by default on a Red Hat Linux system sufficient and requisite cause order to become important Let s look at the auth configuration for rlogin auth required lib security pam_securetty so auth sufficient lib security pam_rhosts_auth so auth required lib security pam pwdb so shadow nullok auth required lib security pam nologin so That looks almost like the login entry but there s an extra line specifying an extra module and the modules are specified in a different order First pam_securetty so keeps root logins from happening on insecure terminals This effectively d
388. org xwinman E 8 5 X window error 111 Question Iget an error about errno 111 What does it mean and what can I do Answer Whenever the XFree86 Xserver crashes dies ceases to exist or is inaccessible for any reason you will see the error message X11TransSocketUNIXConnect Can t connect errno 111 or one similar to it It is a message from an X client any program running on your XFree86 Xserver for example the window manager telling you that it tried to connect to the Xserver but failed to do so for some reason To further debug this issue you will need to look into the server output for what got this error Normally you should see the real error message why the server stopped to work a few lines before the error 111 message If you still can t make head or tail from all those messages make sure to quote the FULL server output in your problem report to either technical support or a mailing list Obtaining the full server output is normally accomplished by redirecting both standard output and standard error to a file while starting the server You can do this by running X like this startx amp gt startx out Other useful information to check are the symbolic links of X the xinitrc if one exists or what commands were running when the error occurred E 8 X Window System 331 E 8 6 X Keyboard mapping problems Question My keyboard mappings don t work correctly in X What can I do Answer If you are using
389. ormation in figure 3 8 on the next page is a sample only You should obtain the proper information for your network from your network administrator 40 Starting the Installation Field Example Value IP Address 10 0 2 15 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 0 2 254 Primary Nameserver 10 0 2 1 Domain Name redhat com Hostname pooh redhat com Figure 3 8 Sample Networking Information The first dialog asks you for IP and other network addresses see Figure 3 9 Enter the IP address you are using during installation and press Enter The installation program attempts to guess your Netmask based on your IP address you may change the netmask if it is incorrect Press Enter The installation program guesses the Default gateway and Primary nameserver addresses from your IP address and netmask you may change them if they are incorrect A Digre TPIP Plsss enter the P oonfbsuratbon for this aachine Esih item hold ba anberad ar an P sirar in datted decimal natation Chor esla 1 2 3 4 IP sifas Partmark Default pate LIP Primary namararear Ca to beien e beant Figure 3 9 Configuring TCP IP In either case choose OK to continue After the first dialog box you may see a second one It will prompt you for a domain name a hostname and other networking information see Figure 3 10 on the next page Enter the Domain name for your system and press Enter the installation program carries the domain name down to
390. ost likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto german Version 5 2 11 760K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into german Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto greek Version 5 2 2 822K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into greek Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto html Version 5 2 11 214K These are the html versions of the HOWTOs You can view them with your favorite web browser howto indonesian Version 5 2 3 727K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into indonesian Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto italian Version 5 2 15 179K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into italian Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto japanese Version 5 2 25 676K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into japanese Ple
391. ou don t have to search through the sources to find the documents Every package containing documentation other than man pages and files that need to be in specific locations places their documentation in a subdirectory of usr doc The name of the subdirectory depends on the package name and version number For example For example the tin package might be at version 1 22 Therefore the path to its documentation would be usr doc tin 1 22 For the most part the documents in usr doc are in ASCII You can view them with more file name orless filename Having this special documentation area can be handy but what if you re looking for documentation on a specific command or file and you don t know what package that command came from No problem Take for example the file usr bin rtin You re not sure what package it s part of but you d like to learn a bit more about it Simply enter rpm qdf usr bin rtin 7 1 On Line Help This command will return a listing of all the documentation including man pages from the package containing the file usr bin rtin RPM is capable of a lot more than this simple example For more information on RPM turn to Chapter 9 on page 165 Of course maybe this kind of information is not exactly what you re looking for Maybe you re more interested in task oriented documentation If so read on 7 1 3 HOWTOs and FAQs If you elected to install it most of the contents of the Linux Documentation
392. ou re behind a firewall for exam ple check the check box and another dialog box will request the FTP account and proxy informa tion If everything has been specified properly you should see a message box indicating that base hdlist is being retrieved If you are doing a workstation or server class installation please turn to Chapter 5 on page 65 Otherwise turn to Section 4 9 on page 59 to continue installing Red Hat Linux 4 7 For SMB Installations Only If you are not performing an SMB installation please skip ahead to Section 4 8 on page 59 If you are performing an SMB installation please mark this place in the manual because you ll be 57 58 Continuing the Installation Plasa aber tha following information a tha nama or P mabe of your FIP mrar o ihe directory on that ser containing Pad Hat Linu far your architacura Red Hat directory CL eb Lo ea e bos Cup selecta Figure 4 13 Installing via FTP returning here later Turn to Section 3 4 3 on page 38 This section will guide you through the neces sary network configuration dialog boxes When you get to the SMB Setup dialog box come back here At this point you should have entered all the necessary network information and should now be looking at the SMB Setup dialog box This is where you ll specify which SMB server share and account information the installation program should use See Figure 4 14 on the facing page First you l
393. overview of the standard and a description of the parts of the filesystem not covered by the standard The complete standard can be viewed at http www pathname com fhs 186 System Administration 11 1 1 Overview of the FSSTND The directories and files noted here are a small subset of those specified by the FSSTND document Check the latest FSSTND document for the most up to date and complete information The etc Directory The etc directory is reserved for configuration files that are local to your machine No binaries are to put in etc Binaries that were in the past put in etc should now go into sbin or possibly bin The X11 and skel directories should be subdirectories of et c etc XI skel The X11 directory is for X11 configuration files such as XF86Config The skel directory is for skeleton user files which are files used to populate a home directory when a user is first created The 1ib Directory The 1ib directory should contain only those libraries that are need to execute the binaries in bin and sbin The sbin Directory The sbin directory is for executables used only by the root user and only those executables needed to boot and mount usr and perform system recovery operations The FSSTND says sbin typically contains files essential for booting the system in addition to the binaries in bin Anything executed after usr is known to be mounted when there are no problems should be
394. ox libraries svgalib Version 1 3 0 718K SVGAlib is a library which allows applications to use full screen graphics on a variety of hardware platforms Many games and utilities are avaiable which take advantage of SVGAlib for graphics access as it is more suitable for machines with little memory then X Windows is zlib Version 1 1 3 57K B The zlib compression library provides in memory compression and decompression functions in cluding integrity checks of the uncompressed data This version of the library supports only one compression method deflation but other algorithms may be added later and will have the same stream interface This library is used by a number of different system programs C 9 Networking This section lists packages that are related to networking It has been split into several subsections for easier browsing C 9 1 Admin This section lists packages that provide basic network administrative functions anonftp Version 2 6 1 046K Contains the files needed for allowing anonymous ftp access to your machine This lets any user get files from your machine without having an account which is a popular way of making programs available on the Internet caching nameserver Version 5 2 3K Includes configuration files for bind the DNS nameserver which make it behave as a simple caching nameserver Many users on dialup connections use this package along with bind and make the it s
395. p close destroy buttons 3 Gradient filled root window PopUp menus which can be configured to accomodate different tastes and styles of management 4 NEXTSTEP style icons which give a consistent look to the entire desktop 5 Pixmapped Pager with desktop pixmmaping 6 Easy to use look files to share you desktop appearance with your friends 7 Start menu entries in a hierarchy of directories 8 WinList a tasklist which can be horizontal or vertical 9 Many modules amp asapps to give a good look to your X window station AfterStep APPS Version 1 5 715K This package includes some applets that can be used in the Wharf module used by window Managers like AfterStep and WindowMaker They all look very cool and will make your desktop look more appealing once you add them to your Wharf module AnotherLevel Version 0 7 2 308K AnotherLevel is the next version of TheNextLevel TheNextLevel desktop was created by Greg J Badros and was the winning entry in the 1996 Red Hat Desktop Contest It features a powerful and attractive fvwm configuration that works with fvwm2 That version suffered a number of en hancements and transformations so we called it AnotherLevel Some documentation is available in usr doc AnotherLevel in html format This desktop is defined to be easily reconfigured Most attributes may be redefined by copying etc X11 AnotherLevel fvwm2rc defines to a user s home directory as fvwm2rc defines and mod ifying the copied
396. package owning lt file gt e p lt packagefile gt queries the package lt packagefile gt There are a number of ways to specify what information to display about queried packages The following options are used to select the information you are interested in These are called Information Selection Options e i displays package information such as name description release size build date install date vendor and other miscellaneous information e 1 displays the list of files that the package owns e s displays the state of all the files in the package e d displays a list of files marked as documentation man pages info pages READMESs etc e c displays a list of files marked as configuration files These are the files you change after installation to adapt the package to your system sendmail cf passwd inittab etc For those options that display file lists you can add v to your command line to get the lists in a familiar 1s 1 format 9 2 5 Verifying Verifying a package compares information about files installed from a package with the same in formation from the original package Among other things verifying compares the size MD5 sum permissions type owner and group of each file rpm V verifies a package You can use any of the Package Selection Options listed for querying to specify the packages you wish to verify A simple useis rpm V foo which verifies that all the files in the foo package are as the
397. pauns dad Eni aliras irr aliai iri vinim nan bear ers Falicigi Paul amp account palici dl user shells Aoallable PPP shells Bualabie SLIP shells Massage di tfei day Fig stare Vitel ead dni nts od ii swap fas and partitions Changing soper user pasara Please ander mobs pa ssaord end Cancel Heil Figure 8 9 Root Password Verification Screen characters in length They may contain numbers as well as a mix of lowercase and uppercase letters If you decide against changing the root password just hit Cancel Once you have entered the new password select Accept The change takes place immediately and is effective not only for logging in as root but also for becoming root using the su command Disabling a User Account Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open Config gt Users accounts gt Normal gt User accounts 4 Select the account 5 De select the account is enabled checkbox 6 Select Accept 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 123 Disabling a User Account General Overview Why disable an account Good question There s no single answer but we can provide some reasons why this option is available The biggest reason is security For example you may have created a special account to be used by clients coworkers or friends to access specific files on
398. pinfocom is an interpreter for those old Infocom compatible text adventure games remember those scottfree Version 1 14 31K scottfree is an interpreter for Scott Adams format text adventure games remember those 258 Package List trojka Version 1 1 15K The aim of this game is to control and to place the falling blocks so that at least three blocks horizon tally or diagonally or both have matching patterns This sequence is then removed and the above blocks will coll you reach the top of the screen the game is finished vga cardgames Version 1 3 1 110K A number of various card games for the Linux console including Klondike Oh Hell Solitaire and Spider as well as some other popular time wasters vga gamespack Version 1 3 54K A number of various mind games for the Linux console using SVGAlib The selection includes such favorites as Othello Minesweeper and Connect 4 C 8 Libraries This section lists packages that contain various libraries These libraries are used by other program to support various functions such as image manipulation compatibility with older binary program formats and screen handling aout libs Version 1 4 3 663K Old Linux systems used a format for programs and shared libraries called a out while newer ones use the ELF format In order to run old a out format programs you need the a out format libraries which this package provide With it you are
399. plies the Official Red Hat Linux 5 2 Installation Guide is just that a guide to installing Red Hat Linux on your system While we make every effort to give you the information you need to get your Red Hat Linux system running the Installation Guide can t do it all For one the Guide would balloon to more than a thousand pages Besides then we d have to change the title because it wouldn t be just an Installation Guide anymore Instead let s take those categories we discussed back in Section 2 1 on page 6 and let s try to be more explicit in terms of the documentation you ll need Let s start by figuring out your experience level Here are the three basic categories 84 What Do Do Now New To Linux Has never used any Linux or Linux like operating system before or has had only limited exposure to Linux May or may not have experience using other operating systems such as Windows Is this you If so please turn to Section 6 1 1 Some Linux Experience Has installed and successfully used Linux but not Red Hat Linux before Or may have equivalent experience with other Linux like operating systems Does this describe you If so please turn to Section 6 1 2 on the facing page Old Timer Has installed and sucessfully used Red Hat Linux before Are you an old timer If so please turn to Section 6 1 3 on the next page 6 1 1 Documentation For First Time Linux Users A journey of a thousand miles begins with a single st
400. pport for all file systems avail able under Linux At install time the modularized kernel has support for E IDE devices including ATAPI CD ROM drives SCSI adapters and network cards Additionally all mice SLIP CSLIP PPP PLIP FPU emulation console selection ELF SysV IPC IP forwarding firewalling and accounting reverse ARP OIC tape and parallel printers are supported Please Note Because Red Hat Linux supports installation on many different types of hardware many drivers including those for SCSI adapters network cards and many CD ROMs are not built into the Linux kernel used during installation rather they are available as modules and loaded as you need them during the installation process If necessary you will have the chance to specify options for these modules at the time they are loaded and in fact these drivers will ignore any options you specify for them at the boot prompt After the installation is complete you may want to rebuild a kernel that includes support for your spe cific hardware configuration See Section 11 6 on page 197 for information on building a customized kernel Note that in most cases a custom built kernel is not necessary 2 9 If You Have Problems If you have problems before during or after the installation check the list of Red Hat Linux Fre quently Asked Questions in Appendix E on page 307 In many cases a quick check of the FAQ can quickly get you back in action 2 10 One Last
401. presentatives may tell you you don t need this information or may tell you you need more than this Red Hat has streamlined the information needed using intelligent defaults and tools such as linuxconf to simplify this process for you Unless they have a document specifically for Red Hat Linux just request the information below and go from there Specifically you ll need e the IP address for a domain nameserver DNS e the telephone number to dial e your login and password e an P address for your machine if the network you are connecting to isn t going to provide you a dynamic one e whether or not your ISP uses an authentication method such as PAP CHAP or MS CHAP If so you will need a secret to enable authentication The secret will be a word or sequence of characters CHAP and MS CHAP are not currently supported using linuxconf and are rarely used Additional information which may be helpful but isn t necessary includes a secondary nameserver address and a search domain Once you have all this information you re ready to get connected e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt Networking gt PPP SLIP PLIP e Select Add 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Initially there won t be any configurations specified When you select Add you will be given a choice Pertworkirg Cien barks Brdr host imannaiion Hae
402. pritners and accepts jobs from remote clients man Version 1 5f 89K B The man page suite including man apropos and whatis These programs are used to read most of the documentation available on a Linux system The whatis and apropos programs can be used to find documentation related to a particular subject mingetty Version 0 9 4 31K 5 mingetty by Florian La Roche is a lightweight minimalist getty for use on virtual consoles only mingetty is not suitable for serial lines the author recommends using mgetty for that purpose C 11 Utilities mkbootdisk Version 1 1 5K This package creates a self contained boot disk for booting a system It assumes that the boot disk should use the root partition mentioned in etc fstab The resultant boot disk includes all of the SCSI modules needed to use the system mkdosfs ygg Version 0 3b 15K This is the mkdosfs package You can use this under Linux to create MS DOS FAT file systems mkinitrd Version 1 8 6K B Generic kernels can be built without drivers for any SCSI adapters which load the SCSI driver as a module To solve the problem of allowing the kernel to read the module without being able to address the SCSI adapter an initial ramdisk is used That ramdisk is loaded by the operating system loader such as lilo and is available to the kernel as soon as it is loaded That image is resonsible for loading the proper SCSI adapter and allowing t
403. proper workaround for this problem is to rm f Xclients A more drastic work workaround is available to the root user rm f home Xclients E 8 12 Problems with Netscape colors in X Question When I run netscape the colors don t seem right or When I run netscape I get error messages and warnings about colors Answer This problem often comes with the error 334 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Cannot allocate colormap entry for default background The reason is that X has run out of colors to allocate to applications this shows up a lot on 16 and 256 color applications To solve this problem you can try the following 1 run netscape with install switch This can be ugly in that you ll see color flashes 2 run X in 15bpp or higher To obtain a higher bpp than 8 default run st art x like startx bpp 16 If it doesn t work consult your X driver manuals Xconfigurator or upgrade your video card E 8 13 Problems with Accelerated X and Red Hat 5 x Question Iam using Accelerated X but when I try to start it I get this error Fatal server error could not open default font fixed What can I do to fix this Answer In 5 x the fonts come gzipped Your version of AcceleratedX does not know how to handle this What you need to dois gzip d the fonts in your font directory then run mkfontdir E 8 14 Problems with X and Microsoft Serial Mouse Question Ihave a Microsoft serial mouse and Linux
404. pting to establish a connection after a previous attempt has failed letc sysconfig network scripts chat interface name This file is a chat script for PPP or SLIP connections and is intended to establish the connection For SLIP devices a DIP script is written from the chat script for PPP devices the chat script is used directly etc sysconfig network scripts dip lt interface name gt This write only script is created from the chat script by netcfg Do not modify this file In the future this file may disappear and instead will be created on the fly from the chat script letc sysconfig network scripts ifup post This file is called when any network device ex cepta SLIP device comes up Calls etc sysconfig network scripts ifup routesto bring up static routes that depend on that device Brings up aliases for that device Sets the hostname if it is not already set and a hostname can be found for the IP for that device Sends SIGIO to any programs that have requested notification of network events Could be extended to fix up nameservice configuration call arbitrary scripts etc as needed letc sysconfig network scripts ifdhcpc done This file is called by dhcpcd once dhcp con figuration is complete sets up etc resolv conf from the version dhcpcd dropped in etc dhcpc resolv conf 11 11 2 System V Init This section is a brief description of the internals of the boot process It basically covers in detail how the machine
405. r 321 boot problems sssssesssssss 324 booting from diskette oooo 342 booting from floppy ooooooccoocooooo 342 CD n mbet two evadir os pr hend 341 CD probl tis site vrs teak 312 CD ROM mounting problems 342 command not found 6 6 327 contact nfO iia 308 default boot using LILO 345 disk name differences sss 315 disk space requirements 312 diskette based booting 342 diskettes missing 66 02005 314 A en po e i epe Ub ds 307 floppies missing seessssssse 314 floppy based booting ssssl 342 Eto 338 FTP site mitos ceina eenen 351 Future Domain TMC 3260 318 general questions ssie annesse nesse 310 393 394 general resources 0 00 cece 308 IDE CDROM problems 316 installation alternate ssssuu 314 Introduction uoo bre xa ve Ev vea 307 Jaz drive configuration s 339 laptop installation 08 317 LILO and modules 344 LIMO removing reine eret heh 322 Linux removing 66 cece eee eee 322 Linux using 0 ire eaaa 325 live filesystem on CD sssss 321 lOadlin using eere rre 323 ls getting colors With oooo 326 Macmillan documentation 327 mailing lists
406. r most of the time it s possible to use the modular sound drivers 6 4 Configuring Your Red Hat Linux System For Sound 6 4 4 Modular Sound Drivers ALPHA Modular sound drivers are not supported for Alpha based systems Red Hat Linux 5 2 includes modular versions of the standard OSS Free sound drivers This makes it possible to load and unload the various sound drivers without recompiling the kernel or rebooting For additional information please consult the README files in the rhsound documentation direc tory usr doc rhsound The latest information can always be found at ftp ftp redhat com pub sound If you have any issues concerning the modular sound drivers please send mail to sound bugs redhat com There is also a mailing list associated with the modular sound drivers sound list redhat com To subscribe send mail to sound list request redhat com with subscribe as the subject line Recognized Sound Cards At this point most sound cards should be recognized by the modular sound drivers however drivers for the following sound cards were among the first to be developed and as such have re ceived the most testing e Sound Blaster 1 0 e Sound Blaster 2 0 e Sound Blaster Pro e Sound Blaster 16 e Sound Blaster 16 PnP e Sound Blaster AWE32 AWE64 6 4 2 Sound Card Configuration Tool Also included in Red Hat Linux 5 2 is sndconf ig a screen oriented utility that can properly config ure modular sound c
407. r not unlike Javasoft s machine in the second mode if performs just in time code conversion from the abstract code to the host ma chine s native code This will ultimately allow execution of Java code at the same speed as standard compiled code but while maintaining the advantages and flexibility of code independence p2c devel Version 1 20 24K This is the development kit for the Pascal to C translator It contains the header files and some other programs that might be useful to someone using the translator python Version 1 5 1 5 320K B Python in an interpreted object orientated scripting language If contains support for dynamic load ing of objects classes modules and exceptions Adding interfaces to new system libraries through C code is straightforward making Python easy to use in custom settings This Python package includes most of the standard Python modules along with modules for inter facing to the Tix widget set for Tk and RPM python devel Version 1 5 1 2 877K The Python interpreter is relatively easy to extend with dynamically loaded extensions and to embed in other programs This packages contains the header files and libraries which are needed to do both of these tasks python docs Version 1 5 1 2 611K This package contains documentation on the Python language and interpretor as a mix of plain ASCII files and LaTeX sources tcl Version 8 0 3 5 464K TCL is a simple scripting l
408. r interfaces e Command line Linuxconf s command line mode is handy for manipulating your system s configuration in scripts e Character Cell Using the same user interface style as the Red Hat Linux installation pro gram the character cell interface makes it easy to navigate your way through linuxconf even if you aren t running X e X Window Based Linuxconf can take advantage of X and give you an easy to use point and click tree menu interface This form of navigation is new in Linuxconf Please see the Tree Menu Interface subsection of section 8 1 1 for more information This is the interface we ll use for illustrations throughout this chapter e Web Based A web based interface makes remote system administration a breeze The web interface will even play nice with the Lynx character cell web browser Linuxconf will normally start in either character cell or X mode depending on the DISPLAY en vironment variable The first time you run linuxconf an introductory message will be displayed although it is only displayed once accessing help from the main screen will give you the same basic information Linuxconf has context specific help available For information on any specific aspect of linuxconf please select Help from the screen you d like help with Note that not all help screens are complete at this time as help screens are updated they will be included in subsequent versions of linuxconf Tree Menu Interface The ne
409. r more information about the Linux Documentation Project and pos sible updates to this version man pages Version 1 21 1 575K A large collection of man pages covering programming APIs file formats protocols etc Section 1 user commands intro only Section 2 system calls Section 3 libc calls Section 4 devices e g hd sd Section 5 file formats and protocols e g wtmp etc passwd nfs Section 6 games intro only Section 7 conventions macro packages etc e g nroff ascii Section 8 system administration intro only nag Version 1 0 1 217K This is a generic guide to the Network Administration of Linux systems Check http sunsite unc edu LDP for more information about the Linux Documentation Project and pos sible updates to this version rhl alpha install addend en Version 5 2 196K This is a local copy of the HTML version of the Red Hat Linux 5 2 Alpha Installation Addendum rhl install guide en Version 5 2 1 472K This is a local copy of the HTML version of the Red Hat Linux 5 2 Installation Guide An online copy can be found at http www redhat com sag Version 0 6 644K This is a generic guide to the System Administration of Linux systems Check http sunsite unc edu LDP for more information about the Linux Documentation Project and pos sible updates to this version C 6 Extensions This section lists packages that provide language specific extensions to Red Hat Lin
410. r readers has been successful getting a pre 2 0 SPARC system booted from the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM please send us mail at docs redhat com and we ll update this manual Thank you Note that using an NFS mounted root after booting from CD ROM is not supported as the filesys tem on the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM performs the same function as an NFS mounted root Therefore no additional boot command arguments should be given for CD ROM boots F 5 3 Booting From the Network There are two types of network boots supported by the Red Hat Linux SPARC installation program 1 Network boot with NFS mounted root This method is required for SPARC systems with less than 12 MB of RAM 2 Network boot with network loaded ramdisk This method can be used by systems with at least 12 MB of RAM While booting your SPARC system from the network is fairly straightforward there are several re quirements e Your SPARC system must have a network connection e Your network must be able to give your SPARC system its IP address via a rarp e You must have a TFTP server that can download the Red Hat Linux SPARC kernel and instal lation program to your SPARC system e If you are going to use an NFS mounted root an NFS server capable of exporting the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM or equivalent files F 5 Choosing a Boot Method Setting up RARP If you are going to use rarp please refer to Section F 4 1 on page 356 TFTP Server Setup If you are going
411. r type 2 IRO 10 base address 0xca000 irq 10 When a parameter has commas make sure you do not put a space after a comma D 3 Ethernet parameters Most ethernet drivers accept parameters to specify a base IO address and an IRQ as follows io base addr irq irq For example for a 3com 3c509 ethernet card located at IO address 210 IO addresses are usually in hexadecimal and IRO 10 use the following parameters for the 3c509 driver io 0x210 irq 10 You can use multiple ethernet cards in one machine If each card uses a different driver e g 3c509 and a DE425 you simply need to add aliases and possibly options for each card to etc conf modules for example alias eth0 3c509 options 3c509 io 20x210 irq 10 alias ethl de4x5 options de4x5 io 0 See Section 8 2 2 on page 156 for more information However if any two ethernet cards use the same driver e g two 3c509 s or a 3c595 and a 3c905 you will need to compile a custom kernel with the ethernet driver built in In that case you can use the classic LILO boot parameters of the form ether irq base_addr interface For example 304 General Parameters and Modules LILO boot linux ether 10 0x210 eth0 ether 11 0x300 eth1 For more information about using more than one ethernet card see the Multiple Ethernet mini HOWTO D 4 Network Module Listing The following table lists various network cards and the kernel modules that support them Cards Driver Module
412. r words Windows cannot be running If your computer can t boot directly from CD ROM and you can t use a DOS based autoboot you ll have to use a boot diskette to get things started 3 3 Beginning the Installation After booting the installation program begins by displaying a welcome message Press to begin the installation If you wish to abort the installation process at this time simply eject the boot diskette now and reboot your machine 3 3 Beginning the Installation 3 3 1 Choosing a Language After the welcome dialog the installation program asks you to select the language to be used during the installation process see Figure 3 4 Using the T and 1 keys select the appropriate language A scroll bar may appear to the right of the languages if present it indicates that there are more entries than can be displayed at one time You ll be seeing scroll bars like this throughout the installation program Mhat Languaga zhauld ba uned during the installation process Figure 3 4 Selecting a Language 3 3 2 Selecting a Keyboard Type Next the installation program gives you an opportunity to select a keyboard type see Figure 3 5 on the next page You may navigate this dialog box the same way you did with the language selection dialog After selecting the appropriate keyboard type press Enter the keyboard type you select will be loaded automatically both for the remainder of the installation process and each ti
413. ral you probably don t need it emacs Version 20 3 17 337K Emacs is the extensible customizable self documenting real time display editor Emacs has special code editing modes a scripting language elisp and comes with many packages for doing mail news and more all in your editor This package includes the libraries necessary to run the emacs editor the actual program can be found in either the emacs nox or emacs X11 packages depending on whether you use X Windows or not emacs X11 Version 20 3 5 839K This package contains an emacs binary built with support for X Windows It will still work fine outside of X Windows on the console for instance but supports the mouse and GUI elements when used inside of X Windows emacs el Version 20 3 16 778K This package contains the emacs lisp sources for many of the elisp programs included with the main emacs package You do not need this package unless you want to modify these packages or see some elisp examples emacs nox Version 20 3 2 443K This package contains an emacs binary built without support for X Windows While the emacs binary in the main emacs package will work fine outside of X Windows on the console for instance the one in this package has a smaller memory image jed Version 0 98 4 1 193K Jed is a fast compact editor based on the slang screen library It has special editing modes for C C and other languages It can emulate Emac
414. rary files in order to execute Programs linked against shared libraries will not execute unless the required libraries have been installed LILO A commonly used bootstrap loader for Linux systems based on an Intel compatible proces sor Linus Torvalds Created Linux in 1991 while a university student Linuxconf A versatile system configuration program written by Jacques Gelinas Linuxconf pro vides a menu based approach to system configuration via several different user interfaces Linux A full featured robust freely available operating system originally developed by Linus Tor valds 369 370 Glossary Logical Partition A partition that exists within an extended partition See also partition and extended partition Master Boot Record The master boot record or MBR is a section of a disk drive s storage space that is set aside for the purpose of saving information necessary to begin the bootstrap process on a personal computer MBR See Master Boot Record Memory When referring to computers memory in general is any hardware that can store data for later retrieval However the term is usually used to specifically refer to RAM MILO A commonly used bootstrap loader for Linux systems based on the Alpha processor Module In Linux a module is a collection of routines that perform a system level function and may be dynamically loaded and unloaded from the running kernel as required Often containing device drivers
415. re times when you ll just have to sit there and look at the sources to understand things For tunately because of the freely available nature of Linux it s easy to get the sources Now if it were only that easy to understand them Now that we ve covered documentation let s look at some of the most commonly performed system tasks 85 86 What Do Do Now 6 2 Basic System Tasks Remember when everyone upgraded from Windows 3 1 to Windows 95 For a while people scram bled to figure out how to do the same things under 95 that they had done for a years under 3 x It s no different here If you have experience with other operating systems but not with Linux you ll need to adjust to different ways of doing things Some tasks may be similar some may be entirely different and some may have no equivalent to anything you ve ever done before Let s start by going through a few of the more common tasks 6 2 1 Booting Your Red Hat Linux System The process required to get your computer running Red Hat Linux may vary a bit from what you re used to If you have no other operating system installed on your computer just apply power and wait You ll see the computer pause for a moment while it says something about LILO but it should continue displaying all sorts of strange messages However if you are sharing your computer between Red Hat Linux and another operating system you may have one of the following tasks to perform e Select
416. red at the boot prompt as it deals with support for IDE ATAPI CD ROMs which is part of the kernel 302 General Parameters and Modules D 1 CD ROM parameters Hardware Parameter Mitsumi CD ROM mca portirg Sony CDU 3T or 33 CD ROM cdu31a port hase addr cdu3Ta irq ing hdx cdrom Examples of the above would be onfiguration non IDE Mitsumi CD ROM on port mcd 0x340 11 340 IRO 11 ony CDU Or at port 340 no cdu31a port 0x340 cdu31a irq 0 IRQ Aztech CD ROM at port 220 aztcd 0x220 ATAPI CD ROM jumpered as mas hdc cdrom Pre TREE anasonic type D ROM on a sbpcd 0x230 1 Please Note Most newer Sound Blaster cards come with IDE interfaces You do not need to use sbpcd parameters only use hdx parameters D 2 SCSI parameters Hardware Module J Parameters Seagate STOX seagate o controller type 1 base_address base addr irq iri F Domain TMC 8xx seagate o controller type 2 base address base addr irq 1 Domain TMC 3260 fdomain o setup called base base_addr rupt_level irq fdomain o setup called base vase_adar rupt_level irq t128 o ncr5380 Dasc addr irq da charme ppa base base adir Always In2000 in2000 0 setup_string 10port base_addr noreset nosync x period ns disconnect x debug x proc x D 3 Ethernet parameters 303 Some examples would be Ad aptec AHA1522 at port 330 IRO aha152x 0x330 11 7 11 SCSI ID 7 uture Domain TMC 800 at CA000 controlle
417. ree up space for Red Hat Linux partitions 2 7 1 Partition Naming Scheme Linux refers to disk partitions using a combination of letters and numbers which may be confus ing particularly if you re used to the C drive way of referring to hard disks and their partitions Red Hat Linux uses a naming scheme that is more flexible and conveys more information than the approach used by other operating systems Here is a summary First Two Letters The first two letters of the partition name indicate the type of device on which the partition resides You ll normally see either nd for IDE disks or sd for SCSI disks The Next Letter This letter indicates which device the partition is on For example dev hda the first IDE hard disk or dev sdb the second SCSI disk The number The final number denotes the partition The first four primary or extended partitions are numbered 1 through 4 Logical partitions start at 5 E g dev hda3 is the third primary or extended partition on the first IDE hard disk dev sdb6 is the second logical partition on the second SCSI hard disk Keep this information in mind it will make things easier to understand when you re setting up the partitions Red Hat Linux requires 2 7 2 Repartitioning Strategies There are three possible scenarios you may face when attempting to repartition your hard disk e Unpartitioned free space is available 2 7 Disk Partitions e An unused partition is avail
418. rence is Managing NES and NIS Services by Hal Stern published by O Reilly amp Associates 204 System Administration 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown This section contains information on what happens when a Red Hat Linux system is booted and shut down Let s start with information on the files in etc sysconfig 11 11 1 Sysconfig Information The following information outlines the various files in etc sysconfig their function and their contents Files in etc sysconfig The following files are normally found in etc sysconfig e etc sysconfig clock e etc sysconfig keyboard e etc sysconfig mouse e etc sysconfig network e etc sysconfig pomcia e etc sysconfig amd e etc sysconfig tape Let s take a look at each one letc sysconfig clock The etc sysconfig clock file controls the interpretation of values read from the system clock Earlier releases of Red Hat Linux used the following values which is deprecated e CLOCKMODE mode where mode is one of the following GMT indicates that the clock is set to UTC ARC on alpha only indicates the ARC console s 42 year time offset is in effect Currently the correct values are e UTC boolean where booleanis one of the following 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown 205 true indicates that the clock is set to UTC Any other value indicates that it is set to local time e ARC boolean where booleanis one of the following
419. rent ways of creating new accounts We ll use the most basic method the useradd command Basically all you need to enter as root remember is 87 88 What Do Do Now root bigdog root useradd blarg root bigdog root f That wasn t very exciting was it Well let s try to login Red Hat Linux release 5 1 Manhattan Kernel 2 0 34 on an i586 login blarg Password Login incorrect login Not knowing what blarg s password was we just pressed Enter Guess that wasn t the right pass word Say how do you specify a password for a new account Passwords The passwd command can be used to e Specify passwords for newly created user accounts e Change an already existing account s password e Change the password of the account you re logged into The first two scenarios are really one and the same there s really no difference as far as passwd is concerned between an account that s just be created or one that has existed for the past five years All you need to remember is that you must be logged in as root and that you must specify the account name whose password you want to change Using the account we just created as an example let s give passwd a try root bigdog root passwd blarg New UNIX password Retype new UNIX password passwd all authentication tokens updated successfully root bigdog root f As you might have guessed the password is not displayed when you enter it You also have to t
420. rivers loaded during the installation Expert mode can be entered using the following boot command 33 34 Starting the Installation boot expert Please Note The initial boot messages will not contain any references to SCSI or network cards These devices are supported by modules that are loaded during the installation process Options can also be passed to the kernel For example to instruct the kernel to use all the RAM in a 128 MB system enter boot linux mem 128M After entering any options press to boot using those options If you do need to specify boot options to identify your hardware please make note of them they will be needed later INTEL Installing Without Using a Boot Diskette The Red Hat Linux Intel CD ROM can also be booted by newer computers that support bootable CD ROMs Not all computers support this fea ture so if yours can t boot from CD ROM there is one other way to start the installation without using a boot diskette The following method is specific to Intel based computers only If you have MS DOS installed on your computer you can boot the installation system directly from the CD without using any diskettes To do this use the following commands assuming your CD is drive d C gt d D gt ed dosutils D dosutils gt autoboot bat Note that this method will not work if run in a DOS window the autoboot bat file must be executed with DOS as the only operating system In othe
421. rives If you have only SCSI hard drives boot must be located on a drive at ID 0 or ID 1 No other SCSI IDs will work Partition Completely Below Cylinder 1023 No matter which of the above configurations apply the partition that holds boot must be located entirely below cylinder 1023 If the partition holding boot straddles cylinder 1023 you may face a situation where LILO will work ini tially because all the necessary information is below cylinder 1023 but will fail if a new kernel is to be loaded and that kernel resides above cylinder 1023 25 26 Before You Begin As mentioned earlier it is possible that some of the newer BIOSes may permit LILO to work with configurations that don t meet our guidelines Likewise some of LILO s more esoteric features may be used to get a Linux system started even if the configuration doesn t meet our guidelines How ever due to the number of variables involved Red Hat Software cannot support such extraordinary efforts Please Note Disk Druid as well as the workstation and server class installs take these BIOS related limitations into account However if you decide to use disk instead it is your responsibility to ensure that you keep these limitations in mind 2 7 5 How Many Partitions Although you can install Red Hat Linux in a single large partition subject to any of the partitioning considerations we ve mentioned so far it s a much better idea to split things up a bit We r
422. roup Each user has its own primary group of which only it is a member 11 3 Users Groups and User Private Groups 191 GID Members root root bin daemon root bin daemon root bin adm root adm daemon root daemon lp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 11 2 Standard Groups 192 System Administration umask 002 The traditional UNIX umask is 022 which prevents other users and other members of a user s primary group from modifying a user s files Since every user has their own private group in the UPG scheme this group protection is not needed A umask of 002 will prevent users from modifying other users private files The umask is set in etc profile setgid bit on Directories If you set the setgid bit on a directory with chmod g s directory files created in that directory will have their group set to the directory s group Most computing sites like to create a group for each major project and assign people to the groups they need to be in Managing files traditionally has been difficult though because when someone creates a file it is owned by the primary group he or she belongs to When a single person works on multiple projects it becomes hard to make the files owned by the group that is associated with that project In the UPG scheme groups are automatically assigned to files on a project by project basis which makes managing group projects very simple Let s say you have a big project called devel with many pe
423. rrectly depend on other software packages or libraries that must be installed on your system For example many of the graphical Red Hat system admin istration tools require the python and pythonlib packages To make sure your system has all the packages it needs in order to be fully functional Red Hat Linux checks these package dependencies each time you install or remove software packages After you have finished selecting packages to install the installation program checks the list of se lected packages for dependencies If any package requires another package which you have not selected to install the program presents a list of these unresolved dependencies and gives you the op portunity to resolve them see Figure 4 19 on page 64 If you simply press OK the program will resolve them automatically by adding all required packages to the list of selected packages 4 10 4 Package Installation After all package dependencies have been resolved the installation program presents a dialog box telling you that a log file containing a list of all packages installed will be written to tmp install log on your Red Hat Linux system Select Ok and press to continue At this point the installation program will format every partition you selected for formatting This can take several minutes and will take even longer if you directed the installation program to check for bad blocks Once all partitions have been formatted the installation program
424. rresponds to a type of hardware device that Linux supports This package contains a script which makes it easier to create and maintain the files which fill the dev tree adjtimex Version 1 3 22K adjtimex is a kernel clock management system It is useful in adjusting the system clock for accuracy apmd Version 2 4 63K This is a Advanced Power Management daemon and utilities It can watch your notebook s battery and warn all users when the battery is low Ihave added an unofficial patch for shutting down the PCMCIA sockets before a suspend awesfx Version 0 4 2 251K awesfx includes a couple of utilities for the AWE32 sound driver You need to use these utilities to enable sounds on the driver properly This package includes a soundfont that is a replacement for 276 Package List the SYNTHGM SBK that comes with the SB AWE32 chkconfig Version 0 9 4 44K B chkconfig provides a simple command line tool for maintaining the etc rc d directory hierarchy by relieving system administrators of directly manipulating the numerous symbolic links in that directory control panel Version 3 7 177K The Red Hat control panel is an X program launcher for various configuration tools Other packages provide information which allow them to show up on the control panel s menu of available tools cracklib dicts Version 2 7 227K 5 Includes the cracklib dictionaries for the standard usr dict words as well
425. rs accounts tab beget Normal tab But that s an awful lot of begets Instead we ll use the following format Config Users accounts Normal gt User accounts It s much more concise and clear It assumes as its base the linuxconf entry screen The other advan tage to this approach is that it s not interface specific so regardless of which interface you re using you know exactly where the information is You re happy we re happy and the trees who lobbied against lengthy descriptions are happy What could be better 8 1 1 Running Linuxconf To run linuxconf you must have root access If you are logged in as something other than root there are two easy ways to handle this situation The first is to run Linuxconf by typing linuxconf Linuxconf will then prompt you for root s password see figure 8 2 on the following page The other option is to use the su command to become root In case you aren t familiar with it yet type su at the shell prompt and hit Enter The password it asks you for is the root account s Once you ve entered that correctly you ll have phenomenal cosmic power Well complete control of your 111 112 System Configuration Emhr paa miar for rant Cni fig suparisar t ali wed da param comi guration tosk rant pasren accep Cancel Figure 8 2 root Access Verification Screen system at any rate Anyway type Linuxconf at the shell prompt to begin the program Linuxconf has the following use
426. rs on both the detachable mail in portion and on the top portion of this card The product registration number uniquely identifies a product which you have purchased such as Red Hat Linux that includes 90 days of free installation technical support by fax or email 220 Getting Technical Support Registering via the Web Registering via the Web You can register your Red Hat Software product online at Red Hat s World Wide Web site at http www redhat com support register Choose Register a Product Please enter all applicable information and please be accurate with the system information This information will aid in solving problems and answering questions more quickly and easily and incorrect information benefits neither us nor our customers Also make sure the electronic mail address you give is correct All support correspondence will be sent to that address If this should change please login to the registration pages and edit this information Registration has changed There will be no more annoying support ID numbers to remember If you don t have a current login to the support database you will need to create one Simply enter a name at the Support Login and click on the Create Login button to begin registration of your product If you were already registered for support before August 14 1997 you can login in by using your email address as your Support Login and your former support customer ID as the password The password can be c
427. rsions of software be freely distributed on public internet servers but limits their usefulness to those who already have a copy of the package It uses a simple XOR scheme for creating the file mask and uses file size and md5 sums to ensure the integrity of the result rhs hwdiag Version 0 30 70K 5 A package of utilities which report on the devices of the system PnP probing of serial and parallel devices is supported Useful for reporting errors to Red Hat concerning hardware rhs printfilters Version 1 46 90K The Red Hat print filter system provides an easy way to handle the printing of numerous file formats Meant primarily to be used in conjuction with the Red Hat printtool rhsound Version 1 7 11K The fake service created by rhsound allows sound modules to be loaded in contrallable runlevels and preserves mixer settings on shutdown restarts rmt Version 0 3 12K B rmt provides remote access to tape devices for programs like dump restore and tar rpm Version 2 5 5 1 015K RPM is a powerful package manager which can be used to build install query verify update and uninstall individual software packages A package consists of an archive of files and package infor mation including name version and description setconsole Version 1 0 4K 5 setconsole sets up etc inittab dev systty and dev console for a new console The console may be either the local terminal directly at
428. rt NFS Export the CD ROM file system via NFS You will need to have a nameserver configured or know the NFS server s IP address as well as the path to the exported CD ROM Please Note Your NFS server must be able to handle long filenames INTEL For an NES installation you ll need a boot diskette only If you ve determined that this installation method is most applicable to your situation please skip ahead to Section 2 5 on the following page 2 4 5 Installing From an SMB Shared Volume If your system doesn t have a CD ROM drive but you do have network access then installing Red Hat Linux using an SMB shared volume may be for you When performing an SMB installation your computer accesses the Red Hat Linux packages using a DOS style network drive The packages you select are then installed on your hard drive How To Do It If you wish to install from an SMB shared volume you will need to mount the Red Hat Linux CD ROM on a Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95 server that supports shared volumes You will need to have nameservices configured you will also need the name of the shared volume contain ing the Red Hat Linux CD ROM and the account and password information required to access the volume Please Note The Windows system s Microsoft Networking name must be identical to the system s DNS hostname For example given a Microsoft Networking name of windows1 the system s DNS hostname must be windowsl whatever your domain is 17
429. rt for shadow passwords has been enhanced significantly for Red Hat Linux 5 2 Shadow passwords are a method of improving system security by moving the encrypted passwords nor mally found in etc passwd to another file with more restrictive file access permissions The shadow utils package contains a number of utilities that support e Conversion from normal to shadowed passwords and back pwconv pwunconv e Verification of the password group and associated shadow files pwck grpck e Industry standard methods of adding deleting and modifying user accounts useradd usermod and userdel e Industry standard methods of adding deleting and modifying user groups groupadd groupmod and groupdel e Industry standard method of administering the etc group file gpasswd Please Note There are a few additional points of interest concerning these utilities e The utilities will work properly whether shadowing is enabled or not e The utilities have been slightly modified to support Red Hat Software s user private group scheme For a description of the modifications please see the useradd man page For more information on user private groups please turn to Section 11 3 3 on page 190 e The adduser script has been replaced with a symlink to usr sbin useradd 11 6 Building a Custom Kernel 11 6 Building a Custom Kernel With the introduction of modularization in the Linux 2 0 x kernel there have been some significant changes
430. ruct union tags external function prototypes optional typedefs and variable declarations It is far less easily fooled by code contain ing fif preprocessor conditional constructs using a conditional path selection algorithm to resolve complicated choices and a fall back algorithm when this one fails Can also be used to print out a list of selected objects found in source files 245 246 Package List egcs Version 1 0 3a 2 782K A compiler aimed at integrating all the optimizations and features necessary for a high performance and stable development environment egcs c Version 1 0 3a 1 780K This package adds C support to the GNU C compiler It includes support for most of the current C specification including templates and exception handling It does not include a standard C library which is available separately egcs g77 Version 1 0 3a 2 356K This apckage adds support for compiling Fortran 77 programs with the GNU compiler egcs objc Version 1 0 3a 1 490K This package adds Objective C support to the GNU C compiler Objective C is a object oriented derivative of the C language mainly used on systems running NeXTSTEP This package does not include the standard objective C object library expect Version 5 26 746K Expect is a tool for automating interactive applications such as telnet ftp passwd fsck rlogin tip etc It makes it easy for a script to control another program and intera
431. s 4 10 2 Selecting Individual Packages After selecting the components you wish to install you may select or deselect individual packages The installation program presents a list of the package groups available select a group to examine and press Enter The installation program presents a list of the packages in that group which you may select or deselect by using the arrow keys to highlight a package and pressing see Figure 4 18 on page 63 Please Note Some packages such as the kernel and certain libraries are required for every Red Hat Linux system and are not available to select or deselect When you are finished selecting individual packages press OK in the Select Group dialog box Getting Information About A Package You may view a detailed description of the currently highlighted package by pressing Fi A dialog box will appear containing a description of the package You can use the arrow keys to scroll through the description if there is more than can fit on the screen When you re done reading the description press Ok and the box will disappear You can then continue selecting packages and viewing their descriptions Please Note If you d rather read the package descriptions on paper please turn to Appendix C on page 227 61 62 Continuing the Installation Chaara componente ta inrtall Figure 4 17 Selecting System Components 4 10 3 Package Dependencies Many software packages in order to work co
432. s Wordstar and other editors and can be customized with slang macros colors keybindings etc jed xjed Version 0 98 4 153K Xjed is the same editor as jed it just runs in its own X Window joe Version 2 8 282K Joe is a friendly and easy to use editor It has a nice interface and would be a good choice for a novice needing a text editor It uses the same WordStar keybindings which are also used by Borland s 231 232 Package List development enbironment vim X11 Version 5 3 1 306K The VIsual editor iMproved is an updated and feature added clone of the vi editor that comes with almost all UN X systems It adds multiple windows multi level undo block highliting and many other features to the standard vi program This package is a version of VIM with the X Windows libraries linked in allowing you to run VIM as an X Windows application with a full GUI interface and mouse support You just run gvim vim color Version 5 3 427K The VIsual editor iMproved is an updated and feature added clone of the vi editor that comes with almost all UN X systems It adds multiple windows multi level undo block highliting and many other features to the standard vi program vim common Version 5 3 4 354K B The VIsual editor iMproved is an updated and feature added clone of the vi editor that comes with almost all UN X systems It adds multiple windows multi level undo block highliting and many other f
433. s a list of services with a check box by each Scroll through this list and check every service that you would like automatically started every time your Red Hat Linux system boots If you re not sure what a particular service is move the highlight to it and press F1 You ll then get a brief description of the service 69 Finishing the Installation Farmat machina tima iz rere in A A Larka Msn Let Lan A Ar rana Ms Cereal A Eart Indiana HIT HEN CT eb Lao ea eene Tee uwelerbs T Figure 5 4 Configuring Timezones Note that you can run usr sbin ntsysv or sbin chkconfig after the installation to change which services automatically start on reboot 5 6 Configuring a Printer After you have set up networking the installation program asks whether you would like to configure a printer If you choose Yes a dialog box will ask you to indicate how the printer is connected to your computer see Figure 5 6 on page 72 Here is a brief description of the three types of printer connections available Local This printer is directly connected to your computer Remote Ipd This printer is connected to your local area network either through another com puter or directly and is capable of communicating via 1pr 1pd LAN Manager This printer is connected to another computer which shares the printer via LAN Manager or SMB networking After selecting a printer type you ll be presented with a dialog box entitled Standar
434. s ahe routes bo hoia routes to altemate local r the routed daemon Hari nae search path Hebrea Information Syren PX meros reup PPP SLIP PLIP Taper paks Expanded fie system MFI F aiya for virus hosts UU CF dini n unix caps PPAVSipPip costgeraens Type oinera PPP maraca ppp Phone Modern pos ic Lib s 4 Use PAF authentication Login same FF Login Fasten PPPP ad pacer Cancel Custonite Hen td Ld gere and made scheduled Esrier Mil delivery syslen frend Basic Figure 8 19 PPP Interface Screen The login name is the one for the PPP account The password you enter will be shown in plain text so be careful who you have around when you enter it If you will be using PAP authentication check the box when you ve entered the other required information select the Customize button at the bottom of the screen All the other information is provided on the various tabs and can be set within the Customize screen but it s easier to find the information all in one place on the primary screen Select the PAP tab and enter your username and then the secret the ISP has provided you in the Secret field The other defaults should be sufficient but if you need to you can edit the initial settings using the Customize option Modifying a PPP or SLIP Configuration Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open
435. s and particularly how it differs from the operating system you re used to can be invaluable in getting off to a good start with your Red Hat Linux system e An introductory command overview with examples This is probably the most important thing to look for in Linux documentation The design philosophy behind Linux is that it s better to use many small commands connected together in different ways than it is to have a few large and complex commands that do the whole job themselves Without some examples that illustrate the Linux approach to doing things you will find yourself intimidated by the sheer number of commands available on your Red Hat Linux system As you gain more experience using your Red Hat Linux system you ll probably find that you ll need more in depth information Continue reading the next section to find out more about the kinds of documentation that will help you at that point 6 1 Getting the Documentation That s Right For You 6 1 2 Documentation For More Experienced Linux Users If you ve used other Linux distributions you probably already have a basic grasp of the most fre quently used commands You may have installed your own Linux system and maybe you ve even downloaded and built software you found on the Internet What sorts of information will you need e Anextensive list of available commands While you can find this sort of information on line in the man pages you might also want it in book form While
436. s and the new PNG format C 1 7 Mail This section contains several of the more popular e mail related programs elm Version 2 4 25 476K ELM is one of the most popular terminal mode mail handling programs It is powerful easy to use and easy to find help on It has all the mail handling features you would expect including MIME support via metamail exmh Version 2 0 2 1 814K exmh is a graphical interface to the MH mail system It includes MIME support faces glimpse indexing color highlighting PGP interface and more Requires sox or play for sound support fetchmail Version 4 5 8 549K Fetchmail is a program that is used to retrieve mail from a remote mail server It can use the Post Office Protocol POP or IMAP Internet Mail Access Protocol for this and delivers the mail through the local SMTP server normally sendmail mailx Version 8 1 1 88K B C 1 Applications 235 The bin mail program can be used to send quick mail messages and is often used in shell scripts metamail Version 2 7 333K Metamail is an implementation of MIME the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions a proposed standard for multimedia mail on the Internet Metamail implements MIME and also implements extensibility and configuration via the mailcap mechanism described in an informational RFC that is a companion to the MIME document mutt Version 0 93 2 507K Mutt is a small but very poweful full s
437. s a viewer for Portable Document Format PDF files These are also sometimes also called Acrobat files from the name of Adobe s PDF software Xpdf is designed to be small and efficient It does not use the Motif or Xt libraries It uses standard X fonts Xpdf is quite usable on a 486 66 PC running Linux xrn Version 9 01 234K This is an X program for reading USENET news It allows point and click reading replying and posting or news as well as simple group selections xterm color Version 1 1 191K xterm color displays the ANSI color codes in addition to performing as a standard xterm VT100 terminal emulator xv Version 3 10a 4 480K This is the famous xv by John Bradley It is shareware but we ship it with the permission of the authors It is a graphics viewer for many file types including gif jpg tiff xwd etc It also have manipulation features such as cropping expanding etc xwpe X11 Version 1 5 12a 622K Includes the xwpe and xwe programs from the xwpe package that are specific to X Windows C 12 3 Games This section lists packages that contain various games capable of running under X 289 290 Package List acm Version 4 7 3 438K ACM is an X based flight simulator It also have network cabailities for multiple player games cxhextris Version 1 0 38K cxhextrix is a color version of the popular hextris Both are a close of the popular T tris video
438. s bt dun 241 nA 263 inri devel rt desir tib rhet 249 install guide raei re iees ee ks 256 Intimedi dass eis cise Sash ohare ET MEE UHR 263 PWI ricino 277 IP Senna bitte aia t Rm etat 267 a ad 229 A ob PER 229 isapriptools tacere rete reme Eneas 277 ij e M 285 jp 231 js Lm 231 JOC iri ereciesiecrb erce a 231 KATO ios sides 247 Wis ois ces ener utes deb th ice diner 277 kbdconfig cocer the Ren Eee 277 Denm 240 kernel headers 24 i reise i i epe nes 240 kerriel ibes isis esos sedo e rer eese R e Eg 240 k rnel pemceia cs eie aec dre nee 243 kernel sources ia cuoi be ea VE eR ioris 240 A ee ehh RE APR RE HORSE Rd 277 A en edd iiaa 257 EE 259 AC iii 277 A ien Lernen IER RR Rv 285 ON 272 bata A A OUR teas dais 259 libel asta Ede a dotes 259 O 259 UDE oen EESE ERE tia be 259 liber develiac issn onina E EEEE 249 libgt ptogS cere ere xxn moe exe kRRER YET 234 lile AP E 259 libipeg develiz cessit sco enie Redde hd 249 A ntt eer d Ret td 259 libpeap i eie A same qna de 236 HDPNP ida 259 libpng devel crcire reris herede 249 bcr 259 MA emet um 249 libtettncap a dens anaes 260 libtermcap devel 0 6 cece cece eae 260 loo m 260 libtiff devel idee rire re era 249 lb see raeg naeg EELE EEEE E ENE i 244 A 260 libungif devel ceci ettet tete renes 250 libungif progs iiie emn 234 lil ose dat aoe catese
439. s built the files in the package and other attributes All of the configuration and documentation components of each package are clearly marked as such to reduce the time you spend looking for them Using glint to perform all of these operations is the same as using rpm to do them from the command line However the graphical nature of glint often makes these operations easier to perform The normal way to handle glint is to display the available packages and files select the ones you want to operate on and then press a button or choose a menu item that performs the operation For instance you can install several packages with a few button clicks 176 Glint 10 1 Starting glint To start glint simply run glint amp from any X terminal window That will bring up a window that looks like the one in figure 10 1 Any user can use glint to query and verify packages but if you need to install uninstall or upgrade packages be sure to run glint as root There are two main parts to the glint interface The first on the left allows you to browse and select the packages installed on your system The right side contains buttons that manipulate the selected packages Query a Daemons Shells o verity _ Configure _ Configure Games Documentation Applications Development Exit Packages selected 0 c Figure 10 1 Main Glint Window 10 2 The Package Display Each folder icon in glint represents a group of packages Each group
440. s but on a reboot I get only an L LI and some other items What is happening and how can I recover Answer If you have rebooted the system and have gotten an L LI or a combination of this and a lot of scrolling numbers this indicates that LILO is having a problem bootstrapping itself due to one or more problems Write down the error codes that are being printed and what letter it stopped on L LI LIL etc If you can access the cdrom from DOS floppies or another machine you can cd to assuming DOS live usr doc lilo 0 20 RE ADME and check to see what the error seems to indicate Most of the time the LILO failures are due to the BIOS and the hard drive mismatching geometries or something similar e First the kernel or parts of it are above the 1023 cylinder so the BIOS can not bootstrap the information If your BIOS has the capability to use LBA Linear Block Addressing mode and it isn t already enabled you should enable it and then re run lilo either by reinstalling or using rescue mode In most cases you will probably have to repartition after enabling LBA e If you can reinstall and add more partitions create a boot partition and place it entirely below the 1023rd cylinder e You have placed the kernel on a drive the BIOS can t access This can be an IDE drive that is not on the primary chain IDEO hda hdb or if you have placed Linux on a SCSI drive it is because the SCSI ID is not 0
441. s directly from the web from these pages 223 224 Getting Technical Support Making Installation Diskettes It is sometimes necessary to create a diskette from an image file for example you might need to use updated diskette images obtained from the Red Hat Linux Errata As the name implies an image file is a file that contains an exact copy or image of a diskette s contents Since a diskette contains filesystem information in addition to the data contained in files the image file is not usable until it has been written to a diskette To start you ll need a blank formatted high density 1 44 MB 3 5 inch diskette You ll need access toa computer with a 3 5 inch diskette drive and capable of running a DOS program or the dd utility program found on most Linux like operating systems The image files are found in the following directories on your Red Hat Linux CD e images Contains the boot and supplemental images for Red Hat Linux Intel and the vari ous kernel and ramdisk images for Red Hat Linux Alpha On the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD this directory contains the boot image and an image for network booting e milo Contains the various images for the Red Hat Linux Alpha miniloader MILO This directory exists only on Red Hat Linux Alpha CDs Once you ve selected the proper image it s time to transfer the image file onto a diskette As men tioned previously this can be done on a DOS capable system or on a system runn
442. s may prefer the 100dpi fonts available in a separate package XFree86 8514 Version 3 3 2 3 3 413K X server for older IBM 8514 cards and compatibles from companies such as ATI XFree86 AGX Version 3 3 2 3 3 580K X server for AGX based cards such as the Boca Vortex Orchid Celsius Spider Black Widow and Hercules Graphite XFree86 1128 Version 3 3 2 3 3 810K X server for the 9 Imagine 128 board XFree86 Mach32 Version 3 3 2 3 3 544K X server for cards built around ATI s Mach32 chip including the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro and Ultra Plus XFree86 Mach64 Version 3 3 2 3 3 658K X server for ATI Mach64 based cards such as the Graphics Xpression GUP Turbo and WinTurbo cards This server is known to have problems with some Mach64 cards which newer versions of XFree86 which were only available as BETA releases at the time of this release may fix Look at http www xfree86 org for information on updating this server XFree86 Mach8 Version 3 3 2 3 3 423K X server for cards built around ATI s Mach8 chip including the ATI 8514 Ultra and Graphics Ultra XFree86 Mono Version 3 3 2 3 3 668K Generic monochrome 2 color server for VGA cards which works on nearly all VGA style boards with limited resolutions XFree86 P9000 Version 3 3 2 3 3 600K X server for cards built around the Weitek P9000 chips such as most Diamond Viper cards and the Orchid P9000 card XFree86 S3 Version 3 3
443. scc etico m dedica 65 81 uud 16 37 42 getting Red Hat Linux 6 Hard Drive rb eR eua 18 37 hard dtive ic siete cedes ers tn 41 NES menu eae 17 37 38 NFS server information ooocoomocom 41 package information 61 package selection 00005 60 61 PCMCIA SUpport osasuna 15 35 preparing fOr asse cda 5 selecting network drivers 38 SMB mina es 17 42 SMBim ag ecciiusiseeebe reina 37 TCP IP networking ooocooocccooc 39 jon p ae 43 installation alternate methods 0000005 314 CASSES nnanet aia a ES Bauer ds 19 kickstart see kickstart installations language selecting sssssss 35 PENCE ea E 70 installation la occ is 44 installation guide e dere opt Rete 7 installation guide improvements to 2 installation method CD ROM eese prar rai 36 37 gu EE 37 hard drive oie rere 37 41 hij 37 BELEGUNG ET 36 SMBmage score 37 installation method choosing for SPARC 360 installation methodS ooocoocccooccccncccnocos 14 395 396 installation mode expert ssuuusuus 33 installation overview for SPARC 355 installation problems IDE CDROM related s 316 installation program bo oting ccce teer ike E Rer ep an kir tta 33 booting without diskette 34 keyboard navigation suus
444. sed by DOS OS 2 and Linux Please Note You must install Red Hat Linux to one or more partitions having a partition type of Linux native Red Hat Linux also requires a swap partition which has a partition type of Linux swap This means that an installation of Red Hat Linux requires at least two partitions e Oneor more partitions of type Linux native 21 22 Before You Begin e A partition of type Linux swap We will discuss partitioning issues in more detail below For now keep in mind that Red Hat Linux requires at least two dedicated partitions and that you cannot install Red Hat Linux to a DOS Windows partition Even if you will be installing Red Hat Linux on its own hard disk or on a computer which contains no other operating system you ll still need to create partitions for Red Hat Linux to use In this case it s pretty easy as there are no other partitions on the hard disk to worry about On the other hand you may wish to install Red Hat Linux on a disk which already contains software or data from a different operating system Things can get a little trickier in this situation since a mistake can destroy your existing partitions not to mention the data they contain During the installation process you ll be given the chance to create partitions for Red Hat Linux At this point your main concern is making sure you have sufficient disk space available to create those partitions Let s review the different ways to f
445. sedas 107 r dhat install list rne 107 zedliat list derer pre 107 redhat ppp list 4e nem 107 zpi lisb i ves Ke ue here eR Enea ene sound list sparc Dist eoi ore en hv eae nuns SUpport MOMs ccc keen eros in ro erre 106 makewhatis cisco iio Mai paces did dai aa how to read A abb ed anda searching SECOS iaa VES teris Master boot record seek ek see MBR Maximum RPM ceieese rrr rk hare 173 MBR installing LILO on sseeeessss 78 media problems sese en een 312 menus SINE Soe se scented ninia 177 methods installation 000 0 cece eens 14 Microsoft MOUSE 666 cece innia EnEn 334 missing components 66 00 eee eee e eens 9 MESWAP EE 186 modem configuration issus 137 138 modular sound drivers oocoococcccccccocconos 97 module parameters 0 666 0 cece eee ee 301 modules PA Mio idas 193 mounting NFS filesystems oooooooooo 203 mouse SCLECHOM cos east ete tbe eoe d ka d 99 mouse configuring oooccccccooccccccnnccnnnos 65 mouse Microsoft issues 334 MS DOS creating installation diskette with 226 multiple OS installations 5 313 nameserver selectitig nosse koe Meere sad res mens 159 398 nameservers specifying oooocccocoooococc 147 NeoMagic support under X sss 332 tiet pf errore moa a eters EEU TERES 349 netnews support from ssssssssssss
446. shared libraries the standard C library and the standard math library Without these a Linux system will not function It also contains national language locale support and timezone databases glibc debug Version 2 0 7 2K These libraries have the debugging information debuggers use for tracing the execution of programs These are only needed when the shared libraries themselves are being debugged they are not needed to debug programs which use them glibc devel Version 2 0 7 11 688K To develop programs which use the standard C libraries which nearly all programs do the system needs to have these standard header files and object files available for creating the executables glibc profile Version 2 0 7 10 010K When programs are being profiled used gprof they must use these libraries instrad of the standard C libraries for gprof to be able to profile them correctly gpm devel Version 1 13 23K This package allows you to develop your own text mode programs that take advantage of the mouse inn devel Version 1 7 2 128K This library is needed by several programs that interface to INN such as newsgate or tin libgr devel Version 2 0 13 302K This package is all you need to develop programs that handle the various graphics file formats sup ported by libgr libjpeg devel Version 6b 228K This package is all you need to develop programs that manipulate jpeg images including documen
447. simply creates a nice login banner with your kernel version and machine type 11 11 6 Shutting Down To shut down Red Hat Linux issue the shut down command You can read the shutdown man page for complete details but the two most common usages are shutdown h now shutdown r now Each will cleanly shutdown the system After shutting everything down the first will halt the ma chine and the second will reboot Although the reboot and halt commands are now smart enough to invoke shutdown if run while the system is in runlevels 1 5 it is a bad habit to get into as not all Linux like operating systems have this feature 11 12 Rescue Modes 11 12 Rescue Modes When things go wrong there are several ways to work on fixing them However they require that you understand the system well This manual can t teach you what to do but we will present the ways that you can use our products to get into rescue modes where you can use your own knowledge to rescue the system 11 12 1 Through LILO If your system boots but does not allow you to log in when it has completed booting you can use the single or emergency boot option At the LILO boot prompt type linux single in order to boot in single user mode In single user mode your local filesystems will be mounted but your network will not be activated In emergency mode almost nothing will be set up Only the root filesystem will be mounted and it will be mounted read only 11 12 2 E
448. sk based Installation Criteria es 356 E5 Choosing a Boot Method o br ERE RR 357 F6 Choosing an Installation Method eee 360 E7 Installation Using a Serial Terminal ss soo ca ee 361 F8 Installation Selecting System Components s s sooo ee 362 E9 SILO Configuration os xo 49 006 45 RR Pe oe EE ER GU GREGEM 362 P10 Partitioning us sae voi Gare ES Ra wd ae RSS RODE ee RAS Rus 362 Bill X Windows oi 4 kem Bebe 3 m Rr RR PURSE EUER RUE Rex ee Ss 363 G Glossary 365 H Kickstart Installations 377 viii H 1 Where to Put A Kickstart File H 2 Starting a Kickstart Installation H3 The Kickstart File cres Index Index of Packages CONTENTS Preface Welcome And thanks for your interest in Red Hat Linux We have what we think is the best Linux distribution on the market today and we work hard to keep it that way Red Hat Linux 5 2 is the latest in a long line of software from Red Hat Software We hope you like it and that you enjoy using Red Hat Linux as much as we ve enjoyed making it for you It s interesting to note that while Linux is popular and well known by a certain segment of the computer using population there are many people out there that are only now hearing about Linux For this group of people the following section should provide enough background to help you get acquainted with Linux and Red Hat Software What is Linux Back in August of 199
449. sound manipulation functions C 2 Base This section contains the packages that are consider basic to every Red Hat Linux system You will normally will not see them during the installation process but they re included here for your infor mation C 2 1 Kernel This section contains packages related to your Red Hat Linux system s kernel This part of the Linux operating system is central to all system operations kernel Version 2 0 36 4 726K B This package contains the Linux kernel that is used to boot and run your system It contains few device drivers for specific hardware Most hardware is instead supported by modules loaded after booting kernel headers Version 2 0 36 1 551K These are the C header files for the Linux kernel which define structures and constants that are needed when building most standard programs under Linux as well as to rebuild the kernel kernel ibcs Version 2 0 36 219K This package allows you to run programs in the iBCS2 Intel Binary Compatibility Standard version 2 and related executable formats kernel source Version 2 0 36 30 727K This is the source code for the Linux kernel It is required to build most C programs as they depend on constants defined in here You can also build a custom kernel that is better tuned to your particular hardware C 2 Base basesystem Version 4 9 0K B While this package does not contain any files it does perform an impor
450. ss 107 INGtSCa POS aie saccare ieee ets see WWW browsers Netscape problems ssri eere the 333 network interface aliasing cesis exe re esee eed 158 network adapters pocket ooooooccooooc 162 network administration 0 085 348 network boot commands SPARC 358 network boot commands SPARC install 360 network configuration 68 137 144 158 adding device iiem eme 160 network configuration dialogs 69 network devices clone oooooooocooooo o 160 network information esses 14 network routes managing sssssss 163 NEEWOLKING cortante 160 TOW featutes i ool lid 1 installation clasSes oooooocoooccomm 2 installation guide improvements 2 installation related swe rrr resa 1 miscellaneous oer x t Ere re eue 4 sysadmin relat d 0 045 608 ecer e ern 2 NFS configuration 00 cece eee eee 202 eXDOEUnE ese epe eon ore ee 203 ANONN i sc datas tears andeiahe bib eret 203 NES install Ovas rhe sintio 17 NES installation for SPARC 361 NES mount adding cece i eere ee eee 55 NFS mounts adding 00c cece 135 136 NFS mounted root SPARC install using 356 non destructive partitioning 24 notes editot s 24s edes etr iati e tad xii NT dual booting with 00005 321 NESYSV UN erster 0 inc ex eee eva 214 O Reilly amp Associates
451. st answer Yes if the installation requires access to a PCMCIA device 3 4 Selecting an Installation Method Next you are asked what type of installation method you wish to use see Figure 3 6 on the facing page Highlight the appropriate choice and select OK or press Enter You can install Red Hat Linux via any of five basic methods see Section 2 4 on page 14 some of which require the use of a supplemental diskette To summarize you can install Red Hat Linux from 3 4 Selecting an Installation Method c Installation Hethod Mhat bus of media oomiains the pedeyr to ba inctal lead A heten eines Figure 3 6 Selecting an Installation Method CD ROM If you have a CD ROM drive and the Red Hat Linux CD ROM Does not require a supplemental diskette Please refer to Section 3 4 1 to select the CD ROM installation method NFS If you are installing from an NFS server which is exporting the Red Hat Linux CD ROM or a mirror image of Red Hat Linux Does not require a supplemental diskette Please refer to Section 3 4 2 on the next page to select the NFS installation method Hard Drive If you copied the Red Hat Linux files to a local hard drive Requires a supplemental diskette Please refer to Section 3 4 6 on page 41 to select the hard drive installation method FTP If you are installing directly from an FTP server Requires a supplemental diskette Please refer to Section 3 4 7 on page 42 to select the FTP installation method
452. st to deal with The main problem is that you have enough free space but it s presently allocated to a partition that is in use If you purchased a computer with pre installed software the hard disk most likely has one massive partition holding the operating system and data Aside from adding a new hard drive to your system you have two choices Destructive Repartitioning Basically you delete the single large partition and create several smaller ones As you might imagine any data you had in that partition is destroyed This means that making a complete backup is necessary For your own sake make two backups use verification if available in your backup software and try to read data from your backup before you delete the partition Note also that if there was an operating system of some type installed on that partition it will need to be reinstalled as well After creating a smaller partition for your existing software you can reinstall any software restore your data and continue with your Red Hat Linux installation 24 Before You Begin Non Destructive Repartitioning Here you run a program that does the seemingly impossible it makes a big partition smaller without losing any of the files stored in that partition Many people have found this method to be reliable and trouble free What software should you use to perform this feat There are several disk management software products on the market you ll have to do some res
453. stion Ihave all the latest updates installed but my programs still get the incorrect time Answer If you have installed all the latest updates and you programs still get the incorrect time try checking the settings in etc sysconfig clock They probably look something like this UTC true ARC false This means that Linux will assume that your BIOS clock is set to the UTC or GMT timezone More than likely the clock is set to your local timezone and you need to change the UTC line to be UTC false E 9 43 What is on the 2nd cdrom Question During the install I was not asked to use the 2nd cdrom When I use the X program glint on it it reports that there are no rpms but when I look at the directories I see lots of them What is going on Answer The 2nd cdrom in the Red Hat Linux boxed set contains the source code rpms SRPM for all of the Open Source applications that are on the first cdrom From these source rpms you can build all the Open Source applications we have in the distribution The reason that glint does not see source rpms is due to the fact that SRPMS are not stored in any of the RPM databases This makes it almost impossible to tell if you have installed an src rpm before or are over writing an older version Thus you will need to use the plain rpm command to install these items rpm ivh filename gt will install the source code into the directory that the maintainer of that SRPM used The data in src rpms
454. stions Answer Make sure to register via the World Wide Web at http www redhat com support register If you didn t please do so by first ac cessing the registration page Next input a login name and click on Create Login After this you will be prompted to input some personal information When finished click on the Submit button and then enter your registration number which should look something like fffe Offf 00 00 Then be sure to enter all the information about your system This information can be maintained by logging in and accessing your registration information from http www redhat com support register Question But I registered via email Why isn t the support system working Answer When you register via email your message goes to an actual human who registers you manually Depending on the backlog of people sending in registrations via this method this can delay your registration anywhere from several hours to several days Question I ve done everything perfectly for my registration but I m still getting messages telling me I have an invalid registration number Answer Please make sure you re using a valid product registration number If you have not purchased the official box set from Red Hat Software or a Vendor that sells the official version it will say official on the box you will not be able to register as Red Hat Software cannot support products packaged and sold by other software publishers
455. sts packages containing part of XFree86 a freely available version of the X Window System In order to use X you must install an X server capable of driving your Red Hat Linux system s video card As you can see XFree86 has a number of servers from which to choose X11R6 contrib Version 3 3 2 446K This is a collection of X programs from X11R6 s contrib tape which contains programs contributed by various users It includes listres xbiff xedit xeyes xcalcm xload and xman amoung others XFree86 100dpi fonts Version 3 3 2 3 1 228K The 100dpi fonts used on most Linux systems Users with high resolution displays may prefer the 100dpi fonts available in a separate package XFree86 Version 3 3 2 3 12 040K X Windows is a full featured graphical user interface featuring multiple windows multiple clients and different window styles It is used on most Unix platforms and the clients can also be run under other popular windowing systems The X protocol allows applications to be run on either the local machine or across a network providing flexibility in client server mplementations This package contains the basic fonts programs and documentation for an X workstation It does not provide the X server which drives your video hardware those are available in other package 298 Package List XFree86 75dpi fonts Version 3 3 2 3 1 060K The 75dpi fonts used on most Linux systems Users with high resolution display
456. t Version 3 52 5 2 847K An implementation of the Lisp programming language for X Windows with extensions for advanced statistics computations C 4 4 Libraries This section contains packages of the various libraries Some libraries are required for normal sys tem operation while others are only needed if you will be using their features in a program you re writing cracklib Version 2 7 69K B Checks passwords for security related characteristics length uniqueness whether they are in a word database etc e2fsprogs devel Version 1 12 257K Libraries and header files needed to develop ext2 filesystem specific programs faces devel Version 1 6 1 22K This is the xface development environment It contains the static libraries and header files for doing xface development gd devel Version 1 3 7K This package contains the files needed for development of programs linked against GD gdbm devel Version 1 7 3 70K These are the development libraries and header files for gdbm the GNU database system These are required if you plan to do development using the gdbm database C 4 Development glibc Version 2 0 7 15 608K B Contains the standard libraries that are used by multiple programs on the system In order to save disk space and memory as well as to ease upgrades common system code is kept in one place and shared between programs This package contains the most important sets of
457. t EM960 Cogent EM964 Quartet Danpex EN 9400P3 D Link DFE500 Tx D Link DE 530CT Linksys EtherPCI Kingston EtherX KNT40T Kingston EtherX KNE100TX Netgear FX310 TX 10 100 SMC EtherPower SMC 8432BT SMC EtherPower10 100 Surecom EP 320X Thomas Conrad TC5048 Znyx ZX312 EtherAction Znyx ZX314 ZX315 Znyx ZX342 ZX844 ZX345 ZX346 ZX348 Znyx ZX351 WD8003 WD8013 various clones acket Engines G N Yellowfin yellowfin o 306 General Parameters and Modules Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ E 1 Introduction This is the Official Red Hat Linux FAQ It answers many commonly asked questions concerning Red Hat Linux It is maintained by faq maintainer redhat com all comments or suggestions for this FAQ should be sent to that address To get a more recent version of this FAQ see Section E 4 on the following page E 2 Errata The single best source of information especially with respect to bugs or problems with the Red Hat Linux distribution are the errata pages available at http www redhat com support docs errata html Be sure to review both the general errata as well as the platform specific errata specific to your version of Red Hat Linux See also Section E 4 on the next page for other ways to access the errata It may seem strange that we list this as the very first item but the errata pages are perhaps the best 308 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ resource for fixing 9076 of the com
458. t and Previous buttons on the right side of the window 180 Glint The name version and release of the current package are in the top middle of the query window Immediately below this is the description of the package which can be quite large A scroll bar is there to let you read the whole thing Below the description is a list of the files contained in the package Along with the full path to the file the file list tells you a couple of other things If a D appears to the left of the path that file is a documentation file and would be a good thing to read If a C appears there then the file is a configuration file A means that the correct version of that file is not installed on your system This can occur because a more recent version of a package was installed or because two packages contain different versions of the same file Name Version Release Size 0 Vendor Red Hat Software Distribution RHCL 2 0 Build host porky redhat com Build date Mon Aug 21 05 13 51 1995 Figure 10 6 Query Details More information on a package can be seen by clicking on the Details pushbutton A window like the one in figure 10 6 will then appear This lists more information about the package being displayed in the main query window When you select a new package in the query window the information in the details window will change to reflect your new choice You may also select unselect or verify a package while querying it by using t
459. t era itid enel erm bdieueoe 277 A Yes eee bee Presents 278 linuxcont devel si iere ee erem 251 logrotate is ecezbenesecer ier eek tere ense 278 losetup P 278 lotti torio andes o ai 237 A tsbedacct teeth es 238 lp I thacegh ance 256 ln 278 yo ss do Onis 229 I rreri ste nea tana cane EE EO REE 274 I lt n 274 405 406 hoc 236 Ind ssiorisheted da 285 Macul cuencia ida 274 MANCA Poiana e EErEE EAE es 241 1 T D EEE EEA E A a ER ER 234 make eese so ki ue la edid 244 MAKEDEY oops inst 275 an ate Ta EA a aiii da 278 MAN PARES ai kena piani ed EEEE EAEE 256 maplay cnevcenese shrine tenes thant edes 239 MATS MWe ls aw ea kg e na c e Ea AR 263 MW dada 285 Mess cd dao 271 A eque p ad Rl Y E EOR 293 metal rh hne xke EDAM ARUM 235 MEET euidenter t d ada 267 mge tty sendfaX crini ree pret eR ree EE es 267 Meet Vie Wisconsin EE 294 Ingetty volCe dao 267 MIKMO A creek E EDERN EDERE EX 239 O Cute bets Rave stes ons 278 o sers a a TACE PRATER UL RA aa ee 229 mkboOOtdislez renei tu arre ba Er nibo E 279 mkdosfs ygg i cies cebexehruxe rene ehe dr 279 Ti IEEE GL ac eoi cete aede cde ed fete notre 279 mkisOfs ici da 279 mikkickstart cicani iaa 279 Dada is 279 A e cesta enki deed ep ee 294 mod perl 2 2 2c th here e mens 264 mod php tonto eerte ce 264 mod PHS mirarse add HEU T 264 MOdeMtOOl sche oases evo a Xv er pau 279 modutls 2 2m ica eh aei 279
460. t into it but it can animate other fonts xlockmore Version 4 11 975K An enhanced version of the standard xlock program which allows you to keep other users locked out of an X session while you are away from the machine It runs one of many provided screen savers while waiting for you to type your password unlocking the session and letting you at your X programs xmailbox Version 2 5 30K This program will notify you when new mail arrives It is similar to xbiff but offers more features and fancier notification options xosview Version 1 6 1 a 99K xosview provides a convenient bar graph of the current system state memory usage CPU load and network usage Very useful for monitoring status xscreensaver Version 2 27 2 453K Screen savers of every sort are included in this package guaranteeing hours of tor there s that old classic the plain black screen xsysinfo Version 1 6 21K Many aspects of system performance can be monitored with xsysinfo including network traffic CPU load disk space disk usage and more Displays a history of performance in a window so you can easily see changes xtoolwait Version 1 1 9K Utility to start a program and wait for it to map a window Not an end user program but useful for writing scripts that run X Windows programs xwpick Version 2 20 44K Xwpick lets you pick an image from an arbitrary window or rectangular area of an X11 server
461. t must exist You can still create other partitions as you normally would Note that this partition will already exist on any disk that has been used under SunOS or Solaris If 1 Hun you are partitioning a new disk you can use fdisk s s command to create a standard disk label F 11 X Windows which includes the whole disk partition If you don t care for the size of the other partitions created nu un by s you can delete those partitions and recreate them with the sizes you want F 10 1 Swap Partitions and Red Hat Linux SPARC Because of the way disk partitioning is done if the first partition on a disk starts at cylinder 0 and is used for swap space it will overwrite the drive s partition table This is a bad thing Therefore you have two options e Do not use the first partition for swap e Use the first partition for swap but when you create it start it at cylinder 1 instead of cylinder Either approach will save your drive s partition table F11 XWindows There is no mouse or X windows config on the SPARC The 8 bit server is installed by default If you want to use the 24 bit server for TCX cards you need to install the Xsun24 package If you only have a bwtwo framebuffer and want to increase performance install the XsunMono package Installing both of the above requires you to restart X windows Also you can uninstall the Xsun package if you use one of the above servers 363 364 Information Specific t
462. t the shell prompt Enter root s password when prompted if not already root Open gt Control files and systems Linuxconf modules De select the This module is active checkbox for the treemenu module Click Accept 113 114 System Configuration 6 Click Quit 7 Restart Linuxconf Enabling Web Based Linuxconf Access For security reasons web based access to linuxconf is disabled by default Before attempting to access linuxconf with a web browser you ll need to enable access Here s how to do it from the text mode interface 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt Networking gt Linuxconf network access 4 In the Linuxconf html access control dialog box enter the hostname of any computers that should be allowed access to linuxconf This would also include your own system if you wish to use the web based interface locally Web accesses related to linuxconf may be logged to your system s htmlaccess log file by selecting the check box shown 5 Select the Accept button and press Space Then select the Quit buttons on each dialog box to back out of the menu hierarchy When you come to a dialog box labelled Status of the system press to take the default action which is to apply the changes you ve made At this point web based access has been enabled To test it out go to one of the systems that you adde
463. t under each color depth 8 16 and 24 bit Use the to select individual resolutions and the key to move between color depth fields When you have selected the video modes you want to use move the cursor to the OK button and press Enter or use the E12 shortcut An information screen will give you the most current information on selecting video modes starting and stopping the X server 6 3 2 If You ve Already Installed X If you selected the X Window System component when you installed Red Hat Linux you should be all set All you ll need to do is to get X running As it turns out there are two ways to do this You can e Start X manually after you log in 94 What Do Do Now e Start X automatically whenever the system boots Let s start with the manual procedure Starting X Manually Red Hat Linux as installed will not start X automatically for you Therefore you ll see the same character cell login prompt you saw when you first booted your Red Hat Linux system In order to get X started you ll first need to log in Do so using your non root account and then enter the startx command The screen should go blank and after a short delay you should see a graphical desktop with one or more windows The appearance of the desktop you ll see will vary depending on the packages you installed and other variables When you re done and you d like to leave X you can click on any part of the desktop in other words
464. tached to the system via a video card or a serial console setserial Version 2 14 40K B 282 Package List Setserial is a program which allows you to look at and change various attributes of a serial device including its port its IRO and other serial port options setuptool Version 1 0 9K B setup is a friendly text mode menu program that gives you easy instant access to all the text mode configuration programs in Red Hat Linux sh utils Version 1 16 337K B The GNU shell utilities provide many of the basic common commands used among other things for shell programming hence the name Nearly all shell scripts use at least one of these programs shadow utils Version 980403 583K B This package includes the programs necessary to convert standard UNIX password files to the shadow password format as well as programs for command line management of the user s accounts pw conv converts everything to the shadow password format pwunconv unconverts from shadow passwords generating a file in the current directory called npasswd that is a standard UNIX pass word file pwck checks the integrity of the password and shadow files lastlog prints out the last login times of all users useradd userdel and usermod for accounts management groupadd groupdel and groupmod for group management A number of man pages are also included that relate to these utilities a
465. talled on your machine The upgrade process preserves existing configuration files using a rpmsave extension e g sendmail cf rpmsave and leaves a log telling what actions it took in tmp upgrade log As software evolves configuration file formats can change so you should carefully compare your original configuration files to the new files before integrating your changes A Word From the Developers We would like to thank all our beta testers for entrusting their systems to early versions of Red Hat Linux and for taking the time to submit bug reports from the front especially those of you who have been with Red Hat since the Halloween release and earlier We would also like to thank Linus Torvalds and the hundreds of developers around the world for creating truly one of the wonders of distributed development And again we d like to thank you for your interest in Red Hat Linux The Red Hat Development Team Notes from the Editor Our evolutionary process of expanding the scope of this Installation Guide continues As before we ve updated the chapters related to the actual installation process We ve also updated the New 1f you need a supplemental diskette you ll need to create one Section 2 5 on page 18 describes how a sup plemental diskette is created Preface Features chapter to reflect all the good stuff that s been added to Red Hat Linux 5 2 We consider this to be business as usual We ve also made some changes
466. tant function It defines the components of a basic Red Hat system as the package installation order to use during bootstrapping It should be the first package installed on a system and it should never be removed crontabs Version 1 7 4K B The root crontab file is used to schedule execution of various programs dev Version 2 5 9 0K B Unix and unix like systems including Linux use file system entries to represent devices attached to the machine All of these entries are in the dev tree though they don t have to be and this package contains the most commonly used dev entries These files are essential for a system to function properly etcskel Version 1 3 5K B This is part of the Base Red Hat system It contains the files that go in etc skel which are in turn placed in every new user s home directory when new accounts are created filesystem Version 1 3 2 79K 5 This package contains the basic directory layout for a Linux system including the proper permissions for the directories This layout conforms to the Linux Filesystem Standard FSSTND 1 3 initscripts Version 3 72 94K 5 This package contains the scripts use to boot a system change run levels and shut the system down cleanly It also contains the scripts that activate and deactivate most network interfaces mailcap Version 1 0 29K This is the Red Hat Mailcap package Installing it will allow programs like lyn
467. tart the beginning of a kickstart file section that lists the packages you d like to install Note that this is for installs only as package selection during upgrades is not supported Packages can be specified by component or by individual package name The installation program defines several components that group together related packages See the RedHat base comps file on any Red Hat Linux CD ROM for a list of components The components are defined by the lines that begin with a number followed by a space and then the component name Each of the packages in that component are then listed line by line until the end keyword Individual packages lack the leading number found in front of component lines In most cases it s only necessary to list the desired components and not individual packages Note that the Base component is always selected by default so it s not necessary to specify it in the packages section Here s an example packages section packages Networked Workstation C Development Web Server X Window System bsd games As you can see components are specified one to a line starting with an symbol a space and then the full component name as given in the comps file Specify individual packages with no additional characters The bsd games line in the example above is an individual package Please Note You can also direct the kickstart install to use the workstation and server class intalla
468. te includes native support for Microsoft encrypted passwords improved browse list and WINS database management Please refer to the WHATSNEW txt document for fixup information This binary release includes en crypted password support Please read the smb conf file and ENCRYPTION txt in the docs directory for implementation details telnet Version 0 10 175K Telnet is a popular protocol for remote logins across the Internet This package provides a command line telnet client as well as a telnet daemon which allows remote logins into the machine it is running on The telnet daemon is enabled by default and may be disabled by editing etc inetd conf tftp Version 0 10 32K The trivial file transfer protocol tftp is normally used only for booting diskless workstations It provides very little security and should not be enabled unless it is needed The tftp server is run from etc inetd conf and is disabled by default on Red Hat systems timed Version 0 10 60K This timed server allows remote machines to query the time of day of the machine the server is running on This allows for simple time syncronization across a network ypbind Version 3 3 37K This is a daemon which runs on NIS YP clients and binds them to a NIS domain It must be running for systems based on glibc to behave as NIS clients ytalk Version 3 0 3 72K ytalk is an extension of the standard Internet talk protocol that allows more than
469. ted Partition Warning Deleting a Partition To delete a partition highlight the partition in the Current Disk Partitions section select the Delete button and press Space You will be asked to confirm the deletion 51 52 Continuing the Installation Editing a Partition To change a partition s settings highlight the partition in the Current Disk Partitions section select the Edit button and press Space You will be presented with a dialog box very similar to the one shown in Figure 4 5 on page 50 Make the appropriate changes select Ok and press Space Please Note If the partition already existed on your hard disk you will only be able to change the partition s mount point If you want to make any other changes you will need to delete the partition and recreate it Adding an NFS Mount To add a read only NFS served filesystem press F2 If you have not selected a network related in stallation method you will be presented with several dialog boxes concerning network configuration Turn back to Section 3 4 3 on page 38 for more information Fill them in appropriately You will then see a dialog box entitled Edit Network Mount Point similar to the one in Figure 4 11 on page 56 In this dialog box you will need to enter the NFS server name the path to the exported filesystem and the mount point for the filesystem Select the Ok or Cancel button as appropriate and press Space Starting Over If you d lik
470. that is to remain safe from system software upgrades Since system upgrades from Red Hat Software are done safely with the RPM system and Glint you don t need to protect files by putting them in usr local Instead we recommend you use usr local for software that is local to your machine For instance let s say you have mounted usr via read only NFS from beavis If there is a package or program you would like to install but you are not allowed to write to beavis you should install it under usr local Later perhaps if you ve managed to convince the system administrator of beavis to install the program on usr you can uninstall it from usr local 11 2 Special Red Hat File Locations In addition to the files pertaining to the RPM system that reside in var 1ib rpm see chapter 9 there are two other special locations that are reserved for Red Hat Linux configuration and operation The control panel and related tools put lots of stuff in usr 1lib rhs There is probably nothing here that you would want to edit It is mostly small scripts bitmaps and text files The other location etc sysconfig stores configuration information The major users of the files in this directory are the scripts that run at boot time It is possible to edit these by hand but it would be better to use the proper control panel tool 11 3 Users Groups and User Private Groups Managing users and groups has traditionally been tedious Red Hat Linux has a few too
471. that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto spanish Version 5 2 18 413K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into spanish Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto swedish Version 5 2 4 867K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into swedish Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install howto turkish Version 5 2 816K This package contains translated versions of the Linux HOWTO into turkish Please note that not all the files have been translated so you most likely will need the english version installed if you want to have a complete HOWTO install indexhtml Version 5 2 6K Red Hat html index page 255 256 Package List install guide Version 3 2 1 373K A general guide for installing and getting started with Linux The installation sections should be ignored in favor of the Red Hat Linux manual Although there is overlap there is other useful information in this guide Ipg Version 0 4 1 739K This is a generic guide to the Programming on Linux systems Check http sunsite unc edu LDP fo
472. the Generic entries based on your mouse s number of buttons and its interface To determine your mouse s interface follow the mouse cable back to where it plugs into your system If the connector at the end of the mouse cable plugs into a rectangular No guessing allowed 66 Finishing the Installation Conf guns Houses What tune oF moss do uou Fares ALPS GlbdePolnt Paz AIII Hiabaura Ever il gt ASCII Hiehause IPS 2 ATE Jur Haura Cr lo House Lose Lale Generic 3 button Howes oar ial ic tton Hura A EA Rebamee e bos Cape selecta Figure 5 1 Mouse Configuration connector you have a serial mouse On the other hand if the connector is round you have a PS 2 mouse If you are installing Red Hat Linux on a laptop computer in most cases the pointing device will be PS 2 compatible The Emulate 3 Buttons checkbox allows you to use a two button mouse as if it had three buttons In general it s easiest to use the X Window System if you have a three button mouse If you select this checkbox you can emulate a third middle button by pressing both mouse buttons simultaneously If you ve selected a mouse with a serial interface you will then see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 5 2 on the facing page Simply highlight the appropriate serial port for your mouse select Ok and press Space If you wish to change your mouse configuration after you have booted your Red Hat Linux system you may use
473. the domain is how the network it is attached to is specified For example given foo bar com foo is the primary name and bar com is the domain e IP number also referred to as IP address this is the address of the machine and will follow the pattern of x x x x For example 192 168 0 13 Optional Fields e Alias A shorthand for the fully qualified domain name This is often the same as the primary name So for example if the fully qualified domain name is foo bar com you could select foo as the alias e Comment a comment on the machine For example The remote nameserver 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf 149 aietara miman shoul ohe nete Linen rebanada pur Users arc cunts Hom User accpunis Group dainte Change rod peed pecias accounts PPP scrauni SLIP eraut vis nana Ir UUCP arcanis POP scraurir ims any Viral POP scouts isi Ens ales E usar dba Wiel darain usar mier Policies Poomi amp account pairie Availabe user heb Arusilsble PPP rell Availabe SLP shells Mere at the day LI Emart shoul ohe hot Bgleci a nasimebweari dalinion da meadi H er add da adr Ep ard a new daliniion IP mts rane Balon 7007 l s lahar orador e nen Figure 8 26 etc hosts Screen You will need to specify both the primary name domain and the IP number The other fields are optional Once finished select Accept Date and Time To get to the date amp time contr
474. the facing page The two choices you have are e Disk Druid This is Red Hat Linux s install time disk management utility It can create and delete disk partitions according to user supplied requirements in addition to managing mount points for each partition e fdisk This is the traditional Linux disk partitioning tool While it is somewhat more flexible than Disk Druid the downside is that fdisk assumes you have some experience with disk partitioning and are comfortable with its somewhat terse user interface With the exception of certain esoteric situations Disk Druid can handle the partitioning requirements for a typical Red Hat Linux installation SPARC Note that there are some things you should be aware of if you decide to use Disk Druid under Red Hat Linux SPARC Please refer to Appendix F on page 353 for more information ALPHA Note that there are some things you should be aware of if you decide to use Disk Druid under Red Hat Linux Alpha Please refer to the Alpha Installation Addendum for more information Select the disk partitioning tool you d like to use and press Enter If you choose Disk Druid con tinue reading If you d rather use disk please turn to Section 4 4 2 on page 52 4 4 Creating Partitions for Red Hat Linux ick buid iz a tool far partitioning and ratting up mount polmbs t s designed to be easier to use thon Linuz r traditional dit partitioning miara fdir 45 WSL 55 mons pL Haee there g
475. the part of the screen without any windows using your mouse s primary button Select the Exit Fvwm Quit or logout menu entry and X will shut down leaving you at your original character cell shell prompt You can then logout as usual Starting X Automatically Please Note Make sure you verify that your X configuration works properly before making X start automatically Failure to do so can make it difficult to log into your Red Hat Linux system If you haven t done so already review the previous section before continuing It is possible to configure your Red Hat Linux system such that X will start automatically whenever the system is booted When configured in this manner xdm will run which will present a graphically oriented login screen After logging in you will have a regular X session running just as if you had issued a start x command manually Pretty neat eh Here s a quick overview of how it s done e Test xdm using telinit e Edit etc inittab e Reboot Let s look at each step in more detail Testing xdm Using telinit The telinit command is used to change your Red Hat Linux system s run level It is the run level that controls various aspects of system operation including whether xdm should be started or not Newly installed Red Hat Linux systems use run level 3 as their default this results in the character cell login prompt you ve seen Since xdm is started at run level 5 you ll need to issue the command
476. the two most widely used Internet protocols It works non interactively thus enabling work in the background after having logged off The recursive retrieval of HTML pages as well as FTP sites is supported you can use Wget to make mirrors of archives and home pages or traverse the web like a WWW robot Wget understands robots txt Weet works exceedingly well on slow or unstable connections keeping getting the document until it is fully retrieved Re getting files from where it left off works on servers both HTTP and FTP that support it Matching of wildcards and recursive mirroring of directories are available when retrieving via FTP Both HTTP and FTP retrievals can be time stamped thus Wget can see if the remote file has changed since last retrieval and automatically retrieve the new version if it has By default Wget supports proxy servers which can lighten the network load speed up retrieval and provide access behind firewalls However if you are behind a firewall that requires that you use a socks style gateway you can get the socks library and compile wget with support for socks Most of the features are configurable either through command line options or via initialization file wgetrc Wget allows you to install a global startup file etc wgetrc on RedHat for site settings C 1 Applications C 1 10 News This section contains packages that you can use to read on line newsgroups sirn Version 0 9 4 3 302K
477. thentication modules see PAM pocket network adapters 005 162 post installation configuration 83 Pride 28 160 pop see doka see PPP PPP configuration 00000 137 138 modification Of ooooocococoo o 141 142 pre installation information 10 printer configuration ooooocccccoconoo 70 151 finalizing aa iaa ttg 74 LAN manager tel ssa 70 74 154 local atenas ida dana dlls 70 71 154 remote Pd errit sere ris eh eee keen 70 71 SMB test pages nera a 155 A A erent b evens 74 printer configuration enhancements 3 printer setup ceieeciciecsi ey ERR EFE A 350 printouts incorrect anemiaa ee cence eee 350 printtool enhancements to 6666 00 eee 3 processor Pp 198 C VEI eese ces mitos ens Cent E QUEE CHOR 198 programs not running 6 e eee e eee 327 programs running at boot time 214 Quake running under Linux 326 querying packages with glint 179 quick Start m xii RAM Problems s ei sscnsenedins cast PEE Athe 335 ramdisk criteria for use on SPARC 356 RARP commands SPARC install 359 rawrite creating installation diskette with 226 rc local modifying 6 66 66 cece eee eee 214 reading man pages eee emen 103 README files xxr erp Rh e 104 A be ee CER PVT see recursion Re
478. these cases you may need to create one or more diskettes to get started INTEL For people installing Red Hat Linux Intel you ll need a boot diskette and optionally a supple mental diskette It may also be possible to start the installation directly from the CD under certain conditions We ll discuss this in more detail when we outline the various installation methods available ALPHA People with Alpha based systems should refer to the Red Hat Linux Alpha Installation Addendum for additional information on the diskettes they may need SPARC SPARC owners should refer to section E5 1 on page 357 for information on which diskettes they ll need 10 Before You Begin 2 2 4 Checking for Updated Diskette Images From time to time we find that the installation may fail and that a revised diskette image is required in order for the installation to work properly In these cases we make special images available via the Red Hat Linux Errata Since this is a relatively rare occurrence you will in general save time if you try to use the standard diskette images first and then review the Errata only if you experience any problems completing the installation There are two ways to review the Errata 1 World Wide Web By pointing your web browser at http www redhat com errata you can read the Errata on line and download diskette images easily 2 Electronic Mail By sending an empty mail message to errata redhat com you
479. these values are generally available in the documentation which accompanies your monitor or from your monitor s vendor or manufacturer Caution It is not recommended to select a monitor similar to your monitor unless you are certain that the monitor you are selecting does not exceed the capabilities of your monitor If you do so it is possible you may overclock your monitor and damage or destroy it Next Xconfigurator prompts you for the amount of video memory installed on your video card If you are not sure please consult the documentation accompanying your video card It will not damage your video card by choosing more memory than is available but the XFree86 server may not start correctly if you do If the video card you selected might have a video clockchip Xconfigurator presents a list of 68 Finishing the Installation clockchips The recommended choice is No Clockchip Setting since XFree86 can automatically detect the proper clockchip in most cases Finally Xconfigurator prompts you to select the video modes you wish to use select one or more modes by pressing Space Xconfigurator then writes a configuration file containing all of your choices to etc X11 XF86Config 5 3 Configuring Networking Next the installation program gives you an opportunity to configure or reconfigure networking If you are installing from CD ROM or from a local hard disk the installation program asks if you want to configure networking I
480. timing parameters CORE OPTSczoption where option is the list of pcmcia core options CARDMGR _OPTS option where option is the list of options for the PCMCIA cardmgr 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown 207 letc sysconfig amd The etc syscon ig ama file is used to specify operational parameters for amd The following values may be used e ADIR path where path is the amd directory It should be automount and is normally never changed e MOUNTPTSzmountpts where mounipts is for example net etc amd conf e AMDOPTS options where options are any extra options for AMD letc sysconfig tape The etc sysconfig tape file is used to specify tape related configu ration information The following values may be used e DEVzdevnam where devnam is the tape device for example dev nst 0 Use the non rewinding device for these scripts For SCSI tapes this is dev nst where 4 is the number of the tape drive you want to use If you only have one then use dev nst0 For IDE tapes you use dev ht t where is the number of the tape drive you want to use If you only have one then use dev ht 0 For floppy tape drives use dev ftape e ADMINzaccount where account is the user account to send mail to if the backup fails for any reason Normally set to root e SLEEP time where time is the time to sleep between tape operations Some drives need a bit more than others b
481. ting system including Red Hat Linux Rescue Diskette A diskette containing a rudimentary system environment As the name im plies a rescue diskette is normally used in an attempt to rescue an ailing system from the necessity of re installing the entire operating system RISC An acronym for Reduced Instruction Set Computer A design philosophy for computers whereby the processor is optimized to execute a relatively small number of different instructions in a predictably small amount of time Contrast with CISC ROM An acronym for Read Only Memory ROM is used to hold programs and data that must survive the computer being turned off This is because ROM is non volatile data in ROM will remain unchanged the next time the computer is turned back on As the name implies data cannot be easily written to ROM depending on the technology used in the ROM writing may require special hardware or may be impossible A computer s BIOS may be stored in ROM Root The name of the login account given full and complete access to all system resources Also used to describe the directory named as in the root directory Glossary RPM An acronym that stands for Red Hat Package Manager RPM is also the name of a program that enables the installation upgrading and removal of packages SCSI An acronym for Small Computer System Interface SCSI is a standard interface for connecting a wide variety of devices to a computer Although the most popular
482. ting what you need from our documentation Thanks to Paul Gerwe one of our new writers for his hard work documenting linuxconf Thanks also go to Support Genius Stephen Smoogen for his work on the new FAQ It s been a pleasure working with you both Last but far from least is the support group at Red Hat Software They have given many insightful suggestions regarding this manual based on extensive experience with thousands of Red Hat Linux customers So if you find yourself breezing through the installation chapters it s due in no small part to their input I thank them Edward C Bailey New Features Of Red Hat Linux 5 2 This chapter describes features that are new to Red Hat Linux 5 2 1 1 Installation Related Enhancements There have been many changes made to make the Red Hat Linux installation process easier Here s a list e New installation classes e Improved Installation Guide e Support for multiple SCSI adapters e Disk Druid supported on all platforms Let s take a look at each one in a bit more detail New Features Of Red Hat Linux 5 2 1 1 1 New Installation Classes The Red Hat Linux 5 2 installation program now includes pre defined installation classes Work station and server modes automatically handle partitioning and basic defaults The installation pro gram s previous behavior has been retained as the custom class and can be used for complete control over the installation process For more information on
483. tion To Add a new partition select the Add button and press or Enter A dialog box entitled Edit New Partition will appear see Figure 4 5 It contains the following fields Current Jisk Partitions dica Pasqua Edit Heu Partition Host Pointr ERETNNNMNRREEKNKEKRM Size NOT Ti TL rau eee m lr BTS 16 bit H KH iB hit H Al loable Dri Figure 4 5 Creating a New Partition e Mount Point Highlight this field and enter the partition s mount point For example if this partition should be the root partition enter enter usr for the usr partition and so on e Size Megs In this field enter the size in megabytes of the partition Note that this field starts with a 1 in it meaning that unless you change it you ll end up with a 1 MB partition Delete it using the key and enter the desired partition size e Growable This check box indicates whether the size you entered in the previous field is to be considered the partition s exact size or its minimum size Press to check and uncheck the box When checked the partition will grow to fill all available space on the hard disk In this case the partition s size will expand and contract as other partitions are modified Note that you can make more than one partition growable if you do so the additional free space will be shared between all growable partitions e Type This field contains a list of different partition types Select the appropriate partit
484. tion on starting the installation SPARC If you haven t prepared for the installation yet please read Sections E 2 on page 355 through E5 Determine how you will boot the installation program and issue the boot command that will start the installation 3 2 1 Booting the Installation Program To start installing Red Hat Linux insert your boot diskette into your computer s first diskette drive and reboot or boot from the Red Hat Linux CD ROM if your computer supports it After a short delay a screen containing the boot prompt should appear The screen contains information on a variety of boot options Each boot option also has one or more help screens associated with it To access a given help screen press the appropriate function key as listed in the line at the bottom of the screen You should keep two things in mind e The initial screen will automatically start the installation program if you take no action within the first minute To disable this feature press one of the help screen function keys e If you press a help screen function key there will be a slight delay as the help screen is read from diskette Normally you ll only need to press to boot Watch the boot messages to see whether the Linux kernel detects your hardware If it does not properly detect your hardware you may need to restart the installation in expert mode Expert mode disables most hardware probing and gives you the option of entering options for the d
485. tion about RPM for both the end user and the package builder An on line version of the book is available at http www rpm org There is also a mailing list for discussion of RPM related issues called rpm listGredhat com The list is archived on http www redhat com support mailing lists To subscribe send mail to zpm list request8redhat com with the word subscribe in the subject line 174 Package Management with RPM 10 Glint Red Hat provides a graphical tool to aid in package installation and removal It s called glint Graph ical Linux INstallation Tool and runs under the X Window System It allows easy installation unin stallation upgrading querying and verification of packages The interface is similar to the one found in many popular file managers and is simple to use Operations are performed in glint by selecting the packages to operate on and then selecting the operation to perform via pushbuttons Installing a package places all of the components of that package on your system Uninstalling one removes all traces of the package except for configuration files you have modified Upgrading a package installs the newly available version and uninstalls all other versions that were previously installed This allows quick upgrading to the latest releases of packages The query operation lets you examine the details of both installed or available packages You can view the description of the package where and when it wa
486. tion method is assumed Red Hat Linux SPARC can be installed by any of the follow ing methods e Installing packages from CD ROM e Installing packages from an FTP site e Installing packages from an NFS server e Installing packages from a locally attached hard disk F 6 1 CD ROM Installation This is the most straightforward method It requires a Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM and a Sun supported CD ROM connected to your SPARC system F 7 Installation Using a Serial Terminal F 6 2 FTP Installation This installation method requires a local area network connection and access to an FTP site with the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM or equivalent files F 6 3 NFS Installation Installing via NFS requires a local area network connection and access to an NFS server that can export the contents of the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM or equivalent files Hard Disk Installation This installation method requires that the contents of the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM or equiv alent files have been copied to a hard disk directly attached to your SPARC system It is important to note that the partition holding these files cannot be used for any other purpose during the instal lation ie it cannot be given a mount point during the installation In addition the partition must be in ext2 format F7 Installation Using a Serial Terminal You can also install Red Hat Linux SPARC using a serial terminal attached to your SPARC system Any terminal w
487. tion methods To do this simply add one of the following lines to the packages section H 3 The Kickstart File 389 Workstation Server H 3 19 post Post Installation Configuration Section You have the option of adding commands to be run on the installed system after the installation is complete This section must be at the end of the kickstart file and must start with the post keyword Note that you can access the network in the post section however nameservice has not yet been configured at this point so only IP addresses will work Here s an example post section Spost add comment to etc motd echo Kickstart installed Red Hat Linux bin date gt etc motd add another nameserver echo nameserver 10 10 0 2 gt gt etc resolv conf This section creates a message of the day file containing the date the kickstart installation took place and gets around the network keyword s one nameserver only limitation by adding another name server to etc resolv conf 390 Kickstart Installations Index Symbols etc directoty cotas 186 etc hosts file managing usus 159 ete syscotifig files ine occ asno dern 204 lib directory uiae as oni poina 186 sbin directory Von 186 J st dite parir ec PE rito 187 sr local directoty eee ets 187 189 Vat directory een ese dre er et eO 188 eto patlic COBE i e iste ei tte reed weakens 194 eto pattsQesssciiis bte e daa 194 1023rd cylind
488. tion with 137 144 NFS mount addition with 135 136 OVERVIEW OE sie ses exe ye ev seers 110 PPP configuration modification 141 142 PPP configuration with 137 138 TUN ra dd daria ale etie veda 111 SLIP configuration modification 141 142 SLIP configuration with 137 138 time setting With oooooccccccocccccc 149 tree MENU ia 112 users adding With o 114 115 WED ACCESS iris dace esha nia 114 live filesystem on CD ssssseesssssse 321 LOAIDLIN 22k ette temer hte RE En Re eh nhe 80 loadlin using iii ceexe e renine RECHESER 323 local printer configuring 4 70 71 locate command finding documentation with 105 logging in isses ss ctcxkes ERRAT OX AR a here ey 87 logged 86 logging Oreiro EUER deu 87 Ipd printer configuring sess 70 71 Is getting colors With ooooooocccooccoooo 326 Macmillan documentation sus 327 mailing listS i oiii eccetrr bea hada eck tee hie ios 311 applixware list 6 0 2 0 harrig 107 axp liSE sis nce sie ree rica 107 blin x list coe vie rere nana 107 edelsteen rei denie iei bre des 107 gnome announee 6 ee eee ee 107 A idee veiw stole cee 107 hurricane Evisos tre rere 107 Imuxcalett iet etretr e ters 107 India 107 A A eer ete mls 107 pru 107 redhat announce liSt ooooocooocccom 107 tedhat devel list ocio
489. tire system and see what might be missing you would enter rpm Va If some files are missing or appear to have been corrupted you should probably either re install the package or uninstall then re install the package e Let s say you run across a file that you don t recognize To find out which package owns it you would enter 172 Package Management with RPM rpm qf usr X11R6 bin xjewel The output would look like xjewel 1 6 1 e We can combine the above two examples in the following scenario Say you are having prob lems with usr bin paste You would like to verify the package that owns that program but you don t know which package that is Simply enter rpm Vf usr bin paste and the appropriate package will be verified e If you are using a program and want to find out more information about it you can enter the following to find out what documentation came with the package that owns that program in this case spell rpm qdf usr bin ispell The output would be usr man man4 ispell 4 usr man man4 english 4 usr man manl unsq 1 usr man manl tryaffix 1 usr man manl sq 1 usr man manl munchlist 1 usr man manl ispell 1 usr man manl findaffix 1 usr man manl buildhash 1 usr info ispell info gz usr doc ispell 3 1 18 1 README e You find a new koules RPM but you don t know what it is To find out some information on it enter rpm qip koules 1 2 2 i386 rpm The output would be Name
490. to generates function prototypes for functions defined in the specified C source files to the stan dard output The function definitions may be in the old style or ANSI C style Optionally cproto also outputs declarations for variables defined in the files If no file argument is given cproto reads its 252 Package List input from the standard input flex Version 2 5 4a 290K This is the GNU fast lexical analyzer generator It generates lexical tokenizing code based on a lexical regular expression based description of the input It is designed to work with both yacc and bison and is used by many programs as part of their build process gettext Version 0 10 35 824K The gettext library provides an easy to use library and tools for creating using and modifying natu ral language catalogs It is a powerfull and simple method for internationalizing programs gperf Version 2 7 245K GNU gperf generates perfect hash functions for sets of key words A perfect hash function is simply A hash function and a data structure that allows recognition of a key word in a set of words using exactly 1 probe into the data structure indent Version 1 9 1 80K This is the GNU indenting program It is used to beautify C program source files xwpe Version 1 5 12a 712K XWPE is actually a package of four programs we wpe xwe and xwpe They are different versions of the same basic programmers editor and development env
491. to mount filesystems from SMB servers stat Version 1 5 6K 5 The stat program prints out filesystem level information about a file including permissions link count inode etc symlinks Version 1 2 98K This program check for a number of problems with symlinks on a system including symlinks which point to nonexistant files dangling symlinks It can also automatically convert absolute symlinks to C 11 Utilities 275 relative symlinks tree Version 1 2 18K This program is basically a UNIX port of the very useful DOS utility tree which prints out a view of the specified directory tree along with the files it owns Includes support for color Is style listings which Version 1 0 7K Give it a program name and it tells you if it is on your PATH For example which Is would print bin ls because the ls program which is in one of the directo ries listed in your PATH environment variable is located in the bin directory C 11 4 Printing This section lists packages that provide utility programs related to printing mpage Version 2 4 84K mpage formats multiple pages of ASCII text onto a single page of PostScript It supports many different layouts for the final pages C 11 5 System This section lists packages that provide utilities that perform various system related functions MAKEDEV Version 2 3 1 24K B The dev tree holds special files each of which co
492. to run most a out format packages for text X and SVGAlib modes gd Version 1 3 312K B This library allows you to easily create and manipulate GIF image files from your C programs gdbm Version 1 7 3 25K B This is a database indexing library It is useful for those who need to write C applications and need access to a simple and efficient database or build C applications which use it glib Version 1 0 6 54K B Handy library of utility functions Development libs and headers are in gtk devel gmp Version 2 0 2 111K This is the GNU arbitrary precision library Linking against it gives access to functions for handling arbitrarily large numbers with either a high level or a low level interface gmp devel Version 2 0 2 313K These are the static libraries header files and documentation for using the GNU arbitrary precision C 8 Libraries library in your own programs With these you can create your own own programs that use this library gsl Version 0 3b 455K This is the GNU scientific library Linking against it gives access to functions for handling many problems that arise in scientific computing Id so Version 1 9 5 246K B This package contains the shared library configuration tool ldconfig which is required by many packages It also includes the shared library loader and dynamic loader for Linux libc 5 libc Version 5 3 12 5 293K B Older Linux systems including
493. ton PS 2 mouse you would use mouse kickstart generic3ps 2 386 Kickstart Installations For a two button PS 2 mouse use mouse kickstart genericps 2 For a two button Microsoft mouse on your second serial port use mouse kickstart microsoft device cual H 3 14 timezone Timezone Definition Red Hat Linux is timezone aware so you ll need to specify the timezone in which the machine will operate This is done using the timezone keyword There are many different timezones the best way to find yours is to run usr sbin timeconfig onan already installed Red Hat Linux system If you would like to have your system s hardware clock set to use GMT UTC add the ut c option to your timezone line Here s an example that defines the timezone as US Eastern with the system clock set to GMT timezone utc US Eastern H 3 15 xconfig X Window Setup The next item is the X Window setup line The installation program will normally find common PCI video hardware and will know which X server to install The keyword for X configuration is xconfig If your video card isn t probed properly you can use the card option to explicitly specify the card Youcan use Xconfigurator helponarunning Red Hat Linux system to get a list of supported cards to choose from If your card isn t in the list but is supported by one of the existing servers you can simply install the proper server by using the server option Again use Xconfigurator
494. trary asyncmap if so desired HARDFLOWCTL answer where answer is one of the following yes Use hardware flow control no Do not use hardware flow control PPPOPTIONS options where options is an arbitrary option string It is placed last on the command line so it can override other options such as asyncmap that were specified previously PAPNAME name where name is used as part of name SPAPNAME on the pppd command line note that the remotename option is always specified as the logical ppp device name like ppp0 which might perhaps be the physical device ppp1 if some other ppp device was brought up earlier which makes it easy to manage pap chap files name password pairs are associated with the logical ppp device name so that they can be managed together In principle there shouldn t anything that would keep the logical PPP device names from being worldnet or myISP instead of pppo pppN REMIP addr where addr is the remote ip address which is normally unspecified 11 11 The Boot Process Init and Shutdown e MTU value where value is the value to be used as MTU MRU value where value is the value to be used as MRU DISCONNECTTIMEOUT value where value represents the number of seconds to wait be fore re establishing the connection after a successfully connected session terminated e RETRYTIMEOUT va ue where value represents the number of seconds to wait before re attem
495. trols this For SMB and NCP printers fill in the following information e Hostname of Printer Server Name of the machine to which the printer you want to use is attached e P number of Server The IP address of the machine to which the printer you want to use is attached this is optional e Printer Name Name of the printer on which you want to print e User Name of user you must login as to access the printer typically guest for Windows servers or nobody for samba servers 8 2 System Configuration With the Control Panel 155 j Bard BOF afar jua to aja paga cf Fi etar iegping tret 1 Fist ined penting asi PS printeri only ce sed oe O 1 pages ger ont page Figure 8 33 Configuring a Print Filter e Password Password if required to use the printer typically blank Someone should be able to tell you this if you do not already know it Please Note If you need to use a username and password for an SMB LAN Manager or NCP NetWare print queue they are stored unencrypted in a local script Thus it is possible for another person to learn the username and password It is therefore recommended that the username and password for use of the printer not to be the same as that for a user account on the local Red Hat Linux system so that the only possible security compromise would be unauthorized use of the printer If there are file shares from the SMB server it is recommended that they also use a different password than t
496. tu tee wales Geb ere 67 92 93 xdm config rng suicido 94 XFree86 configuration ooooocccccoocccccccooo gt 67 91 Xconfig rator ssssesece eere 91 92 Xf86cOnfig ecce eere xh 91 92 A qase da toad bor ke en 93 Zip drive IDE version iesistie nonkaa a 339 Zip drive parallel port version 339 INDEX Index of Packages ACN iuge iux vum a adea uento nae Re EP arde 290 o oio esee vae meus E TODAY Pe 275 O iaia 296 AfterStep APPS sinsi esis een tek stiti eraris 296 amcutilss Lec egeo canna esa tes ede pisces 262 anonftpi cede cias ln REA TD htt a 261 AmotherLeyvel emet Ret RE ERE es 296 agit MDS iaa 258 apa heee rae ran ias ii 262 apache devel 525 esses bete adage baad isani 262 cjut eii m 275 arpwatoh acie tede da AA 235 O uy toe b PUE MESA Mee ud 270 BEL ecce renda tonto e ete n otii dui dies 242 o oss oer ia eee aets Means tet RE X REY 239 O i EE 244 cia 262 aUtOmake decisa ene IPod etis 244 AWE Panone nani sio ted Gard ok dn eb uie dts 275 base system ci O 241 DI A 271 basSie nerien y r E oe epa 245 DRE 235 A M 242 DE M 268 luno et 245 DO iesus hin hod at e iae OP EE 262 bind devel encre 266 AAA etta t neta 266 bin til ence e is ese ertt ieee doe in 251 Jot Em 251 Dl 245 0101031 Li aia dd 263 bootpar mid vost as d eh ttu pat hito 268 DOOtPC sti 266 e A nee e tels 257 DNA m 251 Dy p
497. two users per conversation redirection of program output to others as well as an easy to use menu of commands It uses the same talk daemon as the standard talk program C 10 Shells This section lists packages that provide a wide variety of shells for your Red Hat Linux system ash Version 0 2 247K ash is a bourne shell clone from Berkeley It supports all of the standard Bourne shell commands and C 11 Utilities has the advantage of supporting them while remaining considerably smaller than bash bash Version 1 14 7 1 327K B Bash is an sh compatible command language interpreter that executes commands read from the stan dard input or from a file Bash also incorporates useful features from the Korn and C shells ksh and csh Bash is ultimately intended to be a conformant implementation of the IEEE Posix Shell and Tools specification IEEE Working Group 1003 2 mc Version 4 1 35 869K Midnight Commander is a visual shell much like a file manager only with way more features It is text mode but also includes mouse support if you are running GPM Its coolest feature is the ability to ftp view tar and zip files and poke into RPMs for specific files pdksh Version 5 2 12 391K pdksh a remimplementation of ksh is a command interpreter that is intended for both interactive and shell script use Its command language is a superset of the sh 1 shell language sash Version 2 1 280K B
498. twork scripts ifdown e etc sysconfig network scripts network functions e etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg interface name e etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg interface name clone name e etc sysconfig network scripts chat interface name e etc sysconfig network scripts dip interface name e etc sysconfig network scripts ifup post e etc sysconfig network scripts ifdhcpc done Let s take a look at each one letc sysconfig network scripts ifup etc sysconfig network scripts ifdown Symlinks to sbin ifup and sbin ifdown respectively These are the only two scripts in this directory that should be called directly these two scripts call all the other scripts as needed These sym links are here for legacy purposes only they will probably be removed in future versions so only sbin ifup and sbin ifdown should currently be used These scripts take one argument normally the name of the device e g eth0 They are called with a second argument of boot during the boot sequence so that devices that are not meant to be brought up on boot ONBOOT no see below can be ignored at that time letc sysconfig network scripts network functions Not really a public file Contains func tions which the scripts use for bringing interfaces up and down In particular it contains most of the code for handling alternative interface configurations and interface change notification through
499. u want to be allowed to relay mail to the file etc relay allow The web site http www informatik uni kiel de 7Eca email check htmlfor more details on this If you are having problems with sites sending you UBE Unsolicited Bulk Email you can also deny them access to your machines with the new features of sendmail Add the sites to the file etc mail deny and then make a hash table for it The following command can be used to create the hash database version of this file makemap v hash etc mail deny etc mail deny E 10 3 net pf errors Question Ihave installed Linux recompiled my kernel and now I get errors when the network comes out about various net pf modules not found What is happening and what should I do Answer This means that Linux was unable to find modules for various network protocols The most common ones are net pf 4 IPX and net p 5 appletalk It looks like that during a kernel recompile these were not included and some service is looking for it during the boot First check to see that you are not running a service that is wanting it mars nwe netatalk etc If you are you will need to recompile the kernel with these items or turn off the service If you still get net p errors you can fix it by following these directions cd etc vi conf modules 350 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Add the following lines to the file alias net pf 3 off alias net pf 4 off alias net pf 5 off
500. uage is intended to be practical easy to use efficient complete rather than beautiful tiny elegant minimal perl MD5 Version 1 7 29K Provides access to the md5 algorithm from RSA sed Version 3 02 68K 5 285 286 Package List Sed copies the named files standard input default to the standard output edited according to a script of commands textutils Version 1 22 683K B These are the GNU text file actually file contents processing utilities They include programs to split join compare and modify files words Version 2 411K B This package contains the english dictionary in usr dict It is used by programs like ispell as a database of words to check for spelling and so forth rgrep Version 0 98 4 16K a recursive grep utility that can highlight the matching expression by the author of Jed C 12 X11 This section lists packages related to the X Window System If you d like your Red Hat Linux system to have a spiffy graphical user interface this is where you ll need to look Since there are so many X related packages we ve divided them into subsections to make it easier to browse C 12 1 Amusements This section lists packages containing various amusing programs that run under X multimedia Version 2 1 325K This package contains XPlaycd XMixer and XGetfile XPlaycd is a program to play audio cd s using a cdrom drive XMixer is used to control the mixer on a
501. umber following it is the process ID of the process that actually performed the deletion The o1daccounts directory is created in the same place as all of your user directories and is created automatically the first time you remove a user account using this option 3 Files not contained in the user s home directory but owned by that user remain The file is owned by the deleted account s user ID UID If you create a new account and specifically assign it the UID of a deleted account it will then become the owner of any remaining files 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Ls or accus Miia user aicina Grua dations Changa meri pariciwoed Special accounts User informato Deleting account jaraith Yau are dufedeg an accus Tha Rma iC asd fg mail inb Volar may Ba amied dalsiad er bef in plara PPP ge courts Amaia he acccust s dala M ima ic Dota thre ac Ps dala POP aceaunts nail ani Virtual POP accaunta rial Eniail aliis iar El ds iri Va urn Lrowr ai ii Paititi Paword amp account police Anaabi user diik n alabe PPP iiiki n alabie SLE shell Massage OT iha day Fig stare local diva nt aiii cra Mus cong mona Ln run se Lauaes fa across ata lin place Prem caca nee Figure 8 10 Deleting Account Screen Selecting Delete the account s data on the Deleting account lt accountname gt screen see figure 8 10 will 1 Remove the user from the user accounts list 2
502. up files including the passwd group profile files etc termcap Version 9 12 6 424K 5 The etc termcap file is a database defining the capabilities of various terminals and terminal em ulators Programs use etc termcap to gain access to various features of terminals such as the bell color and graphics C 3 Daemons This section contains packages for all the daemons available for your Red Hat Linux system Dae mons are programs that run automatically and perform various system functions for you SysVinit Version 2 74 141K B SysVinit is the first program started by the Linux kernel when the system boots controlling the startup running and shutdown of all other programs at Version 3 1 7 60K B at and batch read commands from standard input or a specified file which are to be executed at a later time using bin sh bdflush Version 1 5 9K B This program flushes the disk buffers the kernel keeps to prevent them from growing too stale C 3 Daemons gpm Version 1 13 193K B GPM adds mouse support to text based Linux applications such as emacs Midnight Commander and more It also provides console cut and paste operations using the mouse Includes a program to allow pop up menus to appear at the click of a mouse button kernel pemcia cs Version 2 0 36 754K B Many laptop machines and some others support PCMCIA cards for expansion Also known as credit card adapters PCMC
503. ured no Networking should not be configured e HOSTNAME hostname where hostname should be the FODN Fully Qualified Domain Name but can be whatever hostname you want Please Note For compatibility with older software that people might install such as t rn the etc HOSTNAME file should contain the same value as here e FORWARD IPV4zanswer where answer is one of the following yes Perform IP forwarding no Do not perform IP forwarding The current Red Hat Linux installation sets this to no by default for RFC compliance but if FORWARD IPV4 is not set at all forwarding is enabled for compatibility with the configuration files used on Red Hat Linux versions 4 2 and earlier e GATEWAYzgw ip where gw ip is the IP address of the network s gateway e GATEWAYDEV gw dev where gw dev is the gateway device e g eth0 e NISDOMAIN dom name where dom name is the NIS domain name letc sysconfig pcmcia The etc sysconfig pemcia file is used to specify PCMCIA con figuration information The following values may be used e PCMCIA answer where answer is one of the following yes PCMCIA support should be enabled no PCMCIA support should not be enabled PCIC pcic type where pcic type is one of the following 182365 The computer has an i82365 style PCMCIA socket chipset tcic The computer has a tcic style PCMCIA socket chipset e PCIC_OPTS option where option is the socket driver 182365 or tcic
504. ursor is used to select and interact with a particular widget As the cursor is moved from widget to widget it may cause the widget to change color or you may only see the cursor itself positioned in or next to the widget In Figure 3 1 on the next page the cursor is positioned on the Ok button Figure 3 2 on page 32 shows the cursor on the first line of the text widget at the stop of the window As you might have guessed by our description of these widgets the installation program is character based and does not use a mouse This is due to the fact that the installation program must run on a wide variety of computers some of which may not even have a mouse The following section describes the keystrokes necessary to interact with the installation program 3 1 1 Using the Keyboard to Navigate You can navigate around the installation dialogs using a simple set of keystrokes You will need to move the cursor around by using various keys such as C C3 and Q You can also use Tab and to cycle forward or backward through each widget on the screen In most cases there is a summary of available function keys presented at the bottom of each screen To press a button position the cursor over the button using Tab for instance and press or Enter To select an item from a list of items move the cursor to the item you wish to select and 3 1 The Installation Program User Interface Window Text input Fleas enter the Following inf
505. ut 5 seems to work for 8mm 4mm and DLT e BLOCKSIZE size where size is the tape drive s optimal block size A value of 32768 worked fine for 8mm then 4mm and now DLT An optimal setting is probably however much data your drive writes at one time e SHORTDATE date where date is a string that evaluates to a short date string to be used in backup log filenames The default setting is date y m d H M e DAY date where date is a string that evaluates to a date string to be used for the log file directory The default setting is date log y m d e DATE date whre date is a string that evaluates to a reguarl date string to be used in log files The default setting is date e LOGROOT path where path is the root of the logging directory e LIST file where file is the file name the incremental backup will use to store the incremental list It will be followed by a sequence number e DOTCOUNT count where count is the name of a file used for counting as you go to know which incremental list to use 208 System Administration e COUNTER count file where count file is used for rewinding when done might not use e BACKUPTAB file where file is the name of the file in which we keep our list of backup s we want to make Files in etc sysconfig network scripts The following files are normally found in etc sysconfig network scripts e etc sysconfig network scripts ifup e etc sysconfig ne
506. ux C 7 Games 257 C 6 1 Japanese This section lists packages that provide Japanese specific extensions to Red Hat Linux kterm Version 6 2 0 147K kterm is the Kanji Terminal Emulator It uses the Kanji character set instead of the normal english set for those who prefer Kanji C 7 Games This section lists the packages that provide fun and entertainment to Red Hat Linux system owners the world over Game packages that run under the X window system can be found in the X11 section near the end of this appendix bsd games Version 2 1 1 786K This is a bunch of games Highlights include backgammon cribbage hangman monop primes trek and battlestar christminster Version 3 223K This is a text adventure game for use with xzip colour yahtzee Version 1 0 19K This is a terminal mode version of the popular game yahtzee It is a dice and board game fortune mod Version 1 0 2 337K This is the ever popular fortune program It will gladly print a random fortune when run Is usually fun to put in the login for your users on a system so they see something new every time they log in gnuchess Version 4 0 pI77 1 328K This is the famous GNU chess program It is text based but can be used in conjunction with xboard to play X based chess mysterious Version 1 0 163K Brian Howarth s Mysterious Adventure game series This is a text based adventure game pinfocom Version 3 0 170K
507. ux SPARC installation program an NFS server is used to export the necessary files to the SPARC system While this approach uses less memory it is somewhat more complex to set up Please Note Red Hat Linux SPARC may also be installed by booting from the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM This method uses neither a ramdisk or an NFS mounted root as the necessary files are already present on the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM We will discuss booting from CD ROM in Section E 5 2 on page 358 F 4 1 Preparing to Use an NFS Mounted Root If you will be using an NFS mounted root for the installation program you ll need a network con nection for your SPARC system an NFS server capable of exporting the Red Hat Linux SPARC CD ROM or equivalent files and the ability to respond to rarp requests so that your SPARC system can obtain its IP address The necessary commands for rarp would be rarp s ip address of sparc hw address of sparc arp s ip address of sparc hw address of sparc As you might surmise replace ip address of sparc with the IP address of your SPARC sys tem and replace hw address of sparc with the MAC address of your SPARC system s network adapter The IP address is assigned by your network administrator and the MAC address is dis played on your SPARC system s console at power up To use an NFS mounted root during the installation add the following argument to your boot com mand linux nfsroot nfs server ip address path to RH image
508. ux comi equ reat re LLO gher 2S coniguratiar alan ici conigaratian au ne Lem a kamal you hag compie Pel Cad LE daiaufl oxi raced g Cconimi Control pareil Actvete com jurada uh e co Control nao mui Coig paniir achidi Archi comi gurati Tarir aitor rerik Local satura System Configuration WOU Con edi aid ar daba ers Bgleci add da add In add a new dani or Sawee jMrurtpomi Potes suce Perttion tyne sE Dt y Sus pc ad dad Mad dram Sud 20000 eE m4 imm ml Dh 1509550 Dh ead Figure 8 14 Local volume screen Mount point This is where in the system the drive is to be mapped when mounted FsType This is where the type of filesystem is indicated A standard Linux partition uses the ext2 filesystem type A filesystem type of vfat indicates a DOS filesystem with long filename support while a fat filesystem type is for DOS filesystems supporting traditional 8 3 filenames The iso9660 filesystem type indicates a CD ROM drive as seen in figure 8 14 Please Note Red Hat Linux 5 2 can access FAT32 filesystems using the vfat filesystem type e Size Size indicates the size of the filesystem in megabytes M For removable media devices such as diskette and CD ROM drives the stated size is listed as zero Partition type A description of the filesystem used on that partition Filesystems from other machines on a network may also be available These can range from single small directories or ent
509. ux is also easy to maintain package installations can be verified and corrected and packages can be installed and uninstalled simply and reliably Furthermore Red Hat Linux is easy to administer Included are a rich set of administrative tools which reduce the hassle of everyday system administration Complete source code is provided for the freely distributable components of the system An Overview of This Manual This manual is organized to guide you through the process of installing Red Hat Linux quickly and easily Toward that goal let s take a quick look at each chapter to help you get acclimated Chapter 1 New Features Of Red Hat Linux 5 2 contains information concerning new functional ity that has been added to Red Hat Linux 5 2 Chapter 2 Before You Begin contains information on tasks you should perform prior to starting the Red Hat Linux installation Chapter 3 Starting the Installation contains detailed instructions for starting the Red Hat Linux installation process Chapter 4 Continuing the Installation contains instructions on the main part of the installation process Chapter 5 Finishing the Installation contains instructions on the last steps required to complete the installation process Chapter 6 What Do I Do Now contains information on logging in performing system shutdowns and configuring the more popular system components such as X Chapters 7 11 explain how to find documentation on your system a
510. v ior When using the Network Configuration Tool click Save to write your changes to disk to quit without making any changes select Quit Managing Names The Names panel of the Network Configuration tool serves two primary purposes setting the host name and domain of the computer and determining which name server will be used to look up other hosts on the network The Network tool is not capable of configuring a machine as a nameserver To edit a field or add information to a field simply click on the field with the left mouse button and type the new information Managing Hosts In the Hosts management panel you have the ability to add edit or remove hosts from the et c hosts file Adding or editing an entry involves identical actions An edit dialog box will appear simply type the new information and click Done when you are finished See Figure 8 41 on the next page for an example 160 System Configuration Figure 8 41 Adding Editing Hosts Adding a Networking Interface If you have added a networking interface to your machine since installing Red Hat Linux or you didn t configure your ethernet card at install time you can configure it with a few clicks of a mouse Please Note You may need to configure kerneld to load a driver for the network interface you are adding e g eth 0 see Section 8 2 2 on page 156 for more information Begin adding an interface by clicking on Interfaces in the main panel This will bring up
511. voice mail extensions nc Version 1 10 104K NetCat is a minimal network client It can be used to make terminal TCP connections to arbitrary ports and can fake connections over UDP It can also listen on ports ncpfs Version 2 2 0 446K This package contains tools to help configure and use the ncpfs filesysten which is a linux filesystem which understands the NCP protocol This protocol is used by Novell NetWare clients use to talk to NetWare servers rdate Version 0 960923 5K 267 268 Package List rdate is a program that can retrieve the time from another machine on your network If run as root it will also set your local time to that of the machine you queried It is not super accurate get xntpd if you are really worried about milliseconds rdist Version 1 0 118K Rdist is a program to maintain identical copies of files over multiple hosts It preserves the owner group mode and mtime of files if possible and can update programs that are executing traceroute Version 1 4a5 29K Traceroute prints the route packets take across a TCP IP The names or IP numbers if names are not available of the machines which are routing packets from the machine traceroute is running on to the destination machine are printed along with the time is took to receive a packet acknowledgement from that machine This tool can be very helpfull in diagnosing networking problems ucd snmp devel Version 3 5 3 583
512. w version of Linuxconf comes complete with a tree menu interface One could argue that it s pretty much the same thing 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Finding the appropriate panel should be simple and fast You can collapse and expand sections by clicking on the menu item icons Click the icon once to activate it for that particular sub menu A E ong Hakworking Client bonki Basic heit iniannalion Hara orii specication r Ripulire and gateways Default uhr mdf E nefinia ghir raus Eb hls raus b aic ale loca e ira rc dese Hast nanii march pali Harkavk Infomiabgn Sy stain Fe manaca setup PPP SLIPIPLIP Samar dass Exp rad Me sata HF S F alas fai viral Poste UUCP dinis t unb capri EHI re arel ed Oe iri 3c Fe dia b d Lario Mill malin usan undi rh Enaks Figure 8 3 Linuxconf Entry Screen single click will then collapse it another single click will expand it again Selected entries will appear as tabs in the right hand panel and will remain there until closed This will greatly reduce the clutter of windows on your desktop that Linuxconf has typically caused If you end up with more tabs open than you like just hit Cancel on the bottom of each tab to close it without making any changes or Accept to implement them Please Note If you ve grown fond of the previous X Windows interface it s still available To return to it Q2 a e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf a
513. well as private newsfeeds There is a LOT of information about setting up INN in usr doc read it intimed Version 1 10 96K intimed is a server that will tell networked machines what time it currently has It is useful for keeping networks of machines in sync with the proper time mars nwe Version 0 99pI10 533K 263 264 Package List MARS is a NetWare compatible file and printer server It lets you use a Linux machine as a file and print server for NetWare based clients using NetWare s native IPX protocol suite mod perl Version 1 15 1 407K mod perl is a powerful Apache module that enables the use of the PERL language within HTML files and more mod php Version 2 0 1 667K PHP is a powerful apache module that adds scripting and database connection capabilities to the apache server mod php3 Version 3 0 4 2 935K PHP3 is a powerful apache module that adds scripting and database connection capabilities to the apache server nfs server Version 2 2beta37 155K The NFS and mount daemons are used to create an NFS server which can export filesystems to other machines This package is not needed to mount NFS filesystems that functionality is already in the Linux kernel portmap Version 4 0 43K The portmapper manages RPC connections which are used by protocols such as NFS and NIS The portmap server must be running on machines which act as servers for protocols which make use
514. which LP is being used etc you would add the line options ppa ppa lt options go here For more information check http www torque net paraport E 9 9 Problems with IDE Zip drive Question I m having problems getting my IDE zip drive to work Can I make it work with Linux 340 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Answer First check and make sure there is a disk in the drive Also make sure you are mounting it as partition 4 instead of 1 An example would be hdc4 The reason for this is that the Macintosh uses partition 4 for its data partition and has problems if data is on another partition E 9 10 Intel SMP Question How can I enable Intel SMP support Answer Due to the experimental nature of Linux on a dual processor Intel machine Red Hat Linux doesn t currently support this hardware without a recompile of the kernel However we encourage you to investigate Linux for the dual processor systems at http www linux org uk SMP title html E 9 11 Problems with Red Hat 5 x older applications and time Question Some of my older applications get the incorrect time Answer Some libc5 apps want usr lib zoneinfo so you can either recompile them for libc6 or provide a symlink so that things will work ln s share zoneinfo usr lib zoneinfo Please also see check the Red Hat errata http www redhat com errata for other items E 9 System Administration 341 E 9 12 More problems with time Que
515. word is case sensitive Write down this password and keep it in a secure place Please Note The root user also known as the superuser has complete access to the entire system for this reason logging in as the root user is best done only to perform system maintenance or adminis tration Please see Chapter 8 on page 109 for instructions on how to add a user account for yourself after you reboot your system A more basic method of creating a new user account can also be found in Section 6 2 3 on page 87 5 8 Creating a Boot Diskette AAA Root Pasar Pick 4 root pasmaond You must bases t tuica ta mora you krem what it br and didn t makes 3 alates n tuning Remember that tha rast parraard ir a critical part af mjia secun bu Pirmd Parmord Lagain CL at beten beanii Figure 5 14 Root Password 5 8 Creating a Boot Diskette Next you ll be given the opportunity to create a customized boot diskette for your Red Hat Linux system see Figure 5 15 on the following page A boot diskette can be handy for a number of reasons e Uselt Instead of LILO You can use a boot diskette instead of LILO This is handy if you re trying Red Hat Linux for the first time and you d feel more comfortable if the boot process for your other operating system is left unchanged With a boot diskette going back to your other operating system is as easy as removing the boot diskette and rebooting e Use It In Emergencies The boot diskette can
516. x to automatically use zgv to display pictures provided zgv is installed pam Version 0 64 2 747K B PAM Pluggable Authentication Modules is a powerful flexible extensible authentication system which allows the system administrator to configure authentication services individually for every pam compliant application without recompiling any of the applications pamconfig Version 0 51 2K This package has been made obsolete by pam 0 56 and is provided for compatibility purposes only If the command rpm q whatrequires pamconfig returns no package names you may remove this package with rpm e pamconfig 241 242 Package List passwd Version 0 50 17K B This password changing program uses PAM Pluggable Authentication Modules to set or change a password Like all PAM capable applications it can be configured using a file in the etc pam d directory pwdb Version 0 54 1 260K B pwdb Password Database Library allows configurable access to and management of etc passwd etc shadow and network authentication systems including NIS and Radius redhat release Version 5 2 0K 5 Red Hat Linux release file rootfiles Version 5 2 2K B This package contains all the startup files for the root user These are basically the same files that are in the etcskel package setup Version 1 9 1 8K This package contains a number of very important configuration and set
517. y also wish to specify members of the group and can do so in the Alternate members field The list of users should be space delimited meaning that each username must have a space between it and the next one When you re finished select Accept and the group will be created Deleting a Group Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open Config gt Users account gt Norma gt Group demi 4 Select the group you wish to delete 5 Select Del 6 Confirm deletion 128 Users Accounts Moral User accounts Griup dufinibons Chenga mal gaiciwoed Special accounts PPP accaunt SLIP accaunts via nana lr UCP accounts POP seconds inia anb Virtual POP accaunti ial Eniail aliis irr Ed ds ris iia dinah tar ali Fu lities Paw rd amp ait ont palco usar groups au cas eii adi br delete groups nasci 3 mew Available user Meda nebadg 95 Available PPP shall m SEXES AFTER shells Wiissan e arti day Fig stare local diu En Dune caius us rai aras ouj mdo re System Configuration Figure 8 12 User groups screen Deleting a Group General Overview To delete a group e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt gt gt Group definitions e With or without a prefix select Acc
518. y hand or by using linuxconf To use linuxconf please see Sec tions 8 1 3 and 8 1 3 on page 135 Reviewing Your Current Filesystem Quick Reference 1 Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt 2 Enter root s password when prompted if not already root 3 Open gt File systems Access local drive or to look at your network environment Open gt File systems gt Reviewing Your Current Filesystem General Overview We ll start by looking at your current directory structure e Start Linuxconf by typing 1inuxconf at the shell prompt e Enter root s password when prompted if not already root e Open gt File systems Access local drive The fields are e Source The physical hardware hd indicates an IDE hard drive d indicates a diskette drive and cdrom typically indicates a CD ROM drive If your system has a SCSI drive you will see an sd instead More than one drive of a type are listed by letters so hda represents the first IDE drive while hdb would be the second In some cases you ll see numbers following these letters on hard drives the numbers represent the partitions on that drive while for diskette drives this number refers to the actual unit 7It also controls which filesystems are automatically mounted when the system is booted 134 dg sy sius Ipcal diu nts Dung swap dibus and partir Sa giria datant sure as panmnsska Did inda Lia ULG defaults Linux boot da LILO Lin
519. y more than we can cover in this chapter So we ll focus on those areas that address common tasks such as adding new users and getting connected to the network More information on linuxconf including its status most recent release and more can be found at the Linuxconf Project homepage shown in Figure 8 1 on the next page http www solucorp qc ca linuxconf This website includes fairly extensive information on linuxconf including description rationale his tory list of contacts and a lot of other information in addition to the software itself It is maintained by linuxconf s creator Jacques Gelinas so it s the best source of linuxconf information on the Internet Notation Accurately describing the location of specific screens within linuxconf is easy but lengthy given linuxconf s hierarchical nature If the structure was a family tree most of the data entry screens are in the fourth generation To describe the path to the screen where you would add new users to your system we could write this out as select the Config option from the main screen then the users accounts option off of that on the users accounts screen that appears select the normal option and then select the user accounts option 8 1 System Configuration With Linuxconf Figure 8 1 Linuxconf Project Homepage Rather lengthy and not immediately accessible Given the structural similarity to a family tree we could write it as main window beget Use
520. y times the com pany that constructs the hardware has to tweak a chipset to make it fit in the confined structure or meet certain power requirements These changes are usually only documented internally for trade secret reasons leaving others to find work arounds When Red Hat support finds itself with a laptop question our first and sometimes only reference is the Linux Laptop Pages which can be found at http www cs utexas edu users kharker linux laptop E 6 8 Having trouble upgrading to 5 x from earlier Linux Question lam trying to upgrade my earlier Red Hat system to 5 x but it complains that it can t find a valid RPM data base What do I need to do 318 Red Hat Linux Installation Support FAQ Answer The problem is that a few earlier versions of rpm would write the database in a way that seems corrupted to later versions Rebuilding the database fixes this problem To do this we will need to upgrade rpm on your system to the one on the installation cdrom and then rebuild the database First thing to do is mount the system CD on the system mount mnt cdrom After doing this upgrade rpm from the CD like so cd mnt cdrom RedHat RPMS rpm Uvh nodeps force rpm rpm When the new RPM is installed rebuild the database using the following command rpm rebuilddb This will rewrite the database in a format that can be used by the version of RPM used during the installation since they are now the same E 6
521. y were when they were originally installed For example e To verify a package containing particular file rpm Vf bin vi e To verify ALL installed packages rpm Va 9 3 Impressing Your Friends with RPM 171 e To verify an installed package against an RPM package file rpm Vp foo 1 0 1 1386 rpm This can be useful if you suspect that your RPM databases are corrupt If everything verified properly there will be no output If there are any discrepancies they will be displayed The format of the output is a string of 8 characters a possible c denoting a configuration file and then the file name Each of the 8 characters denotes the result of a comparison of one attribute of the file to the value of that attribute recorded in the RPM database A single period means the test passed The following characters denote failure of certain tests 5 MD5 checksum S File size L Symbolic link T File modification time D Device U User G Group M Mode includes permissions and file type If you see any output use your best judgment to determine if you should remove or reinstall the package or somehow fix the problem 9 3 Impressing Your Friends with RPM RPM is a very useful tool for both managing your system and diagnosing and fixing problems The best way to make sense of all the options is to look at some examples e Let s say you delete some files by accident but you aren t sure what you deleted If you want to verify your en
522. ype the password twice to make sure you didn t make a mistake while entering it Let s try logging into the new account again 6 2 Basic System Tasks Red Hat Linux release 5 1 Manhattan Kernel 2 0 34 on an i586 login blarg Password blarg bigdog blarg Once you re logged in to an account you can change that account s password by using the passwd command without the account name In this case you will be asked for the account s current pass word followed by the new password blarg bigdog blarg passwd Changing password for blarg current UNIX password New UNIX password Retype new UNIX password passwd all authentication tokens updated successfully blarg bigdog blarg It s as simple as that The su Command There may be times when you d like to issue a command or two as another user Normally system administrators need this capability they like all good sysadmins use their personal non privileged account most of the time But maybe a user s password needs to be changed or the permissions on a system file need to be modified Such things only take a minute so it s a pain logging out logging in as root doing whatever it was they needed to do as root logging out and finally logging back into their personal accounts A much simpler approach is to use the su command With su your current login session can be come a root or other user s login session In the following example

RedHat 5.2 - Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents